JP2020081626A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To make it possible in a game machine executing a set-value suggestion to prevent the confusion of a player.SOLUTION: The game machine is made possible to: to execute a read-ahead performance for notification of the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state before a pattern to be determined is variably displayed based on a determination result of read-ahead determination means; to execute a notification performance for notification of the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state while the pattern is being varied; to set a set value that indicates the level of probability of whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state; to determine the content of the notification of a predetermined performance for variable display of a pattern independently of the set value when a read-ahead performance for variable display of the pattern is executed after the pattern is variably displayed, if the notification performance contains the predetermined performance and the pattern is to be variably displayed; and to determine the content of the notification of a predetermined performance for variable display of a pattern, based on the set value, when a read-ahead performance for variable display of the pattern is not executed after the pattern is variably displayed, if the pattern is to be variably displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 78

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a ball game machine and a spinning-game machine, and in particular, a set value representing a step regarding a probability of controlling to an advantageous state which is an advantageous state for a player. The present invention relates to a technical field of a gaming machine that can be set based on an operation.

For example, various game machines such as a ball game machine such as a pachinko game machine and a rotating drum type game machine such as a slot machine are widely known.
2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines, such as slot machines, are capable of setting a set value representing a step regarding the probability of whether or not to win an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on an operation.

Regarding the related art, the following patent document 1 can be cited.

Japanese Patent No. 5956529

In the gaming machine in which the setting value can be changed and set, it is conceivable that a setting value suggesting effect that suggests the setting value being set to the player is revealed.
However, if the set value suggestion effect is executed indiscriminately, ignoring the progress status of the game, etc., an effect that suggests an element other than the set value (for example, an effect that suggests the possibility of winning an advantageous state). There is a risk of conflict with the player and confuse the player.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to prevent confusion of a player in a gaming machine that executes a set value suggesting effect.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols and controls to an advantageous state that is an advantageous state for a player, and a determining unit that determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state, Whether or not to control to the advantageous state, pre-reading determination means for determining before the determination by the determination means, and based on the determination result of the pre-reading determination means, before the variable display of the symbol to be determined is performed. In addition, the pre-reading effect execution means capable of executing the pre-reading effect for notifying the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state, and the notice effect for notifying the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state during the variable display of the symbol Possible effect executing means, and setting means capable of setting a setting value representing a step about the probability of controlling to the advantageous state, the notice effect includes a predetermined effect, the symbol When performing the variable display, if the pre-reading effect for the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is executed, the predetermined effect of the variable display of the symbol is targeted. When it is possible to determine the details of the notice without being based on the set value, and when performing the variable display of the symbol, in the case where the prefetch effect for the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is not executed Is for making it possible to determine the advance notice content of the predetermined effect for the variable display of the symbol based on the set value.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed while the prefetching effect is being executed.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols and controls to an advantageous state which is an advantageous state for the player, and a determining means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state. And, whether or not to control to the advantageous state, pre-reading determination means for determining before the determination by the determination means, and based on the determination result of the pre-reading determination means, the variable display of the symbol to be determined is performed. In advance, a pre-reading effect execution means capable of executing a pre-reading effect that notifies the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state, and a notice effect that notifies the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state during variable display of the symbol , And a setting means capable of setting a set value representing a step regarding the probability of controlling to the advantageous state, the notice effect includes a predetermined effect, When performing the variable display of the symbol, when the prefetch effect for the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is executed, the predetermined target for the variable display of the symbol Whether or not to execute the effect can be determined without being based on the set value, and when performing the variable display of the symbol, the prefetch effect targeting the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol If is not executed, whether or not to execute the predetermined effect for the variable display of the symbol can be determined based on the set value.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed while the prefetching effect is being executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused in the gaming machine that executes the set value suggestion effect.

It is a front perspective view showing the external appearance of the gaming machine as an embodiment according to the present invention. It is a figure showing composition of a game board of a game machine as an embodiment. It is a block diagram showing a control configuration of a gaming machine as an embodiment. It is explanatory drawing about the example of the pre-reading notice production in embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control side of the embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process in FIG. 5. 6 is a flowchart showing a power supply abnormality check process of the embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between each determination condition on the operation side when shifting to a setting change process, a RAM clear process, a setting confirmation process, and a backup restoration process, and a value of a W register. 6 is a flowchart showing a main loop process in FIG. 5. 6 is a flowchart showing a setting change process in FIG. 5. 11 is a flowchart showing an output management process in FIG. 10. It is a figure showing an example of a 7 segment decoding table. It is a figure which illustrated the relationship between the segment structure and the display pattern of a segment in the indicator of a setting value. 6 is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process in FIG. 5. 6 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process in FIG. 5. It is the figure which showed the example of the setting value offset conversion table. 6 is a flowchart showing main loop preprocessing in FIG. 5. 6 is a flowchart showing main control side timer interrupt processing of the embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a power supply check/backup process in FIG. 18. 19 is a flowchart showing a setting abnormality check process in FIG. 18. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol management processing in FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 starting opening check process in FIG. 21. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation start processing in Figure 21. 24 is a flowchart showing a variation management process in FIG. 23. 25 is a flowchart showing a jackpot random number determination process in FIG. 24. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot random number determination method of embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the big hit random number judgment table for big hit random number judgment processing. 25 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern lottery process in FIG. 24. It is the figure which showed the example of the deviation variation pattern table of embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a hit variation pattern table of an embodiment. It is a figure showing other examples of a hit variation pattern table of an embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the common variation pattern table at the time of the setting error of embodiment. It is a figure showing other examples of a common error pattern table at the time of a setting error of an embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of storage of the first data table and the second data table in an embodiment. It is the figure which showed the other storage example of the 1st data table and 2nd data table in embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the storage area structure in ROM of the main control part. It is an explanatory view of scenario registration information, lamp data registration information, and motor data registration information of an embodiment. It is an explanatory view of sound data registration information of an embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the main scenario table of embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the sub-scenario table of embodiment. It is the flowchart of the production control main processing of execution form. It is a flow chart of command analysis processing in production control of an embodiment. It is the flowchart of the command corresponding processing in the production control of execution form. It is the flowchart of production control timer interruption processing of execution form. It is explanatory drawing of the display control timing of embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated one display mode of the setting operation history. It is the figure which showed the example of the screen during setting confirmation. It is a figure showing an example of history display information in an embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of a backup operation of history display information as an embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of processing of adding individual history information in history display information. It is a flow chart of history information initial setting processing at the time of power supply of an embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a process for updating history information according to the occurrence of a target event of history display. It is a flow chart of history information update processing of an embodiment. It is a flow chart of history display processing of an embodiment. It is a flow chart of history information screen creation processing of an embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the numerical value of the setting value which can be expressed in embodiment. It is a flowchart of the left symbol lottery process of the embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the left symbol lottery table. It is the figure which showed the example of the offset table for left symbol lottery. It is a flowchart showing another example of the left symbol lottery process. It is the figure which showed the example of the left symbol lottery offset table used by the process shown in FIG. It is a flow chart of the mini-character notice lottery process of the embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a first mini-character notice lottery table. It is a figure showing an example of a first notice offset table. It is the figure which showed the example of the 2nd mini-character notice lottery table. It is a figure showing the example of the offset table for the 2nd notice. It is a flowchart of the jackpot production lottery process of the embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the big hit end INT suggestion element table. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a first offset table for referencing the table of FIG. 68. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a second offset table for referring to the table of FIG. 68. It is a flow chart of SU notice lottery processing of an embodiment. It is the figure which shows the example of the SU production table. It is the figure which showed the example of the offset table for SU stage lottery. It is the figure which showed the example of the SU3 replacement table. It is the figure which showed the example of the offset table for SU3 replacement. It is a flow chart showing another example of SU notice lottery processing. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of a SU3 replacement first offset table and a SU3 replacement second offset table used in the process of FIG. 76. It is explanatory drawing about the lottery example of a SU notice production in embodiment. It is a flowchart of the setting related command process (S2130e) as a 1st modification. It is a flowchart of the setting related command process (S2130e) as a 2nd modification. It is the figure which showed the example of the setting value conversion table which the production|generation control part uses in a modification. It is a figure which shows the kind of suggestive production of embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing when the suggestive effect of embodiment is performed. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of suggestive production and timing of embodiment. It is a flow chart for performing suggestive effect (effect 01) of the embodiment. It is a flow chart for performing suggestive effect (effect 02) of the embodiment. It is the flowchart of the command response processing when the customer waiting demonstration command in the production control of form of execution is received. It is the flowchart of the command response processing when the decorative design command is received in production control of form of execution. It is a flow chart for performing suggestive effect (effect 05) of the embodiment. It is a flow chart for performing suggestive effect (effect 06) of the embodiment. It is the flowchart of the command response processing when the decorative design command is received in production control of form of execution. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table used when performing the suggestion production (production 09) of embodiment. It is a flow chart for performing suggestive effect (effect 10) of an embodiment. It is the table and the flowchart in order to execute the suggestion production (production 11) of form of execution. It is a flow chart for performing suggestive effect (effect 12) of an embodiment. It is an example of a table used in the re-lottery process of the embodiment. It is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the suggested effect (effect 13) of the embodiment. It is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the suggested effect (effect 13) of the embodiment. It is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the suggested effect (effect 13) of the embodiment. It is a flow chart for performing suggestive effect (effect 13) of an embodiment. It is a flow chart for performing suggestive effect (effect 14) of an embodiment. It is a table used in the suggestion effect (effect 14) of the embodiment. It is the flowchart and the table which are used of the command corresponding processing when the special winning a prize command is received in the production control section of form of execution. It is the flowchart of the command response processing when the big hit end command is received in the production control section of form of execution. It is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the suggested effect (effect 16) of the embodiment. It is a figure for explaining suggestive effect (effect 17) of an embodiment. It is a figure for explaining suggestive effect (effect 18) of an embodiment. It is a figure for explaining suggestive effect (effect 19) of an embodiment. It is a figure for performing suggestive production (production 20) of an embodiment. It is a flow chart for performing suggestive effect (effect 21) of an embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining other examples of effects of an embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining other examples of effects of an embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining setting value change suggestion production 2 of an embodiment. It is a figure for explaining setting value change suggestion production 3 of an embodiment. It is a figure for explaining setting value suggestion production 1 of an embodiment. It is a figure for explaining setting value suggestion production 1 of an embodiment. It is a figure for explaining setting value suggestion production 1 of an embodiment. It is a figure for explaining setting value suggestion production 1 of an embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the kind of suggestive production and execution timing of embodiment. It is a figure showing a kind of jackpot suggestion production of an embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining a timing when the big hit suggestive effect of the embodiment is executed. It is the figure in order to explain the example of selective mounting of production on the game machine of form of execution. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the state waiting for a customer and the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device of embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the production 02 of an embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the type and execution timing of the effect of the embodiment. It is a figure for explaining another example of suggestive production 16 of an embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the accompanying drawings.

<1. Structure of amusement machines>
<2. Gaming machine control configuration>
[2-1. Main controller]
(About setting value change operation)
(About performance display)
(Direction control command)
[2-2. Production control section]
<3. Outline of operation>
[3-1. Pattern change display game]
(Special symbol variable display game)
(Decorated pattern display game)
(Normal symbol variable display game)
(About hold)
[3-2. Game state]
[3-3. About hit]
[3-4. About production]
(Direction mode)
(Advance notice)
(Direction means)
<4. Processing of main controller>
[4-1. Main processing on main control side]
(Initial setting process)
(Processing after initial setting)
(Main loop processing)
(Setting change process)
(RAM clear processing)
(Setting confirmation process)
(Main loop pre-processing)
(Advantages of setting value display data table and setting value conversion table as an embodiment)
[4-2. Main control timer interrupt processing]
(Power check/backup processing)
(Processing for error management and game progress)
[4-3. Processing relating to special symbol variable display game]
(Special symbol management process)
(Special figure 1 start opening check process)
(Special symbol fluctuation start processing)
(Variation management processing)
(Big hit random number determination process)
(Variation pattern lottery process)
(Advantages of setting value related data table as an embodiment)
<5. Process of production control unit>
[5-1. Outline of processing]
[5-2. Display setting history confirmation screen]
[5-3. Regarding the data type of the setting value in the embodiment]
[5-4. Proposed setting value]
(Indicative production by the left pattern)
(Suggestive production with a mini character notice)
(Suggestive production by big hit end production)
(Suggestive production by SU notice)
[5-5. Regarding the difference in the set value range that the main control unit and the production control unit correspond to]
<6. Modified example of setting-related command processing and setting value conversion>
<7. Summary so far>
<8. Suggestive production regarding set values>
[8-1. Type of production]
[8-2. Performance timing]
[8-3. Example of production]
(Production 01) to (Production 21)
(Summary of each performance)
[8-4. Other examples of production]
(Set value change suggestion production 1)
(Set value change suggestion production 2)
(Set value change suggestion 3)
(Set value suggestion production 1)
<9. Suggestion production about big hit>
[9-1. Type of production]
[9-2. Performance timing]
[9-3. Example of production]
<10. Other productions>
<11. About productions with different appearance probabilities depending on the setting value>
[11-1. First example]
[11-2. Second example]
<12. Example of selective implementation on game machines>
[12-1. About the appearance timing of the production]
[12-2. About waiting for customers]
[12-3. About prefetching]
[12-4. About changing (first half)]
[12-5. About changing (second half)]
[12-6. About big hit]
[12-7. About changing (overall)]
[12-8. Set value suggestion production and appearance timing]
[12-9. Big hit suggestion production and appearance timing]
[12-10. Production buttons and each production]
<13. Example 2 of selective implementation on game machines>
<14. Definition>
<15. Other modifications>

<1. Structure of amusement machines>

The structure of a pachinko gaming machine 1 as an embodiment according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. 1 is a perspective view of the front side showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of a game board 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “gaming machine 1”) has a frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so that the front frame 2 can be opened and closed. The game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in the attached game board storage frame (not shown), and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is made to face the opening of the front frame 2. Have. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling game operations are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and by inserting a key into the key cylinder and operating the key cylinder on one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 can be obtained. By operating to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened to the front side.

Below the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 pivotably supported by the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is arranged. An upper saucer unit 8 is provided on the front operation panel 7, and an upper saucer 9 for storing the discharged game balls is formed on the upper saucer unit 8.

Further, in the upper tray unit 8, a ball pull-out button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 below the gaming machine 1, and the payout of the game balls to a game ball lending device (not shown). A ball lending button 11 for requesting and a card return button 12 for requesting return of the valuable media inserted in the game ball lending device are provided. In addition, the upper tray unit 8 is provided with an effect button 13 (operation means) configured to be operable by the player. The effect button 13 can be operated (input can be accepted) by turning on a built-in lamp (button LED 75) during a predetermined input acceptance period, and a predetermined operation (press, continuous hit, long press, etc.) while the built-in lamp is lit. By doing, it is possible to change the production.
Although not shown in FIG. 1, the front operation panel 7 is provided with a cross key 16 for a user such as a player or a hall staff to select various items and give directions. There is.

A firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7.

Speakers 46 that produce a sound effect (sound effect) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper portion of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15. In addition, a plurality of decoration lamps 45 (for example, LEDs for light production by full-color LEDs) that provide a light production effect by light decoration are provided at appropriate places on the glass door 6. A plurality of full-color LEDs (LEDs for light effect) as the decoration lamps 45 are provided in the circumferential direction around the pachinko gaming machine, that is, on the peripheral edge of the front frame of the glass door 6.

The configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. On the illustrated game board 3, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game balls is annularly mounted as a board surface partitioning member, and a substantially circular area surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is a game area 3a, The four corners are non-gaming areas.

In the approximately central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (design variable display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc., independently) (for example, Liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 capable of variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of left design (corresponding to left display area), middle design (corresponding to middle display area), right design (corresponding to right display area) It is provided. In the following description, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may be referred to as “symbol groups”. That is, for example, the symbol stopped and displayed in the left display area is one of the symbol groups forming the left symbol.
The liquid crystal display device 36, under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later, displays various effects as images in addition to the variable display operation of the decorative symbol.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center ornament 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long winding manner. The center decoration 48 is provided along the front surface side of the game board 3, protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and the flow of the game balls depends on the launch strength or stroke length of the game balls. It works as a flow path distribution unit that allows the path to be divided into left and right. In the present embodiment, the center ornament 48 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 3a so that the flow of the game balls is formed on both upper sides (left side and right side) in the game area 3a due to the presence of the center decoration 48. ing. The game balls that have been hit by the launching device 32 on the upper side of the game area 3a are distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and the left downflow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 and the right downflow path 3c on the right side. Run down either.

In addition, the non-gaming area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 has various function display parts, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is used to start the upper start opening 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower start. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device) which are arranged side by side corresponding to the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol) Is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the special symbol variable display game is performed by the variable display operation of the "special symbol" represented by the 7-segment display. And in the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device 36, in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the decorative symbol by the image is variably displayed and decorated with various notice effects (effect image). A symbol variable display game is executed (details of these symbol variable display games will be described later).

Further, in the various function display portions, a composite display device (LED display device for reserved composite display) 38c including a 7-segment display device (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The term "composite" refers to the special symbols 1 and 2, the display of the number of operation-retaining balls of ordinary symbols, the variable time reduction function operating (time saving), and the high probability state notification (high probability medium), which is five. This is because it is a hold/time saving/high accuracy composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as “composite display device”) having a display function.

Further, in the various function display portions, a normal symbol display device 39a (ordinary symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged is provided next to the composite display device 38c. In this normal symbol display device 39a, the normal symbol variable display game is executed by the variable display operation of the normal symbol expressed by the two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, the normal symbol by the LED is alternately turned on and off in a seesaw manner, and stopped in a state in which either side is lit, so that it becomes clear whether or not the normal symbol variable display game is successful. There is. Further, a round number display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a, and three LEDs (first to third round display LEDs) are arranged. The number-of-rounds display device 39b notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to a big hit by a combination of lighting and extinguishing states of three LEDs.

Below the center ornament 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting unit) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting unit) are provided. Ordinary variation winning and winning device 41 is provided vertically, and detection sensors 34a, 35a (upper starting opening sensor 34a, lower starting opening sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting passage of a game ball are formed inside each of them. ing.

The upper starting opening 34 which is the first special symbol starting port is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1", and in some cases "special symbol 1"). It is a winning a prize relating to the start condition of the variable display operation of (hereinafter, abbreviated as "), and is configured as a winning a prize type fixed winning a prize device which does not have a starting mouth opening/closing means (means for opening or expanding the starting mouth). In this embodiment, due to the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center ornament 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the left downflow path 3b is directed to the upper starting port 34. While the game ball that has flowed down is easy to enter (win), the game ball that has flowed down the right downflow path 3c is difficult or impossible to enter.

The normal variation winning device 41 is configured as a winning percentage varying type winning device in which the winning percentage of the game ball at the starting opening can be varied by the opening opening/closing means. In the present embodiment, a so-called "electric tulip" that includes a pair of left and right movable blades (movable members) 47 that can open or expand the lower starting opening 35 that is the second special symbol starting opening as the opening opening/closing means. Configured as a "type" winning device.

The lower start opening 35 of the normal variation winning device 41 is the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 38b (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2", and may be referred to as "special symbol 2" in some cases). ) Is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and the winning area of the lower starting opening 35 is in an open state (which facilitates winning) depending on the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. It is converted into a winning state (easy winning state) and a closed state (difficult winning state) that makes winning more difficult or impossible than in the open state. In the present embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inoperative, the closed state in which the winning on the lower starting opening 35 is impossible (the winning impossible state) is maintained.

Further, on both sides of the normal variation winning device 41, there are four general winning openings 43, one on the left side and one on the right side, a total of four, and inside each of them, there is a general winning action for detecting passage of a game ball. The mouth sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed. Further, in the area of the game board, a movable body accessory (not shown) having a visual effect is arranged at a position that does not obstruct the flow of the game ball.

Also, diagonally right above the normal variation winning device 41, that is, on the upper side of the intermediate portion of the right-flowing route 3c, a normal symbol starting port 37 (third start) formed of a passage gate (specific passage area) through which a game ball can pass. Means) is provided. This normal symbol starting port 37 is a winning port relating to the variable display operation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside thereof, a normal symbol starting port sensor 37a for detecting a passing game ball (see FIG. 3). Are formed. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol starting port 37 is formed only on the right downflow path 3c side, and is not formed on the left downflow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be formed only in the left downflow path 3b or may be formed in both downflow paths.

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol starting port 37 in the rightward flow route 3c to the normal variation winning device 41, a special variation prize configured to open or expand the special winning opening 50 by a collapsible opening door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and inside thereof, a special winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball entered in the special winning opening 50 is formed.

Around the special winning opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms the downstream guide portion of the rightward flow path 3c. There is. If the special winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (large winning opening closed state), a surface that is continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 is formed, and the downstream guide portion of the right downflow path 3c ( It is designed to form a part of the upper side 55a). Further, in the downstream region of the rightward flow path 3c, in a region above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, to be exact, in the game region above the special winning opening 50, the flow path correcting plate is approximately parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. 51d is provided so as to project the flowing down game ball toward the special winning opening 50.

The process of entering a game ball into the special winning opening 50 is as follows.
The game ball that has passed through the play area between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correcting plate 51d projecting from the surface of the game board 3, whereby the flowing down direction of the game ball is corrected in the direction of the special winning opening 50 (downward). At this time, if the special winning opening 50 is covered by the open/close type opening door 52b (large winning opening closed state), the game ball rolls on this, and a predetermined arrangement (not shown) is formed. By the game nail, it is guided in the direction of the tulip-type normal variation winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower starting opening 35 is in a winning possible state (starting opening open state), a game ball can be won in the lower starting opening 35. On the other hand, when the open door 52b is retracted to the inside of the game board and the special winning opening 50 is open (large winning opening open state), the game ball is guided into the big winning opening 50.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the launch position on the side of the special variation winning device 52 (when the player aims at the game ball passing through the rightward flow path 3c), the upper starting opening The game ball is hard to be guided or is not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win the starting openings 34, 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates. The movable wing piece 47 operates in an opening/closing pattern that is more advantageous than in the normal state when the game state is accompanied by the electric support state described later.

In the case of the present embodiment, how to hit the player in an advantageous situation changes depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in a gaming state involving a “no electric support state” to be described later, “left hitting” in which the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the leftward flow path 3b is advantageous, and the “electric support” described later is advantageous. If the game state is accompanied by the "existence state", "right hitting" in which the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the rightward flow path 3c is advantageous.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the various winning openings provided in the game area 3a, if there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol starting opening 37, it is promised for each winning opening. The number of prize balls per winning ball (for example, 3 for the upper starting opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35, 13 for the big winning opening 50, and 10 for the general winning opening 43) is the gaming ball payout device 19 (FIG. 3). (See) to be paid out. The game balls that have not won any of the above winning openings are discharged from the game area 3a through the out opening 49.
Here, the "winning prize" does not have a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball, or the winning opening takes in the game ball into the inside thereof, and does not have a structure in which the passing gate is formed (for example, a normal symbol starting opening 37) If it is, it means that the game ball passes through the gate, and in reality, when the game ball is detected by each prize detection switch formed for each prize hole, a "winning" occurs at the prize hole. Will be treated as The game ball related to this winning is also called a "winning ball". If a game ball enters the winning opening, the game ball will be detected by the winning detection switch. Therefore, unless otherwise specified in this specification, whether the gaming ball is detected by the winning detection switch or not. Regardless of whether or not a game ball enters the winning opening, it may be referred to as a “winning prize”.

<2. Gaming machine control configuration>

A configuration (control configuration) for realizing the game operation control of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.
The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter, referred to as "main control unit 20") for overall control of game operations (game operation control), and a main control unit. A production control board (production control unit) 24 (hereinafter, referred to as "production control unit 24") that receives the production control command from 20 and totally controls the execution control (the appearance control) of the production by the production unit, and the prize ball. A payout control board (payout control means) 29 for performing payout control, a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)) for generating and supplying necessary power to the gaming machine 1 from an external power supply (not shown), Is configured.
The effect control unit 24 is connected to a liquid crystal control unit 40 that drives display of a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device. The liquid crystal control unit 40 is a micro controller mounted on a substrate different from various substrates such as the main control substrate (main control unit) 20, the production control substrate (production control unit) 24, the payout control substrate 29, and the power supply substrate described above. It is configured to have a computer.
In FIG. 3, the power supply route to each unit is omitted.

[2-1. Main controller]

The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor having a built-in CPU (Central Processing Unit) 201 (main control CPU), and stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program describing a game operation control procedure. A ROM (Read Only Memory) 202 (main control ROM) for storing therein and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 203 (main control RAM) functioning as a work area or a buffer memory are mounted to constitute a microcomputer as a whole. .

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 includes a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) for realizing a periodic interrupt, a constant period pulse output creation function (bit rate generator), and a time measurement function, and a CPU 201. An interrupt controller circuit that performs an interrupt enable/disable function such as a timer interrupt that gives an interrupt signal, and a system reset signal can be output to detect the power-on/power-off/power-supply abnormality and reset the CPU 201. Reset circuit, watchdog timer (WDT) circuit for monitoring the operation abnormality of the control program, and out-of-designated area prohibition (IAT) circuit for monitoring whether the program is correctly executed within a preset address range , And a counter circuit for generating random numbers in a fixed range in terms of hardware.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number and a sampling circuit that samples the random number value from the random number generation circuit at a predetermined timing, and works as a 16-bit counter as a whole. The CPU 201 sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state to obtain the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (random number size: 65536)). , The random number is used for the big hit lottery. The internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a soft random number value generated by an appropriate software process and a hard random number value in order to prevent a hitting action such as aiming at a hit.

In the main control unit 20, an upper starting opening sensor 34a that detects a winning (ball entry) into the upper starting opening 34, a lower starting opening sensor 35a that detects a winning into the lower starting opening 35, and a normal symbol starting opening 37. Ordinary symbol starting opening sensor 37a for detecting the passage of the, a special winning opening sensor 52a for detecting the winning of the big winning opening 50, a general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting the winning of the general winning opening 43, and an out opening 49 The OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting the game ball (out ball) discharged from is connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive the detection signal output from these. Based on the detection signals from the respective sensors, the main control unit 20 can grasp which winning opening the game ball entered.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening/closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a special winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening/closing of the open door 52b of the special winning opening 50. And are connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling these.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to the special symbol display device 38a and the special symbol display device 38b, and the main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling the display of the special symbols 1 and 2. .. Furthermore, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and a control signal for controlling the display of the normal symbol can be transmitted.

A composite display device 38c and a round number display device 39b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 controls the display of various information displayed on the composite display device 38c and a round. A control signal for controlling the display of the specified number of rounds by the big hit displayed on the number display device 39b can be transmitted.

Further, a frame external centralized terminal board 21 is connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 provides a predetermined value to the hall computer HC provided outside the gaming machine via the frame external centralized terminal board 21. It is possible to transmit game information (eg, big hit information, prize ball number information, symbol variation execution information, etc.).
The hall computer HC is an information processing device (computer device) for monitoring the game information from the main control unit 20 and comprehensively managing the operating status of the gaming machines in the pachinko hall.

Furthermore, a payout control board (payout control section) 29 is connected to the main control section 20, and when payout of prize balls is required, a control command (payout number of prize balls) related to payout is given to the payout control board 29. It is possible to send a payout control command for specifying).

To the payout control board 29, a launch control board (a launch control section) 28 for controlling the launching device 32 and a game ball payout apparatus (game ball payout means) 19 for paying out the game balls are connected. The main role of this payout control board 29 is to receive a payout control command from the main control unit 20, control the prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, send a status signal to the main control unit 20, etc. Is.

The gaming ball payout device 19 is provided with an out-of-supply detection sensor 19a for detecting an insufficient supply of gaming balls and a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting gaming balls (prize balls) to be paid out. It is said that each detection signal of can be received. Further, the game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism unit (not shown) for paying out the game balls, and the payout control board 29 controls the payout motor 19c. It is possible to transmit the control signal of.

Further, on the payout control board 29, a full detection sensor 60 that detects the full state of the upper receiving tray 9 with the game balls (in the present embodiment, a detection sensor that detects the storage state of the game balls stored in the upper receiving tray 9), The front door open sensor 61 (in the present embodiment, at least a detection sensor that detects the open state of the front frame 2) is connected.

The payout control board 29 can transmit various status signals to the main controller 20 based on the detection signals from the full detection sensor 60, the front door opening sensor 61, the replenishment detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. Has become. This state signal includes a ball clogging signal indicating a full state, a door opening signal indicating that at least the front frame 2 is opened, a supply end signal indicating a shortage of supply of game balls from the game ball payout device 19, and a prize ball. In addition, a count error signal indicating that the payout is insufficient or an abnormality has occurred in the ball counting sensor 19b, a payout completion signal indicating that the payout operation is completed, and the like are included, and various state signals can be transmitted. Based on these status signals, the main controller 20 opens the front frame 2 (door open error), whether or not the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal (replenishment error), and the upper tray 9 Monitor the full condition (ball clogging error) etc.

Furthermore, a launch control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a permission signal for permitting launch to the launch control board 28 can be transmitted. The firing control board 28 controls energization to a firing solenoid (not shown) provided in the firing device 32 based on the output of the permission signal from the payout control board 29 to operate the firing operation handle 15. It realizes the game ball launch operation. Specifically, the launch control signal is output from the payout control board 29 (the launch permission signal is in the ON state), and the player touches the handle with a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the launch operation handle 15. It is detected that the game ball is detected, and the shooting stop switch (not shown) provided on the shooting operation handle 15 is not operated, the shooting operation of the game ball is permitted. Therefore, when the firing permission signal is not output (firing permission signal OFF state), the firing operation is not executed even if the firing operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not fired. Further, the strength of launching the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the firing operation handle 15.
When the payout control board 29 detects the ball clogging error, it sends a ball clogging signal to the main control unit 20 and stops outputting the firing permission signal to the firing control board 28 (firing permission signal OFF). The control for stopping the launching operation is performed until the full state of is cleared.
Further, the payout control board 29 outputs a firing permission signal to the firing control board 28 on condition that the firing permission is instructed from the main control unit 20.

Here, the main control unit 20 is connected to the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98, and is capable of receiving detection signals from these switches.

The RAM clear switch 98 is, for example, a push button type switch for inputting an instruction to initialize a predetermined area of the RAM 203.
The setting key switch 94 is a key switch for switching to a setting change mode (during ON operation) by inserting a setting key possessed by a hall staff member and performing ON/OFF operation when the power is turned on.
Here, the setting change mode is a mode in which the set value Ve can be changed. The set value Ve is a value representing the stage of the winning probability of whether or not the player is won in the advantageous game state.

The RAM clear switch 98 is turned ON/OFF according to the operation of the RAM clear button operably provided with the front frame 2 opened. The setting key switch 98 is provided with a corresponding key cylinder into which the setting key can be inserted/removed, and is turned on by rotating the setting key inserted in the key cylinder in the forward direction, When it is turned in the opposite direction from the ON state, it turns OFF. The key cylinder is provided so that it can be operated by inserting the setting key with the front frame 2 opened. The key cylinder functions as an operator that can be operated by inserting the setting key.

In this example, the RAM clear button is also used for the operation of changing the set value Ve. Specifically, the RAM clear button also functions as an operator for sequentially forwarding the set value Ve.

The RAM clear switch 98 and the setting key switch 94 are provided at appropriate places inside the gaming machine 1. For example, it is arranged on the main control board 20.

A setting/performance indicator 97 is connected to the main controller 20.
The setting/performance display device 97 is configured to include, for example, a 7-segment display device, and functions as a display unit capable of displaying the set value Ve and performance information (described later). The setting/performance indicator 97 is mounted, for example, at a position on the main control unit (main control board) 20 where it is easily visible.
The main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying the set value Ve and performance information to the setting/performance display 97.

Here, the set value Ve mainly defines at least a lottery probability (winning probability) of a big hit (a hit type in which a condition device described later operates) in stages (for example, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6). However, as the set value Ve becomes higher, the winning probability becomes higher (the setting 1 has the lowest winning probability, and thereafter, the winning probability becomes higher in the ascending order of the set value), and it becomes advantageous to the player. There is. In other words, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the so-called "machine ratio (ball output rate, PAYOUT rate)", which is advantageous for the player.
As described above, the set value Ve is a value that defines the jackpot winning probability, machine division, etc., and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of occurrence of a specific event such as a profit state that acts on a player. In the present embodiment, the game-related advantage is defined according to each set value Ve.

In this example, it is assumed that there are six stages (stages of advantage) of the set value Ve that can be used according to the rules. Specifically, it is assumed that the range in which the set value Ve can be used according to the rule (hereinafter referred to as “usable range Re”) is the range of “1” to “6”.
Under this premise, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example uses only some of the set values Ve that can be used according to the rules. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example uses only three values, for example, “1”, “2”, and “6”, out of “1” to “6” which are set values Ve within the usable range Re. To do. In other words, the specification of the winning probability is limited to three stages instead of the maximum six stages in the rule.
Hereinafter, the range of the set value Ve actually used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, specifically, the range of the set value Ve actually used in the set value Ve within the usable range Re (in the above example, “1 “The range of “2” and “6”) is referred to as “usage range Ru”.

The set value Ve is set exclusively by the hall staff such as a hall clerk based on the sales strategy of the hall (game shop). When there are a plurality of types of jackpots, which jackpot probability to change according to the set value Ve and the type of the jackpot to be targeted can be appropriately determined. For example, if there are three types of big hits, big hits 1 to 3, if the set value Ve is relatively high, then all the winning probabilities of big hits 1 to 3 may be high, or if the big hits 1 to 3 are big hits. The total winning probability may be increased. Moreover, you may raise the winning probability of some big hits. For example, only the winning probabilities of the big hits 1 and 2 may be increased, and for the big hits 3, all the set values Ve may have a constant winning probability.

(About setting value change operation)

In order to change the set value Ve, in this example, the setting key switch 94 is turned on (to the setting change mode side) with the power of the gaming machine 1 turned off and the front frame 2 released. The power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on while the RAM clear button is pressed (the RAM clear switch 98 is ON). Then, the current set value Ve is displayed on the setting/performance indicator 97, and the mode is shifted to the "setting change mode" in which the setting value Ve (1, 2, 6 in this example) can be changed.

In this example, it is determined whether or not to shift to the setting change mode in the main processing on the main control side described later (see step S104 in FIG. 5). When the above operating condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied, the processing for changing the setting is executed accordingly.

After the shift to the setting change mode, when the RAM clear button that functions as a change operator for the set value Ve is turned on, the current display value of the setting/performance display 97 is "1→2→6→1→ 2→6→... ”, and is switched to the circulation type within the usage range Ru. When the setting key switch 94 is turned off when the desired set value Ve is reached, the set value Ve is confirmed, and the information of the confirmed set value Ve is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.
When the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the setting change mode is ended and the display of the setting/performance display 97 is cleared.
When the setting change mode ends, the state is allowed to proceed with the game.

(About performance display)

The main control section 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying predetermined performance information to the setting/performance display 97.
Performance information is information that pachinko halls and related agencies want to confirm. Typical examples include information on whether there is an illegal prize ball such as an excess prize ball for the gaming machine 1 or the original payout performance of the gaming machine 1. Is. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the game progress itself when the player enjoys the game, unlike the notice production.

Therefore, the setting/performance indicator 97 is provided inside the gaming machine 1, for example, the main control unit (main control board) 20, the payout control board 29, the launch control board 28, the relay board, and the effect control section (effect control board (liquid crystal). (Including the control board)) 24, a board case (protective cover for protecting the board), and the like, the display information can be visually recognized when the front frame 2 is opened.

Here, the following information can be specifically adopted as the performance information.

(1) The total number of payouts (total number of specified award balls: α) paid out by winning in the specified state is the total number of out balls discharged from the outlet 49 during the specified state (specified out The information (specific ratio information) based on the value (α/β) divided by the number: β can be adopted as the performance information.
The above-mentioned "total payout number" is the total value of the game balls (prize balls) paid out when the prize is won at the winning openings (upper starting opening 34, lower starting opening 35, general winning opening 43, big winning opening 50). Is. In the case of the present embodiment, there are three upper starting openings 34 or lower starting openings 35, 13 large winning openings 50, and 10 general winning openings 43.
In addition, which state is adopted as the specific state can be appropriately determined according to which state under which performance information is desired to be grasped. In the case of the present embodiment, any of a normal state, a latent probability state, a time saving state, a positive variation state, and a big hit game can be adopted. In addition, a plurality of types of states may be measured. For example, it is a normal state and a probability change state, all game states other than a winning game, etc., and the types to be measured can be appropriately determined.
Further, as the period in the specific state, a period in which the jackpot lottery probability is in the low-probability state or the high-probability state may be adopted.
Alternatively, one or a plurality of specific winning openings may be excluded from the measurement target as the total payout number (specific winning opening excluded total payout quantity). For example, the total payout number may be obtained by excluding the special winning opening 50 from the measurement targets among the respective winning openings.

(2) In addition, any one of the total payout number, the specific payout port excluded total payout number, and the total outball number may be measured, and the measurement result may be used as the performance information.

In this embodiment, the total payout number in the normal state (normal time payout number) and the total out ball number in the normal state (normal time out number) are measured in real time, and the normal time payout number is calculated as the normal time out number. A value obtained by multiplying the value obtained by dividing by 100 by 100 (a value calculated by the number of normal-time payouts/the number of normal-time outs×100) is displayed as performance information (hereinafter referred to as “normal-time ratio information”). The displayed value at this time is a value rounded off to one decimal place.
Therefore, the respective data of the normal-time payout number, the normal-time out number, and the normal-time ratio information are respectively stored in the corresponding areas of the RAM 203 (specific medium total prize ball number storage area, specific medium out number storage area, specific ratio information storage area). It is designed to be stored. However, instead of merely permanently measuring and displaying the performance information, when the total number of out balls reaches a predetermined prescribed number (for example, 60,000), the measurement is temporarily terminated. This specified number is not the total number of out balls in the normal state, but the total number of out balls in the entire gaming state (including per game) (hereinafter referred to as "total state out number"). The total number of all-state-outs is also measured in real time and stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 203 (total-state-out-number storage area). Hereinafter, for convenience of description, the specified medium total prize ball number storage area, the specified medium out number storage area, the specific ratio information storage area, and the total state out number storage area are abbreviated as “measurement information storage area”.

Then, the normal time ratio information at the end time is stored in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the RAM 203 (this time normal time ratio information is stored), and then the measurement information storage area (normal time payout number, normal time out number) And the total number of out-of-states) are cleared, and then the measurement is started again (measurement of the number of ordinary-time payouts, the number of ordinary-time outs, the ratio of ordinary-time outs, and the number of all-state out balls is started). Then, the setting/performance display 97 displays the previous normal time ratio information (measurement history information) and the normal time ratio information currently being measured. It should be noted that not only the information of the previous time but also the history of the time before the last time or the history before the time (three times before) may be displayed, and how many times before the information is displayed can be appropriately determined.

Here, in the case of this example, the setting value Ve and the performance information are displayed alternatively on the setting/performance display 97. Specifically, in this example, the settings are changed and the settings are checked only at startup when the power is turned on.Therefore, after the startup when the power is turned on, the settings and The set value Ve is displayed on the performance display 97, and the performance information is displayed after the setting change and the setting confirmation are completed.
Note that the set value Ve and the performance information are not limited to being displayed on a common display, and may be displayed on different displays. In that case, the set value Ve and the performance information may be displayed in parallel.

(Direction control command)

The main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting to the effect control unit 24 various effect control commands including information regarding a special symbol variable display game, information regarding an error, and the like, depending on the processing state. However, in order to prevent fraudulent acts such as gotting, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24, and has a one-way communication configuration in which the signal from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. Has become.

Here, the effect control command defines a function with a 2-byte configuration including a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit7 is ON, and EVENT Bit7 is OFF. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid information, strobe signals are output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, if there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal of is transmitted. Further, the event (EVENT) information is set and output after a lapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after a lapse of the predetermined time from the setting. The strobe signal is controlled by the CPU 201 to be in an active state for a predetermined period in which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

[2-2. Production control section]

The effect control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor having a built-in CPU 241 (effect control CPU), and has a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) storing effect data required for effect control processing and a RAM 243 (functioning as a work area or buffer memory). It is mainly composed of a microcomputer equipped with a production control RAM), and additionally, an acoustic control unit (sound source IC), an RTC (Real Time Clock) function unit, a counter circuit, an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, a WDT circuit, etc. are provided. Control the overall production operation.
The effect control unit 24 of this example has a memory 244 other than the RAM 243 described above as a memory from which information can be read and written. The memory 244 is composed of, for example, an SRAM, and the reading speed of information by the CPU 241 is slower than that of the RAM 243. The RAM 243 is not connected to the backup power supply, and the stored information cannot be held when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, whereas the memory 244 is connected to the backup power supply and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. Even if it is done, the stored information can be held.
The usage of the memory 244 will be described later.

The main role of the performance control unit 24 is to receive a performance control command from the main control unit 20, determine and select a performance based on the performance control command, and control the liquid crystal control unit 40 to cause the liquid crystal display device 36 to display an image. , Sound control of the speaker 46, light emission control of the decoration lamp 45 and various LEDs (button LED 75, other effect LED (not shown)), operation control of movable body (feature), and the like.

The liquid crystal control unit 40 is configured as a computer device including a CPU and various memory devices, and controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. The liquid crystal control unit 40 stores an image that stores VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall image output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, and image data (effect image data) that the VDP performs image development processing. A ROM, a VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores the image data expanded by the VDP, and a CPU that controls the operation of the VDP based on various instructions (such as a “liquid crystal control command” described later) from the effect control unit 24 ( A liquid crystal control CPU), a ROM (liquid crystal control ROM) that stores a program describing a display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and various data necessary for the display control, and a RAM (liquid crystal that functions as a work area or a buffer memory). Control RAM).
The liquid crystal control CPU controls the operation of VDP (display drive operation of the liquid crystal display device 36) based on the instruction from the effect control unit 24, so that the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an image according to the instruction of the effect control unit 24. Is done.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 3 has a CPU for liquid crystal display (CPU of the liquid crystal control unit 40) on a board different from the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24. Such a configuration is generally referred to as a "2 CPU" configuration. On the other hand, a configuration in which a CPU that performs the same function as the CPU of the liquid crystal control unit 40 is mounted on the effect control unit 24, that is, a configuration in which the effect control unit 24 also functions as the liquid crystal control unit 40 is a “1 CPU” configuration. Is called.

The production control unit 24 also provides an optical display control unit for the optical display device 45a including the decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs in order to bring out various productions (light production, sound production, and movable body production by a movable body accessory). , A sound control unit for the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46, a drive control unit (motor drive circuit: driver) for a movable body accessory motor 80c that operates a movable body (not shown), and the like.

The effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection sensor 82a that monitors the operation of the movable body accessory, and the effect control unit 24 determines the current operation position of the movable body accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Further, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, the malfunction of the operation of the movable body accessory is monitored, and if the malfunction occurs, this is detected as an error.

The effect control unit 24 is connected to switches for the effect button 13 and the cross key 16, that is, operation detection switches for the effect button 13 and the cross key 16, and the effect control unit 24 operates from the effect button 13 and the cross key 16. Each of the detection signals can be received.

Based on the effect control command sent from the main control section 20, the effect control unit 24 selects (determines) an effect pattern from a plurality of kinds of effect patterns prepared in advance, or uniquely selects (determines) the effect pattern. By controlling various performance means at the timing, the desired performance is displayed. As a result, display of an effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, reproduction of sound from the speaker 46, and lighting/blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns (decorative design variable display operation and The "drafting scenario" in a broad sense is realized by deploying the notice production in time series.

Here, for the effect control command, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt process based on the input of the above-described strobe signal transmitted by the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), and receives and analyzes the interrupt process. Specifically, the CPU 241 executes the control program for command reception interrupt processing based on the input of the above-described strobe signal, acquires the effect control command in the interrupt processing realized by this, and analyzes the command content. To do.
At this time, when an interrupt occurs based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 performs the process even if the interrupt process (the timer interrupt process that is regularly executed) based on another interrupt is being executed. The command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the, and the command reception interrupt process is prioritized even if another interrupt occurs at the same time.

<3. Outline of operation>
[3-1. Pattern change display game]

Next, an outline of the game operation of the gaming machine 1 realized by the above control configuration (FIG. 3) will be described.
First, the symbol variable display game will be described.

(Special symbol variable display game)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 is based on a predetermined starting condition, specifically, that the game ball enters (wins) the upper starting opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35. A "big hit lottery" is conducted by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variably displays the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined time has passed, the result is special. Derivative display on the symbol display device, thereby ending the special symbol variable display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the upper starting opening 34 and the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the lower starting opening 35 are separately and independently performed. Therefore, the big hit lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big hit lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on condition that the game ball has entered the upper starting opening 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variable display game is started, On the other hand, on the side of the special symbol display device 38b, on condition that the game ball has entered the lower start opening 35, the special symbol 2 is variably displayed and the second special symbol variable display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time, if the jackpot lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined "big hit" In the mode, in other cases, in a predetermined “deviated” mode, the special symbols that are being variably displayed are stopped and displayed, whereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived.

In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side. The variable display game is referred to as "special symbol variable display game 2". Unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (abbreviated as "special symbol" in some cases), and also "special symbol variable display game 1" and "special symbol variable display game 1". The "special symbol variable display game 2" is simply referred to as "special symbol variable display game".

(Decorated pattern display game)

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variable display game is started, the decorative symbol (display game pattern) is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the decorative symbol variable display game is started. Various performances are developed accompanying it. And when the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device shows a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative pattern is derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variable display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variable display game including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variable display game is "big hit" (when the big hit lottery result is "big hit"), the effect reflecting the result is developed in the decorative symbol variable display game. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, 7-segment display state of "7"), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". In each display area of “”, the display pattern in which the decorative pattern reflects “big hit” (for example, in each display area of “left”, “middle”, “right”, three decorative patterns are “7”, “7”, “7”) Is displayed).

In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variable display game ends, and accordingly the decorative symbol variable display game ends, and as a result, the symbol aspect of "big hit" is derived and displayed. After that, the special winning opening solenoid 52c of the special variation winning device 52 operates to open and close the opening door 52b in a predetermined pattern, whereby the special winning opening 50 is opened and closed, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A special game state (big hit game) occurs. In this jackpot game, the opening door 52b is used until the opening time of the special winning opening elapses for a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds) or the number of game balls winning the big winning opening (large winning opening Number of winning balls to 50) is a predetermined number (maximum winning number: the maximum number of winning balls allowed for a winning opening whose entrance is opened or expanded by one action of a winning character: for example, 9) "Round game" such that the winning area is opened or expanded until it reaches, and the special winning opening is closed when any of these conditions is satisfied, a predetermined round number (for example, 16 at maximum). Round) repeated.

When the big hit game is started, an opening effect is first notified to the effect that the big hit is started, and after the opening effect is finished, a round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined number of rounds set in advance as an upper limit. Then, after the specified number of rounds, an ending effect for notifying that the big hit will be ended is performed, whereby the big hit game is ended.

Regarding the information necessary for executing the decorative symbol variable display game, the main control unit 20 firstly, based on the fact that the game ball has entered (winning) the upper starting opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35, specifically, , Lottery whether it is a "big hit" or "off" on condition that the game ball is detected by the upper starting opening sensor 34a or the lower starting opening sensor 35a and the starting condition (starting condition concerning the special symbol) is established. Do'win lottery (lottery type lottery)', and if it is a "big hit", the jackpot type, if it is "outside", the lottery type is drawn out" Design lottery (winning type (winning type) lottery )'And a jackpot lottery including (and if there is one type of lottery, the lottery may be omitted because there is no need to perform a type lottery for the lottery), based on the lottery result information, the variation pattern of the special symbol Alternatively, a special symbol to be finally stopped and displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “special stop symbol”) is determined according to the winning type.
Then, the main control unit 20, as a production control command for specifying the processing state, "variation pattern designation command" including at least variation pattern information of the special symbol (for example, information regarding the jackpot lottery result and the variation time of the special symbol). It transmits to the production control unit 24 side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variable display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to make the variations of the production rich, a "decorative symbol designating command" including the information of the special stop symbol (symbol lottery result information (information regarding the hit type)) is also transmitted to the production control unit 24. It is like this.

The variation pattern information of the special symbol may include information that specifies whether or not a specific notice effect (for example, “reach effect” or “pseudo continuous effect” described later) is generated. In detail, the variation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a “hit variation pattern” in the case of a hit and a “off variation pattern” in the case of a hit, depending on the result of the big hit lottery. These fluctuation patterns include, for example, a'reach fluctuation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of a reach effect described later, a'normal fluctuation pattern' that does not specify the occurrence of a reach effect, and the occurrence of pseudo continuous effects and reach effects (duplication occurrence). A plurality of types of variation patterns are included, such as a specified'reach variation pattern with pseudo-relation', a generation of pseudo-relation production is designated, and a normal variation pattern with pseudo-relation is not designated. In addition, in order to secure the production time of the reach production or the pseudo continuous production, the variation pattern that specifies the reach production or the pseudo continuous production is usually set to have a longer variation time than the normal variation pattern.

The effect control unit 24 is time-series during the decorative symbol variable display game, based on the information included in the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. Decide the contents of the effect to be developed (drafting scenario such as notice effect) and the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed (decorative stop pattern), and display the decorative pattern in a variably displayed manner according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. The symbol variable display game is executed. As a result, the decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 36 are variably displayed in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game are in progress. And the period is substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 respectively controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the optical display device 45a, or the sound generation device 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variable display game. As a result, reproduction of an image on the liquid crystal display device 36 (image effect), reproduction of a sound effect (sound effect), and lighting/blinking of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED (light effect) are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game have an inseparable relationship, and what reflects the display result of the special symbol variable display game is expressed in the decorative symbol variable display game. The two symbol variation display games may be regarded as an equivalent symbol game. In the present specification, the above-mentioned two symbol variable display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variable display game” unless otherwise necessary.

(Normal symbol variable display game)

Further, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 37 (winning), the main controller 20 performs a "assisted winning lottery" by a random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a certain period of time, the result is a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. It is designed to stop and display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variable display game is "auxiliary hit", the display portion of the normal symbol display device 39a is in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are in a lighting state, or "○" and " Among the LEDs expressing “X”, the LED on the “◯” side is in a lighting state) and is stopped and displayed.

In the case of this "auxiliary hit", the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is actuated, whereby the movable wing piece 47 opens in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 opens. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to be in a state in which the game ball is likely to flow (starting mouth open state), and an auxiliary game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (hereinafter, referred to as "normal electric open game") occurs. In this normal electric open game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variation winning device 41 is used until the opening time of the lower starting port 35 elapses for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), or the game in which the lower starting port 35 is won. The winning area is opened or expanded until the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, four), and the lower starting opening 35 is closed when any one of these conditions is satisfied, a predetermined number of times (for example, maximum). It is supposed to be repeated twice.

(About hold)

Here, in the present embodiment, during the special/decorative symbol variable display game, the normal symbol variable display game, the big hit game, the normal electric open game, or the like, the upper starting opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35 or the normal symbol starting opening 37. If a prize is generated, that is, if there is an input of a detection signal from the upper starting mouth sensor 34a, the lower starting mouth sensor 35a, or the normal symbol starting mouth sensor 37a, and the corresponding starting condition (symbol game starting condition) is satisfied, As data related to the start right of the variable display game, this data is reserved and stored up to the maximum reserved memory number (for example, maximum 4) which is a predetermined upper limit value, except for data related to variable display. The on-hold data that has not been used for this symbol variation display operation, or the game ball related to the on-hold data is also referred to as an "operation holding ball". In order to clarify the number of operation reserve balls to the player, a dedicated hold indicator (not shown) provided in an appropriate place of the gaming machine 1 or a hold display provided as an icon image on the screen by the liquid crystal display device 36. Turn on the display.

In the present embodiment, the special symbols 1, the special symbols 2, and the operation-reserving spheres related to the normal symbols are stored in the corresponding storage areas of the RAM 203 up to a maximum of 4, respectively, and are retained as the number of fluctuations of the special symbols or the normal symbols. In addition, the maximum storage number (maximum storage number) of each operation holding ball number relating to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. In addition, all or part of the maximum reserved storage number of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics.

[3-2. Game state]

The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of gaming states, in addition to the above-mentioned big hit which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present embodiment, first, various game states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute and control at least four types of gaming states: a normal state, a time saving state, a latent probability state, and a probability variation state. These gaming states are distinguished by whether or not a jackpot lottery probability state (low-probability state, high-probability state) or an electric-chu support state (privilege game) has occurred (electric support is provided, electric support is not provided).

"Den Chu support state" is a normal state when the opening operation period of the movable wing piece 47 (at least one of the opening time of the movable wing piece 47 and the number of times of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variation winning device 41 in the ordinary electric open game is normal. It refers to an “open extended state” that is extended more than. When the open extension state occurs, the opening operation period of the movable wing piece 47 is extended, for example, from 0.2 seconds in the normal time (under the non-open extension state) to 1.7 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing thereof is, for example, It is extended from once in normal times to 2-3 times.
In the case of the present embodiment, in the electric-chu support state, the lottery probability per assist changes from a low probability (for example, 1/256) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 255/256) (typically). (Probability fluctuation state) occurs, and the "normal symbol time saving state" occurs that shortens the average time (variable display operation time of normal symbol) required for one normal symbol variation display game (for example, from 10 seconds Shortened to 1 second). Therefore, when the electric Chu support state occurs, the normal electric open game frequently occurs, and the operation rate improved state (high base state) in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved compared to the normal state. In the following, the state under the electric power support state is abbreviated as “with electric power support”, and the case without it is abbreviated as “without electric power support”.

In the present embodiment, the “normal state” means that the jackpot lottery probability is a low probability (for example, 1/399) of a predetermined probability (normal probability), and a gaming state without electric support (low probability + no electric support). To tell.

The "time saving state" is a low probability that the jackpot lottery probability is the same as the normal state, but the average time required for one special symbol variable display game (variable display operation time of the special symbol)) is higher than the normal state. "Special symbol time saving state" that is also shortened occurs, and it refers to the game state that becomes the electric Chu support state. In other words, during the time saving state, "low probability + electric support available + special symbol time saving state".

The "latent probability state" is a "special symbol probability changing state" in which the jackpot lottery probability has changed to a high probability (for example, 1 in 39.9) that is higher than the above low probability, and a gaming state without electric support (high Probability + no electric support).

The "probability change state" is a gaming state in which the jackpot lottery probability has a high probability similar to the latent probability state, but a special symbol time saving state and an electric chew support state occur. In other words, during the probability change state, "high probability + electric power support + special symbol time saving state".

Regarding the gaming state, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability, when the gaming state is "normal state" or "time saving state", at least the jackpot lottery probability becomes a "low probability state", and the gaming state becomes a "latent state""probabilitychange". In the case of “state”, at least the jackpot lottery probability becomes “high probability state”. In addition, during the big hit, a big hit game in which the big winning opening is opened and closed occurs, but the big hit lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support are placed in the same low probability/no electric support game state as in the normal state.

[3-3. About hit]

Next, the "hit" in the gaming machine 1 will be described.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a big hit lottery (win lottery) is performed for a plurality of types of hits. In the case of this example, the types of hits include, for example, each of the “normal 4R”, “normal 6R”, “probably variable 6R”, and “probably variable 10R” jackpots belonging to the jackpot type.
In addition, the above-mentioned "R" notation means a prescribed round number (maximum round number).

The big hit type is a hit that triggers the operation of the condition device. Here, the "conditional device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, a combination of specific special symbols is displayed, or the game ball is This is the one that operates when a specific area within the special winning opening is passed.

In the probability variation state, when the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number (for example, 70 times: a specified ST number) without winning the big hit type, the high probability state is ended and the low probability is shifted to. That is, the so-called “number-of-times cut probability variation machine (ST machine)”, and when the prescribed ST number of times is over, the next game is shifted to the normal state. However, it may be a "general probability variation machine" of a type that continues until the next big hit is won.
The number of executions of the special symbol variation display game may be the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2 (total variation number of special figure 1 and special figure 2), It may be the number of times of execution of either one (for example, the number of times of execution of the special symbol variable display game 2). Further, the number of times in the time saving state is not limited to 60 times or 100 times, and can be appropriately determined according to the game playability. Further, there is no particular limitation on what kind of hit is provided, and it can be appropriately determined.

Here, in this example, as with the big hit type, a plurality of types are provided for the “out”. Specifically, there are provided three types of disengagement types: "displacement 1", "displacement 2", and "displacement 3".
As described above, when the result of the winning lottery is “out”, the lottery of the outfall type is performed in the symbol lottery.

[3-4. About production]
(Direction mode)

Next, the production mode (production state) will be described. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes for displaying effects related to the game state, and is configured to be able to switch between the effect modes. Specifically, a normal effect mode, a time saving effect mode, a latent probability effect mode, and a probability change effect mode are provided corresponding to the normal state, the time saving state, the latent probability state, and the probability varying state, respectively. In each effect mode, the background display as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative pattern is displayed with different background effects, so that the player can grasp what kind of gaming state he/she is currently staying in. It has become.

The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a functional unit (effect state transition control means) that controls transition between a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) uses a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, an effect control command including game state information managed by the main control unit 20. Based on the game state managed by the main controller 20, the current game state is grasped, and the transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes is possible. Examples of the specific effect control command as described above include a variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol designation command, a game state designation command sent when a change occurs in the game state, and the like.

(Advance notice)

Next, the notice production will be described. The production control unit 24, based on the content of the production control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command, is related to the current production mode and the jackpot lottery result. It is configured to be able to control the appearance of a "notice production". Such advance notice production suggests (preliminary notice) the degree of expectation of whether or not the winning type has been won (hereinafter referred to as “the expected degree of win”), and serves as a “stirring production” to fuel the player's expectation of winning work. Typical examples of the notice production include "reach production", "pseudo continuous production", and "prefetch notice production". The effect control unit 24 functions as a notice effect control means capable of controlling (displaying) these effects.

The "reach effect" means an effect mode with a reach state (variable display mode with a reach state: reach variation pattern), and specifically, a final game result is derived and displayed via the reach state. This is a production mode. The reach effect includes a plurality of types of reach effects associated with the expected winning degree. For example, in some cases, the expectation of winning is relatively higher than when the normal reach effect appears. Such reach production is called "super reach production". Most of this "Super Reach" has a longer production time (variation time) than the normal reach in order to fuel the expectation of winning. In addition, normal reach and super reach include multiple types of reach effects. In this example, the super reach includes multiple types of reach productions such as super reach 1, 2, 3, and 4. For the expectation of winning of these super reach 1 to 4, "super reach 1 <super reach 2 <super The relationship is "reach 3 <super reach 4".

“Pseudo continuous production” refers to a production mode involving a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo continuous variation) of a decorative pattern, and “pseudo continuous variation” is one of the decorative symbols in the decorative pattern variable display game. This is a variable display mode in which a display operation is performed once or a plurality of times by temporarily setting a part or all of them and then performing a re-variation display operation of a decorative symbol from the temporary stop state. In this respect, it is different from the "prefetching notice effect (continuous notice effect)" which will be described later and is spread over a plurality of symbol variation display games. Basically, such a "pseudo-run" has its occurrence rate (appearance rate) set so that the higher the number of pseudo fluctuations, the higher the expectation of winning. It is easy to select an effect to fuel expectations such as reach.

"Pre-reading notice effect" (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as "pre-reading notice" or "pre-reading effect") is based on the result of the pre-reading determination, before the variable display of the symbol to be determined is performed, It means an effect that notifies the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state. The "advantageous state" means an advantageous state for the player.
Specifically, the look-ahead effect of this example is mainly for the pending display of the operation-holding balls (undigested operation-holding balls) that are not yet used for the execution of the symbol variable display game (variable display operation of the special symbol). By using the mode and the background effect of the symbol variable display game that is executed earlier, the operation is held in a mode in which the expected winning degree can be notified in advance before the operation suspension ball is provided to the symbol variable display game. . In the symbol variation display game, in addition to the above-mentioned “reach effect”, various effects such as so-called “SU (step-up) notice effect”, “timer notice effect”, “revival effect”, “premier notice effect”, etc. Occurred, it is supposed to excite the game content.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, "holding change notice effect" as an example of the prefetch notice effect will be described.
In the case of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the upper display area in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, a display area in which the decorative symbol variable display game appears (variable display effect of the decorative symbol and notice effect are displayed. Display area for) is provided, and in the display area on the lower side of the screen, a special display 1 (hold display area a1 to d1) and a special display 1 are displayed. A holding display area 77 (holding display portions a2 to d2) that displays the number of operation holding balls on the second side is provided. With respect to the presence/absence of the operation holding ball, the fact is notified by a predetermined hold display mode. In FIG. 4, the presence or absence of the operation-reserving sphere is lit (with the operation-retaining sphere: “○ (white circle) in the figure”) or off (without the operation-retaining sphere: broken circle in the figure). An example in which information regarding the number of operation-reserving balls is notified is shown.

The display (holding display) regarding the presence or absence of operation holding balls is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (prize order), and in each holding display area 76, 77, the leftmost holding ball is all the operations in the holding display. It is displayed as the operation hold ball that occurred first (that is, the oldest) on the time axis among the hold balls. Further, on the left side of the hold display areas 76 and 77, a changing display area 78 for showing the operation hold balls currently used in the special symbol change display game is provided. In the case of the present embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured such that an image in which the icon of the game in-hold K currently used for the game appears on the icon of the seat J is displayed. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the icon (icon image) of the oldest hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the game running hold K. As an icon, the icon moves to the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

When an operation-holding ball is generated, the main control unit 20 reads the pre-reading determination information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operation-holding balls at the time of pre-reading determination (the number of existing operation-holding balls, including the operation-holding ball generated this time). A "holding addition command" designating "and" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see steps S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 22).
In the case of the present embodiment, the hold addition command is composed of 2 bytes, and the hold addition command makes it possible to specify the high-order byte data that can specify the number of operation-holding balls at the time of pre-reading determination and the pre-reading determination information. It consists of lower byte data.

Here, as will be understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that a winning ball is generated at the upper starting opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35 and a new holding ball is generated, the prefetch for the holding ball is performed. As a determination, a big hit lottery is performed for the symbol variation display game related to the reserved ball. As will be described later, the main control unit 20 reserves and stores information representing the result of the big hit lottery performed as such prefetch determination in a corresponding storage area of the RAM 203.
The information on the jackpot lottery result obtained at the time of pre-reading determination is used to select (lottery) the symbol variation pattern in the symbol variation display game, and can be called the “variation pattern selection information”. Therefore, it can be said that the main control unit 20 performs pre-reading determination and holds the “variation pattern selection information” obtained as a result in a reserved area in the RAM 203.

When the production control unit 24 receives the above-mentioned hold addition command transmitted by the main control unit 20, based on the pre-reading determination information included in this command, as a part of the display control processing related to the above-mentioned hold display, "pre-reading notice production". Effect control processing regarding. Specifically, a "read-ahead notice lottery" is performed to select whether or not to execute the read-ahead notice effect, and if this is won, the look-ahead notice effect is displayed.

Here, the prefetch determination information is, specifically, in the main control unit 20, a jackpot lottery result (a jackpot lottery result at the time of start of variation) or a jackpot lottery result executed when the operation-holding balls are provided in the symbol variation display game. It is the game information obtained by prefetching the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. That is, this information includes at least information that pre-determined the winning lottery result at the start of fluctuation (pre-fetch winning information), and other information that pre-determined the symbol lottery result (pre-reading symbol information) and fluctuation at the start of fluctuation. Information for pre-reading determination of the pattern (pre-reading variation pattern information) can be included. What kind of information including the pending addition command to be sent to the effect control unit 24 can be appropriately determined according to the content to be notified in the pre-reading notice.
In this example, it is assumed that the hold addition command includes prefetch failure information, prefetch symbol information, and prefetch variation pattern information.

In addition, the "prefetch variation pattern" obtained by the prefetch judgment when the operation-holding sphere occurs is not necessarily the "variation pattern at the start of variation" itself obtained when the operation-holding sphere is actually subjected to the variation display operation. There is no. For example, the case in which the variation pattern at the start of variation is a variation pattern designating "super reach 1" is representatively described. In this case, the content designated by the look-ahead variation pattern is called "super reach 1". It is possible to specify not the type of reach effect itself but the essence of "super reach type".

In the case of the present embodiment, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the hold icons of the hold display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the hold icon that is the pre-reading notice target is, for example, a normal hold display. "Normal hold display mode" can be changed from white to the notice display blue, green, red, and a hold display with a danger pattern (or a special color or pattern such as rainbow) (special hold display mode) Pre-reading notice production of "system" (also referred to as "holding change notice") is performed.
FIG. 4 shows an example in which the hatched operation hold balls of the hold display portion b1 are changed to the special hold display. Here, the blue, green, red, and the display of the danger pattern of the hold icons mean that the winning probability is high in this order, and in particular, the display of the hold icon of the danger pattern shows that the jackpot winning expectation is extremely high. It is a premium hold icon that is displayed.

(Direction means)

Various effects in the gaming machine 1 are displayed by the effecting means arranged in the gaming machine 1. The rendering means may be any stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a rendering effect by appealing to human perceptions such as sight, hearing, and tactile sense, and light generating means (light display device 45a: Light production means), a sound generation device such as a speaker 46 (sound generation device 46a: sound production means), a production display device (display means) such as a liquid crystal display device 36, a pressure device for transmitting a contact pressure to the operator's body, Typical examples thereof include a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to the player's body, and a movable body accessory that exerts a visual effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a display device that is visually appealing like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes a device that does not depend on an image (for example, a 7-segment display device). When referred to as an image display device, it mainly refers to a type in which an effect is displayed by displaying an image, and a device such as a 7-segment display device that displays an effect other than an image is included in the concept of the effect display device.

<4. Processing of main controller>

Next, the processing performed by the main control unit 20 of this embodiment will be described. The main control unit 20 mainly processes a predetermined main process (main control side main process: FIG. 5) and a timer interrupt process activated by a timed interrupt from the CTC (main control side timer interrupt process: FIG. 18). It is configured to include and.

[4-1. Main processing on main control side]

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control side.
The main processing on the main control side starts when the system reset by the system reset signal from the power supply board occurs at the time of recovery from a power failure or power failure, or when the control program runs out of control. There is a case where the WDT) is exerted and the CPU 201 is forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first executes an initial setting process necessary for starting a game operation, such as initializing a register value of each unit including the CPU 201. Yes (step S101).

(Initial setting process)

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of step S101.
In FIG. 6, when the above system reset or WDT reset occurs, the CPU 201 sets itself in the interrupt disabled state in step S201, and then, as stack pointer setting processing in step S202, the value of the stack pointer in the RAM 203 is set to the stack area. The setting process corresponding to the final address of is executed. Then, in a succeeding step S203, processing for invalidating the RAM protect and invalidating the prohibited area in the outside designated area traveling prohibition function of the RAM 203 is performed.

Next, in step S204, the CPU 201 executes processing for turning off the security signal, turning off the set value display, and turning off the firing permission signal. Here, the security signal is a signal output to the hall computer HC through the frame outer centralized terminal board 21, and functions as a signal for notifying the hall computer HC of a status such as setting change. Setting value display OFF means turning off the display of the setting value Ve on the setting/performance display 97.
The launch permission signal is a signal output from the payout control board 29 to the launch control board 28 as described above, and the CPU 201 instructs the payout control board 29 to turn off the launch permission signal.
Here, the security signal OFF and the set value display OFF are measures for turning the power on/off during the setting change. That is, since the power may have been turned off while the set value Ve was being displayed in the setting change process, the set value display and the security signal are once turned off.

In step S205 following step S204, the CPU 201 executes power supply abnormality check processing.
As shown in FIG. 7, in the power supply abnormality check processing, the WDT timer is cleared (step S11), and it is determined whether or not the power supply abnormality signal is ON (step S12). The power supply abnormality signal is a signal output from the power supply board, represents that the power supply abnormality signal OFF is at a normal level, and represents that the power supply abnormality signal ON is not at a normal level (that is, abnormal). If the power supply abnormality signal is ON, the CPU 201 returns to step S101 shown in FIG. 5 and restarts the main processing on the main control side. That is, when an abnormality is found in the power supply, the main processing on the main control side is reset.
If the power supply abnormality signal is not ON, no abnormality is recognized in the power supply, so the CPU 201 ends the power supply abnormality check processing.

Returning to FIG. 6, in response to the completion of the power supply abnormality check processing in step S205, the CPU 201 performs various startup setting processing in step S206. In the setting process of step S206, for example, an interrupt mode setting process of setting a predetermined interrupt mode, an internal hard random number setting process of activating the internal hard random number circuit, and the like are executed.

In step S207 following step S206, the CPU 201 sets the activation waiting time of the sub control board (effect control unit 24). Then, by the processing of steps S208 to S210, it waits until the set activation waiting time elapses. Specifically, the set startup waiting time is decremented by 1 (step S208), the power supply abnormality check process (step S209) is executed, and the startup waiting time is not zero (step S210:≠0). Return to processing. By the standby process based on the activation waiting time, the activation of the effect control unit 24 is completed.

In step S210, when the activation waiting time has elapsed (waiting time=0), the CPU 201 proceeds to step S211, and transmits a standby screen display command to the effect control unit 24.
In response to the standby screen display command, the effect control unit 24 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display a predetermined screen display corresponding to the startup, such as a screen on which characters such as "Pleased Wait..." Are arranged. Performs control for execution.

In response to the execution of the transmission process of step S211, the CPU 201 advances the process to step S212, and executes the power supply abnormality check process (S212: see FIG. 7) by the processes of steps S212 and S213, It waits for a signal to be sent from the board 29 when the power is turned on. This power-on signal is a signal that is output when the payout control board 29 has normally started up, and the CPU 201 waits until the payout control board 29 normally starts. As a result, when the payout control board 29 is not functioning normally due to some trouble, the game operation is not started but only the processes of steps S212 and S213 are repeated. Therefore, a payout abnormality such as a prize ball not being paid out does not occur, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.
When the power-on signal is sent (step S213: ON), the CPU 201 ends the initialization process of step S101.

(Processing after initial setting)

Upon completion of the above initialization processing, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S102 shown in FIG.
In step S102, the CPU 201 acquires information of the input port n (that is, a predetermined input port) and copies it to the W register.
Here, the input port n is a 1-byte (8-bit) port, and in this example, the following signals are input. In addition, "b0" to "b7" shown below represent bit positions.

b0: Setting key (input signal from setting key switch 94)
b1: Supply outage detection signal b2: Count error signal b3: Disconnection detection signal 1
b4: disconnection detection signal 2
b5: Door open signal (detection signal of front door open sensor 61)
b6: RAM clear button (input signal from RAM clear switch 98)
b7: Power-on signal and payout communication confirmation signal

Here, in the setting key of b0, "0" means the setting key switch 94=OFF, and "1" means the setting key switch 94=ON. Regarding the door opening signal of b5, "0" means door closing (front frame 2 is closing), and "1" means door opening. Regarding the RAM clear button of b6, "0" means RAM clear switch 98=OFF (button non-operation state), and "1" means RAM clear switch 98=ON (button operation state).

In step S103 following step S102, the CPU 201 masks the value of the W register. Specifically, a value required for performing the transition determination of the setting change process (S115), the RAM clear process (at least S117 and S118), the setting confirmation process (S109), and the backup restoration process (S111) described below. A process for masking values other than the setting key (b0), the RAM clear button (b6), and the door opening signal (b5) is performed.
As can be understood from the above description, the condition for shifting to the setting change process is that both the setting key and the RAM clear button are in the operating state at the time of startup with the front frame 2 opened. ing.
Further, in this example, in terms of operation, the transition condition to the RAM clear processing is that the setting key is in the non-operating state and the RAM clear button is in the operating state at the time of startup.
In terms of operation, the condition for shifting to the setting confirmation process is that the setting key is in the operating state and the RAM clear button is in the non-operating state when the front frame 2 is open.
Furthermore, in terms of operation, the condition for shifting to the backup restoration process is that both the setting key and the RAM clear button are in the non-operation state at the time of startup.

FIG. 8 shows a correspondence relationship between each of the determination conditions on the operation side and the value of the W register when shifting to the setting changing process, the RAM clearing process, the setting confirming process, and the backup restoring process.
FIG. 8 shows the order of the setting change processing, the RAM clear processing, the setting confirmation processing, and the determination of the shift to the backup restoration processing.
As shown in the drawing, the determination conditions for the shift to the first setting change process are: setting key: ON (setting key switch 94: ON), door opening: ON (front door opening sensor 61: ON), RAM clear switch 98. :ON, so that the condition of the value of the W register is 0th bit: 1, 5th bit: 1, 6th bit: 1.
The determination of the transition to the second RAM clear processing is performed by determining whether the determination condition is the RAM clear switch 98: ON and the value of the W register is the 6th bit: 1. Here, in the present example, the transition determination to the RAM clear processing is executed when the transition condition of the setting change processing is not satisfied. Further, the RAM clear switch 98 is required to be OFF before shifting to the setting confirmation process and the backup restoration process. From these points, if the condition for shifting to the setting change process is not satisfied and the RAM clear switch 98 is ON, it can be estimated that the operation for shifting to the RAM clear process is being performed. Therefore, in the present example, in the determination of the transition to the RAM clear processing as described above, in terms of operation, it is only determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 98 is ON (6th bit: 1 or not). I am trying.

In the determination of the shift to the third setting confirmation process, the determination conditions are the setting key: ON, the door opening: ON, and the RAM clear switch 98: OFF. Therefore, the value of the W register is 0th bit: :1st, 6th bit: 0 is a condition.
Further, in the determination of the shift to the fourth backup restoration processing, the determination condition is that the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch 98 is OFF. Therefore, as the value of the W register, 0th bit: 0, 6th bit: 0 It is a condition.

Here, regarding the backup restoration processing, as a transition condition for performing only the backup restoration processing without passing through the setting confirmation processing, the setting key: OFF and the RAM clear switch 98: OFF are described on the operation side as described above. However, the condition for whether or not to simply shift to the state in which the backup restoration process is performed regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process is performed is that the backup flag described later is ON (step S106). Refer to the judgment process).

The description returns to FIG.
The CPU 201 executes the setting change condition satisfaction determination process in step S104 in response to the mask process in step S103. Specifically, in order to determine whether or not to shift to the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not the value (3 bits) after the masking in step S103 is "111".
When the masked value is “111” and a positive result that the setting change condition is satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 executes the setting change process of step S115. That is, the processing for newly setting the set value Ve in response to the operation of the RAM clear button or the setting key is performed.
The details of the setting change process in step S115 will be described later.

Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the setting key switch 94, the front door opening sensor 61, and the RAM clear switch 98, in other words, the respective detections used to determine the shift to the setting change mode. The signals are input to the same input port of the main control unit 20, and it is collectively determined whether or not the value of each input detection signal is a value satisfying a predetermined condition.
This makes it possible to reduce the number of determination processes with respect to the determination of the shift to the setting change mode, as compared with the case of individually determining whether or not the value of each detection signal satisfies a predetermined condition.

In response to the execution of the setting change processing in step S115, the CPU 201 executes RAM clear processing in step S116. This RAM clearing process is a process for initializing a value in a predetermined region (use region) including a work region in the RAM 203, and a setting for notifying the effect control unit 24 side of the end of the setting change process executed in step S115. The change end command transmission processing is included, but details will be described later.

Subsequently, in the previous step S104, if the value after the masking in step S103 is not “111” and a negative result that the setting change condition is not satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S105 and RAM abnormality occurs. Or not. Specifically, at least it is determined whether or not the “setting value” stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is a value outside the usage range Ru (outside the range of “1”, “2”, and “6” in this example). To do.
Here, the value that the CPU 201 handles with respect to the set value Ve is the set value Vd. The set value Vd is a value corresponding to the set value Ve, and is a value of 1 byte in this example, so that at least three levels corresponding to the above-described usage range Ru can be expressed by 00H. Values (0) to 02H(3) are defined. In addition, "H" means a hexadecimal number (the same applies hereinafter). In this example, the set value Vd=00H represents the set value Ve=“1”, the set value Vd=01H represents the set value Ve=“2”, and the set value Vd=02H represents the set value Ve=“6”. To be taken. In the main controller 20, the set value Vd is mainly handled as the “set value”, and the set value Vd is stored in the storage area of the “set value” in the work area of the RAM 203 of the main controller 20. ..
In the determination processing of step S105, it is determined whether or not the set value Vd stored in the work area is a value in the range of 00H to 02H.

When it is determined in step S105 that the set value is outside the above-described range Ru (that is, outside the normal range) and the RAM is abnormal, the CPU 201 waits for the power to be turned on again after step S112. And later.
Specifically, in step S112, the CPU 201, as a command transmission process when the power is turned on again, an effect control command (setting) for instructing to perform notification for prompting the player to turn on the pachinko gaming machine 1 again and change the setting. A process of transmitting a (change wait command) to the effect control unit 24 is performed. When a RAM abnormality is detected at the time of startup, the setting change mode is forcibly entered and a change (setting) of the set value Ve is accepted. Therefore, in step S112, the CPU 201 first notifies the effect control unit 24 side that the setting change mode is entered by the setting change wait command.
Upon receiving the setting change waiting command, the effect control unit 24 executes, on the liquid crystal display device 36, a screen display for prompting a setting change operation, such as a screen including characters such as "Open the door and change the setting." Let At this time, the effect control unit 24 may perform control for causing the corresponding light effect (for example, lighting of all LEDs in the light display device 45a) and sound effect together with the screen display.

In step S113 following step S112, the CPU 201 sets the backup flag to 00H (that is, OFF), and then repeats the error display process of step S114. In the error display process of step S114, a process for causing the setting/performance display 97 to display an error is performed. This error display process is repeated until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, and when the power is turned on again, the processes after step S101 are executed again as the main process on the main control side. At this time, if the operation of shifting to the setting change mode is performed according to the above screen display or the like, the shift to the setting change mode is performed, and the RAM abnormal state is eliminated.

When it is determined in step S105 that the set value is not a value outside the use range Ru and there is no RAM abnormality, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S106 and determines whether the backup flag is in the ON state (backup flag=5AH in this example). Is ON).
In the gaming machine 1, when the power is cut off, a process for backing up the stored information in the RAM 203 is performed by a power check/backup process (step S901, see FIG. 19) described later in the main control side timer interrupt process. If the backup process is properly performed when the power is cut off, the backup flag is turned on (see step S1010 in FIG. 19). Therefore, in step S106, the backup flag is checked to determine whether the backup can be restored. Specifically, in step S106, it is determined whether the backup flag stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is in the ON state (5AH).

When the CPU 201 determines in step S106 that the backup flag is not ON, the CPU 201 advances the process to step S112 described above. As a result, when the backup recovery condition is not satisfied, the transition to the setting change mode is forcibly performed as in the case where the RAM abnormality described above is recognized.

Here, as described above, the determination process of step S106 corresponds to a process of determining whether or not the state where the backup restoration process is performed can be performed regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S106 that the backup flag is ON, the CPU 201 determines in step S107 whether or not the RAM clear condition (condition for shifting to the RAM clear processing) is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the 6th bit of the W register is "1".
When the value of the 6th bit of the W register is “1” and an affirmative result that the RAM clear condition is satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 advances the process to step S116 described above. As a result, the RAM clearing process described above is executed.

Here, as can be seen by referring to the route from step S107 to step S116 described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to clear the RAM without changing the setting. As a result, it is possible to deal with the case where it is desired to clear data other than the data related to the set value Ve, such as payout-related data in the RAM 203.

Further, in step S107, when the value of the 6th bit of the W register is not “1” and a negative result that the RAM clear condition is not satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S108 and sets confirmation condition ( It is determined whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting confirmation process) is satisfied. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the W register after masking in step S103 is “110”.
When the value of the W register after masking is “110” and a positive result that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 executes the setting confirmation process of step S109, and advances the process to step S110. That is, the process proceeds to the process for restoring the backup.
The details of the setting confirmation processing in step S109 will be described later.

On the other hand, when the value of the W register after masking is not “110” and a negative result that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 passes the setting confirmation process of step S109, and proceeds to step S110. ..

In step S110, the CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting a predetermined effect control command corresponding to the backup recovery to the effect control unit 24 as the command transmission process at the backup recovery.

In step S111 following step S110, the CPU 201 performs backup restoration processing.
The backup restoration process is a process for returning to the operation before the power shutdown after the power is turned on, based on the stored contents of the RAM 203 backed up at the time of power shutdown. Specifically, the CPU 201 restores the stack pointer before power-off, and performs processing for starting the game operation from the processing state at power-off.
Further, in the backup restoration processing, a power failure restoration display command (OB03H) for giving an information display instruction corresponding to the case of the backup restoration is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in the main loop preprocessing of step S119 described later. Therefore, the process of storing the lower byte data of the power failure recovery display command in the register is executed.

When the backup restoration process of step S111 is executed, or when the RAM clear process of step S116 described above is executed (that is, when both the setting change process and the RAM clear process are executed, or only the RAM clear process is executed). , CPU 201 advances the processing in step S117.

In step S117, the CPU 201 sets the CTC for periodically generating a timer interrupt at every predetermined time such as 4 ms.
By performing the setting process in step S117, thereafter, the interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output, and the main control timer interrupt process is executed.

In the following step S118, the CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command for instructing the game start to the effect control unit 24, then advances the process to step S119 to execute the main loop preprocessing, and then the step S120. The main loop processing of is executed.
The main loop preprocessing of step S119 will be described later.

(Main loop processing)

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main loop processing of step S120.
In the main loop process of FIG. 9, the CPU 201 sets itself in the interrupt disabled state in step S601, and executes the random number update process in subsequent step S602. In this random number update process, various random numbers used in the special symbol variable display game and the normal symbol variable display game (random numbers related to the jackpot lottery that circulates within a predetermined numerical range by the increment process (special symbol determination used in the symbol lottery Random number) and the random number related to the lottery per subsidy (random number for sub-judgment used for lottery per subsidy) initial value (start value) used to change the random number (initial value random number for special symbol judgment) , Initial value random number for auxiliary hit determination) and a variation pattern random number used to select a variation pattern.

In the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, a random number counter for special symbol determination, a random number counter for generating a special symbol, a special symbol determination, as a random number counter used for a symbol lottery related to a big hit lottery, an auxiliary hit lottery, or a variation pattern lottery. There are provided a random number counter, a random number counter for auxiliary hit determination, a counter for generating an initial value of the auxiliary hit determination, a random number counter for auxiliary hit determination, a random number counter for variation patterns, and the like. These counters serve as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. In the random number updating process of step S602, the two initial value generating counters that generate the initial values of the special symbol determining random number counter and the auxiliary winning determination random number counter, the variation pattern random number counter, and the like are updated, and the various types described above. Generate a soft random number. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the fluctuation pattern random number counter is "0 to 238", a value is acquired from the count value storage area of the RAM 203 for generating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number, and the acquired value is set to the acquired value. After adding "1", it is stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding “1” to the acquired value is “239”, “0” is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters are similarly updated.

When the random number updating process of step S602 ends, the CPU 201 saves the values of all the registers in step S603, and then performs the performance display monitor total division process in step S604.
The performance display monitor tabulation/division processing is processing for computing the value as the performance information described above (here, for example, the value as the “normal ratio information” described above). As described above, the value of the normal duty ratio information is calculated by using the total payout number and the total out ball number, but the CPU 201 determines the winning amount (upper start opening 34, It is calculated based on the result of counting the number of game balls that have won the lower start opening 35, the general winning opening 43, and the big winning opening 50). For the total number of out balls, Obtain by counting.
The counting of the number of winning balls and the counting of the number of out balls are performed in an input management process (see step S904 in FIG. 18) described later in the main control side timer interrupt process. The CPU 201 calculates the value as the normal ratio information in step S604 based on the count value of each of the winning ball count and the out ball count performed on the timer interrupt processing side. As described above, the calculated value as the normal ratio information is stored in the predetermined area (measurement information storage area) of the RAM 203.
The value of the normal ratio information calculated in this way is displayed on the setting/performance display 97 by a performance display monitor display process (see step S916 in FIG. 18) described later in the main control side timer interrupt process.

In step S605 following step S604, the CPU 201 performs a process for restoring all registers, sets the interrupt-enabled state in step S606, and then returns to step S601.

As described above, in the main loop process of step S123, the processes of steps S601 to S606 are repeated in an infinite loop. The CPU 201 will repeatedly execute the processing of these steps S601 to S606 except when the timer interrupt processing that is intermittently executed is being performed.

(Setting change process)

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the setting change process of step S115.
In this setting change process, a process for setting the set value Ve based on the operation, and a production control command for notifying that the setting is being changed or the setting change has been completed (completed) are transmitted to the production control unit 24. Processing and the like for transmission are performed.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first executes a process of transmitting a setting change command (BA76H) to the effect control unit 24 in step S401.
Receiving the setting change command, the effect control unit 24 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display a screen for notifying that the setting is being changed, such as a screen on which characters such as “setting is being changed” are arranged. Processing is executed to execute the sound or to output sound corresponding to the setting change from the speaker 46. Further, at this time, the effect control unit 24 may turn on a predetermined LED (for example, all LEDs) in the above-described light generation means (light display device 45a) in a predetermined lighting pattern.
The process executed by the effect control unit 24 in response to various effect control commands transmitted by the CPU 201 in connection with the setting change, including the setting change command, will be described later (FIG. 52A and the like).

In the subsequent step S402, the CPU 201 sets the backup flag to 00H (that is, the OFF state), and then sets the system operation status=2 in step S403. This system operation status is information for at least identifying whether or not the setting change processing of step S115 has been performed at the time of startup, and "2" indicates that the setting change processing has been performed, and is other than "2". A value (for example, “0”) indicates that the setting change process has not been performed.
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 5, in the present example, the RAM is changed between the case where both the setting change process and the RAM clear process (S116) are executed and the case where only the RAM clear process is executed without executing the setting change process. Although the clear processing (program) is shared, by using the system operation status described above, it is possible to execute the processing separately in the former case and the latter case while sharing the RAM clear program. .

In step S404 subsequent to step S403, the CPU 201 executes the process of acquiring the setting value. Specifically, the setting value Vd (any of 00H to 02H in this example) stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is acquired.

In the processing from step S405 subsequent to step S404, the display value on the setting/performance display unit 97 is updated according to the forward operation of the set value Ve (operation of the RAM clear button), and the setting change completion operation (setting key is pressed). This is a process for setting the set value Ve according to the (operation).
First, the CPU 201 decrements the acquired setting value Vd by 1 in step S405 ("setting value-1"), and determines in subsequent step S406 whether the setting value Vd is greater than 1 (setting value>1). ). In this example, since the maximum value of the set value Vd is 02H, the set value>1 is not determined in step S406 that is first executed after the setting change process is started.
If the set value Vd is not greater than 1 in step S406, the CPU 201 sets the carry flag in step S407 (on) and then increments the set value Vd by 1 in step S408 (“set value+1”). ), and it is determined in step S409 whether the carry flag is ON. If the carry flag is ON, the CPU 201 executes the setting change command acquisition process in step S411, and transmits the setting change command to the effect control unit 24 by the command process in step S412.
The setting change command will be described later.
Then, in response to the execution of the command transmission process of step S412, the CPU 201 executes the output management process of step S413. By this output management processing, the setting/performance indicator 97 displays the setting value Ve corresponding to the current setting value Vd. The details of the output management process of step S413 will be described later.

In step S414 following step S413, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key is OFF, that is, whether or not the setting key switch 94 is OFF, and if the setting key is not OFF, the change switch, that is, the change key, in step S415. It is determined whether the RAM clear switch 98 is ON. If the RAM clear switch 98 is not ON, the CPU 201 executes the output management process of step S413 again.
Through the processing of steps S413 to S415, the CPU 201 waits until either the setting key or the change switch is turned ON, and during the standby, the setting/performance display 97 displays the current set value Ve by the processing of step S413. The process for is repeated.

If the change switch is ON in step S415, the CPU 201 returns to step S406.
Here, if the setting value Vd acquired at the start of the setting changing process in step S115 (the setting value Vd that was being set up to then) is 02H, the change switch is determined to be ON in step S415. In the process of step S406 that is executed accordingly, a determination result that "the set value>1" is obtained (because -1 is made in step S405, but +1 is made in step S408). The set value Vd should be returned to 00H according to the changing operation (sequential feed operation) performed with the set value Vd being 02H. Therefore, if it is determined in step S406 that "the set value>1", the carry flag setting process of step S407 is passed and the process proceeds to step S408. As a result, the carry flag is determined to be OFF in step S409, so the process proceeds to step S410 and the set value Vd is returned to 00H (“set value←0”).
In response to the setting value Vd being returned to 00H in step S410, the CPU 201 advances the processing to step S413 via the processing in steps S411 and S412. That is, in this case, the setting/performance display 97 displays the setting value Ve (“1” in this example) corresponding to the setting value Vd=00H.

By the above-described processing, during the setting change, the set value Vd is changed to the cyclic type within the range of 00H to 02H (within the use range Ru) according to the change operation, and the set value Vd corresponds to the changed set value Vd. The set value Ve is displayed on the setting/performance display 97.

The setting change command transmitted in step S412 is a command for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the setting value Ve corresponding to the setting value Vd being selected during the setting change process. It is a command in which information representing Ve is stored.
Through the series of processes of steps S406 to S415 described above, every time the set value Ve being selected is switched by the sequential feeding operation of the set values, the setting change command reflecting the switched set value Ve is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Will be.
Although not shown in FIG. 10, the CPU 201 uses a set value offset conversion table described later to acquire the set value Ve corresponding to the set value Vd (see FIG. 16).

If it is determined in step S415 that the setting key is OFF, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S416 to execute processing of saving the setting value Vd. That is, the process of storing the set value Vd in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 203 is executed.
The CPU 201 ends the setting change processing of step S115 in response to the execution of the storage processing of step S416.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the output management process of step S413.
First, in step S501, the CPU 201 executes a security signal output process. Specifically, processing is performed so that a security signal is output to the hall computer HC through the frame outer centralized terminal board 21.
In the subsequent step S502, the CPU 201 executes a process of outputting 0 to the LED common port, that is, the LED common port as the setting/performance indicator 97, and then acquires the display data from the 7-segment decoding table in step S503. Execute the process. That is, this is a process of acquiring the display data of the set value Ve (“1” “2” “6”) based on the set value Vd.
When 0 is output to the LED common port in step S502, the setting/performance indicator 97 is in the display OFF state (non-display state), the significance of which will be described later.

FIG. 12 shows an example of the 7-segment decoding table, and FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the segment configuration and the segment display pattern in the setting/performance display 97.
The 7-segment decoding table is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20.

In this example, the seven segments in the setting/performance display 97 are numbered by the numerical values 0 to 6 as shown in FIG. 13A. The setting/performance indicator 97 is also provided with a DP (dot point) display section (light emitting section) along with these seven segments 0 to 6, and the DP display section is numbered "7". ing.
As the 7-segment display data, a total of 10 pieces are prepared from the display data of “SEG_0” indicating the numerical value “0” to the display data of “SEG_9” indicating the numerical value “9”. The display data is 1-byte (8-bit) data. When the least significant bit position is the first bit position, the first bit position is the display/non-display (light emission/non-light emission) of the segment “0”. Represents Thereafter, similarly, the second bit position is segment "1", the third bit position is segment "2", the fourth bit position is segment "3", the fifth bit position is segment "4", the sixth. The bit position of "" indicates the display of segment "5", and the seventh bit position indicates the display/non-display of segment "6".
Further, in the display data in this example, the eighth bit position represents DP (“7”) display/non-display.

In the 7-segment decoding table shown in FIG. 12, the corresponding display data, specifically, the display data of SEG_1, SEG_2, SEG_6 are acquired from the set values Vd=00H, 01H, 02H. It is configured.
Specifically, in the 7-segment decoding table of this example, an area for storing display data for each set value Vd of at least 00H to 05H is secured like the address areas of “6203” to “6208” in the figure. In this area, the display data SEG_1 (“06” in the figure) corresponding to the set value Vd=00H is set in the second area in the uppermost area (the area of the address with the smallest number). Display data SEG_2 (“5B” in the figure) corresponding to Vd=01H is stored in the third area, and display data SEG_6 (“7D” in the figure) corresponding to the set value Vd=02H is stored.
In the present example, the fourth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=03H, the fifth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=04H, and the sixth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=05H are used for display. Although "00" is stored as data, its significance will be described again.
Further, in the 7-segment decoding table of this example, the display data SEG_E (“79”) for displaying “E” indicating the setting value error is stored in the seventh area. It is possible to notify a setting value error through the setting/performance display 97 in response to a case where the setting value Vd shows an abnormal value such as a value outside the usage range Ru. .

The description returns to FIG.
The CPU 201 performs a process of outputting the display data acquired from the 7-segment decoding table by the process of step S503 to the setting/performance indicator 97 in step S504.
The processing of subsequent steps S505 to S508 is processing for dynamically lighting (intermittent lighting) the display LED of the setting value Ve on the setting/performance display 97. Specifically, the CPU 201 increments the LED counter by 1 in step S505, and determines in step S506 whether or not the 0th and 1st bits (lower 2 bits) of the LED counter are “11”. Here, the lower 2 bits of the LED counter become "11" when the increment process of step S505 is performed a multiple of 4.
If the 1st and 0th bits of the LED counter are "11" in step S506, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S507, outputs the data designating the segment for displaying the set value to the LED common port, and displays the data in step S508 for display. Executes timer count processing. By performing the output process of step S507, the setting/performance display 97 displays the set value Ve based on the display data output in step S504. Then, this display state is continued for the time of the display timer in step S508 (4 ms in this example).

The output management process shown in FIG. 11 is ended in response to execution of the process of step S509 following the timer count process of step S508, and the process proceeds to step S414 shown in FIG. If the change switch is ON, the output management process of step S413 is repeated. Since 0 is output to the LED common port in step S502 as described above, the lighting state of the set value display LED started in the process of step S507 is canceled by executing step S502. Since the LED counter is incremented by 1 in step S505, it is determined in step S506 that the 0th and 1st bits of the LED counter are not "11", the output process of step S507 is passed, and the timer count process of step S508 is executed. Executed. That is, after the processing of step S507 is executed and the LED for displaying the set value is lit for at least 4 ms, until the 0th and 1st bits of the LED counter become “11” again, that is, in this example. The LED is turned off for at least 4 ms×3=12 ms.
In this way, dynamic lighting in which the set value display LED is intermittently lit at a predetermined cycle is realized.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 executes the input data creation process in step S509 in response to the execution of the timer count process in step S508.
This input data creation processing is executed by calling the same processing of step S902 in the main control side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18), for example. As will be described later, the input data created in the input data creation process includes the input data of the RAM clear switch 98 indicating the presence/absence of the forward operation of the set value Ve and the setting key switch indicating the presence/absence of the setting change completion operation. It contains 94 input data.
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 10, the determination of the presence/absence of a setting change completion operation (S414) and the determination of the presence/absence of a forward operation of the set value Ve (S415) are performed after the output management process of step S413. By executing the input data creation process of step S509, the data required for these determination processes are obtained in advance.

(RAM clear processing)

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the RAM clearing process shown in FIG.
First, in step S601, the CPU 201 executes in-area RAM initialization processing. The initialization process of step S601 is a process of initializing (clearing) values in a predetermined area (use area) including the work area in the RAM 203. However, in the initialization processing of step S601, the storage area of the set value Vd in the work area is not subject to initialization.

The performance information described above is stored in the area outside the used area in the RAM 203, and thus is not cleared by the initialization processing in step S601.
The target to be cleared in the RAM clearing process is the data in the RAM area (normal data storage area) such as various flags and timers and counters necessary for the normal game progress. These data include the following, for example. That is, data relating to the game state designation (a game state flag that identifies the current game state such as a normal state, a probability variation state, a time saving state, a latent probability state), a flag that specifies whether or not a winning game is in progress (condition device) Operation flag), various data related to the execution of a winning game (current number of rounds, maximum number of rounds, etc.), data related to jackpot lottery results (big hit determination flag: winning lottery result information, special symbol determination data: symbol lottery result information) , Hold data about the operation holding ball (number of operation holding balls, various random numbers used in big hit lottery, various random numbers used in auxiliary lottery, random number for fluctuation pattern), special symbol operation status, manage game progress Timer (special symbol auditors product operation timer), input/output data related to switches and sensors, various winning counters that count the number of winning balls at winning holes, a flag (open extension flag) that specifies the presence or absence of a power support state, power Electric support counter that counts the remaining number of support, counter that counts the remaining number of high probability state (special figure probability variation counter, general figure probability variation number counter), various error flags (excluding RAM error flag), and payout related Data, etc. In any case, when the RAM clear process is executed, all data other than specific data (setting value Vd and performance information) are set to the initial state.

Here, as understood from the description of FIG. 5 above, when the setting change process (S115) is executed, the process proceeds to step S116, and the RAM clear process is executed.
The setting value Vd can be changed in the setting change process. When the set value Vd is changed, the stored values other than the set value Vd in the work area of the RAM 203 may be inconsistent with the changed set value Vd. Therefore, when the setting change processing is performed, the RAM clear processing is executed to clear (initialize) the area other than the set value Vd in the work area.

In response to the execution of the initialization process in step S601, the CPU 201 sets the RAM clear notification timer to 30 s in step S602 and also executes the process to set the outlier in this special figure. The RAM clear notification timer is a timer for setting the time of the RAM clear notification executed by the effect control unit 24 according to the RAM clear command transmitted in the process of step S803 of FIG. To set. The special figure referred to here means, for example, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 described above.

In step S603 following step S602, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the above-mentioned system operation status is “2”. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting change process of step S115 has been performed after the activation.
If the system operation status is "2", the CPU 201 executes the processing corresponding to the case of passing through the setting change processing in steps S604 to S612.
If the system operation status is not "2", the CPU 201 advances the process to step S613, stores the lower byte data of the RAM clear command in the register, and finishes the RAM clear process of step S116.
The operation of storing the lower byte data of the command in the register as described above functions as an operation of designating the command type to be transmitted in step S804 of the main loop preprocessing (FIG. 17) described later.

When the setting change processing is performed, the CPU 201 first resets the system operation status to “0” in step S604, executes the setting change end command (BA77H) acquisition processing in step S605, and then executes the command in step S606. By the transmission process, the setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

The processing of steps S607 to S612 following step S606 is processing relating to the display of the set value Ve on the setting/performance display 97.
First, in step S607, the CPU 201 outputs the data designating the set value display segment to the LED common port, and in the subsequent step S608, displays the display data corresponding to the set value Vd from the 7-segment decode table (see FIG. 13). After performing the process of obtaining and adding DP to the display data in step S609, that is, the process of setting the value of the 7th bit position of the display data to “1”, the display data is output by the output process of step S610. Output to the setting/performance display 97.

The processing of steps S612 and S613 following step S611 is processing for continuing the display state of the set values Ve and DP on the setting/performance display 97 for a predetermined time (1 s in this example). Specifically, the CPU 201 repeatedly executes the display timer count process of step S612 (for example, the timer count process of 4 ms cycle similar to the previous step S508 (see FIG. 11)) until it is determined in step S612 that 1 s has elapsed. To do.

When it is determined that 1 s has elapsed in step S612, the CPU 201 executes the storage process of step S613, and ends the RAM clear process of step S116.

As can be understood from the above description, when the setting change process of step S115 is executed and the setting change completion operation is performed (step S412: Y in FIG. 10), in the RAM clear process of step S116. A setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (S605, S606), and notification that the setting change has been completed is performed.
In the case of the present example, the setting change end command notifies the effect control unit 24 that the setting change has ended, and is not given to the function of notifying the setting value Ve set in the setting change process. .
In this example, the setting value Ve set in the setting changing process is notified to the effect control unit 24 by the setting value command transmitted in the process of step S808 of FIG. 17 (main loop preprocessing) described later.

(Setting confirmation process)

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process of step S109.
The setting confirmation process is a process for confirming and displaying the set value Ve being set.
In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 first sets 30s in the illegal information timer in step S701. The illegal information timer is a timer for managing the output time of the above-described security signal to the hall computer HC.
In a succeeding step S702, processing for acquiring the current setting value information is performed. That is, the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM is acquired.

In step S703 subsequent to step S702, the CPU 201 executes a process of acquiring setting value data from the setting value offset conversion table.

FIG. 16 shows an example of the set value offset conversion table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20.
In the set value offset conversion table, the set value Vd (00H to 02H) is set to the set value Ve (“1
“2” “6”) identification data (“SETNUM1” to “SETNUM6”).
In the case of this example, the set value offset conversion table has an area for storing the identification data of the set value Ve at least for each set value Vd of 00H to 05H, like the address areas of “6215” to “6220” in the figure. The identification data (“00” in the figure) of the set value Ve “1” corresponding to the set value Vd=00H is secured in the uppermost area of the area, and the set value Vd=01H is set in the second area. The identification data of the corresponding set value Ve “2” (“01” in the figure) is the identification data of the set value Ve “6” (“05” in the figure) corresponding to the set value Vd=02H in the third area. It is stored.
In this example, in the fourth area corresponding to the set value Vd=03H, the fifth area corresponding to the set value Vd=04H, and the sixth area corresponding to the set value Vd=05H, the set value is set. Although "00" is stored as Ve identification data, its significance will be described again.

In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 acquires the above identification data as “setting value data” by the acquisition processing in step S703.

In response to the acquisition process of step S703 being executed, the CPU 201 executes the acquisition process of the setting confirmation command (BA6xH) in step S704, and the subsequent command transmission process of step S705 transmits the setting confirmation command to the effect control unit 24. Send.
In the acquisition process of step S704, the CPU 201 performs a process of including the setting value data acquired in step S703 in the setting confirmation command, that is, identification data for identifying the setting value Ve being set among the current setting values.
As a result, the command transmission process of step S705 is executed, so that the effect control unit 24 is notified of the setting confirmation and the current set value Ve.

The processing of steps S706 and S707 following step S705 is processing for displaying the current set value Ve on the setting/performance display 97.
Specifically, the CPU 201 first executes a process of acquiring the set value and the DP data in step S706. That is, a process of acquiring the current setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 and the DP data (“1”) on the setting/performance display 97 is executed. Then, the output management process of step S707 is executed. The output management process of step S707 is the same as the output management process of step S413 shown in FIG. As a result, the setting/performance indicator 97 in this case displays the value indicating the current set value Ve and DP.

In step S708 subsequent to step S707, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key is OFF (setting key switch 94 is OFF), that is, whether or not an operation for instructing to end the setting confirmation display is performed, and the setting key must be OFF. For example, the output management process of step S707 is executed again. As a result, after the setting confirmation command is transmitted in step S705, the process of step S708 waits until the end confirmation operation of the setting confirmation display is performed, and in the standby state, the setting/performance is set by the process of step S707. The process of displaying the current set values Ve and DP on the display device 97 is continuously performed.

When it is determined in step S708 that the setting key is OFF, the CPU 201 executes the acquisition process of the setting confirmation end command (BA67H) in step S709, and the setting confirmation end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process of the subsequent step S710. Then, the setting confirmation process in step S109 is completed.

(Main loop pre-processing)

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the main loop preprocessing of step S119.
In the main loop pre-processing, the CPU 201 first executes an initializing command acquisition processing in step S801, and transmits the initializing command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission processing in subsequent step S802. The initialization command is a command for instructing the initialization (return to the origin) of the movable body accessory motor 80c for operating the movable body as the accessory.

In step S803 subsequent to step S802, the CPU 201 performs a process of acquiring transmission command data from the acquired lower byte command, and transmits the acquired command data to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process of step S804.
Here, in the acquisition processing of step S803, the data of the command in which the lower byte data is stored in the register is acquired in the course of the processing that has passed through after the activation. Specifically, in the case of passing through the RAM clear process of step S116 (when both the setting change process and the RAM clear process are performed, or when the setting change process is not performed and only the RAM clear process is performed), The data of the RAM clear command (BA02H) is acquired. On the other hand, if the backup restoration processing of step S111 is performed (both the setting confirmation processing and the backup restoration processing are performed, or if the setting confirmation processing is not performed and only the backup restoration processing is performed), the power restoration is performed. The data of the display command (OB03H) is acquired.
As a result, the effect control unit 24 is configured to execute different processing when the RAM clear processing is performed and when the backup restoration processing is performed.

In step S805 subsequent to step S804, the CPU 201 executes a process for transmitting the reserved number of special figure 1 and special figure 2. Here, in the process of step S805, when the backup restoration process of step S111 is performed, the reserved numbers of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the RAM clearing process of step S116 is performed. In the case of the above, the number of the held numbers is not transmitted (because the information of the number of the held numbers is cleared).

The processing of steps S806 to S808 following step S805 is processing for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the current set value Ve by the set value command.
First, in step S806, the CPU 201 performs a process of acquiring the set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 as a process for acquiring the current set value information, and in the subsequent step S807, the set value offset conversion table ( The process of acquiring the set value data from FIG. 16) is executed. Specifically, the identification data of the set value Ve (“1” “2” “5”) corresponding to the set value Vd (00H to 02H) obtained in step S806 is obtained.
And CPU201 performs the acquisition process of the setting value command (F6xxH) in the following step S808, and transmits the setting value command to the production|generation control part 24 by the command transmission process of step S809.
In the acquisition process of step S808, the setting value command including the identification data acquired in step S807 is acquired. With such a set value command, it is possible to notify the effect control unit 24 of the current set value Ve.

In response to the execution of the command transmission process in step S809, the CPU 201 executes in step S810 a setting process of an internal function register, that is, a register setting process for initial setting of various functions such as a hardware random number counting function. In step S811, a process of setting the performance display monitor lighting timer to 5 seconds is executed. The performance display monitor lighting timer is a timer for managing the operation time of the operation confirmation lighting operation (in this example, blinking operation for 5 seconds) when the setting/performance display 97 is activated.

Further, in step S812 subsequent to step S811, the CPU 201 resets the system operation status to "0", and in step S813, turns on the firing permission signal for the payout control board 29. In response to this, the payout control board 29 determines that it is in the launch permission state, outputs the permission signal to the launch control board 28, and permits the launching operation of the game ball by the launching device 32. As a result, it becomes possible to shoot the game ball with the shooting operation handle 15.
In addition, here, a configuration in which the payout control board 29 receives a launch permission signal from the main control section 20 to permit the launch operation, that is, the instruction information of the launch permission from the main control section 20 is indirectly transmitted through the payout control board 29. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main controller 20 may directly output the firing permission signal to the firing control board 28. ..
The CPU 201 ends the main loop preprocessing of step S119 in response to the execution of the processing of step S813.

(Advantages of setting value display data table and setting value conversion table as an embodiment)

Here, in the present embodiment, like the setting value offset conversion table shown in FIG. 16, the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20 includes a data table including a plurality of setting value related information selected by referring to the setting values. Is stored.
Then, in this data table, the setting value related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to the setting values Vd (“00H” to “02H”) that can be set by the setting change processing (see FIG. 10). It includes certain first set value related information and second set value related information which is set value related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to a set value that cannot be set by the setting change process. Specifically, as the first set value related information, “00”, “01”, and “05” stored at addresses “6215”, “6216”, and “6217” in the set value offset conversion table shown in FIG. 16 correspond to each other. As the second set value related information, “00”, “00”, and “00” stored in the addresses “6218”, “6219”, and “6220” respectively correspond.
Further, in the data table, as the first setting value related information, at least specific information (that is, “00” at the address “6215”) regarding the setting value Ve representing the stage where the winning probability is the lowest is stored, and the second setting is performed. The same information as the specific information is stored as the value-related information.

When the set value Vd is a value that cannot be set, it is conceivable to rewrite the set value Vd stored in the RAM 203 with a value representing the lowest step.
However, if the data is tampered with after being rewritten, the corresponding information may be acquired from the data table based on the unsettable set value Vd, and the operation corresponding to the unsettable set value may be realized.
According to the above configuration, it is impossible to obtain the information corresponding to the unsettable setting value Vd from the data table, so that it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act from being established and the fairness of the game. Can be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, 0 is stored as the above-mentioned specific information.
With this, it is possible to prevent establishment of an illegal act due to falsification of the set value by a simple method of writing specific information=0 in the set value related information. That is, the fairness of the game can be improved by a simple method.

Further, in the present embodiment, the 7-segment decoding table shown in FIG. 12 is also the setting value related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to the setting value Vd that can be set by the setting change process. The setting value related information (addresses “6203” to “6205”) and the second setting value related information that is the setting value related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to the setting value that cannot be set by the setting change process. (Addresses “6206” to “6208”) are included. Then, in the 7-segment decoding table, 0 is stored as the second set value related information.
As a result, even if the data table is referred to by the setting value Vd that cannot be set in the setting change processing due to an illegal act or some malfunction, the setting value is set in the display means (setting/performance display 97 in this example). It is possible not to display the value. Specifically, in this example, since the data of “00”, that is, “00000000” is acquired as the display data, all the segments of “0” to “6” in the 7 segments for displaying the set value are not displayed. As a result, the numerical value is not displayed.
Therefore, erroneous display of the set value can be prevented.

[4-2. Main control timer interrupt processing]

The main control side timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
The main control side timer interrupt process is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is interrupted and executed during execution of the main control side main process.

In FIG. 18, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first executes the power supply check/backup process of step S901. In this power supply check/backup process, the power supply level that is supplied from the power supply board is mainly monitored, and if an abnormality such as a power failure occurs, the power can be restored without any trouble when the power is restored. A backup process for storing the predetermined game information at the time in the RAM 203 is performed.

(Power check/backup processing)

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the power supply check/backup processing in step S901.
In the power supply check/backup process, the CPU 201 reads the power supply abnormality signal output from the power supply board twice in step S1001, and determines in step S1002 whether the read values of both match. If the two values do not match, the process returns to step S1001 and the power supply abnormality signal is read again twice.

If the two values match in step S1002, the CPU 201 determines in step S1003 whether or not the power supply abnormality signal is at a normal level (power supply abnormality signal is OFF=normal level, ON=not normal level).
If the power supply abnormality signal is at a normal level (step S1003: OFF), the CPU 201 turns off the backup flag in step S1004, clears the power supply abnormality check counter in subsequent step S1005, and finishes the power supply abnormality check processing in step S901. That is, when it is confirmed that the power supply abnormality signal is at the normal level, the backup process described below is not performed and the timer interrupt process is continued.

On the other hand, if the power supply abnormality signal is not at the normal level in step S1003 (step S1003: ON), the CPU 201 increments the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter by 1 in step S1006, and then the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter in step S1007. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value (threshold value=natural number of 2 or more: for example, “2”).
If the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is not equal to or greater than the threshold value, the CPU 201 ends the power supply abnormality check processing in step S901. That is, when the abnormal power supply signal is detected at a non-normal level but not continuously detected, the backup process is not performed and the timer interrupt process is continued.

On the other hand, if the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the CPU 201 performs the backup process shown in steps S1008 to S1011.
Specifically, the CPU 201 first clears the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter (S1108), turns off the firing permission signal (S1009), and turns on the backup flag (S1010).
Further, the CPU 201 transmits a power-off command to the effect control unit 24 (S1011), and advances the processing to step S1012.

In step S1012, the CPU 201 validates the RAM protect and invalidates the prohibited area.
The RAM protect is a rewrite prevention function for the RAM 203 due to a malfunction or an erroneous operation. By setting the RAM protect to be valid, only the data can be read from the RAM 203 and the data cannot be written.
The prohibited area is an area corresponding to the designated area in the IAT (prohibition of traveling outside designated area) function. By setting the prohibited area to be invalid, the IAT reset will not occur thereafter.

In step S1013 following step S1012, the CPU 201 clears the value of the output port, further stops the timer interrupt process in step S1014, sets itself in the interrupt disabled state, and shifts to the infinite loop process.
During this infinite loop, the CPU 201 is reset by the WDT and shifts to the operation stop state due to the loss of operating power.

The description returns to FIG.
In FIG. 18, when the power supply check/backup processing in step S901 is completed, the CPU 201 executes the input data creation processing in step S902. Specifically, input data is created from various sensors and switches based on input information (ON/OFF signal and rising state (ON edge, OFF edge)).
The input information here is from a winning detection switch such as an upper starting opening sensor 34a, a lower starting opening sensor 35a, a normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, a special winning opening sensor 52a, a general winning opening sensor 43a, and an OUT monitoring switch 49a. ON/OFF information (winning detection information) of the output switch signal, and ON/OFF information (operation of the switch signal output from the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, etc. related to the setting operation of the set value Ve) Information), status signals from the payout control board 29 (ON/OFF information of the front door opening sensor 61 and the full detection sensor 60), and the like. As a result, whether or not a game ball is detected at the outlet or each winning opening is monitored for each interruption.

When the input data creation process of step S902 ends, the CPU 201 executes a timer management process of managing a timer used for game operation control in step S903. Here, the values of various timers used for the game operation control of the gaming machine 1 are updated (subtraction processing).

Next, the CPU 201 performs input management processing in step S904. In this input management process, the value of the winning counter, the OUT ball monitoring counter, or the like is updated based on the input data created in the input data creating process (S902). The "winning counter" is a counter that is provided for each winning opening and counts the number of game balls that have won (the number of winning balls). The OUT ball monitoring counter is a counter that counts game balls (out balls) discharged from the out port 49.
The input management process of step S904 functions as an input management unit that manages input signals (detection signals) from the various winning opening sensors.

In step S905 subsequent to step S904, the CPU 201 executes setting abnormality check processing.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the setting abnormality check processing in step S905.
20, the CPU 201 confirms the set value error flag in step S1101. The set value error flag is a flag that is set (turned on) by the process of step S1103 described below when an abnormality in the set value Vd is recognized, and in this example, "5AH" means the ON state. ..

If the set value error flag is "5AH" (ON state) in step S1101, the CPU 201 ends the setting abnormality check process of step S905. That is, if the setting value error flag is determined to be ON in step S1101, it means that the setting value abnormality command (command for instructing the effect control unit 24 to execute the setting error notification) has already been executed in step S1104 described later. Since it is in the state of being set, the setting abnormality check processing is ended without transmitting the setting value error flag again.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S1101 that the setting value error flag is not "5AH" (OFF), the CPU 201 determines in step S1102 whether the setting value Vd is within the normal range (within the range of 0 to 2). Determine whether or not. Specifically, the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is acquired, and it is determined whether the value is in the range of "00H" to "02H".

If the setting value Vd is a value within the normal range, the CPU 201 ends the setting abnormality check processing of step S905.
If the set value Vd is not within the normal range, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1103 to set the set value error flag (ON state), and in the subsequent step S1104, the setting for indicating that the set value Vd is abnormal. The value abnormality command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the setting abnormality check processing ends.
Here, the set value error flag includes step S1308 (setting error judgment at the time of winning), which will be described later, and step S1501 in FIG. 24 (setting error judgment at the time of performing jackpot random number judgment at the start of fluctuation, It is used in step S1701 in FIG. 28 (setting error determination when performing fluctuation pattern lottery at the start of fluctuation).

Here, the effect control unit 24, which receives the above-described setting value abnormality command, performs processing for notifying the data abnormality of the setting value Ve. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is caused to display an image including a display such as "RAM abnormal. Call a staff member."
In the gaming machine 1, a setting error (setting value error) can be canceled by performing a setting change operation.

The description returns to FIG.
When the CPU 201 completes the setting abnormality check process of step S905, it executes an error management process in step S906. In this error management process, the presence or absence of an error is monitored based on the input data relating to various sensors and the status signal from the payout control board 29.
When an error occurs, the CPU 201 transmits the command to the effect control unit 24 as an error process if the error type requires transmission of an error command. When the production control unit 24 receives this error command, it performs error notification according to the error type. Moreover, CPU201 transmits the error cancellation command to the production|generation control part 24, when the error currently occurring is eliminated. When the production control unit 24 receives this error cancel command, the error notification being executed is ended.

Next, in step S907, the CPU 201 executes a timer interruption random number management process for regularly updating the random number associated with each variable display game. Here, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, for the special symbol determination random number and the auxiliary hit determination random number, etc., update of the random number (+1 addition for each interrupt) and every time the random number counter makes one round. Then, the process of changing the start value of the random number counter is performed. The internal random number for random selection (random number for jackpot determination) is generated by the random number generation circuit and is not updated here.

In step S908 subsequent to step S907, the CPU 201 executes prize ball management processing. In the prize ball management processing, the prize counter is checked, and if there is a prize, a payout control command for designating the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command to execute the payout operation for the designated number of prize balls.

Next, in step S909, the CPU 201 executes normal symbol management processing. In this normal symbol management process, a process necessary for executing the normal symbol variable display game is performed. Here, it is monitored whether or not the game ball is detected by the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, and when the game ball is detected, predetermined game information necessary for the auxiliary hit lottery (random number for auxiliary hit determination etc.) Acquire (random number acquisition process), the game information as the hold data (operation hold sphere related to the normal symbol), the maximum number of hold balls is stored up to the upper limit (hold storage process). Then, when a predetermined variation display start condition for the universal figure is satisfied, an auxiliary winning lottery based on the operation-holding ball is performed, and a variation pattern of the normal symbol based on the auxiliary winning lottery result is selected and a normal symbol stop display mode (ordinary symbol) Stop pattern) is determined. In addition, here, in order to perform the variable display operation of the normal symbol, the LED display data for the variable display is created if it is changing, and the LED display data for the stop display is created if it is not changing.

Further, in step S910, the CPU 201 executes the ordinary electric accessory management process. In this normal electric auditors product management processing, processing necessary for executing the ordinary electric opening game is performed. Specifically, when the lottery result of the auxiliary win lottery is a win, the setting process of the solenoid control data for the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c is performed. An excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c based on the solenoid control data set here, and thereby the opening/closing operation pattern of the movable wing piece 47 is controlled.

Next, in step S911, the CPU 201 executes special symbol management processing. In this special symbol management processing, the jackpot lottery in the special symbol variable display game is mainly performed, and based on the lottery result, the variation pattern of the special symbol (prefetch variation pattern, and variation pattern at the start of variation) and the special stop symbol A process necessary for the special symbol variable display game such as the determination of is executed.
The details of the special symbol management process in step S911 will be described later.

Next, the CPU 201 executes the special electric auditors product management process in step S912. In this special electric auditors product management process, a setting process necessary for controlling execution of a winning game is performed. Specifically, when the big hit lottery result is a big hit, the hit game (big hit game) corresponding to the hit type is executed and controlled.
Specifically, setting of solenoid control data for the special winning opening solenoid 52c, counting of the number of rounds (in the case of a big hit), monitoring of the maximum number of winnings in the special winning opening 50 and the opening time are performed. When the winning game is over, the game state transition setting based on the winning game state and the winning type is performed.

In addition, here, a plurality of effect control commands are transmitted according to the progress of the winning game. At the start of jackpot, at the start of round game, at the end of round game, when the maximum number of rounds has been exhausted, etc., the jackpot start command, the round start command, the round end command, the special winning opening prize command, and the big hit end command have arrived. To send according to. The big hit start command includes the hit type information of this time, and is used by the effect control unit 24 side when determining a series of hit effect scenarios to be developed during the hit game. In addition, the big hit end command includes information about the hit type of this time and the game state at the time of winning, that is, information that can specify the game state after the end of the hit game. It is used when deciding the effect mode after the game. Therefore, this “big hit end command” can specify the gaming state after the end of the winning game, and thus plays a role as a gaming state designation command for designating the gaming state.

When the processing for game progression up to step S912 is finished, the CPU 201 performs external terminal management processing in step S913. In this external terminal management processing, the operating state information of the gaming machine 1 is output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or an island lamp through the frame external centralized terminal board 21. The operation state information includes, for example, winning game occurrence information, symbol variation display game execution start information, winning number/prize ball number information, error information, and other game information.

Next, the CPU 201 executes an LED management process in step S914. In this LED management process, the output control of the control signal (dynamic lighting data) to the LED display devices such as the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the setting/performance indicator 97 is performed. Normally, the control signal based on the display data created by the symbol management process (step S909), the special symbol management process (step S911), etc. is output to the corresponding display device or display device by this LED management process, and the display control is performed. Done. As a result, a series of variable display operations (variable display and stop display) of special symbols in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b and normal symbols in the normal symbol display device 39a are realized.

In step S915 following step S914, the CPU 201 saves the values of all the registers, and then performs the performance display monitor display process of step S916. That is, this is a process for displaying the value as the above-mentioned normal ratio information on the setting/performance display 97.
As mentioned above, in the case of this example, the value of the normal duty ratio information is recalculated each time the total number of out-of-balls reaches a prescribed value, and the setting/performance indicator 97 indicates that the current normal It is possible to display the duty ratio information and the previous normal duty ratio information (normal duty ratio information which has been calculated at the most recent recalculation timing). For this reason, in the display process of step S916 in this case, a process of causing the setting/performance indicator 97 to display these two values as the normal ratio information is performed.
The current value of the normal ratio information is a value calculated in the process of step S604 in the main loop process (FIG. 11) described above, and the previous value of the normal ratio information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Then, the CPU 201 reads out the stored value and displays it on the setting/performance display 97.

Next, the CPU 201 restores the values of all the registers in step S917, clears the WDT count value in step S918, and ends the main control timer interrupt processing.

When the above timer interrupt processing ends, the CPU 201 executes the main loop processing (S123) until the next timer interrupt occurs.

[4-3. Processing relating to special symbol variable display game]
(Special symbol management process)

Next, the processing of the main control unit 20 relating to the special symbol variable display game will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol management process (step S911) described above. As described above, the special symbol management process is executed as a part of the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 18, and is mainly used for the jackpot lottery and the lottery result in the special symbol variable display game. Based on the variation pattern of the special symbol (prefetch variation pattern, and variation pattern at the start of variation), the determination of the special stop symbol, and the like are performed.

In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first performs the special symbol 1 starting opening check process for the special symbol 1 side (upper starting opening 34 side) in step S1201, and then the special symbol 2 side (lower starting opening 35 side) in subsequent step S1202. Special figure 2 Starting port check processing is performed.
The details of the starting opening check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the starting opening check process of steps S1201 and S1202 is completed, the CPU 201 determines the state of the conditional device operation flag in step S1203. The "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is being played, and when the flag is in an ON state (for example, 5AH), it means that a big hit game is being played, When the flag is OFF (for example, 00H), it means that the big hit game is not in progress.

If the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (≠5AH), that is, if it is not a big hit game, the CPU 201 proceeds to the special symbol operation status branching process of step S1204, and the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H) Processing relating to the variable display operation is performed (steps S1205, S1206, S1207).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1203 that the big hit game is in progress (=5AH), the CPU 201 proceeds to the special symbol display data updating process of step S1208 without performing the process relating to the variable display operation of the special symbols of steps S1205 to S1207. That is, when the big hit game is in progress, the variable display operation of the special symbol is not performed (the display state of the special symbol of the special symbol display device is maintained as it is after the big hit is confirmed and displayed). The "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and the status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

In the special symbol operation status branching process of step S1204, depending on which of the status values the special symbol operation status is "standby (00H, 01H)", "changing (02H)", "confirming (03H)" , And the corresponding processing is executed.

Specifically, the CPU 201 performs the special symbol variation start process (step S1205) when the special symbol operation status is "standby (00H, 01H)", and special when it is "variing (02H)". During the symbol variation process (step S1206), in the case of "during confirmation (03H)", the special symbol confirmation time process (step S1207) is executed. Here, the "waiting" means that the behavior of the special symbol is a standby state for the next change, and the "being changed" means that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The meaning, "the confirmation" means that the change of the special symbol is finished and stopped (fixed) is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time).

In the special symbol changing process of step S1206, it is monitored whether or not the special symbol is changing, that is, whether or not the changing time of the special symbol has passed, and if the changing time has passed, the effect control command As a process of transmitting a "variation stop command" to the effect control unit 24, a fixed display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol auditors product operation timer, and the special symbol operation status is switched to "confirming (03H)". (Storing 03H in the special symbol operation status) Processing etc. are performed. The "fluctuation stop command" is a command indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended, and the effect control command causes the effect control unit 24 to end the special symbol variation display game after the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. By grasping that (the end), the decorative pattern that is currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed. As a result, along with the end of the special symbol variable display game, the decorative symbol variable display game is also terminated. Further, the "fixed display time" is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state after the variable display of the special symbol is finished.

Further, in the special symbol confirmation time process of step S1207, it is monitored whether or not the fixed display time described above has passed, and if the fixed display time has passed, it is determined that the special symbol variable display game this time has ended, The symbol operation status is switched to "standby (01H)" (01H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and if the special symbol variable display game this time is a big hit, the process required to start the big hit game (big hit symbol stop Various setting process). In various setting processing when the big hit symbol is stopped, as the big hit game transition preprocessing, the big hit determination flag is cleared and the condition device operation flag is turned on, and various settings such as setting the game state to the same game state as the normal state Perform processing.
Further, in the special symbol confirmation time process of step S1207, when the game state is updated, a process of transmitting a "game state designation command" including the game state transition information to the effect control unit 24 is performed. The effect control unit 24 can grasp that the game state has shifted by the game state designation command.

By the processing of the above steps S1205, S1206, S1207, the variable display operation of setting the variation start and the variation stop of the special symbol by one is realized.
The details of the special symbol variation start process in step S1205 will be described again with reference to FIG.

When the processing of any of steps S1205 to S1207 ends, the CPU 201 executes the special symbol display data update processing of step S1208. In this special symbol display data update processing, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating, and if it is fluctuating, 7-segment display data for the special symbol fluctuating is created, and the special symbol must be fluctuating. For example, create data for 7-segment display during special symbol stop display. The display data of the special symbol created here is output to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b by the LED management processing (step S914) of FIG.

The CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process of step S911 in response to the execution of the update process of step S1208, and proceeds to the special electric auditors product management process of step S912 shown in FIG.

(Special figure 1 start opening check process)

The special figure 1 starting opening check process (step S1201) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
This special figure 1 starting mouth check processing plays a role as winning time processing that is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. In the special figure 1 starting mouth check process in this example, as a pre-start process for executing the special symbol variable display game 1 on the special figure 1 side (winning process on the special figure 1 side), a winning of the upper starting mouth 34 occurs The process of adding the number of operation-holding balls on the side of Toku-zu 1, the process of storing various random numbers (holding storage process), the process of transmitting a holding addition command, and the like are executed.
Note that the special figure 2 starting opening check process (step S1202) also plays a role as a prize winning process that is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, like the special figure 1 starting opening check process. As a pre-start process for executing the special symbol variable display game 2 (process at the time of winning on the special figure 2 side), addition processing of the number of operation holding balls on the side of special figure 2 caused by the occurrence of winning of the lower starting opening 35, A storage process of various random numbers, a transmission process of a pending addition command, and the like are executed. Therefore, the special figure 1 starting port check process and the special figure 2 starting port check process have substantially the same processing content. In the following, the special figure 1 starting port check process will be mainly described, and details of the special figure 2 starting port check process will be omitted to avoid redundant description.

22, the CPU 201 first determines in step S1301 whether or not a winning (winning ball) to the upper starting opening 34 is detected.
When the winning to the upper starting opening 34 is detected, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1302 and determines whether the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol 1 (hereinafter, referred to as "special figure 1 operation holding ball") is 4 or more. judge. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 operation holding balls is equal to or larger than the maximum holding storage number (here, the upper limit is 4). However, when the winning start of the upper starting opening 34 is not detected (step S1301: N), the special figure 1 starting opening check processing of step S1201 is ended without doing anything.

If the special figure 1 operation holding sphere number is 4 or more in step S1302, that is, if the winning of the upper starting opening 34 is detected but the special figure 1 operation holding sphere number is 4 or more, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1311 described later. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 operation holding sphere number is not 4 or more (less than 4), 1 is added to the special figure 1 operation holding sphere number (step S1303), and the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, the CPU 201 acquires various random numbers used in the special symbol variable display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding sphere generated this time. Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the variation pattern random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random value is stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. This hold storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information relating to the variable display game as an operation hold ball (hold data), and in the hold storage area, various random number values described above as hold data are specially stored. Until it is used for the variable display operation of the symbol 1 (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), it is held and stored in the order of establishment of the starting conditions (the winning order). The reserved storage area is provided with a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side, that is, a special figure 1 reserved storage area and a special figure 2 reserved storage area. These reserved storage areas are provided with a reserved 1 storage area to a reserved n storage area (n is the maximum number of reserved memories: n=4 in this embodiment), each of which can store the maximum number of reserved data. Has become.

In step S1305 subsequent to step S1304, the CPU 201 determines the pre-reading prohibition data (EVENT: EVENT: “01H”) is acquired.
Next, in step S1306, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the “special map 1 prefetching prohibition condition” is satisfied. The special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is a condition for prohibiting the pre-reading determination for the special figure 1 operation holding ball.

When the special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is satisfied, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1311 without executing the pre-reading determination processing (step S1309) regarding the pre-reading determination. In this case, the hold addition command having the read-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: “01H”) specifies the read-ahead prohibition, and the read-ahead judgment for the special special figure 1 operation holding ball is prohibited, and as a result, the read-ahead notice is issued. The production will not be executed either. In other words, it can be said that the prefetching prohibition data specifies that the prefetching determination process (step S1309) is not executed.

In this example, the pre-reading determination of special figures 1 and 2 is not performed regardless of the game state, but whether pre-reading is prohibited or not is determined based on the current game state. The reason is as follows.
In the case of a game state with "electric support" that is advantageous for right-handedness (time saving state, probability variation state), winnings to the lower start opening 35 frequently occur, but left-handedness is advantageous When the game state is accompanied by "no electric support" (normal state, latent state), the lower start opening 35 hardly wins, and the upper start opening 34 frequently wins. Considering the above, the pre-reading judgment of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed in the dark cloud regardless of the game state, but the pre-reading judgment on the special figure 1 side is made in the case of the time saving state of'with electric support' or the probability variation state. To allow the pre-reading judgment on the special figure 2 side, and when the normal state or the latent state is'no electric support', the pre-reading judgment on the special figure 2 side is prohibited and the pre-reading judgment on the special figure 1 side is allowed. Is tolerated.

If the special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition is not satisfied in step S1306, the CPU 201 refers to the setting value error flag (flag set in the setting abnormality check processing of step S905) in step S1307, and then the setting error in subsequent step S1308. It is determined whether or not (whether the set value error flag is in the ON state: 5AH or not).
If it is a setting error, the CPU 201 determines that an abnormality (setting value data abnormality) has occurred and does not execute the prefetch determination processing (step S1309) and proceeds to step S1311. Although the details will be described later, when an abnormality of the set value Vd is recognized in the process at the time of winning, a hold addition command including prefetch prohibition data (01H) is transmitted without a RAM error, and the start opening check in step S1201 is performed. You will exit the process.

On the other hand, if the setting error has not occurred, the CPU 201 executes the prefetch determination processing in step S1309. In this pre-reading determination process, the jackpot lottery result executed at the start of fluctuation is pre-readed. Therefore, a series of'pre-reading winning determination', which pre-determines the winning lottery result,'pre-reading symbol determination', which pre-determines the symbol lottery result, and'pre-reading variation pattern determination' which pre-determines the variation pattern at the start of variation Processing is included.

Specifically, in step S1309, the CPU 201 first obtains a big hit determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 (determination random number storage area), and uses the big hit determination random number value and a “big hit determination random number determination table” described later. On the basis of the above, the winning lottery (pre-reading win determination for determining whether to win the jackpot or out) is performed for the operation-holding ball this time, and the result (referred to as “pre-reading win result”) is acquired.

In the present embodiment, the set value Vd is used for the win determination (winning lottery), but a specific method of the win determination according to the present embodiment based on the set value Vd will be described later again. Since the winning/judging determination is performed similarly in the process (FIG. 23) at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the specific method of the winning/judging determination will be described again when the process at the start of the fluctuation is described.

Here, in the present embodiment, the prefetch failure result is not stored in the RAM 203 while being stored in a predetermined general-purpose register incorporated in the CPU 201. This is because the pre-reading hit/miss determination result is immediately used in the subsequent pre-reading symbol determination processing, and this data is not needed and need not be stored in the RAM 203.

Further, in step S1309, the CPU 201, as the above-described prefetch symbol determination processing, a symbol table (not shown) corresponding to the prefetch failure result (at least hit or miss) and the special symbol type (special symbols 1 and 2). Perform the design lottery used. Specifically, the CPU 201 carries out a symbol lottery (lottery of winning type) for the current operation holding ball based on the special symbol determination random number value and the symbol table acquired in the previous step S1304, and the result (" “Pre-reading symbol result”) is acquired. In the "symbol table" of the present embodiment, a determination value (winning area) for determining the symbol type is determined, and displayed as a stopped symbol depending on which determination value the special symbol random number value belongs to. The type of special symbols to be decided is determined.
If there are a plurality of types of deviation as in this example, a deviation symbol table for determining the deviation type is provided. If there is only one type of detachment, the detachment symbol table is unnecessary.
Here, in the present example, in correspondence with the fact that there are a plurality of types of outliers, “outer edge 1”, “outer edge 2”, and “outer edge 3”, an edge symbol table for lottery of the edge type is used in the symbol determination. To do.
Further, in this example, there are at least four types of hits as described above, that is, "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R", and they are provided separately from the above-mentioned outlier symbol table. Based on the hit symbol table, the type of the special symbol corresponding to the hit type according to the special symbol determination random number value among these four types of hits is determined.

Here, for some or all of the above-mentioned symbol tables, a symbol table defining different symbol selection rates depending on the set value Ve may be provided. For example, with respect to the big hit symbol table, a table having different selection rates for big hit types (for example, 6 kinds of big hit symbol tables corresponding to 6 stages of setting) can be provided. For example, it is conceivable to set the table contents so that the payout performance becomes more advantageous to the player as the setting becomes higher. Of course, a jackpot symbol table common to each setting may be used. Further, the symbol table used in step S1309 is also used for the process at the start of fluctuation (FIG. 23).

The CPU 201 does not store the look-ahead symbol result in the RAM 203 while keeping it in a predetermined general-purpose register incorporated in the CPU 201, as in the case of the above-described pre-reading hit determination. This is because the look-ahead symbol result is immediately used in the subsequent look-ahead variation pattern determination, and this data is not needed and need not be stored in the RAM 203.

When the pre-reading pattern determination is completed, the CPU 201 executes the pre-reading variation pattern determination. In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, the above-mentioned look-ahead symbol result (in this example, represents one of "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "probability variation 6R", "probability variation 10R", "deviation 1", "deviation 2" and "deviation 3") Then, the variation pattern table for selecting the variation pattern according to the look-ahead symbol result and the variation pattern random number acquired in step S1304 are used to perform a lottery of variation patterns to determine the variation pattern in advance. That is, the variation pattern (variation pattern at the time of variation start) executed when the current operation holding ball is subjected to the variation display operation is prefetched.

In this example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table is also used in the fluctuation pattern lottery performed in the processing at the start of fluctuation (FIG. 23).
A specific example of the fluctuation pattern table and a fluctuation pattern lottery process using the table will be described again when the fluctuation start process is described.

The prefetch variation pattern determination result (winning command data (EVENT)) is immediately used in the pending addition command creating process of step S1310 described below, and thereafter, this data is not needed. Therefore, the CPU 201 ends the processing of step S1309 while keeping the result of the prefetch variation pattern determination stored in the register without storing it in the RAM 203.

In response to the execution of the prefetch determination processing in step S1309, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1310 and creates the lower byte side data of the pending addition command according to the prefetch determination result. Specifically, data representing the type of the look-ahead variation pattern is created as winning command data (EVENT) on the lower byte side of the pending addition command.
Regarding the EVENT data, “01H” set in step S1305 is updated to the value corresponding to the look-ahead change pattern (the value obtained by the look-ahead change pattern determination process) in this process.

When the creation process of step S1310 is completed, the CPU 201 creates the upper byte data of the hold addition command according to the number of operation hold balls in step S1311. That is, the current number of operation holding balls and data representing the above-mentioned look-ahead symbol result (special symbol type) are created as winning command data (MODE) on the upper byte side of the hold addition command.
With respect to the MODE data, it is possible to identify 1 hold of special figure 1 to 4 hold of figure 1 and 1 hold of figure 2 to 4 hold of figure 2.

In response to the execution of the creation process of step S1311, the CPU 201 performs the process of transmitting the hold addition command in step S1312. That is, a hold addition command including the winning command data created in steps S1310 and S1311 as EVENT and MODE is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

Here, if the pre-reading prohibition condition is satisfied (Y in S1306) or if the setting value Vd is abnormal in the determination processing in the previous step S1308, the CPU 201 causes the pre-reading prohibition data (lower byte = 01H) described above. Is maintained as it is without being updated, and a pending addition command having readahead prohibited data is transmitted.
In addition, at the time of overflow (when a new winning is generated when the maximum number of held memories is reached), an overflow-designated hold addition command is transmitted (see the processing route Y in step S1302). ).

In addition, after being sent from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the hold addition command is used when the effect control unit 24 side presents the "prefetch notice effect" related to the current operation hold ball. It is only used in the special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 23. Therefore, the CPU 201 does not store the hold addition command in the RAM 203, exits the special figure 1 starting opening check process of step S1301, and subsequently performs the special figure 2 starting opening check process of step S1302.

Here, as described above, in this example, even when the data of the set value Vd is abnormal at the time of winning (when the operation holding ball is generated), the holding addition command is transmitted. Since it is a command having pre-reading prohibition data, even if the pre-reading notice production based on the set value Ve or the pre-reading notice production not based on the set value Ve can be displayed, the production related to the pre-read notice is performed. Since the control itself is prohibited, a pre-reading notice due to a malfunction does not appear, and there is no disadvantage to the player, so no particular problem occurs. If the look-ahead notice effect is not prohibited, a high-expected hold display appears in the look-ahead notice effect of the hold display system even if the set value Ve is abnormal, and the subsequent RAM error processing is performed. If the progress of the game is stopped due to (error processing due to an abnormal set value), the expectation of winning held by the player disappears at once, and a great distrust of the gaming machine is brought about. However, in the case of this example, as described above, the advance notice is prohibited, so that such a problem does not occur, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful.

(Special symbol fluctuation start processing)

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23, the special symbol variation start process (step S1205) which is a process at the time of variation start will be described.
In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 first determines in step S1401 whether or not the special figure 2 operation holding sphere number is zero. If the special figure 2 operation holding sphere number is not zero, the process proceeds to step S1403, and this time Processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S1403 to S1412) is performed for the special figure 2 operation-holding sphere that is used for fluctuation display.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 operation holding sphere number is zero, the CPU 201 determines in step S1402 whether the special figure 1 operation holding sphere number is zero, and when the special figure 1 operation holding sphere number is not zero, Proceeding to the process of step S1403, the process (steps S1403 to S1412) related to the start of the variation of the special symbol for the special figure 1 operation holding sphere to be provided for the present variation display is performed.
By the processing of steps S1401 and S1402, which of the special figure 1 operation holding balls and the special figure 2 operation holding balls is preferentially provided for the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is to be preferentially consumed? ) “Priority change order” is determined. In the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 operation holding balls and the special figure 2 operation holding balls both have the operation holding balls, the special figure 2 operation holding balls are preferentially consumed. That is, the special symbol variable display game 2 is preferentially executed over the special symbol variable display game 1. Note that the operation reserve balls are not limited to the priority variation type described above, and may be configured to be exhausted in the order of winning.

In addition, when both of the special reserve 2 operation reserve balls and the special reserve 1 operation reserve balls are zero, the state is “no reserve ball”. The state of "no operation holding ball" is a case where the special symbol is on standby and is in a state without holding memory, and the effect control unit 24 side is informed that the state has entered, and the liquid crystal display The device 36 is controlled to switch to the demo screen display for waiting for customers (customer waiting demo screen). Therefore, if the "no operation holding ball" is reached, the process proceeds to step S1413, and it is determined whether the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the "no operation holding ball" state. ..

In step S1413, when the special symbol operation status is "standby (01H)", the special symbol operation status is switched to "standby (00H)" (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status). Then, as a production control command, a "demo display command" for displaying the customer waiting demo screen is transmitted to the production control unit 24 (step S1415), and the special symbol variation start process of step S1205 ends.
After that, if "waiting (00H)" when the determination process of step S1413 is executed, the special symbol variation start process is ended without transmitting the demo display command again. The reason for doing this is that if the demo display command is sent without any condition when the number of operation-holding balls is zero, the demo display command is repeatedly sent at a cycle of 4 ms while the number of special-function holding balls is zero. This is because, in consideration of the fact that unnecessary transmission occurs and the control load is unnecessarily increased, this is prevented.

If the effect control unit 24 does not receive any effect control command (for example, the hold addition command) related to the symbol variation display game even if a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the demo display command, the variation display operation is performed. The customer waiting demo screen is displayed by assuming that a state (waiting for customer waiting) has not occurred for a certain period of time.

In step S1401, the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is not zero, and in step S1402, the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is not zero (while the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is zero, the special figure 1 operation holding ball is In each case (when the number is not zero), the CPU 201 performs the process (steps S1403 to S1412) related to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, which is targeted for the operation-holding sphere to be used for the current fluctuation display.
Here, regarding the processing of steps S1403 to S1412 described below, when the determination in step S1401 is'NO', the processing for the special figure 2 operation holding ball is performed, and in the determination in step S1402 described above. If it is'NO', it will be a process for the special figure 1 operation holding sphere, but since the method of processing is the same, unless otherwise necessary to avoid duplicate description, the operation of the special symbol 1 side The processing will be described without making a distinction between the processing targeting the holding balls or the processing targeting the operation holding balls on the special symbol 2 side.

In step S1403, the CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the operation-reserving sphere number (the operation-retaining sphere number related to the special symbol side used for the variable display operation this time-1), and in the subsequent step S1404, the operation-retaining sphere number information after the subtraction is included. The "hold subtraction command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. By this hold subtraction command, the effect control unit 24 side grasps the number of remaining operation hold balls after the current number of operation hold balls have been exhausted, and shifts the hold display currently displayed.

Next, in step S1405, the CPU 201 sets special symbol operation confirmation data. This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the variation start side this time, for example, if the special symbol 1 is the variation start side, "00H (special diagram 1 variation start designation)", If the special symbol 2 is the variation start side, "01H (special symbol 2 variation start designation)" is stored in a predetermined area (special symbol operation confirmation data storage area) of the RAM 203.

Next, the CPU 201 shifts the pending data stored in the pending storage area of the RAM 203 in step S1406, and clears the pending 4 storage area in subsequent step S1407. In the processes of steps S1406 to S1407, the pending data (random number for big hit determination, random number for special symbol determination, and variation pattern) stored in the pending storage area (holding 1 storage area) corresponding to the number of pending storages n=1 The random number is read out and stored in the random number storage area for determination of the RAM 203, and the reserved storage areas (reserved 2 storage area, reserved 3 storage area, reserved 4 storage) corresponding to the reserved n storage area (n=2, 3, 4) are stored. The reserved data stored in the area) is stored in the reserved storage areas corresponding to'n-1' (step S1406), and the reserved 4 storage area is cleared to provide an empty area (step S1407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variable display game matches the order of the operation holding balls number n (n=1, 2, 3, 4), and any holding storage of the operation holding balls acquired at the time of winning the start mouth Whether or not it corresponds to the area is specified, and new operation-holding balls can be held and stored.

Next, in step S1408, the CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting the variation remaining number designation command and the game state command. In this step S1408, it is determined whether or not the "electric power support counter" which counts the number of remaining electric power support states is zero. The "remaining number of times designation command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. By this "variation number remaining designation command", the effect control unit 24 side can execute a process of grasping the remaining number of time reductions and notifying the remaining number of time reductions.
In addition, in step S1408, a process of transmitting a game state command designating the current game state to the effect control unit 24 is also performed.

Next, the CPU 201 executes the fluctuation management process in step S1409.
In this variation management process, a jackpot lottery corresponding to the start of variation, a symbol lottery for a stop symbol, and a variation pattern lottery are performed. In the variation management process, an abnormality determination of the set value Vd is performed, and when an abnormality is found in the data of the set value Vd, an effect control command (RAM abnormality command) for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the setting error. ) Is transmitted.
The details of the fluctuation management process of step S1409 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

When the fluctuation management process of step S1409 is finished, the CPU 201 stores 5AH (ON state) in the special symbol N fluctuation flag (N=1, 2) designating that fluctuation display is being performed in step S1410. The "special symbol N changing flag" is a flag that indicates which one of the special symbols 1 to 2 of the special symbols is changing, and when the flag is in the ON state (=5AH) Indicates that the target special symbol is changing, and if the flag is in the OFF state (=00H), it indicates that the target special symbol is stopped.
The special symbol 1 changing flag (N=1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 changing flag (N=2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

Next, in step S1411, the CPU 201 executes command transmission processing at the start of fluctuation. In this command transmission process, in order to notify the effect control unit 24 of the content of the variation pattern selected in the variation management process of step S1409, as a production control command, "variation including the variation pattern information that can specify the variation pattern content. A pattern designation command” is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24.
In the command transmission process, a decorative symbol designating command is created based on the symbol lottery result in step S1409 and transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The decorative symbol designating command is composed of 2 bytes, an upper byte (MODE) for designating the special symbol type on the changing side and a lower byte (EVENT) for designating the winning type. Therefore, this decorative symbol designation command includes information regarding the special symbol type and the winning type (symbol lottery result) on the changing side. Since this decorative symbol designation command includes information on the winning type, mainly on the side of the effect control unit 24, a combination of decorative symbols (a symbol type having a reach symbol as a component) when forming a reach state, It is used when deciding a combination of decorative symbols to be finally stopped (decorative stop symbol), a notice effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variable display game, and the like.
Furthermore, in the command transmission process, a setting value command for notifying the effect control unit 24 side of the current setting value Ve is also transmitted. With this set value command, the effect control unit 24 side can cause different types of effects to appear according to the current set value Ve, or change the appearance rate of the predetermined effect.

Then, in the subsequent step S1412, the CPU 201 switches to the special symbol operation status “during fluctuation (02H)” (stores 02H in the special symbol operation status) as a fluctuation start time setting process, and stores a random number storage area for determination and a random number for fluctuation pattern. Perform processing to clear the storage area.

In response to the execution of the variation start time setting process in step S1412, the CPU 201 ends the special symbol variation start process in step S1205. When the CPU 201 finishes the special symbol variation start process, the special symbol display data update process (step S1208) of FIG. 21 is performed, whereby the variable display of the special symbol is started.

(Variation management processing)

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variation management process of step S1409.
In FIG. 24, the CPU 201 first determines in step S1501 whether a setting error has occurred. That is, it is determined whether or not the set value error flag is in the ON state (5AH).

When it is determined in step S1501 that the setting error flag is OFF and there is no setting error, the CPU 201 executes the jackpot random number determination processing in step S1502, and then proceeds to the symbol lottery processing in step S1503.
The big hit random number determination process in step S1502 is to select (determine) the big hit/outside hit type by lot based on the big hit determination random number (internal lottery random number), the big hit determination random number determination table, and the set value Vd. is there.
The details of the jackpot random number determination process according to the embodiment will be described again with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26.

When the CPU 201 determines in step S1501 that there is a setting error, it passes the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502, and proceeds to the symbol lottery process in step S1503.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a setting error occurs (when a determination result of Y is obtained in step S1501), the jackpot random number determination process is not performed unless the setting error is resolved.
As described above, the setting error can be canceled by performing the setting change operation. That is, when the setting error state occurs, the setting change operation is performed to cancel the setting error state, and the jackpot random number determination process is restored.
Note that, as described above, the setting value abnormality command for performing the setting change operation is transmitted in the setting abnormality check processing (FIG. 20).

In the symbol lottery process of step S1503, the CPU 201 performs a process of determining the type of hit/miss (type of stop symbol) based on at least the winning lottery result (big hit determination flag), the random number for special symbol determination, and the symbol table. To do. Then, the result (special symbol determination data) is stored in a predetermined area (special symbol determination data storage area) of the RAM 203. Thereby, the winning type (type of winning/missing) related to the special symbol variable display game this time is determined.
Note that similar to the symbol lottery process at the time of pre-reading determination, a lottery corresponding to the set value Vd can be performed for the symbol lottery.

In step S1504 subsequent to step S1503, the CPU 201 provides the current variation display operation based on at least the symbol lottery result (above special symbol determination data), the variation pattern random number, and the variation pattern table as the variation pattern lottery process. A process for determining a fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation for the operation-holding balls by lottery is performed.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery process according to the present embodiment, a variation pattern is also selected by using the set value Vd and the number of actuation reserve balls (the number of actuation reserve balls obtained by subtracting the current digestion amount).
The details of the variation pattern lottery process in this embodiment will be described again with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33.

In response to the execution of the variation pattern lottery process in step S1504, the CPU 201 ends the variation management process in step S1409. That is, thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1410 shown in FIG.

Here, as described above, in the present example, the lottery results of the winning lottery and the symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation are stored in the RAM 203. The reason is that these lottery results are the fluctuation management process of step S1409. Is used not only in the special symbol management process (step S911: see FIG. 18 and FIG. 21) to which it belongs, but also in the later special electric auditors product management process (step S912: see FIG. 18), etc. Is.
This is different from the process at the time of prefetch determination in which the lottery result is not stored in the RAM 203.

Although not described with reference to the drawing, in the variation management process of step S1409, when the winning lottery result is a win, as a setting process for shifting the game state, the game state after the winning game is designated. Perform necessary setting processing (game state transition preparation processing).

(Big hit random number determination process)

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot random number determination processing in step S1502, and FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot random number determination method according to the embodiment.
Prior to detailed description of the jackpot random number determination process in FIG. 25, the jackpot random number determination method adopted in the embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

First, as a premise, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number can take 65536 different values from 0 to 65535. In the jackpot random number determination in the present embodiment, the determination reference value TH is set within a range of values that can be used by such a jackpot determination random number, and based on the result of comparing the size relationship between the jackpot determination random number and the determination reference value TH, Judgment of big hit/out. As an example, in this example, a method of obtaining a jackpot determination result when the value of the jackpot determination random number is within a range of “0 to the determination reference value TH” and a deviation determination result in other cases is adopted. There is.

In the present embodiment, as a big hit random number judgment, a judgment corresponding to a low probability time (normal state: hereinafter abbreviated as “low probability time”) and a high probability time (probability change state: hereinafter abbreviated as “high probability time”) Two types of determinations corresponding to are performed. Therefore, as the determination reference value TH, two types of determination reference value TH1 used for the determination at the time of low accuracy and determination reference value TH2 used for the determination at the time of high accuracy are set.
As illustrated in FIG. 26, the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is set to be larger than the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy, so that the winning probability of the jackpot is increased in the determination at the time of high accuracy. ing.

In the case of the present example, a big hit random number is determined according to the set value Ve, so that a different value is prepared for each set value Ve as the determination reference value TH. As a specific example, for the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy, a value (BIGLMAX1) corresponding to the set value Ve “1”, a value (BIGLMAX2) corresponding to the set value Ve “2”, and a set value Ve “6”. Corresponding to the set value Ve "1" (BIGHMAX1), the value corresponding to the set value Ve "2" (BIGHMAX2), and A value (BIGHMAX6) corresponding to the set value Ve “6” is prepared. The determination reference value TH1 (=842) for low accuracy and the determination reference value TH2 (=8429) for high accuracy shown in FIG. 26 are values (BIGLMAX1, BIGHMAX1) corresponding to the set value Ve "1", respectively. is doing.
In this example, the determination reference value TH1 for low accuracy is BIGLMAX1<BIGLMAX2<BIGLMAX6, and the determination reference value TH2 for high accuracy is BIGHMAX1<BIGHMAX2<BIGHMAX6. The higher the setting, the higher the winning probability.

In this example, in the actual determination process, the “determination lower limit value” (corresponding to “BIGMINI-1” described later) is also used as the threshold value for the random number value. First, it is determined whether or not the random number value is greater than the “determination lower limit value”, and if the random number value is not greater than the “determination lower limit value”, a determination result of deviation is obtained. When the random number value is larger than the “determination lower limit value”, the jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1 and the determination reference value TH2 described above is performed.
When the “determination lower limit value” is set to “0”, the jackpot determination condition is that the random number value is within the range of “0” to “determination reference value TH”. On the other hand, if the “judgment lower limit value” is set to a value (X) larger than “0”, it is a big hit judgment condition that the random number value is within the range of “X” to “judgment reference value TH”. Become.

Based on the above premise, the jackpot random number determination process shown in FIG. 25 will be described.
In FIG. 25, the CPU 201 first obtains the setting difference information from the big hit determination random number determination table in step S1601.

FIG. 27 exemplifies a big hit judgment random number judgment table used for big hit random number judgment processing. FIG. 27A shows a big hit judgment random number judgment table for special figure 1, and FIG. The random number determination table is illustrated.
As the jackpot random number determination process, a determination process for special figure 1 using the table shown in FIG. 27A and a determination process for special figure 2 using the table shown in FIG. 27B are performed. Since the same processing is performed by the common processing shown in FIG. 25, only the determination processing for special figure 1 using the table shown in FIG. 27A will be described below as a representative.

In step S1601, the setting difference information means a variable stored in the current reference destination address in the table shown in FIG. 27A, and the reference destination address at the start of the jackpot random number determination process shown in FIG. Since it is the head address of the table, the CPU 201 acquires the variable represented by “000H” stored in the head address as the setting difference information.
In subsequent step S1602, CPU 201 determines whether the setting difference information is other than “000H”. If the setting difference information is “000H” and a negative result is obtained in step S1602, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1603 to acquire the determination reference value. That is, the variable (variable represented by "BIGMIN-1") stored at the next address of the head address in the table shown in FIG. 27A is acquired as the determination reference value. This process corresponds to the process of acquiring the "determination lower limit value" described above.
Next, in step S1604, the CPU 201 performs processing for shifting to the designated address. Specifically, a process of shifting the above-mentioned reference destination address from the current reference destination address (“4093” in FIG. 27A) to four addresses (“4097” in FIG. 27A) is performed.
Then, in step S1610, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the random number value (the value of the big hit determination random number) is larger than the determination reference value.
The series of processes of steps S1601→S1602→S1603→S1604→S1610 described above corresponds to the process of determining whether or not the random number value is larger than the determination lower limit value described above.

If the random number value is not larger than the determination reference value in step S1610, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1611 to acquire the small hit information.
Here, in the table shown in FIG. 27A, as a variable representing the hit information corresponding to the determination lower limit value (“BIGMIN-1”), a variable represented by “000H, 000H, 000H” at the address next to the determination lower limit value. Is stored. The variables correspond to "low-probability medium/big hit information", "high-probability middle/big hit information", and "small hit information" in order from the left side.
In the process of step S1611 that is executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not greater than the determination lower limit value (“BIGMIN-1”) in step S1610, the CPU 201 stores the address next to the determination lower limit value. Of the variables “000H, 000H, 000H” of the hit information, the rightmost “000H” is acquired.
In the hit information, “05AH” represents “win” and “000H” represents “out”.

In step S1612 subsequent to step S1611, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the probability is in the process of probability change, and if the probability is not in the process of probability change, the low-probability medium/big hit information is acquired in step S1613, and the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502 is completed. If so, high-accuracy medium-big hit information is acquired at step S1614, and the big-hit random number determination process at step S1502 ends.
Here, in the case where the low-probability medium-big hit information acquisition process of step S1613 is executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not greater than the determination lower limit value (“BIGMIN-1”) in step S1610, In step S1613, the CPU 201 acquires the leftmost “000H” of the hit information variables “000H, 000H, 000H” stored at the next address of the determination lower limit value (“BIGMIN-1”).
Further, the high-accuracy medium-big hit information acquisition process of step S1614 is executed in response to the process of step S1614 being determined that the random number value is not greater than the determination lower limit value (“BIGMIN-1”) in step S1610. In this case, the CPU 201 acquires the center “000H” of the hit information variables “000H, 000H, 000H” stored at the next address of the determination lower limit value (“BIGMIN-1”).

Through the series of processes described above, when the random number value is equal to or smaller than the determination lower limit value, the information about the deviation is acquired.

Subsequently, when it is determined in step S1610 that the random number value is larger than the determination reference value, the CPU 201 returns to step S1601 and acquires the setting difference information from the big hit determination random number determination table.
When the process of step S1601 is executed in response to the random number value being determined to be larger than the determination lower limit value in step S1610, the reference address described above is “4097” shown in FIG. 27A. As the setting difference information, “001H” stored in the reference destination address is acquired.
Therefore, in this case, the determination result that the setting difference information is other than “000H” is obtained in the subsequent step S1602, and the CPU 201 advances the process to step S1605.

The processes of steps S1605 to S1609 are processes related to the acquisition of the determination reference value TH according to the set value Ve. First, the process relating to the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed.
Specifically, in step S1605, the CPU 201 acquires the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 in step S1605, and corrects the setting value information acquired in step S1606 by 2 bytes. That is, in this example, the set value Vd, which is set to 1 byte, is corrected to 2 bytes.
Next, in step S1607, the CPU 201 acquires a determination reference value according to the set value Ve based on the correction information, that is, the set value Vd corrected by 2 bytes.
After the jackpot random number determination process of step S1502 is started, at the time when step S1607 is executed for the first time, the reference destination address is “4097” shown in FIG. 27A. In the process of step S1607, the determination reference value stored in the address deviated from the reference address by the amount corresponding to the above correction information (that is, in this case, "BIGLMAX1" of the address "4098" and "BIGLMAX2 of the address "4099") is stored. "Any "BIGLMAX6" of the address "4100" is acquired. Specifically, in this case, when the above correction information corresponds to the set value Ve “1” (set value Vd=“00H”), “BIGLMAX1” at the address next to the reference address is acquired, When the correction information corresponds to the set value Ve “2” (set value Vd=“01H”), “BIGLMAX2” at the address two destinations of the reference address is acquired, and the correction information is set to the set value Ve. If it corresponds to “3” (set value Vd=“02H”), “BIGLMAX6” at the address three destinations ahead of the reference destination address is acquired.

In response to the determination reference value being obtained in step S1607, the CPU 201 determines whether the random number value is larger than the determination reference value in step S1610 through the processing of steps S1608→S1609 (these processing will be described later). judge. Thereby, the big hit determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed.

In step S1610, the big hit determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed, and when it is determined that the random number value is not larger than the determination reference value TH1 (that is, the big hit), the above-described step S1611 and subsequent steps are performed. The process is executed, and the winning information acquisition process is performed.
In the table shown in FIG. 27A, the determination reference value TH1 (“BIGLMAX1”, “BIGLMAX2”, and “BIGLMAX6”) for low accuracy is stored as a variable that represents the hit information corresponding to the case where the determination reference value TH1 for low accuracy is used. Variables represented by “05AH, 05AH, 000H” are stored at the next addresses of the areas (“4098” to “4100”) (also for these variables from the left side, “low-precision middle-big hit information” and “high-precision middle hit”). It represents "big hit information" and "small hit information".
In the processing of step S1611 which is executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not greater than the determination reference value TH1 in step S1610, the CPU 201 stores the determination reference value TH1 at the next address of the storage area as described above. The rightmost "000H" among the variables "05AH, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information obtained is acquired.
Further, in this case, if the probability change is not in progress, in the process of step S1613, the CPU 201 selects from among the variables “05AH, 05AH, 000H” of the hit information stored at the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH1 as described above. If "05AH" on the leftmost side is acquired and if the probability change is in progress, in the process of step S1614, the central "05AH" of the variables "05AH, 05AH, 000H" of the relevant information is acquired.

Here, in step S1610, the big hit determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed, and the random number value is larger than the determination reference value TH1 (that is, the determination at the time of low accuracy is “out”). In this case, the jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH2 ("BIGHMAX1""BIGHMAX2""BIGHMAX6") at the time of high accuracy is performed. At this time, the reference address is the address “4097” shown in FIG. 27A, that is, the start address of the information storage area (“4097” to “4101”) for the jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low probability. Therefore, it should be shifted to the address “4103”, that is, the leading address of the information storage area (“4103” to “4107”) for the big hit determination using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy.
If the set value Ve is 3 steps, the address shift amount is 6 addresses of “4097”→“4103”. However, if the set value Ve is 6 steps, when the set value Ve is low Not only "BIGLMAX1", "BIGLMAX2", and "BIGLMAX6" but also "BIGLMAX3", "BIGLMAX4", and "BIGLMAX5" are stored in the information storage area for the big hit determination using the determination reference value TH1. That is, in this case, the address shift amount should be 9 addresses corresponding to the increase of the determination reference value TH1 by 3.

In this way, when the reference destination is changed from the information storage area corresponding to the low accuracy in the table to the information storage area corresponding to the high accuracy, the reference address shift amount is the number of stages of the set value Ve (the set value Ve to be used). It should be changed according to the number). Therefore, in this example, the setting stage information is acquired in step S1608, and in the subsequent step S1609, a process of shifting to the designated address based on the setting stage information is performed. Specifically, in this example, setting stage information representing “3 stages” is acquired, and the reference destination address is shifted to the address 6 addresses ahead based on the setting stage information.

By executing the processes of steps S1608 and S1609, in step S1610, when the jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed and it is determined that the random number value is larger than the determination reference value TH1, In the process of step S1601, the setting difference information “001H” of the address “4103” illustrated in FIG. 27A is acquired.
Therefore, in this case, the setting difference information is determined to be other than “000H” in the determination processing of step S1602, and the processing of step S1605 and subsequent steps is executed again.
Then, in the acquisition process of step S1607 in this case, the determination reference value TH2 corresponding to the set value Ve is obtained from the determination reference values TH2 of “BIGHMAX1”, “BIGHMAX2”, and “BIGHMAX6”, and the processing proceeds to steps S1608 and S1609. In the determination process of step S1610 performed, it is determined whether the random number value is larger than the obtained determination reference value TH2. That is, the big hit determination is performed using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy.

In this way, in step S1610, the jackpot determination using the highly accurate determination reference value TH2 is performed, and when it is determined that the random number value is not larger than the determination reference value TH2 (it is a big hit), the processing in step S1611 and subsequent steps is performed. By the processing, the winning information acquisition processing is performed.
In the table shown in FIG. 27A, as a variable representing the hit information corresponding to the case where the highly accurate determination reference value TH2 is used, the storage area (“4104” to “4106”) of the highly accurate determination reference value TH2 is stored. Variables represented by "000H, 05AH, 000H" are stored at the next address (the variables also represent "low-probability mid-big hit information", "high-probability mid-big hit information", and "small hit information"). .
In the processing of step S1611 that is executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not greater than the determination reference value TH2 in step S1610, the CPU 201 stores the determination reference value TH2 at the next address of the storage area as described above. The rightmost "000H" of the variables "000H, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information obtained is acquired.
In addition, in this case, if the probability change is not in progress, in the process of step S1613, the CPU 201 selects from among the variables “000H, 05AH, 000H” of the hit information stored at the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH2 as described above. If "000H" on the leftmost side is acquired and if the probability change is in progress, in the process of step S1614, the central "05AH" among the variables "000H, 05AH, 000H" of the relevant information is acquired. That is, if the probability change is not in progress, information “off” is acquired, and if the probability change is in progress, “hit” information is acquired.

In step S1610, the big hit determination using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is performed, and it is determined that the random number value is larger than the determination reference value TH2 (that is, it is deviated from both the determination reference values TH1 and TH2). In this case, in this example, processing is performed based on the information stored in the areas of addresses “4109” to “4111” in the table illustrated in FIG. 27A, that is, the out-of-bounds correspondence information for acquiring the out-of-bounds information.
Here, depending on the processing of steps S1608 and S1609 executed when the highly accurate determination reference value TH2 is acquired in step S1607, the reference destination address is 6 addresses ahead of the previous address “4103”. It will be shifted to "4109". Therefore, in the process of step S1601 which is executed in response to the determination that the random number value is larger than the determination reference value TH2 in step S1610, “000H” stored in the address “4109” is acquired as the setting difference information. To be done. That is, in this case, the process proceeds in steps S1601→S1602→S1603.

Here, in the table shown in FIG. 27A, in the storage area (“4109” to “4111”) for the out-of-range correspondence information, “65535” is set as the determination reference value at the next address (“4110”) of the setting difference information. It is stored. That is, the “displacement determination reference value” for surely obtaining the displacement determination with respect to the random number value that can take 0 to 65535 is stored. Further, a variable “000H, 000H, 000H” representing the deviation information is stored at the address (“4111”) next to the deviation reference value. Also for the variable, information corresponding to low accuracy medium, high accuracy medium, and small hit is arranged in order from the left side.

In this case, in the acquisition process of step S1603, "65535" as the "disconnection judgment reference value" stored at the address next to the reference address is acquired as the judgment reference value. Then, in the determination process of step S1610 that is executed through the process of step S1604, it is determined whether or not the random number value is larger than the “offset determination reference value”=65535, and the determination result is that the random number value is It is possible to obtain a determination result that the value is not larger than the “offset determination reference value”.

As described above, when the determination using the “deviation determination reference value” is performed in step S1610 and it is determined that the random number value is not larger than the “deviation determination reference value”, the deviation information is determined by the processing from step S1611 onward. Is acquired.
Specifically, in the processing of step S1611 that is executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not greater than the “deviation determination reference value” in step S1610, the CPU 201 causes the “deviation determination reference value” in the table. Of the variables “000H, 000H, 000H” stored at the next address of, the rightmost “000H” is acquired.
Further, in this case, if the probability change is not in progress, the CPU 201, in the processing of step S1613, sets the leftmost "000H" of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored at the next address of the "offset determination reference value". If it is acquired and if the probability is changing, in the process of step S1614, the central "000H" of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" is acquired.
As described above, when it is determined that both of the determination reference values TH1 and TH2 are out of alignment, each "hit information" (small hit information, low accuracy medium large hit information, high accuracy information) as information indicating a win or loss. As the medium-and-big hit information), information indicating “out” is acquired.

(Variation pattern lottery process)

The variation pattern lottery processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern lottery processing in step S1504.
First, in step S1701, the CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a setting error based on the setting error flag. If not, in step S1702, it is determined whether or not there is a hit. That is, based on the big hit determination flag, it is determined whether or not the big hit (=5 AH).

When it is determined in step S1702 that it is not a hit (a deviation), the CPU 201 selects a deviation variation pattern table in step S1703, and then proceeds to the variation pattern selection processing of step S1706. That is, it is a process of selecting a variation pattern based on a table and a variation pattern random number.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1702 that the player has won, the CPU 201 selects the hit variation pattern table in step S1704, and then proceeds to the variation pattern selection process of step S1706.

29 shows an example of the deviation variation pattern table, and FIG. 30 shows an example of the hit variation pattern table.
First, as a premise, a fluctuation pattern table for Toku-zu 1 and a fluctuation pattern table for Toku-zu 2 are prepared as the deviation fluctuation pattern table and the hit fluctuation pattern table, respectively.

In the variation pattern lottery at the time of deviation performed using the deviation variation pattern table shown in FIG. 29, the variation patterns of the lottery candidates (variation patterns that can be selected by lottery) are “normal variation 4s”, “normal variation 6s”, and “normal variation”. There are 9 types: 8s, “normal fluctuation 12s”, “normal reach”, “super reach 1”, “super reach 2”, “super reach 3”, and “super reach 4”.
Further, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of hitting performed using the hit variation pattern table shown in FIG. 30, the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are “normal variation per hit”, “super reach 1”, “super reach 2”, and “super reach 3”. There are five types of "Super Reach 4".
Regarding the "normal fluctuation", the numerical value described together represents the fluctuation time, and "s" after the numerical value means "second".

Here, among the above-mentioned variation patterns, particularly, “normal variation 4s”, “normal variation 6s”, “normal variation 8s”, and “normal variation 12s” belong to the variation pattern corresponding to “out” which is not selected at the time of hitting (hereinafter It may also be referred to as "out-of-line variation pattern").

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern lottery at the time of deviating is performed using different variation pattern tables for each deviating type (deletion 1, 2, 3) regardless of whether the special patterns 1 and 2 are used (see FIG. 29).
Here, in the present embodiment, the selection ratios by the symbol lottery (rates at which the corresponding type is selected) are different for each of the out-of-range types of “out-of-range 1”, “out-side 2”, and “out-side 3”, and “out-side 1 "Has a high selectivity, and "has 2" and "has 3" have a lower selectivity than "has 1". Specifically, in this example, the selection rates of "off 1" are "190/200", and the selection rates of "off 2" and "off 3" are respectively 5/200. In this case, if the jackpot determination result is "off," in most cases, "off 1" is selected as the off type.

As the variation pattern lottery for Toku-zu 1, the variation pattern lottery when the outfall type is “outgoing 1” is not a lottery according to the set value Ve, but a lottery according to the number of reserved balls. Therefore, among the fluctuation pattern tables for special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern table used when the deviation type is “deviation 1” is common among the set values Ve, but is different for each number of reserved balls. Is prepared.

In the variation pattern lottery of Toku-zu 1 in the case of “out of range”, the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are five types of “normal variation 4s”, “normal variation 6s”, “normal variation 8s”, “normal variation 12s”, and “normal reach”. Therefore, in this example, the variation pattern subject to the lottery is changed according to the number of reserved balls.
Specifically, when the number of reserved balls=0, "normal fluctuation 12s" and "normal reach", when the number of reserved balls=1, "normal fluctuation 8s" and "normal reach", and when the number of reserved balls=2, "normal" The fluctuation patterns of 6 s" and "normal reach" and the "normal fluctuation of 4 s" and "normal reach" when the number of reserved balls is 3 are set as the fluctuation patterns.

Here, in the variation pattern table, the numerical value stored for each variation pattern of the lottery target is distributed to the winning probabilities on the assumption that the variation pattern determination random number can take 200 numeric values from 0 to 199. It represents a value (value indicating distribution). For example, in the fluctuation pattern table for Toku-zu 1, in the table of "out of range 1" and "reserved sphere number = 0", the stored value for "normal fluctuation 12s" = "160", the stored value for "normal reach" = "40" However, this means that the winning probability of “normal fluctuation 12s” is “160/200” and the winning probability of “normal reach” is “40/200”.
The above distributed values are shown as the stored values in the table for the sake of convenience of explanation only. In the actual fluctuation pattern table, the judgment reference values used in the above jackpot random number judgment should be stored. become. For example, in the case of the above-mentioned table of “out of range 1” and “reserved sphere count=0”, for example, “159” is stored as the actual stored value (determination reference value), and in that case, the variation pattern random number is 159 or less. If so, "normal fluctuation 12s" is selected, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is larger than 159, "normal reach" is selected.

As can be seen by referring to the distribution values shown in FIG. 29, in the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1 corresponding to the case of “out of range 1”, “normal variation” is easier to be selected than “normal reach”. (The appearance rate is high).
In addition, in the variation pattern lottery of Toku-zu 1 corresponding to the case of "out of range", the larger the number of reserved balls is, the shorter the variation time is, the normal variation pattern is selected.

Next, as the variation pattern lottery of Toku-zu 1, the variation pattern lottery in the case of each of the detachment types “departure 2” and “departure 3” is performed according to the set value Ve, while depending on the number of reserved balls. Not a lottery. Therefore, as the variation pattern table for special figure 1 used in the cases of "delay 2" and "departure 3", it is common for the number of reserved balls, but a different table is prepared for each set value Ve. There is.

In the variation pattern lottery of Toku-zu 1 corresponding to the cases of “departure 2” and “departure 3”, the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are 4 of “super reach 1”, “super reach 2”, “super reach 3”, and “super reach 4”. Seed.
In this example, in the variation pattern lottery of the special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "out of range 3", the variation pattern to be subjected to the lottery is changed according to the set value Ve.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery of Toku-zu 1, the variation patterns that are subject to the lottery for each of the combinations of “departure 2” and “departure 3” and settings 1, 2 and 6 are as follows.
Setting 1 and "Outside 2" = Super reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 1 and "Outside 3" = Super reach 1
Setting 2 and “Out of range 2” = Super reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 2 and “Out of range 3” = Super reach 2, 3
Setting 6 and "Out of range 2" = Super reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 6 and "Outside 3" = Super reach 4

From the distribution values illustrated in the figure, in the present example, as the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1 corresponding to the case of “out of bounds 2”, in the case of setting 1, it changes in the order of super reach 4, 3, 2, 1. It is easy to select the pattern. In the case of setting 2, the variation patterns are selected in the order of super reach 1, 2, 3, 4 and in the case of setting 3, the variation patterns are selected in the order of super reach 1, 3, 2, 4. Making it easier.
In addition, in the present example, with regard to the variation pattern lottery of Toku-zu 1 corresponding to the case of “departure 3”, the higher the setting (the larger the set value Ve), the more likely the super reach is to be selected. I am trying.

In the variation pattern table used in the lottery in which the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are three or more, as in the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the case of the above-mentioned “departure 2”, a plurality of values ( A value represented by "the number of variation patterns of lottery candidates-1" is stored. For example, in the table corresponding to the case of setting 1 and "offset 2" in the figure, for example, the first reference value=9, the second reference value=39, and the third reference value=99 are used as the determination reference values. In that case, if the random number for the fluctuation pattern is less than or equal to the first value, “Super Reach 1” is larger than the first value, and “Super Reach 2” is less than or equal to the second value. If it is larger than the value and equal to or smaller than the third value, "super reach 3" is selected, and if it is larger than the third value, "super reach 4" is selected.

Next, as the variation pattern lottery of Toku-zu 2, the variation pattern lottery in the case where the out-of-range type is "out-of-range 1" is different from the case of Toku-zu 1 in that the variation pattern of the lottery candidate is "normal variation 12s" only. There is. Therefore, in the variation pattern table for the special figure 2, “departure 1” and “reserved ball number=0”, “departure 1” and “reserved ball number=1”, “departed 1” and “reserved ball number=” In each table used in the case of “2”, “out of range 1” and “number of reserved balls=3”, allotment values corresponding to “normal fluctuation 12 s” are all “200”.
In this case, since the lottery result is the same even if the number of reserved balls is different, the variation pattern table may be a common table among the number of reserved balls.

Further, as the variation pattern lottery of the special diagram 2, the variation pattern lottery in the case of the dislocation type being “displacement 2” and “displacement 3” is the lottery according to the set value Ve as in the case of the special diagram 1, It is not a lottery based on the number of reserved balls. For this reason, in the variation pattern table for special figure 2, the variation pattern table used for each of “delay 2” and “departure 3” is common between the number of reserved balls, but different for each set value Ve. A table is prepared.

In the variation pattern lottery of Toku-zu 2 corresponding to the cases of “departure 2” and “departure 3”, the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are two types of “normal variation 12 s” and “super reach 4”, and depending on the set value Ve. Any one of these "normal fluctuation 12s" and "super reach 4" fluctuation patterns is selected.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery of special figure 2 corresponding to the cases of "departure 2" and "departure 3" in this example, "normal variation 12s" is always selected when either of settings 1 and 2 is set. Thus, in the case of setting 6, "super reach 4" is selected.

Next, the hit variation pattern table shown in FIG. 25 will be described.
In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of winning, different tables are used for each winning type in both the special figures 1 and 2.
In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the lottery target is set as follows for each winning type. That is, when the hit type is “normal 4R”, the variation patterns of the lottery target are “normal variation per hit”, “super reach 1”, “super reach 2”, “super reach 3”, and “super reach 4” in both special maps 1 and 2. It is said to be 5 kinds.
When the hit type is “normal 6R”, the change pattern of the lottery target is “normal change hit”, “super reach 1”, “super reach 2”, “super reach 3”, and “super reach 4” in the special drawing 1. According to Toku-zu 2, there are four types of "Super Reach 1", "Super Reach 2", "Super Reach 3", and "Super Reach 4" excluding "normal fluctuation".
Further, when the hit type is “probability variation 6R” or “probability variation 10R”, the variation patterns of the lottery targets are “Super Reach 1”, “Super Reach 2”, “Super Reach 3”, and “Super Reach 4” for both special maps 1 and 2. There are four types.

In the variation pattern lottery at the time of a hit in the present embodiment, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only for a specific hit type. Specifically, for the variation pattern lottery of Toku-zu 1, the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the set value Ve is performed only for the "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R" win types, and for the variation pattern lottery of Toku-zu 2 "normal The variation pattern lottery corresponding to the set value Ve is performed only for the hit types “4R”, “probability variation 6R”, and “probability variation 10R”.

Regarding the variation pattern lottery in the case of “normal 4R”, in both of FIGS. 1 and 2, the variation pattern of the lottery target is changed depending on the set value Ve. Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery corresponding to “normal 4R” in this example, five types of “normal variation per” to “super reach 4” are set if the setting is 1, and “super” is set if the setting is 2 or setting 6. Each of the four types of reach 1" to "super reach 4" is set as the variation pattern of the lottery target.
Regarding the variation pattern lottery in the case of "normal R6", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R", which are win types other than "normal 4R", the variation pattern of the lottery target is set value Ve in both FIGS. It is said to be unchanged.

In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery for hitting the special figure 1, the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the set value Ve is performed only in the case of “normal 4R” and “probability variation 10R”. Therefore, in the hit variation pattern table of Toku-zu 1, a different table is prepared for each set value Ve as the variation pattern table used in the case of these "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R".
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 30, in this example, in the variation pattern table of Toku-zu 1, in each of the “normal 4R” and “probability variation 10R” tables, the distribution value for “super reach 4” becomes larger as the set value Ve increases. It's getting bigger. As a result, when the "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R" are hit, the higher the current setting is, the easier it is to select the variation pattern having the highest expected winning value as the variation pattern of Toku-zu 1.

Further, in the present example, in the variation pattern lottery when hitting the special figure 2, the variation pattern lottery is performed for the "normal variation 4R", the "probability variation 10R" and the "probability variation 6R" according to the set value Ve. For this reason, in the hit variation pattern table of FIG. 2, different tables are prepared for each set value Ve as the variation pattern table used in the cases of "normal 4R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R". In this example, in the variation pattern table of Toku-zu 2, in all of these "normal 4R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R", the distribution value for "super reach 4" is increased as the set value Ve increases. .

Here, as can be seen by referring to the distribution value in the figure, in this example, the distribution value for "Super Reach 4" is set to be the largest in each table regardless of the hit type or the set value Ve. That is, in this example, in the variation pattern lottery when it is determined that the jackpot is the big hit, the variation pattern with the highest expectation of winning is most likely to be selected.

The description returns to FIG. 28.
In the selection process of step S1706 described above, the variation pattern is selected based on the deviation or hit variation pattern table as described above.
Specifically, when the deviation variation pattern table is selected corresponding to the case where the deviation is determined in step S1702, the CPU 201 selects a table corresponding to the deviation type, the number of reserved balls, and the set value Ve from the variation pattern table. Then, the variation pattern is selected based on the selected table and the variation pattern random number. When the hit variation pattern table is selected in response to the hit determination in step S1702, the CPU 201 selects a table corresponding to the hit type and the set value Ve from the relevant variation pattern table, and selects the hit variation pattern table. The variation pattern is selected based on the table and the variation pattern random number. At this time, it goes without saying that the tables for special figure 1 and special figure 2 are selected and selected according to whether the design target is the special figure 1 or 2.
As can be understood from the above description, in each variation pattern table of win/loss, the determination reference value corresponding to the variation pattern of the lottery target is set to one or more (the variation pattern number of the lottery candidate-1). In the selection process of step S1706, the variation pattern is selected based on the result of comparison of the magnitude relationship between the determination reference value stored in the table selected as described above and the value of the variation pattern random number.

Note that, in the above, regarding the variation pattern table for selecting the variation pattern, an example in which the table is divided for each set value Ve has been described, but a common table may be used for some of the set values Ve.
FIG. 31 shows an example thereof.
Here, a modified example of the hit variation pattern table on the premise that the set value Ve can take six values corresponding to the settings 1 to 6 is shown.
In the example of FIG. 31, a table corresponding to “normal 4R” and “probability variation 10R” for special figure 1 and a table corresponding to “normal 4R” “probability variation 6R” “probability variation 10R” for special figure 2 are set, respectively. An example is shown in which the tables are divided for each of groups 1 to 3 and groups of settings 4 to 6.
As in the example of FIG. 31, in performing the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve, the table is not limited to be individually divided for each set value Ve, and common among some set values Ve. Table may be used.

Next, a process when a setting error is detected during the variation pattern lottery will be described.
If it is determined in step S1701 of FIG. 28 that there is a setting error, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1705, selects the common error pattern table at the time of setting error, and executes the selection process of step S1706.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram of the common variation pattern table at the time of setting error.
In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of the setting error, which is performed using the common variation pattern table at the time of the setting error, the deviation variation pattern is forcibly selected regardless of the hit/miss of both the special figures 1 and 2. To do so. That is, in this example, any one of the "normal fluctuation 4s", "normal fluctuation 6s", "normal fluctuation 8s", and "normal fluctuation 12s" is forcibly selected.

In the variation pattern lottery at the time of setting error in this example, a different variation pattern is selected for the special figure 1 side according to the number of reserved balls, and a specific variation pattern for the special figure 2 side regardless of the number of reserved balls. Only, specifically, “normal fluctuation 12 s” is selected.
On the special map 1 side, the normal fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time is selected as the number of reserved balls increases.

Also in FIG. 32, for convenience of description, as the table structure, the structure storing the distribution value corresponding to the case where the random number for fluctuation pattern lottery can take a value of 0 to 199 is shown, but the actual table structure is a holding ball. As a table for each number (0 to 3), a structure in which a determination reference value is associated with at least a variation pattern of lottery candidates is adopted.
If the specific variation pattern is selected for the special figure 2 side regardless of the number of reserved balls as in this example, there is no need to divide the table for each number of reserved balls (0 to 3). Needless to say.

In FIG. 28, in the selection process of step S1706, when the common error pattern table at the time of setting error is selected in step S1705, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the table and the random number for the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, in this example, a table corresponding to the current number of retained balls in the common fluctuation pattern table at the time of setting error is selected, and the magnitude relationship between the judgment reference value and the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the selected table is selected. A variation pattern is selected based on the comparison result.

The CPU 201 ends the variation pattern lottery process of step S1508 in response to the execution of the selection process of step S1706. When the lottery process in step S1504 ends, the fluctuation management process in step S1409 shown in FIG. 24 ends, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1410 (change flag ON process) shown in FIG.
As described above, in the command transmission process of step S1411 subsequent to step S1410, the “variation pattern designation command” indicating the variation pattern lottery result and the “decoration symbol designation command” indicating the symbol lottery result are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. It
On the production control unit 24 side, based on these commands, a combination of decorative symbols when forming a reach state (a symbol type having a reach symbol as a component), and a decorative symbol to be finally stopped (decorative stop symbol) Is determined, and a lottery or the like for the notice effect corresponding to the winning type is performed in the symbol variable display game.

Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, if a setting error is recognized at the start of fluctuation of the special figure, the deviation fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation) is forcibly selected, but at this time, the decorative pattern In order to confuse the player if the intense heat fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation on the side, in this example, a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time such as the normal fluctuation of 4 s to the normal fluctuation of 12 s is selected as described above. There is.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 24 is also devised not to give a notice effect when a setting error occurs. Specifically, when the production control unit 24 receives a setting value abnormality command (see step S1104 of FIG. 20) notifying a setting error from the main control unit 20 side, the advance production lottery is not performed. It

Here, in the present embodiment, when the setting error is recognized based on the above-described setting value abnormality command, the effect control unit 24 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display a message such as “RAM abnormality, please call the staff”. The occurrence of an abnormality is notified by, for example, displaying an image including. The notification is not limited to the notification by the image display using the liquid crystal display device 36, but may be, for example, the notification by the sound or the lighting (and/or blinking) of the LED, and the combination of a plurality of types of rendering means such as the image, the sound, and the LED. It is also possible to make a notification by combination.

In the above, in the common fluctuation pattern table at the time of setting error on the special figure 1 side, the normal fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time is selected as the number of holding balls is larger. However, this is an example. It is also possible to select a normal fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time as the number decreases.
Alternatively, as illustrated in FIG. 33, the same variation pattern can be selected for each number of reserved balls as in the case of the special figure 2 side. The example of FIG. 33 shows a case where “normal fluctuation 12 s” is commonly selected for each number of reserved balls.
As described above, in the common fluctuation pattern table at the time of setting error, various relationships may be considered between the number of reserved balls and the selected fluctuation pattern, and the relationship is not limited to a specific relationship.
Also on the special map 2 side, the fluctuation pattern selected depending on the number of reserved balls may be different as in the special figure 1 side.

(Advantages of setting value related data table as an embodiment)

Here, in this example, in the big hit determination random number determination table shown in FIG. 27A, the area lower than the storage area (“4109” to “4111”) for the off-time correspondence information is set as an empty area. Further, in this example, also in the big hit determination random number determination table shown in FIG. 27B, an area on the lower layer side than the storage area (“4148” to “4150”) for the off-time correspondence information is set as an empty area. In this example, "0" is stored in these empty areas.
In these jackpot determination random number determination tables, the areas other than the empty area can be rephrased as the usage data storage area in which the usage data used for the progress control of the game operation is stored. In addition, the empty area can be rephrased as an unused data storage area in which unused data that is not used for controlling the progress of the game operation is stored.

Then, when such a big hit determination random number determination table is used as a first data table including a plurality of setting value related information selected by referring to the setting value Vd, in the present embodiment, in the main control unit 20, In the ROM 202, the first data table and a second data table that is stored in a storage area on the lower layer side than the first data table and does not include setting value related information are stored.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a storage example of the first data table and the second data table in the ROM 202 of this embodiment.
As illustrated, in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment, in the storage area on the lower layer side of the first data table (big hit determination random number determination table), a special symbol creation address table, that is, second data that does not include setting value related information The table is stored.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20, the first data table including a plurality of setting value related information and the setting value related information stored in the storage area on the lower layer side of the first data table are stored. The second data table which is not included is stored, and the first data table has a use data storage area in which the use data used for the progress control of the game operation is stored and an unused data not used for the progress control of the game operation. And a stored unused data storage area.

When only the used data storage area is secured in the first data table including the set value related information, when the number of set values Vd to be used (the number of stages) is increased, the set value for the increase is set. When the setting value related information related to Vd is added to the first data table, it is necessary to shift the data of the second data table and the subsequent data to be stored in the lower layer to the lower layer side. That is, the data after the second data table must be rewritten to shift the storage area.
When an attempt is made to increase the number of set values Vd to be used by securing a storage area for not only used data but also unused data in the first data table including the set value related information as described above, It is possible to store the set value related information related to the increased set value Vd in the storage area of the unused data.
Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to rewrite the data on and after the second data table, and it is possible to reduce the load of the data rewriting work associated with changing the number of set values Vd to be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the above-mentioned used data storage area, used data having a capacity corresponding to the number of set values Vd (“3” in this example) that can be set in the setting change process is stored, and unused data is stored. The storage area stores unused data of a capacity corresponding to the number of set values Vd that cannot be set in the setting change process (“3” corresponding to the set values Ve “3” “4” “5” in this example). Has been done. Specifically, in this example, the capacity is not used according to the “3” set values Ve obtained by subtracting the number of actually used set values Ve=3 from the number of set values Ve which can be set according to the rule=6. Data is supposed to be stored.
Accordingly, as the storage capacity of the unused data storage area, it is possible to secure the storage capacity of the setting value related information related to the increased setting value Ve when the number of the setting values Ve to be used is increased. ..
Therefore, it is possible to prevent rewriting of the data on and after the second data table.

Further, in the present embodiment, “0” is stored as the unused data as described above. Therefore, even if the first data table is referred to by the unused setting value Vd, the unused setting is set. It is possible to prevent the setting value related information corresponding to the value Vd from being acquired. That is, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent activity from being established, and the fairness of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20, the first data table is stored in the storage area lower than the second data table, and the second data table is stored in the storage area lower than the first data table. The data table is not stored.
Specifically, in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, the set value offset conversion table (see FIG. 16) as the first data table is stored in the lowest layer area of the normal data area. ..
Here, as shown in FIG. 36, the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20 has a “normal program area”, an “unused area”, a “normal data area”, an “unused area”, a “measurement program area”, and a “measurement program area” in order from the upper layer side. "Unused area", "measurement data area", and "unused area" are defined. The "normal program area" is an area in which programs related to general games are stored, and the "normal data area" is an area in which data tables related to general games that are referred to based on the programs in the "normal program area" are stored. is there. For example, the big hit determination random number determination table shown in FIG. 27 is stored in this “normal data area”.
The "measurement program area" is an area in which the programs related to the display of performance information such as the above-mentioned normal ratio information and the measurement are stored, and the "measurement data area" is referred to based on the program in the "measurement program area". This is an area in which a data table relating to display and measurement of performance information to be stored is stored.

As shown in FIG. 35, by storing the set value offset conversion table as the first data table in the lowest layer area of the normal data area, the first data table is, for example, the above-mentioned “special symbol creation address table” ( For example, the second data table is stored in a storage area lower than the second data table, and the second data table is not stored in a storage area lower than the first data table.

When the number of set values Vd to be used is increased by storing the first and second data tables in the ROM 202 in the above-described manner, the contents of the first data table located in the lowest layer of the data area in the ROM 202 Is rewritten, and rewriting of the data portion on the lower layer side of the first data table can be eliminated.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of the data rewriting work associated with changing the number of set values Vd to be used.

<5. Process of production control unit>
[5-1. Outline of processing]

Next, the processing of the effect control unit 24 will be described. First, an example of the structure of scenario data for effect control will be described.
The structure of the scenario registration information will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37A shows a structure of scenario registration information as a main scenario and a sub-scenario. This scenario registration information is set using a work area provided in the RAM 243 (for example, work memory for built-in CPU) of the effect control unit 24.
In this embodiment, the scenario registration information has 64 channels of scenario channels sCH0 to sCH63. The scenarios registered in each scenario channel sCH can be executed simultaneously.

As shown in the figure, the information that can be registered in each scenario channel sCH includes the sub-scenario timer (scTm) used in the sub-scenario update processing, the previous time (scPrevTm), and the sub-scenario execution line indicating the execution line of the sound/motor sub-scenario table. (ScIx), a ramp sub-scenario table execution line indicating the execution line lmp (lmpIx), a main scenario timer (msTm) used for scenario update processing, a main scenario execution line indicating the execution line of the main scenario table (mcIx), There are a main scenario number (mcNo), a main scenario option (mcOpt) that is optional data that can be added to the main scenario, a user option (userFn), a waiting time (delay), and a checksum (checkSum).

When the sound output from the speaker 46, the light emission from the optical display device 45a, and the driving of the movable body accessory by the movable body motor 80c are started, the standby time (delay) and the main scenario number (mcNo) are set to the scenario channel sCH0. ~ Register to a free scenario channel of sCH63.
The waiting time (delay) indicates the time from the registration to the scenario channel sCH to the start of the scenario. The waiting time (delay) is decremented by 1 at a predetermined processing timing (for example, step S2004 in FIG. 41 described later). When the waiting time (delay) is 0, the processing corresponding to the registered data is executed.

FIG. 39 shows an example of scenario numbers 1, 2, and 3 as a part of the main scenario table. As the scenario of each scenario number, the value of the main scenario timer (msTm) is described as time data on each line of the scenario, and the sub-scenario number (scNo) and option (OPT) can be described. . That is, in the main scenario table, a sub-scenario (and an option in some cases) to be executed is designated as the time by the main scenario timer (msTm). In the last line of the scenario, the scenario data end code D_SEEND or the scenario data loop code D_SELOP is described.
The value of the main scenario timer (msTm) is incremented by 1 at a predetermined processing timing (for example, step S2004 in FIG. 41 described later) from the start of the main scenario.
The scenario table of each scenario number will advance to the next row when the time of the main scenario timer (msTm) in a certain row has elapsed. The time data of each row indicates the timing when the row ends.
For example, in the case of scenario number 2, the operation of sub-scenario number 2 is designated as the time of timer value "1500", the operation of sub-scenario number 20 is designated as the time of the next timer value "500", and the next timer value " The operation of sub-scenario number 21 is designated as the time of 2000". The next line is the scenario data end code D_SEEND. When the scenario data end code is D_SEEND, this scenario is deleted from the scenario registration information (work).

Next, the structure of the lamp data registration information will be described with reference to FIG. 37B. As the lamp data registration information, information indicating the scenario selected from the lamp sub-scenario table, that is, the information indicating the effect operation (lighting pattern) by the optical display device 45a is registered. This lamp data registration information is also set using the work area (work area) of the RAM 243.
In the present embodiment, the ramp data registration information has 16 channels of the ramp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. Priority is set for each of the lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15, and the priority increases in order from the lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. Therefore, the scenario (ramp sub-scenario) registered in the ramp channel dwCH15 is executed with the highest priority. Further, for example, if a scenario is registered in the lamp channels dwCH3 and dwCH10, the scenario registered in the lamp channel dwCH10 is preferentially executed.
The ramp channel dwCH0 is mainly used for a lamp effect associated with BGM (Back Ground Music), the ramp channel dwCH15 is used for an error-related lamp effect, and the ramp channels dwCH1 to dwCH14 are used for a normal effect.

As information that can be registered in each lamp channel dwCH, as shown in the figure, a registered lighting number (lmpNew) indicating the number of the registered lighting pattern, an execution lighting number (lmpNo) indicating the number of the lighting pattern to be executed, and a lamp sub-scenario of the lamp sub-scenario There are an offset (offset) indicating an execution line, an execution time (time), and a checksum (checkSum).

FIG. 40A shows an example of lamp sub-scenario numbers 1, 2, and 3 as a part of the lamp sub-scenario table. As the lamp sub-scenario of each number, a value of time data (time) is described in each line of the scenario, and a lamp channel and a lamp number indicating various lighting patterns are described. Further, the lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND is described in the last line.

In the ramp sub-scenario table, the time data (time) of each line indicates the time when the line is started after the sub-scenario is started.
The main scenario timer (msTm) described above is compared with the time data in the table, and if they match, the lamp number of that line is registered in the lamp data registration information in FIG. 37B. The registered ramp channel dwCH is the channel shown on the line.
For example, suppose that scenario number 2 shown in FIG. 39 is registered and sub-scenario number 2 is referred to in the above-mentioned certain scenario channel sCH. In the ramp sub-scenario number 2 shown in FIG. 40A, the ramp channel 5 (dwCH5) and the ramp number 5 are described with the time data (time)=0 on the first line. In this case, when the main scenario timer (msTm)=0, the information of the first line is first registered in the lamp channel dwCH5 of the lamp data registration information of FIG. 37B as the registered lighting number (lmpNew)=5. The value of the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) of the scenario registration information is updated to the value of the next line (second line). This is a registration for executing the lighting pattern operation of the lighting number 5 with a relatively low priority of the lamp channel dwCH5.
For the second line, similar processing is performed when the main scenario timer (msTm) reaches "500". That is, the registered lighting number (lmpNew)=6 (that is, the lighting pattern instruction of the lighting number 6) is registered in the lamp channel dwCH5 of the lamp data registration information.
If the time data (time) has the same value in two consecutive lines, the processing for each line will be started at the same time.
In the lamp drive data creation process described later, the lamp drive data is created based on the lamp data registration information updated in this way.

Next, the structure of the motor data registration information will be described with reference to FIG. 37C. As the motor data registration information, information indicating a scenario selected from the motor sub-scenario table is registered. This motor data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243.
In the present embodiment, the motor data registration information has eight channels, for example, motor channels mCH0 to mCH7 corresponding to eight motors.
As information that can be registered in each motor channel mCH, as shown in the figure, execution operation number (no), registration operation number (noNew), operation count (lcnt), excitation counter (tcnt), execution step (step), operation line. (Offset), parent (migration source)/child (migration destination) attribute (attribute), parent number (retNo), return address (retAddr), loop start point (roopAddr), loop count (roopCnt), error counter (errCnt) ), current input information (currentSw), software switch information (softSw), and software count (softCnt).

FIG. 40C shows an example of the motor sub-scenario number 1 as a part of the motor sub-scenario table. As the motor sub-scenario of each number, the value of time data (time) is described in each line of the scenario, and the information of the motor and solenoid/user option is described. The scenario data end code D_MSEND is described in the last line.

Regarding this motor sub-scenario table, when the sub-scenario timer (scTm) becomes 0 (it is 0 at the beginning), the value of the time data (time) in this motor sub-scenario table is set in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). To do. The time data (time) of each line indicates the timing at which the line ends. Although the absolute time is described in the sub-scenario timer (scTm), the time data value to be set is the value of (time data of the relevant line)-(time data of the previous line).
The motor data (motors 0 to 3 and 4 to 7) is configured to indicate the number of the motor operation pattern (the number of the motor operation table described later) with 1 byte for each motor. The operation pattern number is set in the registered operation number (noNew) and execution operation number (no) of the motor channel corresponding to the motor number.
This motor data registration information is updated in step S2202 of FIG. 44 described later, and in step S2203, motor drive data is created based on the update of the motor data registration information.

FIG. 38 shows sound data registration information. As the sound data registration information, information indicating a scenario selected from the sound sub-scenario table is registered. This sound data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243.
In the present embodiment, the sound data registration information has 16 channels of sound channels aCH0 to aCH15.
As information that can be registered in each sound channel aCH, as shown in the figure, volume transition amount (frzVq), volume (frzVl), transition amount change (rsv2), volume change (rsv1), phrase change (rsv0), stereo (frzSt). ), a loop (frzLp), a phrase number hi (frzHi), and a phrase number low (frzLo).

FIG. 40B shows an example of sound sub-scenario numbers 1 and 2 as a part of the sound sub-scenario table. As the sound/motor sub-scenario of each number, the value of time data (time) is described in each line of the scenario, and the information of BGM, warning sound, error sound, and sound control is described. In the last line, the scenario data end code D_SEEND is described.
Regarding this sound sub-scenario table, when the sub-scenario timer (scTm) becomes 0 (it is 0 at the beginning), the value of the time data (time) of this sound sub-scenario table is set in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). To do. The time data (time) of each line indicates the timing at which the line ends. Although the absolute time is described in the sub-scenario timer (scTm), the time data value to be set is the value of (time data of the relevant line)-(time data of the previous line).
The BGM data of the line is composed of information to be registered in the sound data registration information such as the BGM phrase number and volume value, and is set to the sound channel aCH0 (additionally aCH1 in the case of stereo) in the sound data registration information. .
The data of the warning sound of the line is composed of information registered in the sound data registration information such as the phrase number of the warning sound and the volume value, and is set in a vacant place of the sound channels aCH2 to aCH14.
The error sound data of the line is composed of information registered in the sound data registration information such as the phrase number and volume value of the error sound, and is set in the sound channel aCH15.
The sound control data consists of channel information in the lower 6 bytes and control information in the upper 2 bytes.
In step S2033 of FIG. 41 described later, reproduction output control is performed based on the scenario update process and the updated sound data registration information.

The sound sub-scenario table and the motor sub-scenario table may have an integrated table structure for each line of time.

An example of the process of the effect control unit 24 which performs the effect control using the scenario data structure as described above, particularly the process of the CPU 241, will be described with reference to FIG. 41.
The CPU 241 starts the process of FIG. 41 when the power of the main body of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

First, in step S2000, the CPU 241 performs a necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation. For example, as initial setting processing, interface system initialization, interrupt setting, external memory initialization, WDT initialization, starting point return processing and control initialization of a movable body accessory, sound source control initialization, serial output controller initialization Initialization, scheduler (scenario scheduler, device scheduler, lamp scheduler, sound scheduler), system timer initialization, liquid crystal control initialization, etc.
Each scheduler refers to the above-mentioned scenario registration information, motor data registration information, lamp data registration information, sound data registration information, or progress of scenario control based on these. As the initialization processing, a work area for storing the scenario registration information and the like is initialized.

When the initialization processing of step S2000 is completed, the CPU 241 executes power-on history information initialization processing in step S2001. The initial setting process is a process for holding, in the RAM 243, information necessary for displaying a setting history confirmation screen Gs, which will be described later, performed using the liquid crystal display device 36. Although details will be described later, predetermined history information such as change history information of the set value Ve is displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (see FIG. 46).
The processing as an embodiment executed by the CPU 241 in displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs, including the power-on history information initial setting processing in step S2001, will be described again.

The CPU 241 repeats the processing of step S2002 and subsequent steps in response to the execution of the processing of step S2001.
In particular, in the present embodiment, the CPU 241 executes the processing from step S2002 while monitoring the frame timing of the liquid crystal display device 36. In this example, control is performed based on the V blank signal which is a synchronizing signal used for display control.
In the present embodiment, the V blank signal is generated twice during 1/30 seconds (33.3 ms) which is one frame period of the display image on the liquid crystal display device 36. Since the CPU 241 counts up the V blank interrupt counter according to the V blank signal, the V blank interrupt counter is counted up every 1/60 seconds (16.6 ms).
Of course, each processing of the CPU 241 is performed based on the processing clock having a frequency extremely higher than the frequency of the V blank signal. 41. Each process of FIG. 41 is performed while grasping the period from the frame start to the end according to the V blank signal. At the frame start time, the process is performed once in steps S2004 to S2006, and then V blank is performed. Steps S2021 to S2043 are repeated until the end of one frame period is confirmed by the value of the interrupt counter. When the end of one frame period is detected, the processes of steps S2050 to S2052 are performed.

In step S2002, the CPU 241 performs clear control for the WDT circuit included in the effect control unit 24.
In subsequent step S2003, CPU 241 confirms the frame update flag. The frame update flag is a flag for managing scheduler update and the like in a frame period.
The frame update flag is turned off at the start of a certain frame of the display data (because it is turned off in step S2052 described later at the end of the frame).
Therefore, at the frame start timing, the CPU 241 proceeds from step S2003 to step S2004.

In step S2004, the CPU 241 updates the scenario scheduler frame. Specifically, this is a process of updating the waiting time (delay), the main scenario timer (msTm), and the sub-scenario timer (scTm) of the scenario registration information in FIG. 37A. In other words, it can be said that the timer of the production scenario is advanced by one timing at the start of the frame.
Then, the CPU 241 turns on the frame update flag in the following step S2005. This is information indicating that the scenario timer advancement has been performed in the current frame.
Further, the CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2006. This is information indicating that the scheduler has been updated, that is, the scenario contents (scenario registration information, lamp data registration information, sound data registration information) have not been updated with the progress of the timer.
Then, the process returns to step S2002. After clearing the WDT circuit, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2020 because the frame update flag is ON in step S2003. Here, the WDT circuit is sequentially reset when the CPU 241 is in a normal processing state.

As described above, steps S2004 to S2006 are performed only once after the frame start timing, and in step S2004, the scenario registration information is updated with the timer. The scenario for the production progresses every 33.3 ms, which is one frame period. For example, the main scenario timer (msTm) advances every 33.3 ms. The time of the main scenario timer (msTm) on one line in the main scenario table of FIG. 39 corresponds to the value expressed by 33.3 ms. Further, the time of one line indicated by the time (time) in the sub-scenario table of FIG. 40 also corresponds to the expressed value×time of 33.3 ms.

In step S2020, the CPU 241 branches the process according to the value of the V blank interrupt counter. If the V blank interrupt counter has not reached "2" (that is, "0" or "1"), the process proceeds to step S2021.
The V blank interrupt counter is cleared at the end of the frame in step S2051 and is incremented twice for one frame. Therefore, V blank interrupt counter=0 indicates the first half period of the frame, and V blank interrupt counter=1 indicates the second half period of the frame. The V blank signal at the end of the frame sets the V blank interrupt counter=2.
The CPU 241 proceeds from step S2020 to step S2021 to repeat steps S2021 to S2043 as many times as possible during the frame period in which the V blank interrupt counter is “0” or “1”.

In step S2021, the CPU 241 branches the process depending on whether the V blank interrupt counter is “0” or “1”. That is, the present is the first half or the second half of a certain frame period.
If V blank interrupt counter=0 at the present, that is, if it is the first half of the frame, the process proceeds to step S2022 to confirm the received command from the main control unit 20. That is, it is confirmed whether or not one or more received commands are stored in the command reception buffer. If there is no received command, the process proceeds to step S2030.
If there is one or a plurality of received commands, the CPU 241 performs command analysis processing in step S2023.

Then, the CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2024. Note that turning off the scheduler update flag in step S2024 means that the command is received again when the command is received even after the scheduler update flag is turned on once in step S2031 during the current frame period. It has the meaning of turning it off.

An example of the command analysis processing in step S2023 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.
As described above, in step S2022 of FIG. 41, the CPU 241 confirms whether the effect control command supplied from the main control unit 20 is stored in the command reception buffer, and if the effect control command is stored, the command is stored. Will be read by the processing of FIG. 42.

In the effect control unit 24, the RAM 243 is provided with a command reception buffer for fetching the effect control command transmitted from the main control unit 20.
First, the CPU 241 confirms the read pointer indicating the read address of the command receiving buffer and the write pointer indicating the write address in step S2101 of FIG.
The light pointer is updated in response to command reception, and the received effect control command is stored in the address indicated by the light pointer accordingly. The read pointer is updated when reading from the command reception buffer (step S2102). Therefore, if the read pointer is not the write pointer, it means that the effect control command that has not been read is stored in the command reception buffer. Therefore, if the read pointer is not the write pointer, the process advances to step S2102, and the CPU 241 loads 1-byte command data from the address indicated by the read pointer in the command reception buffer. In this case, the read pointer is incremented for the next read (load).

Note that actually, the presence/absence of the received command in step S2022 of FIG. 41 can also be determined by whether or not the read pointer=write pointer. As an actual program, if the read pointer=write pointer at the time when the command check processing is first performed, it may be determined that there is no received command in step S2022 of FIG.

As described above, one effect control command is formed by 2 bytes, 1 byte as a mode and 1 byte as an event. In step S2103 of FIG. 42, the CPU 241 confirms whether the loaded 1-byte command data is a mode or an event. This confirmation is performed by the value of Bit7 of 8 bits (Bit0 to Bit7).
If it is the mode, the process proceeds to step S2104 as the process of receiving the command upper data, and the read command data is saved in the register "command HI byte". It also clears the "command LO byte" register. Then, the process returns to step S2101.
Even if the read pointer is not equal to the write pointer, the effect control command that has not yet been read is stored in the command reception buffer, so the process advances to step S2102, and the CPU 241 is indicated by the read pointer in the command reception buffer. Load 1 byte of command data from the address. Also, the read pointer is incremented.
If the read command is an event, as a process of receiving lower data of the command, the process proceeds from step S2103 to S2105, and the read command data is saved in the register "command LO byte".

The command data of the mode and the event is saved in the register “command HI byte” and “command LO byte”, so that the CPU 241 has fetched one command.
Therefore, in step S2106, the CPU 241 performs a process according to the fetched command. A specific example will be described later with reference to FIG.

The read pointer=write pointer is the case where the effect control command that the CPU 241 has not yet fetched does not exist in the command reception buffer. When the read pointer=write pointer is confirmed in step S2101, the command analysis process in step S2023 of FIG. 41 ends.

An example of the command handling process in step S2106 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 43A shows a basic process as a command corresponding process. In response to the reception of the 2-byte effect control command, the CPU 241 first confirms in step S2121 in FIG. 43A whether or not it is currently in the test mode. If in the test mode, in step S2122 all effect scenarios are cleared, sound output is stopped, and the LED of the optical display device 45a is turned off. Then, in step S2123, the test mode ends.
Unless in the test mode, these processes are not performed.
Then, in step S2130, the CPU 241 carries out processing for the fetched effect control command.

As the production control command, for example, a variation pattern designation command of a special symbol, a decorative symbol designation command, a hold addition command, a game state designation command, a power-on command, a RAM clear command, a setting change command, a setting change end command, and a setting confirmation Command, setting confirmation end command, setting value command (in this example, the main control unit 20 transmits at least at startup (S808 of FIG. 17) and at the start of symbol variation (S1411 of FIG. 23)), error command (of various errors) Notification command)... Various settings are made. In step S2130, CPU 241 performs the process defined by the program in response to the received command. Here, four production control commands are listed in FIGS. 43B to 43E to illustrate specific processing.

FIG. 43B shows processing S2130a when a variation pattern designation command is fetched as the command processing in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 performs a process of setting a decorative symbol designation command waiting state in step S2131. This is because the variable pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command are sequentially received, and the CPU 241 controls the variable display of the symbols.

FIG. 43C shows a process S2130b when a symbol designating command is fetched as the command process in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 first confirms in step S2132 whether the variation pattern designation command has been received. If it has not been received, the process is terminated.
If the variation pattern designation command has already been received when the decorative pattern designation command is received, the process proceeds to step S2133, and the scenario registration for the accessory origin correction operation is performed. Then, in step S2134, the symbol variation flag is set. The symbol variation flag is provided corresponding to each of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol, and the variation state is represented by each flag. For example, a 2-bit first special symbol variation flag FZ1, a second special symbol variation flag FZ2, a normal symbol variation flag FZ3 are prepared, and for each of them, during a stop, a stop (hit), and a stop (off) are shown. Here, with the start of fluctuation, the corresponding symbol fluctuation flag (one of FZ1, FZ2, and FZ3) is set to a value indicating "during fluctuation".
The symbol variation flag is set to a value indicating "stopped (winning)" for a predetermined time at the end of symbol variation in the case of winning, and then a value indicating "stopping (out)" until the symbol variation starts. Is set to.
In step S2135, the CPU 241 performs fluctuation start processing. Then, in response to the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern designation command is deleted in step S2136.

FIG. 43D shows processing S2130c when a power-on command is received as the command processing in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 clears the RAM 243 in step S2137. For example, the storage area for the contents of the command reception/transmission buffer and various operation input information buffers is cleared.
Then, in step S2138, an error cancel command is transmitted, in step S2139 clears the accessory error information, in step S2140 the accessory operation is stopped, in step S2141, the scenario of power-on is registered, and in step 2142, the LCD controller 40 is powered on. Set commands sequentially.

FIG. 43E shows processing S2130d when a RAM clear command is fetched as the command processing in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 clears the RAM 243 in step S2143. For example, the storage area for the contents of the command reception/transmission buffer and various operation input information buffers is cleared.
Then, in step S2144, an error cancel command is transmitted, and in step S2145, a RAM clear error is set and an error notification timer is set. Further, in step S2146, information regarding the lottery process in the RAM 243 is cleared, and in step S2147, information regarding the scenario is cleared. Then, in step S2148, the initial power-on display (RAM clear) command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 is set.

The example of the process according to the command reception has been described above.
In the present example, the processes of steps 2022 to S2024 of FIG. 41, which are processes corresponding to the command reception, are started only during the period of V blank interrupt counter=0.

Subsequently, the CPU 241 confirms the scheduler update flag in step S2030 of FIG. 41 and branches the process. Here, the processes of steps S2031 to S2034 are performed only when the scheduler update flag is off.
Then, in step S2031, the frame update flag is turned on.
Since the scheduler update flag is turned off in step S2006 immediately after the frame starts, when the process first proceeds to step S2030 in the current frame period, steps S2031 to S2034 are performed. Further, since the scheduler update flag is turned off in step S2024, the processes of steps S2031 to S2034 are performed even when a command is received.

The CPU 241 performs processing as scenario scheduler execution in step S2032. This is a scenario registration information update process. For example, of the information registered in the scenario channel sCH, when the waiting time (delay) is 0, the processing corresponding to the registered data is executed. That is, the processing corresponding to the scenario number specified in the main scenario table is performed. The main scenario execution line (mcIx), the sub-scenario execution line (scIx), the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx), etc. are also updated.
In step S2033, the CPU 241 executes sound scheduler execution and output processing. This is update processing of sound data registration information according to the sound sub-scenario specified in the scenario table, and output processing of a sound control signal based on the sound data registration information. The CPU 241 causes the sound controller of the effect control unit 24 to perform sound output according to the current scenario progress.

In step S2034, the CPU 241 performs a ramp scheduler execution process.
This is a process of updating the lamp data registration information according to the lamp sub-scenario specified in the scenario table.
For example, the CPU 241 performs the following process for each of the lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. First, the main scenario timer (msTm) is compared with the time data (time) in the ramp sub-scenario table. The time data (time) of the ramp sub-scenario table indicates the time when the line (the line indicated by the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx)) is started. Therefore, if the time of the main scenario timer is equal to or longer than the time data (time), the process for that line is performed.
For example, first, it is determined whether or not the current line is the line in which the lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND is described. If it is not the line in which the lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND is described, the CPU 241 acquires the lamp channel dwCH and the lamp number described in the line, and registers the lighting pattern number in the acquired lamp channel dwCH.
Further, the registration lighting number (lmpNew) and the execution lighting number (lmpNo) are set in the area corresponding to the lamp channel dwCH. That is, the lamp number acquired from the relevant line of the lamp sub-scenario table is set to the registered lighting number (lmpNew), and "0" is set to the execution lighting number (lmpNo). Also, the value of the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) is incremented by one. As described above, the lamp data registration information is updated to the state in which the lamp effect operation to be executed is registered.

In step S2034, the lamp data registration information is updated as described above, but the lamp drive data creation and the lamp drive data output based on the updated lamp data registration information are performed in steps S2041 and S2042 described later.

In step S2040, the CPU 241 branches the process depending on the value of the V blank interrupt counter. If the V blank interrupt counter is "0", the processes of steps S2041 to S2043 are executed, and if it is "1", these processes are not executed.
In step S2041, the CPU 241 creates lamp drive data. That is, based on the information registered in each lamp channel dwCH of the lamp data registration information, the lamp drive data to be output to the driver that actually drives various LEDs is generated.
Then, in step S2042, control is performed so that the generated lamp drive data is output to the driver.
In step S2043, the CPU 241 performs key event processing. Then, the process returns to step S2002.
The processes of creating and outputting the lamp drive data in steps S2041 and S2042 are started only when V blank interrupt counter=0. That is, these processes are started only in the first half period of the frame.

After the V blank interrupt counter=2, that is, when the end of the frame period is detected (S2020:=2), the CPU 241 performs the processing corresponding to the end of the frame after step S2050.

First, the CPU 241 executes a history display process in step S2050. This history display processing is processing for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs described above on the liquid crystal display device 36. The details will be described later.

In response to the display process of step S2050 being executed, the CPU 241 clears the V blank interrupt counter in step S2051, then turns off the frame update flag in step S2052, and returns to step S2002. Then, as described above, the processing for the new frame period is performed.

In addition to the above-described processing of FIG. 41, the CPU 241 executes the processing of FIG. 44 as an interrupt processing every 1 ms, for example. That is, the process of FIG. 44 is a process executed every 1 ms regardless of the frame timing of display data.
In FIG. 44, the CPU 241 performs a WDT pulse generation process in step S2200. The WDT circuit counts every 1 ms by this WDT pulse.
In step S2201, the CPU 241 performs motor sensor update processing. This is a process of detecting the information of the position detection sensor 82a described above.

In step S2202, the CPU 241 performs device scheduler execution processing. Specifically, the motor data registration information is updated. Further, in step S2203, as device scheduler output processing, output processing of motor drive data to the driver of the movable body accessory motor 80c is performed.
That is, the CPU 241 controls the motor operation every 1 ms, which is a time interval of about 1/30 of the frame period.

In subsequent step S2204, CPU 241 performs key input processing. That is, a signal corresponding to the operation of various operators such as the effect button 13 is confirmed.
The CPU 241 ends the interrupt process shown in FIG. 44 in response to the execution of the process of step S2204.

Although the processing examples of the CPU 241 have been described so far, in the above processing examples, the CPU 241 performs various kinds of processing in accordance with the frame of the display data.
FIG. 45 shows various timings for each frame period of display data.
Each frame of display data is set to a frame FR0, FR1, FR2,.... For example, the frame FR0 is displayed at time points T0 to T1 and the frame FR1 is displayed at time points T1 to T2.
Since the value of the V-blank interrupt counter is cleared in step S2051 of FIG. 41, it becomes "0" at the frame start point and "1" at the frame middle point (time points T0m, T1m, etc.) as shown in the figure. Cleared immediately after becoming 2".

In the figure, “SL” represents the frame period, and “SLs” represents the start timing of the frame period (hereinafter referred to as “frame start timing SLs”). “CA” means the first half period of the frame.

First, as a premise, the drawing process of the display data (frame image data) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is performed by the liquid crystal control unit 40 based on the liquid crystal control command from the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241). This drawing process is executed for the display data of the next frame within the frame period SL. For example, the drawing of the display data of the frame FR1 is executed within the time period T0 to T1 which is the display period of the frame FR0.
The liquid crystal control unit 40 also preloads data used for drawing. This preload is executed in a period one frame before the drawing process as preparation for drawing. For example, the preload for drawing the display data of the frame FR2 is executed within the display period of the frame FR0 within the time points T0 to T1.
The start timing of these drawing processing and preload is synchronized with the frame start timing SLs as shown in the figure.

On the side of the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241), the processes of repeating steps S2021 to S2043 are performed during the frame period indicated by SL.
However, the reception command processing (S2022 to S2024) is executed only in the first half period CA of the frame. This is because these are executed only when the V blank interrupt counter=0.
The received command analysis processing is the processing shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, which is a processing with a relatively heavy processing load, and the processing also increases depending on the number of received commands. Depending on the type of command, it may be necessary to carry out lottery for production. In the present embodiment, such processing is performed only in the first half period of the frame.
Therefore, for the command signal, for example, for the command signal received during the period indicated by the broken line as the time points T0m to T1m, the command analysis is performed during the period from the time points T1 to T1m.

The ramp data creation/output process (S2241 to S2243) is also executed only during the first half CA of the frame. This is because these are executed only when the V blank interrupt counter=0.

[5-2. Display setting history confirmation screen]

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of displaying a history of operations related to the set value Ve (Vd) as a set operation history. Specifically, as the setting operation history, a history relating to the change of the set value Ve and a history relating to confirmation of the set value Ve (setting confirmation processing) are displayed.

FIG. 46 shows an example of the setting history confirmation screen Gs as one display mode of the setting operation history.
The setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 under the control of the effect control unit 24, and in the present example, as shown in the figure, for each target event of setting change and setting confirmation, It includes information indicating its content and the time of occurrence (in this example, date and time: date and time by hour and minute).
For the setting change, the “content” of the target event corresponds to the name information of the type of the target event (that is, “setting change”) and the changed set value Ve (the set value Vd whose setting is completed by the setting change process). Numerical information of the set value Ve) is included. The setting confirmation includes name information of the target event type (that is, “setting confirmation”) and numerical information of the set value Ve at the time of setting confirmation (that is, the set value Ve confirmed by the user).

The setting history confirmation screen Gs of this example is made up of a plurality of pages, and specifically 5 pages can be displayed. In this example, there are 10 pieces of history information that can be displayed on one page, so that a maximum of 50 pieces (10×5 pieces) of history information can be displayed.
In this example, the page switching operation on the setting history confirmation screen Gs is the operation of the cross key 16 (see FIG. 3 ). For example, each time one of the direction keys of the cross key 16 is pressed, the page is advanced by one page.

In the setting history confirmation screen Gs, a display number is attached to each history information. In the case of the present example, this display number is assigned "1" for the latest history and is assigned in ascending order from the latest to the past.
In addition, the current page number is also displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (the maximum page number is also written as "1/5" in the figure).

Although not shown in FIG. 46, the target events of the history display in this example include various errors other than the setting change and the setting confirmation described above. Examples of the error here include various errors other than the set value error, such as a door opening error, a replenishment error, and a ball clogging error.

The setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed in response to a predetermined operation performed in a predetermined state. Specifically, the setting history confirmation screen Gs in this example is displayed in response to the effect button 13 being operated during the setting confirmation (during the setting confirmation processing in step S109). Here, as can be understood from the above description, the setting confirmation processing is executed in response to the front frame 2 being opened and the setting key being operated when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and thus the setting history. The display of the confirmation screen Gs is supposed to be performed in such a state that the front frame 2 is opened at the time of starting.

FIG. 47 shows an example of the setting confirmation screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 during the setting confirmation. The production control section 24 (CPU 241) starts displaying this setting confirmation screen in response to receiving the setting confirmation command (see S704) from the main control unit 20 side.
In the setting confirmation screen of this example, a setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed together with information for notifying a user such as a hall staff that the setting is being confirmed (in the figure, "setting confirmation"). Guidance information of the operation required for the operation (in the figure, the characters “setting history list”, the icon of the effect button 13 and the character “decide” correspond) is displayed.

Here, in this example, the operation guide for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed on the setting confirmation screen, that is, the notification screen during the setting confirmation as described above, and the user follows the operation guide. In response to a predetermined operation (operation of the effect button 13 in this example), the setting history confirmation screen Gs shown in FIG. 46 is displayed.
This can be said in other words that the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) accepts the display instruction of the setting history confirmation screen Gs in a state in which the operation guidance is displayed on the notification screen during setting confirmation.
This allows the user to grasp two pieces of information, the timing at which the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed and the operation required for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs, only by the process of displaying the setting confirmation screen. it can. That is, it is possible to reduce the processing load when presenting the information that needs to be notified to the user in displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs.

Further, the setting history confirmation screen Gs of this example can be transited to all pages regardless of the number of stored history information. For example, even if the number of stored history information is “8” as shown in FIG. 46, all the pages from the second page to the fifth page can be displayed according to the page switching operation. In other words, it is possible to display all pages including no so-called blank pages with no history information.
As a result, the user can intuitively understand the maximum number of histories that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can hold and display.

FIG. 48 shows an example of history display information required for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
The history display information is information constructed by the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24 accumulating history information corresponding to each occurrence of a history display target event in a predetermined area of the RAM 243.

An area for storing history display information (hereinafter referred to as “history storage area”) is defined in the work area of the RAM 243, and the CPU 241 executes the processing (see FIGS. 52 and 53) described later. Then, each time a target event occurs, corresponding history information is added to the history storage area.
Hereinafter, the history information that is added one by one at each occurrence of the target event is referred to as “individual history information”. In this example, since up to 50 histories can be displayed, the history storage area in the RAM 243 is set as an area capable of storing 50 individual history information of histories 0 to 49. .

As the individual history information, the "year", "month", "hour", and "minute" information required to display the date and time information of the history and the type of history (setting change, setting confirmation, or error) as shown in the figure The information includes "type" information and "data" information. The information of “data” stores the information indicating the set value Ve after the change due to the setting change and the setting value Ve for which the setting has been confirmed when the setting of the “type” is changed and the setting is confirmed, and the information of the “type” is stored. When is “error”, information indicating the error type is stored.

As the history display information, for example, a checksum area and a storage area for the latest history position information are provided in the head area, and areas following these areas are used as storage areas for individual history information.
The checksum area is an area for storing the sum value calculated from the storage information in the entire storage area of the individual history information. The role of the sum value will be described later.
The latest history position information is information indicating the storage position of the last added individual history information on the RAM 243.

Here, since the RAM 243 has a relatively high information reading speed, it is desirable to use the history display information held in the work area as described above for the quick display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
However, the RAM 243 is not connected to the backup power source, and cannot hold the stored information when the power source is cut off. The setting operation history displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs is assumed to be a history over a relatively long period of time, such as several weeks or one month. If the storage destination memory is used, the history information is lost each time the power is cut off, and the history display cannot be properly performed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the memory 244 shown in FIG. 3 (that is, a memory capable of holding stored information even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off) is provided as a memory accessible by the CPU 243, and the memory 244 is The history display information stored in the work area of the RAM 243 is backed up and stored.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining an example of backup operation of history display information according to the embodiment.
In this example, the memory 244 is provided with a plurality of areas as areas for backing up and storing the history display information. Specifically, two areas, a first history storage area and a second history storage area in the figure, are set.
The CPU 241 copies the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 to each of the first and second history storage areas in the memory 244.

As described above, the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed during the setting confirmation (that is, the state immediately after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on again). In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. After. Since the history display information in the RAM 243 is cleared (cannot be retained) due to the power-off, the CPU 241 displays the history display backed up in the first history storage area or the second history storage area of the memory 244 at the time of starting itself. The usage information is written back to the history storage area of the RAM 243. As a result, it is possible to obtain a state in which the proper history display information is stored in the RAM 243 before the state in which the setting history confirmation screen Gs should be displayed.
Then, the CPU 241 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display the setting history confirmation screen Gs based on the history display information stored in the RAM 243.
Accordingly, it is possible to realize a gaming machine capable of displaying the setting operation history properly and promptly.

In this example, on the premise that the history display information in the RAM 243 is backed up in the memory 244 as described above, a plurality of history storage areas such as the first and second history storage areas described above are provided to make a plurality of backups. I am trying.
By thus making a plurality of backups of the history display information, it is possible to improve the display durability of the setting history confirmation screen Gs against the damage to the stored data in the memory 244. That is, even if data is damaged in a certain history storage area, the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed using the history display information of another history storage area. It is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence of a situation in which proper history information display is impossible due to this.

Here, in this example, the history display information is copied (backed up) to the memory 244 every time new history information (individual history information) is added to the history display information in the RAM 243. That is, when new individual history information is added to the history display information of the RAM 243 according to the occurrence of the target event, the history display information after the addition is stored in the first and second history storage areas in the memory 244. Copy to each.

For example, the history display information may be copied to the memory 244 at regular intervals, but in that case, the power is accidentally shut off immediately after the latest individual history information is added (power shutdown of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Occurs, the latest history is not reflected in the history display information in the memory 244, and the power is cut off. When the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed at the next startup, the latest history may not be displayed. obtain.
On the other hand, if the copy is performed every time the history is added as described above, it is possible to prevent occurrence of a situation where the stored contents of the history do not match between the RAM 243 and the memory 244 due to accidental power failure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a history information display problem.

It should be noted that copying to the memory 244 each time the individual history information is added is merely an example, and it is possible to perform the copying at other timings, for example, each time the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. is there.

FIG. 50 shows an example of additional processing of individual history information in history display information.
In this example, the storage area of the individual history information in the RAM 243 is a ring buffer area capable of holding 50 pieces of individual history information.
Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 50A, in a state in which 50 pieces of history t0 to history t49 are stored as individual history information, a state in which individual history information as a history t50 should be newly added Suppose
In this state, the latest history position indicated by the above-mentioned latest history position information is the storage position of the individual history information as the history t49 as illustrated.

When adding the individual history information as the history t50, first, as shown in FIG. 50B, the CPU 241 updates the latest history position to the next position, that is, the storage position of the history t0. Then, as shown in FIG. 50C, the individual history information of the history t50 to be added is stored in the storage position of the individual history information represented by the latest history position (that is, the history t0 is overwritten).
As a result, when new individual history information is added in a state where the individual history information is held at the maximum, the oldest individual history information is overwritten by the latest individual history information, and as a result, in the history display data. In the storage area for individual history information, the latest 50 pieces of individual history information from the latest are held. That is, the number of pieces of individual history information to be held does not exceed the upper limit (50 required for display).

In the present example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed based on the history display information in which the individual history information is stored in the manner of the ring buffer.
When the individual history information is stored in the form of a ring buffer, the latest history position is managed, and the new or old order of each history information is naturally grasped by the storage position of each history information based on the latest history position. Will be done. Therefore, when the history list is displayed in the new order or the old order as the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is not necessary to refer to the time information included in each history information to specify the new order or the old order of each history information. . That is, it is possible to reduce the processing load in displaying the history in a new order or old order.

Here, in this example, the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is executed only on condition that the setting is being confirmed, and the setting history is confirmed while the setting is being changed (during the setting change process of step S115). The screen Gs is not displayed.
Since the set value Ve can be changed during the setting change, displaying the history of the setting change during the setting change may undesirably confuse the user.
By not displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs during the setting change, it is possible to prevent the user from being confused regarding the history display of the set value Ve.

Next, the processing for realizing the operation related to the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs as the embodiment described above will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 51 to 55.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the history information initial setting process at power-on (S2001). The process is a process executed by the CPU 241 as part of the effect control main process described with reference to FIG. The process of S2001 is executed. As described above, the process of step S2001 is a process for holding the information necessary for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs in the RAM 243.

In FIG. 51, the CPU 241 performs a process of transferring the history display information of the first history storage area in the memory 244 to the internal work (RAM 243) in step S2301. Here, if the history display target event has occurred at a stage prior to the current activation, the history information update process of step S2160 described later is performed on the memory 244 (FIG. 53: Particularly, in step S2406), history display information is stored in each of the first and second history storage areas. In the process of step S2301, the history display information of the first history storage area among the history display information thus stored in the memory 244 is transferred to the RAM 243 and stored in the history storage area.

In subsequent step S2302, CPU 241 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the sum value of the first history storage area (checksum processing). That is, for the history display information (hereinafter referred to as “first history display information”) stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 from the first history storage area as described above, the storage value of the entire storage area of the individual history information is stored. The sum value is calculated from the above, and it is determined whether or not the calculated sum value matches the sum value stored in the checksum area in the first history display information.
The sum value in the checksum area was calculated from the storage value in the storage area for individual history information by the processing in step S2405 in the history information update processing in step S2160 (step S2160) when the history display information was backed up in the memory 244. Therefore, by determining the match/mismatch of the sum values in the checksum processing in step S2302, it is possible to determine whether the stored values in the entire storage area of the individual history information match/mismatch with those at the time of backup. Is. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the backed up history information (for example, presence or absence of illegal rewriting).

When it is determined in step S2302 that the sum values match, that is, the sum value is normal, the CPU 241 ends the initialization process of step S2001. That is, if the history information backed up in the first history storage area of the memory 244 is normal, the state in which the history information of the first history storage area is held in the RAM 243 is continued. That is, the history display process (FIG. 54) of step 2050 described later is executed based on the history information of the first history storage area thus held in the RAM 243.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 2302 that the thumb values do not match, that is, the thumb value is abnormal, the CPU 241 performs a process of transferring the history display information of the second history storage area in the memory 244 to the internal work in step S2303. .. That is, the history display information of the second history storage area is transferred to the RAM 243 and stored in the history storage area (that is, the history display information of the first history storage area stored in step S2301 is overwritten).

Next, in step S2304, the CPU 241 determines whether the sum value of the second history storage area is abnormal. That is, for the history display information of the second history storage area (hereinafter referred to as “second history display information”) stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 as described above, the storage value of the entire storage area of the individual history information The sum value is calculated from the above, and it is determined whether or not the calculated sum value matches the sum value stored in the checksum area in the second history display information. Accordingly, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the history information backed up in the second history storage area.

If it is determined in step S2304 that the sum values match, that is, the sum value is normal, the CPU 241 ends the initialization process of step S2001. That is, if the history information of the second history saving area stored in the RAM 243 is normal, the state in which the history information of the second history saving area is held in the RAM 243 is continued, and in this case, the second history saving area. The history display process (FIG. 54) based on the history information of FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 2304 that the thumb values do not match, that is, the thumb value is abnormal, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2305 to clear the history display information, and ends the initial setting process of step S2001. In the clearing process of step S2305, the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 and the history display information stored in the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244 are also cleared.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a process for updating history information in response to the occurrence of a history display target event.
The target events in this example are setting change, setting confirmation, and error occurrence, and the CPU 241 performs history information update processing according to the occurrence of these events based on the effect control command from the main control unit 20 side. It is supposed to run. Specifically, regarding the setting change and the setting confirmation, the history information is updated according to the reception of the setting change end command, the setting value command, and the setting confirmation command from the main control unit 20 side (see FIG. 52A). Regarding the error, the history information is updated according to the reception of various error commands from the main control unit 20 side (see FIG. 52B).
In the present example, each process of FIGS. 52A and 52B is executed as one of the command processes (see FIG. 43) of step S2130 described above.

FIG. 52A shows setting-related command processing S2130e corresponding to the setting-related command that is a command related to setting change and setting confirmation.
First, the CPU 241 confirms by the process of steps S2150 to S2154 whether any of the setting confirmation command, the setting confirmation end command, the setting change command, the setting change command, and the setting change end command is received.
Specifically, in step S2150, it is determined whether the setting confirmation command has been received. If the setting confirmation command has not been received, it is determined in step S2151 whether the setting confirmation end command has been received. If the setting confirmation end command has not been received, it is determined in step S2152 whether the setting change command has been received. If the setting change command has not been received, it is determined in step S2153 whether the setting change command has been received. To determine. If the setting change command has not been received, it is determined in step S2154 whether the setting change end command has been received.

Here, in step S2150, the setting confirmation command includes the notification information of the setting value Ve as described in FIG. 15, and in step S2150 in the present example, the setting confirmation command is the setting value " It is determined whether or not the command including the notification information of any one of "1" to "6" is received. That is, it is determined whether or not a command for notifying the set value Ve within the usable range Re, not within the usable range Ru, has been received as the setting confirmation command.
Further, in the present example, as for the setting change command of step S2152, similarly, a command for notifying any of the set values Ve (“1” to “6”) within the usable range Re instead of within the usable range Ru is a command. It is determined whether it has been received.
It should be noted that the significance of allowing the command notifying the value within the usable range Re instead of the usable range Ru for the command notifying the set value Ve in this manner will be described later.

If it is determined in step S2150 that the setting confirmation end command (setting values “1” to “6”) has been received, the CPU 241 executes the setting confirmation scenario registration processing in step S2155, and proceeds to step S2159.
If it is determined in step S2151 that the setting confirmation end command has been received, the CPU 241 executes the setting confirmation end scenario registration processing in step S2156 and proceeds to step S2159. In step S2152, the setting change command (setting value “1”). ~"6") is received, the process directly proceeds to step S2159.
Further, when it is determined in step S2153 that the setting change command is received, the CPU 241 executes the setting change start scenario registration process in step S2157, proceeds to step S2159, and determines in step S2154 that the setting change end command is received. In this case, the setting change end scenario registration process is executed in step S2158, and the process proceeds to step S2159.
By executing the scenario registration processing in steps S2155, S2156, S2157, and S2158, effect operations corresponding to setting confirmation, setting confirmation end, setting change start, and setting change end are executed, respectively.

In step S2159, the CPU 241 determines whether the specification/setting information command has been received. That is, it is determined whether any of the specification command and the setting value command has been received. Although illustration is omitted, the specification command is information indicating the specifications of the gaming machine 1 transmitted by the CPU 201 of the main control unit 20 at the time of activation (for example, the winning probability of the big hit or the number of stages of the set value Ve to be used. It is used as a command for notifying (representing information, etc.). The set value command is a command transmitted by the CPU 201 in step S808 (FIG. 17) in the main loop preprocessing.
The upper byte of both the specification command and the set value command is a specific value representing the specification information of the gaming machine 1, and in step S2159, it is determined whether or not a command having the upper byte of the specific value is received. Thus, it is determined whether any of the specification command and the setting value command is received.

If neither the specification command nor the setting value command has been received, and if it is determined in step S2159 that the specification/setting information command has not been received, the CPU 241 ends the setting-related command processing in step S2130e. That is, in this case, the process of storing the set value in the RAM 243 in step S2163 described below is not executed.

On the other hand, when determining that the specification/setting information command is received, the CPU 241 stores the specification information in the RAM 243. That is, the value of the upper byte of the received specification designation command or the set value command is stored in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 243.

In step S2161 following step S2160, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the setting is indefinite. That is, it is determined whether the received specification/setting information command is a specification command, not a setting value command. Here, in this example, the lower byte of the specification command is "0FH", and the lower byte of the setting value command has a value corresponding to the setting value Ve. Therefore, in step S2161, it is determined whether the specification designation/setting information command is not the setting value command but the specification designation command depending on whether the lower byte of the received specification designation/setting information command is “0FH”. (Whether the setting is indefinite) is determined.

When the lower byte is not “0FH” and it is determined that the setting is not indefinite (that is, a setting value command), the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2162 and determines whether the setting information is the usable range Re. That is, it is determined whether the value indicated by the identification data (see FIG. 16) of the set value Ve included in the received set value command is within the range of “00” to “05” corresponding to the usable range Re. judge.
When the value indicated by the identification data is within the usable range Re and the setting information is determined to be the usable range Re, the CPU 241 stores the setting value information in the RAM 243 in step S2163. That is, the identification data is stored in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 243.
In response to executing the storage process of step S2163, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2164.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2162 that the setting information is not within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 skips the storage process of step S2163 and advances the process to step S2164.
If it is determined in step S2161 that the setting is indefinite (that is, the specification command), the CPU 241 skips the determination processing of step S2162 and the storage processing of S2163 and advances the processing to step S2164.

Note that the determination process of step S2162 functions as an abnormality determination process of the set value Ve received from the main control unit 20 side, and when it is determined to be abnormal, the set value Ve is not stored in the RAM 243. However, the significance of determining on the side of the effect control unit 24 whether or not the set value Ve is within the usable range Re instead of the actual use range Ru will be described later.

In step S2164, the CPU 241 determines whether it is time to change or confirm the setting. This determination is, for example, whether the command determined to be received in the current setting value related command process (S2130e) is the first “setting value command” after receiving the “setting change end command” or the “setting confirmation command”. It can be determined as to whether or not

If it is time to change or confirm the setting, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2165 to set the history type. That is, the value of "type" and the value of "data" described above are set for the individual history information to be newly added. Specifically, when the setting is changed, a value indicating “setting change” is set as the value of “type”, and a value indicating the current set value Ve (set value Ve that has been set) is set as the value of “data”. set. Further, if it is at the time of confirming the setting, a value indicating “confirmation of setting” as the value of “type” is set as the value of “data”, and the setting value Ve is confirmed (the setting value Ve notified by the setting confirmation command). Set respectively.

In response to executing the setting process of step S2165, the CPU 241 executes the history information updating process of step S2166.
The history information update processing in step S2166 will be described again.

In step S2167 following step S2166, the CPU 241 executes a process of transmitting the setting value information to the liquid crystal side. That is, the process of transmitting the information indicating the set value Ve notified by the set value command to the liquid crystal control unit 40. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 36 can display the set value Ve notified by the set value command, such as the set value Ve set in the setting change process.
In response to executing the transmission process of step S2167, the CPU 241 ends the process of step S2130e.

FIG. 52B shows the processing S2130f corresponding to the error command.
First, the CPU 241 executes error notification in step S2170. That is, the notification process (the notification process using a predetermined effect means) according to the error type specified from the received error command is executed.

Next, as the history type setting process of step S2171, the CPU 241 sets the value of "type" to the value indicating "error" and the value of "data" to the error number (value indicating the error type) for the individual history information to be newly added. ), the history information update process of step S2166 is executed, and then the process of step S2130f ends.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the history information update processing in step S2166. The update process is a process of updating the history display information in the RAM 243 so that the individual history information is added according to the newly generated target event.
First, in step S2401, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the latest history position information has a value within a specified range (that is, whether or not within the range of 0 to 49 in this example). If the latest history position information is not a value within the specified range (that is, 50 or more), the CPU 241 ends the update process of step S2160. That is, in this case, since the latest history position information is abnormal, the history display information is not updated.

If the latest history position information has a value within the specified range, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2402 and updates the latest history position information to the value of the next position. The value of the latest history position information here is updated within the range of 0 to 49, and as will be understood from the description of FIG. 42 above, when the value is “49”, the next position is updated. Will be set to "0" (that is, the value will be cyclically incremented within the range of 0-49).

Next, in step S2403, the CPU 241 acquires time information (year/month/day/hour/minute) of the RTC function unit, and in step S2404, saves history information in the area indicated by the latest history position information. That is, the latest history position information indicates on the RAM 243 the individual history information including the acquired time information and the information of “type” and “data” set in the corresponding processing of steps S2165 and S2171 described in FIG. To be stored in the storage area of.

Note that, as the individual history information, it is possible to store (display) the energization time after the power is turned on, instead of the time information by the RTC. As a result, in a gaming machine that does not have the RTC function unit, it becomes possible to display information that can specify the occurrence time of the target event as history information.

In step S2405 following step S2404, the CPU 241 performs a process of calculating the sum value of the history information of the internal work and storing the sum value in the checksum area. That is, for the history display information in the RAM 243, a sum value is calculated from the storage value of the entire storage area of the individual history information including the individual history information newly added in step S2404, and the sum value is calculated as the sum value. Stored in the checksum area in.

Further, in subsequent step S2406, the CPU 241 performs a process of transferring the history display information of the internal work to the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244, and ends the update process of step S2160.
As a result, new individual history information is added, and history display information including a sum value reflecting the addition of the individual history information is stored in the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244.

Here, as will be understood from the above description, in this example, when the history information stored in the RAM 243 is backed up in the memory 244, the sum value is calculated from the history information stored in the RAM 243 and the sum value The history information stored in the RAM 243 is stored in the memory 244.
As a method of calculating the sum value for determining the abnormality of the backup information and saving it in the memory 244, first, only the history information stored in the RAM 243 is copied to the memory 244, and then the copy is stored in the memory 244. It is also possible to calculate the sum value from the history information and store the sum value in the memory 244. However, in that case, if copying of the history information from the RAM 243 to the memory 244 partially fails, the sum value itself becomes a correct value, that is, it is determined that there is no abnormality in the checksum processing (S2302 or S2304). In reality, inaccurate history information is backed up, which may cause a display failure of history information.
According to the above-described history information and sum value copying method, if copying of the history information to the memory 244 partially fails, the history information is determined to be abnormal by the checksum processing. Since the history information stored in 244 can be prevented from being used for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to prevent incorrect history information from being displayed.

Next, the processing for displaying history information based on the history display information held in the RAM 243 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 54 and 55.
FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the history display process (S2050). As will be understood from the above description of FIG. 41, this history display processing is executed once per frame period in this example.

In FIG. 54, the CPU 241 determines in step S2501 whether or not the setting is being confirmed. Whether or not the setting confirmation is being performed can be determined by the presence or absence of reception of the above-described setting confirmation command.
If the setting is not being confirmed, the CPU 241 ends the history display process of step S2050. As described above, in this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs is supposed to be displayed only during the setting confirmation.

On the other hand, if the setting is being confirmed, the CPU 241 confirms the history display flag in step S2502. The history display flag is an identifier (the initial value is OFF) set to ON in step S2504, which will be described later. ON indicates that the history is being displayed, and OFF indicates that the history is not being displayed.
When the display start condition of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is not satisfied, the history display flag is off, so the CPU 241 advances the process from step S2502 to step S2503.

In step S2503, the CPU 241 determines whether the display instruction operation is performed. As described above, in this example, the display instruction operation of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is the operation of the effect button 13, and the CPU 241 determines whether or not the effect button 13 is operated in step S2503.

As will be understood from the description of steps S2501 to S2503, the CPU 241 accepts the display instruction operation of the setting history confirmation screen Gs on condition that the setting is being confirmed.

If there is no display instruction operation in step S2503, the CPU 241 ends the history display process of step S2050.
On the other hand, if there is a display instruction operation, the CPU 241 sets the history display flag in step S2504 (turns it on), and sets the display page identifier P to "0" in subsequent step S2505. The display page identifier P is a value for identifying the display page of the setting history confirmation screen Gs.

In response to executing the process of step S2505, the CPU 241 executes the history information screen creation process in step S2508. Then, the history display process of step S2050 ends.
The history information screen creation process in step S2508 is a process for transmitting information necessary for screen display of the page indicated by the display page identifier P to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side. That is, when step S2508 is executed after step S2505, the information necessary for screen display for the first page (P=0) is transmitted.
Details of the history information screen creation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined in the previous step S2502 that the history display flag is on (that is, the state after the display of the first page has already been performed), the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2506 and determines whether there is a page switching operation. To judge. That is, in this example, it is determined whether or not any one of the direction key of the cross key 16 has been operated.
If there is a page switching operation, the CPU 241 proceeds to the history information screen creation processing in step S2508.

Here, the history information screen creation processing of step S2508 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In FIG. 55, first, in step S2601, the CPU 241 calculates the history display head position Idx. That is, the position (the position on the RAM 243) of the storage area of the individual history information to be displayed at the head position of the page to be displayed is calculated as the head position Idx. Specifically, the head position Idx is calculated by “latest history position−P×α” (where α is the display number of individual history information per page: “10” in this example). For example, when displaying the first page (P=0), the start position Idx is obtained as the “latest history position” from the “latest history position-0×α”. Alternatively, when displaying the third page (P=2), the start position Idx is obtained as “latest history position−2α”.

In step S2602 subsequent to step S2601, the CPU 241 transmits the page number as a command. That is, the information of the page number specified by the page identifier P (that is, the page number of the display target page) is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 by the liquid crystal control command.

Next, the CPU 241 sets the display number to "1" in step S2603, and by the processes of steps S2604 to S2610, information necessary for screen display of the display target page (specifically, individual history information and its display number). Is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40.
First, in step S2604 following step S2603, the CPU 241 refers to the history information of the area indicated by the start position Idx. That is, the storage information of the area indicated by the head position Idx in the history storage area (history display information) of the RAM 243 is referred to.

Next, in step S2605, the CPU 241 determines whether or not there is history information, that is, whether or not the individual history information is stored in the area indicated by the head position Idx.
When the individual history information is stored and it is determined that there is history information, the CPU 241 executes the command transmission process of the display number in step S2606, and then executes the command transmission process of history information in step S2607. That is, the individual history information acquired from the area indicated by the display number and the start position Idx is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 by the liquid crystal control command.

In step S2608 following step S2607, the CPU 241 updates the head position Idx to a value corresponding to the storage area of the past individual history information (Idx←Idx-1). This update processing is executed so that the value of the start position Idx is updated cyclically within the range of 0 to 49 (that is, when the start position Idx is "0", it is updated to "49").

Further, in the subsequent step S2609, the CPU 241 increments the display number by 1 and determines in step S2610 whether or not the transmission process for one page (transmission of individual history information and display number) is completed. This determination can be realized, for example, as a determination as to whether or not the value of the display number is α or more.

If the transmission process for one page is not completed, the CPU 241 executes the processes of steps S2604 to S2610 again. As a result, when one page of individual history information is stored, the transmission processing of the individual history information and its display number is repeated until the transmission processing of one page is completed. When the stored individual history information is less than one page, the individual history information and the display number thereof are transmitted only for the stored individual history information (see S2605).

Even if the individual history information is not stored in the area indicated by the start position Idx (that is, even if the stored value is “0”), the individual history information based on “0” is directly controlled by the liquid crystal controller 40. It can also be sent by command. In that case, on the side of the liquid crystal control unit 40, for the individual history information that has received the liquid crystal control command by such "0", a display indicating no history is displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (for example, "-" illustrated in FIG. 38). Display control is performed so that "--" is displayed.
According to this method, the determination process of step S2605 can be omitted.

When transmitting the individual history information to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S2607, it is determined whether the individual history information to be transmitted is history information regarding setting change (setting change history information). In the case of the setting change history information, it is possible to confirm the abnormality of the set value Ve included in the history information. Specifically, it is determined whether the set value Ve is a value outside the usable range Re (whether it is outside the range of "0" to "5").
If the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re and it is recognized that the set value Ve in the individual history information to be transmitted is abnormal, the liquid crystal control unit 40 is instructed to display an abnormality. Send. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to display information indicating that an abnormality has been recognized in the set value Ve in the corresponding individual history information (for example, display of an "E" mark meaning an error). That is, it becomes possible to inform that the setting change history is not normal.
Alternatively, when an abnormality is found in the set value Ve in the individual history information to be transmitted, the information of the set value Ve included in the individual history information may not be transmitted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value Ve of the individual history information in which an abnormality is found in the setting value Ve from being displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, and to notify that the setting history is not normal.

When the CPU 241 determines in step S2610 that the transmission processing for one page has ended, the history information screen creation processing in step S2508 ends.
When the transmission processing for one page is completed, a liquid crystal control command indicating that fact can be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side.

Here, the liquid crystal control unit 40 receives one of the various liquid crystal control commands transmitted by the above processing, and responds to one page of the setting history confirmation screen Gs in the mode illustrated in FIG. 46. The image display operation by the liquid crystal display device 36 is controlled so that the screen display is performed.

The description returns to FIG. 54.
When determining in step S2506 that the page switching operation has not been performed, the CPU 241 determines in step S2509 whether or not there is an end instruction operation, that is, whether or not there is an operation for instructing to end the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs. In this example, the end instruction operation is the operation of the effect button 13, and therefore the CPU 241 determines in step S2509 whether or not the effect button 13 is operated.

When it is determined that the effect button 13 has not been operated and the end instruction operation has not been performed, the CPU 241 ends the history display process of step S2050. As described above, the history display process of step S2050 is performed once per frame period, and the processes of step S2501 and subsequent steps are executed again in the next frame period.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2509 that the end instruction operation has been performed, the CPU 241 clears (turns off) the history display flag in step S2510, sets the demo screen display command in step S2511, and then sets the history of step S2050. Display processing ends.
The process of step S2511 is a process of setting a liquid crystal control command for instructing the liquid crystal control unit 40 to execute the above-mentioned demo screen display for waiting for a customer in the command buffer.

Here, according to the above process, if the individual history information does not exist at all for a certain page, only the page number is notified to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side (S2602), and the individual history information and its display number are displayed. Is not sent.
On the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, when the page number is transmitted in this way, but the individual history information and the display number are not transmitted, the page number information of the page and the display number of each page are displayed as the screen of the corresponding page. The liquid crystal display device 36 is caused to display a screen showing information indicating that individual history information does not exist (for example, the notation of "---" in FIG. 38).
As a result, it is possible to display all pages, including so-called blank pages, which have no history information. That is, it is possible to transit to all pages regardless of the number of stored history information.

Note that it is also possible not to display pages for which individual history information does not exist at all. In this case, the CPU 241 does not allow the liquid crystal control unit 40 to execute the screen display for the current display page P in response to the determination that there is no history information in step S2605 (FIG. 55) at the display number=1 stage. It is sufficient to give an instruction.

As will be understood from the processing of FIGS. 54 and 55 described above, in this example, when the individual history information to be displayed is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, it is assumed that the individual history information is individually transmitted one by one. There is.
Thereby, the individual history information can be transmitted by a command.
Therefore, the program design on the liquid crystal control unit 40 side can be facilitated.

In the above description, the example in which the history information of the corresponding page is transmitted every time the page is switched has been described, but the history information for all pages is first transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, and the liquid crystal control unit 40 is switched at the time of page switching. A page switching command may be transmitted to the side to instruct switching of the display page.

[5-3. Regarding the data type of the setting value in the embodiment]

Here, in the RAM 243 of the effect control unit 24, an area for storing the setting value Ve notified by the setting confirmation command or the setting value command from the main control unit 20 (hereinafter referred to as “notification setting value storage area A1”). ) And a storage area for the set value Ve (hereinafter referred to as “history set value storage area A2”) that constitutes a part of the individual history information necessary for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs are separately provided. .
Then, in the present embodiment, in the operation program of the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24, the program variable of the set value Ve stored in the notification set value storage area A1 (hereinafter referred to as “notification set value Pv1”) and the history set value. The type (data type) of the program variable (hereinafter referred to as “history set value Pv2”) of the set value Ve stored in the storage area A2 is the same. Specifically, in this example, the type of the notification set value Pv1 and the history set value Pv2 are set to the same “unsigned 8 bit”, so that the number of bits of the set value Ve stored in the history set value storage area A2 is set to the notification setting. The number of bits of the set value Ve stored in the value storage area A1 is matched.
As a result, it is possible to prevent information from being lost when the set value Ve stored in the notification set value storage area A1 is stored in the history set value storage area A2 (see S2163 to S2166 in FIG. 52A). That is, since the number of bits of the history setting value Pv2 is smaller than the number of bits of the notification setting value Pv1, the setting value Ve acquired from the notification setting value storage area A1 cannot be properly stored in the history setting value storage area A2. This can be prevented, and accurate information can be displayed as the setting history information.

FIG. 56 exemplifies the numerical value of the set value Ve that can be represented by “8 bits without code” as described above.
By using 8 bits, six values “1” to “6” can be expressed as the set value Ve as illustrated, and a value larger than “6”, in other words, an abnormal value outside the usable range Re can be expressed. It is possible to express.
That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to store an abnormal value other than the value of the usable range Re as the set value Ve, so that when an abnormality occurs, the cause can be easily identified. ing.

[5-4. Proposed setting value]

The effect control unit 24 is configured to be able to execute control for causing a set value suggesting effect that suggests the current set value Ve to the player.
The effect control unit 24 of the present example, as such a set value suggestive effect, suggestive effect by the left pattern as described below, suggestive effect by the mini character notice, suggestive effect at the end of the big hit, suggestion by the SU (step-up) notice Performs control to bring out the effect.

(Indicative production by the left pattern)

First, the suggestive effect based on the left pattern will be described. The left design here means the “left” decorative design among the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative designs displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a left symbol lottery process for lottering the contents of the left symbol.
First, the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24 determines in step S2701 whether or not the special mode 1 is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the game mode is a predetermined mode as "special mode 1".
If it is not the special mode 1, the CPU 241 determines in step S2702 whether or not it is the special mode 2, and if it is not the special mode 2, continuous reach prefetch in step S2703 (display of the decorative symbol is predetermined after the prefetch toward the fluctuation). It is determined whether or not a pre-reading effect that is controlled according to the aspect is won.

If the continuous reach prefetch is not won in step S2703, the CPU 241 acquires the set value Ve stored in the predetermined area (the above-described notification set value storage area A1) of the RAM 243 as the set value information acquisition process of step S2705. Is executed, and in step S2706, the offset value is acquired from the offset table based on the setting value information. In step S2707, the content of the left symbol is determined based on the lottery value.

Here, FIG. 58 shows an example of the left symbol lottery table used in step S2707, and FIG. 59 shows an example of the left symbol lottery offset table used in step S2706. Note that these tables are stored in predetermined areas of the ROM 242, respectively.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the left symbol lottery table, the winning probability for each symbol content (10 types of symbol contents of symbols 0 to 9 in this example) targeted for the lottery is “1” to “6”. Is set for each set value Ve of. It should be noted that, in the figure, the value is represented by the distribution value on the assumption that the random number for the lottery can take 10000 values from 0 to 9999 as the value representing the winning probability. Similar to the case, the threshold value for the random number for lottery is actually stored. Note that this point is the same in each of the tables shown in FIGS. 63, 65, 68, 72, and 74 described later.

In the left symbol lottery offset table shown in FIG. 59, corresponding offset values are stored for each set value Ve of "1" to "6". Specifically, the set value Ve “1” is “0”, the set value Ve “2” is “1”, the set value Ve “3” is “2”, and the set value Ve “ “3” is stored for “4”, “4” is stored for the set value Ve “5”, and “5” is stored for the set value Ve “6”.

In step S2706 of FIG. 57, an offset value corresponding to the current set value Ve acquired in step S2705 is acquired according to the left symbol lottery offset table shown in FIG. Then, in step S2707, the lottery table at the position (address) specified by the offset value acquired in step S2706 is selected from the lottery table for each set value Ve in the left symbol lottery table shown in FIG. Specifically, if the offset value is "0", the offset value is "1" when the lottery table of the set value "1" located at the top of the left symbol lottery table (that is, stored in the address with the smallest number) is set. "If the offset value is "2", the setting value "2" which is the second from the top in the left symbol lottery table, and the setting value that is the third from the top in the left symbol lottery table " The lottery table stored in the position specified by the offset value is selected, such as selecting the “3” lottery table.

By the series of processes described above, if the current state does not correspond to any of the first special mode and the second special mode, and if the continuous reach prefetch is unwinned, the left symbol is selected according to the winning probability based on the set value Ve. The contents will be drawn. In other words, the appearance rate of the symbols 0 to 9 of the left symbol is different depending on the set value Ve, and thus the set value that suggests the type of the set value Ve to the player depending on the appearance rate of the specific symbol content of the left symbol. Suggestive production is realized.

As shown in FIG. 57, if it is determined in step S2701 that the mode is the first special mode, the CPU 241 passes the processes of steps S2702 to S2708 and ends the series of processes. That is, under the first special mode, the symbol content of the left symbol is not selected by lottery.
Further, in each of the case where it is determined in step S2702 that the second special mode is set and the case where it is determined in step S2703 that the continuous reach prefetch is elected, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2704 without referring to the set value Ve. The offset value is acquired from the offset table, and the process proceeds to the table selection process in step S2707. That is, in this case, the offset value of “0” in the left symbol lottery offset table is acquired (S2704), and the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve “1” is selected from the left symbol lottery table (S2707). . Therefore, under the second special mode, under the continuous reach prefetching winning state, the symbol content of the left symbol is drawn by a fixed winning probability that does not depend on the set value Ve. In other words, the set value suggestion effect using the left symbol is not performed.

As described above, in this example, the set value suggestion production using the left symbol is not performed under the continuous reach prefetching winning state, but by this, the symbol content of the left symbol won in the left symbol lottery process is the continuous reach prefetching. It is possible to prevent it from not matching the symbol content of the left symbol selected in.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing another example of the left symbol lottery process.
First, in this another example, the table shown in FIG. 61 is prepared as the left symbol lottery offset table stored in the ROM 242. That is, a table having the same content as that shown in FIG. 59 is stored as a first left symbol lottery offset table (FIG. 61A), and a second left symbol lottery offset different from the first left symbol lottery offset table. The table is stored (FIG. 61B).
In the second left symbol lottery offset table, the same offset value (“2” in this example) is stored for the set values Ve of “1” to “6”.

In the left symbol lottery process shown in FIG. 60, the processes of steps S2710 and S2711 are executed instead of the process of step S2704 shown in FIG. 57, as the processes to be executed in the second special mode and the continuous reach prefetching win. The point to do is different.
In this case, the CPU 241 acquires the setting value Ve stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 in the setting value information acquisition in step S2710, and in the subsequent step S2711, acquires the offset value from the second offset table based on the setting value information. , And proceeds to the lottery table selection processing in step S2707.
Since the offset value acquired in step S2711 is the same value regardless of the set value Ve, in the selection processing of step S2707 in this case, the same lottery table is selected regardless of the set value Ve.
In addition, in this another example, the first left symbol lottery offset table shown in FIG. 61A is used as the offset table in step S2706.

As described above, in the second special mode, as a method for performing the left symbol lottery that does not depend on the set value Ve in correspondence with the continuous reach prefetching winning, a fixed offset value is acquired without referring to the set value Ve. The method is not limited to the method, and a method is adopted in which the same lottery table is selected regardless of the set value Ve by referring to the offset table in which the same offset value is stored in each set value Ve as shown in FIG. 61B. Can also

(Suggestive production with a mini character notice)

FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the mini character advance notice lottery process executed by the CPU 241.
First, as a premise, in the gaming machine 1 of the present example, it is possible to display two types of first mini-character notice production and second mini-character notice production as the mini-character notice production. It is assumed that the lottery process for the first mini-character notice production and the second mini-character notice production has already been executed as a process different from the process shown in FIG. 62.
In this example, the first mini character advance notice effect is not an effect suggesting the set value Ve, but an effect suggesting the set value Ve can be displayed as the second mini character advance notice effect.

In FIG. 62, the CPU 241 determines in step S2801 whether or not the mini character advance notice effect has been won. If the mini character advance notice production has not been won, the CPU 241 ends the mini character advance notice lottery process of FIG. 62 without executing the series of processes described below.

If the player has won the mini character announcement effect, the CPU 241 determines in step S2802 whether the winning content is the first mini character announcement.
When it is determined that the first mini-character notice production has been won and the winning content is the first mini-character notice, the CPU 241 includes the change pattern designation command received from the main control unit 20 as the change pattern information acquisition process in step S2803. After performing the process of acquiring the fluctuation pattern information to be obtained, the offset value is acquired from the offset table based on the fluctuation pattern won in step S2804, and the process of selecting the lottery table based on the offset value is performed in subsequent step S2805. .

FIG. 63 shows an example of the first mini-character notice lottery table used in step S2805, and FIG. 64 shows an example of the first notice offset table used in step S2804. Note that these tables are stored in predetermined areas of the ROM 242, respectively.
In the first advance notice offset table shown in FIG. 64, a short variation pattern (“short variation P” in the figure), a reach variation pattern (“reach variation P” in the figure), a super reach variation pattern (“SP reach P in the figure” The offset value is defined for each "). In this example, the short fluctuation pattern corresponds to the above-mentioned “normal fluctuation 4s”, “normal fluctuation 6s”, “normal fluctuation 8s”, and “normal fluctuation 12s”, and the reach fluctuation pattern corresponds to the above-mentioned “normal reach” and super reach fluctuation. The pattern corresponds to the above-mentioned "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4". As shown in the figure, the short variation pattern is 0, the reach variation pattern is 1, and the super reach variation pattern. 2 has an offset value of 2 set.

In the first mini-character advance notice lottery table of FIG. 63, a plurality of lottery tables are provided in which the winning probabilities are sorted according to the contents of the first mini-character advance notice. In this example, as the contents of the first mini-character notice, five kinds of “none”, “holding change explanation”, “strong notice explanation”, “probability change mode explanation”, and “character introduction” are prepared. Three types of tables, Table 1 to Table 3, which determine the distribution of the winning probabilities with respect to the contents, are prepared.

In the acquisition processing of step S2804 in FIG. 62, the offset value is acquired from the first advance notice offset table shown in FIG. 64 based on the information of the winning fluctuation pattern specified from the acquired fluctuation pattern information, and in step S2805. In the selection process, a lottery table is selected from the first mini-character advance notice lottery table shown in FIG. 63 based on the offset value. Specifically, in this example, when the winning fluctuation pattern is a short fluctuation pattern and 0 is acquired as the offset value, the table 1 is selected. If the winning variation pattern is the reach variation pattern and 1 is acquired as the offset value, table 2 is selected, and if the winning variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern and 2 is acquired as the offset value, table 3 is selected. To be selected.

In step S2806 following step S2805, the CPU 241 determines the content of the first mini character advance notice based on the selected value, and ends the mini character advance notice lottery process shown in FIG. That is, the content of the first mini-character notice is determined according to the distribution value in the selected table among the tables 1 to 3.
In this way, the first mini character advance notice effect is not an effect according to the set value Ve, but an effect according to a variation pattern.

Further, when the CPU 241 determines in the previous step S2802 that the winning content is not the first mini character advance notice, the CPU 241 acquires the setting change information in step S2807, and determines in step S2808 whether or not the setting is changed. That is, the latest individual history information is acquired from the individual history information stored for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs described above, and whether the “type” information in the individual history information is “setting change” or not. To determine.

If a negative result that the setting information is not “setting changed” is obtained in step S2808 and the setting is not changed, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2809 and executes the setting value information acquisition processing. In step S2810, the offset value is acquired from the offset table based on the setting value information, and in step S2811, the process of selecting the lottery table based on the offset value is performed. Determine the content.

FIG. 65 shows an example of the second mini-character advance notice lottery table used in step S2811, and FIG. 66 shows an example of the second advance notice offset table used in step S2810 (note that these tables also serve as the ROM 242). Stored in a predetermined area of each).
In the second advance notice offset table shown in FIG. 66, an offset value is set for each set value Ve. In the second advance notice offset table of this example, the offset value is set not only for the set values Ve “1” to “6” but also for the values “for raising” and “for lowering”. This will be described later.

In the second mini-character advance notice lottery table of FIG. 65, a plurality of lottery tables are provided in which the winning probabilities are distributed according to the contents of the second mini-character advance notice. In this example, the content of the second mini-character notice is “none” “game description” “setting suggestion explanation 1” “setting suggestion explanation 2” “setting suggestion explanation 3” “setting suggestion explanation 4” “setting suggestion explanation 5” 7 types are prepared, and as a lottery table, a table that defines the distribution of the winning probabilities with respect to these contents is set for each of the set values Ve “1” to “6” and “for raising” and “for lowering”. Correspondingly, 8 types are prepared.

62, in the acquisition process of step S2810, an offset value corresponding to the setting value Ve acquired in step S2809 is acquired from the second advance notice offset table shown in FIG. 66, and in the selection process of step S2811, the offset value is acquired. Based on the above, the lottery table is selected from the second mini character advance notice lottery table shown in FIG.
Then, in the determination process of step S2820 subsequent to step S2811, a process of determining the content of the second mini character advance notice is performed according to the selected lottery table.

If the CPU 241 obtains an affirmative result in the previous step S2808 that the above-mentioned “type” information is “setting change” and the setting has been changed, it proceeds to step S2812 and sets the previous and present setting value information. Is acquired, and it is determined in a succeeding step S2813 whether or not the set value is higher than the previous value.
That is, of the individual history information whose “type” information is “setting change”, information on the setting value Ve included in the individual history information stored when the setting was changed last time, and the “notification setting value storage area A1” of the RAM 243. The information of the set value Ve stored in is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the latter set value Ve is larger than the former set value Ve.

In step S2813, if the latest set value Ve is not larger than the previous set value Ve and the set value is not higher than the previous set value Ve, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2814 and executes the first step. The selected value is acquired, and in the following step S2815, the offset value is acquired from the offset table based on the first selected value. That is, the offset value is acquired from the second advance notice offset table in FIG. 66. Here, the first selection value is a value for selecting an address corresponding to “for lowering” shown in FIG. 66, and therefore, by performing the processing of steps S2814 and S2815, the second selection value is given. An offset value corresponding to "for lowering" is acquired from the offset table.
Then, in step S2816 following step S2815, the CPU 241 executes a process of selecting a lottery table based on the offset value, that is, a process of selecting a table corresponding to "for lowering" from the second mini-character preliminary lottery table of FIG. , And proceeds to the determination process of step S2820.
As a result, the content of the second mini-character advance notice effect when the setting change for lowering the set value Ve is performed is determined based on the "lowering" lottery table.

On the other hand, if an affirmative result that the set value is higher than the last time is obtained in step S2813, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2817 to acquire the second selected value, and based on the second selected value in subsequent step S2818. Get the offset value from the offset table. The second selection value is a value for selecting an address corresponding to "for raising" shown in FIG. 66. Therefore, by executing the processing of steps S2817 and S2818, the second selection value is set to "2. The offset value corresponding to "for raising" is acquired.
Then, in step S2819 following step S2818, the CPU 241 executes a process of selecting a lottery table based on the offset value, that is, selecting a table corresponding to "for raising" from the second mini-character preliminary lottery table of FIG. , And proceeds to the determination process of step S2820.
As a result, the content of the second mini-character advance notice effect when the setting change for increasing the set value Ve is performed is determined based on the “for increasing” lottery table.

According to the lottery table of FIG. 65, in this example, the winning probabilities of the announcement contents “none”, “game description”, “setting suggestion explanation 1”, “setting suggestion explanation 2”, and “setting suggestion explanation 3” are “up” and “ Although it is the same in “for lowering”, the winning probabilities of “for setting explanation 4” and “for setting explanation 5” are different between “for raising” and “for lowering”. Regarding the “setting suggestion explanation 4”, the winning probabilities of the set values Ve “1” to “6” and “for lowering” are all set to “0”, while the winning probabilities of “up” are other than “0”, Specifically, in this example, "1000/10000" is set, and therefore, "setting suggestion explanation 4" is set as the notice content that can appear only in the case of "for raising". Further, regarding “setting suggestion explanation 5”, the winning probabilities of the setting values Ve “1” to “6” and “for raising” are all set to “0”, while the winning probability of “for lowering” is “0”. Other than this (“1000/10000” in this example), therefore, the “setting suggestion explanation 5” is the notice content that can appear only in the case of “for lowering”.

In FIG. 62, the CPU 241 ends the mini character advance notice lottery process in response to the execution of the determination process of step S2820.

Here, in determining whether or not the set value is higher than the previous time in step S2813, the set value Ve and the “notified set value storage area” stored in the “history set value storage area A2” in the RAM 243 are stored. The set value Ve stored in “A1” is compared, but at this time, an area for storing the previous set value Ve in the RAM 243 separately from the “history set value storage area A2” ( A “previous set value storage area A3”) may be provided.
In this case, the memory 244 stores the previous setting value Ve separately from the setting history information. For example, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off, the value of the “notification setting value storage area A1” is stored in the memory 244. The value written in the memory 244 at the time of writing and power-on can be read in the "previous set value storage area A3".
Then, regarding the lottery of the effect, the increase/decrease is determined by comparing the values of the “previous setting value storage area A3” and the “notification setting value storage area A1”.

In step S2813, if the previous setting value Ve and the current setting value Ve are the same, the second mini character advance notice lottery table is referenced with the current setting value Ve stored in the “notification setting value storage area A1” as an offset. It is possible to do it.

(Suggestive production by big hit end production)

FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the jackpot effect lottery process executed by the CPU 241.
The lottery process shown in FIG. 67 is a process of lottery based on the set value Ve of the contents of the jackpot end INT (interval) effect that appears in response to the round game being executed the specified number of rounds. Specifically, the background image in the big hit end INT effect is selected by lottery.
Here, for the sake of explanation, it is assumed that there are three types of hits, “3R probability variation”, “9R probability variation”, and “3R time saving”.

First, in step S2901, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the hit type is “3R probability change”. The type of winning is notified by, for example, a decorative pattern designation command transmitted from the main control unit 20.
If the hit type is not "3R probability change", the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2902 to determine whether the hit type is "9R probability change", and if the hit type is not "9R probability change", it is shown in FIG. The big hit production lottery process ends. That is, when the type of the hit is “3R time reduction”, the setting suggestion by the big hit end INT effect is not performed.

Whether the hit type is “3R probability change” in step S2901 or the hit type is “9R probability change” in step S2902, respectively, the CPU 241 advances the processing to step S2903 and is the probability change in progress? Determine whether or not. This is equivalent to determining whether or not the hit this time is a hit as a condominium (whether it is not the first hit).

When it is determined that the probability change is not in progress, that is, it is the first hit, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2904 to execute the setting value information acquisition process, and then acquires the offset value from the first offset table based on the setting value information in step S2905. Then, in a succeeding step S2906, a process of selecting the lottery table based on the offset value is performed. Further, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2910, and determines the suggestive element in the jackpot end INT based on the lottery value.

FIG. 68 shows an example of a lottery table (hereinafter referred to as “big hit end INT suggestion element table”) for lottery of the jackpot end INT suggestion elements used in step S2906, and FIG. 69 shows the first table used in step S2905. Examples of offset tables are shown (note that these tables are also stored in predetermined areas of the ROM 242, respectively).
In the first offset table shown in FIG. 69, an offset value is set for each set value Ve. Specifically, as shown in the figure, offset values of "0" to "5" are set for the set values Ve "1" to "6".

In the jackpot end INT suggestion element table of FIG. 68, a plurality of lottery tables that determine the distribution of the winning probabilities for each content of the jackpot end INT effect are prepared. In this example, the background image in the jackpot end INT effect is used for setting suggestion, and as shown in the figure, there are 13 kinds of contents including “none (no predetermined background image)” and “background 1” to “background 12”. Are prepared, and as the lottery table, a plurality of tables that determine the distribution of the winning probabilities with respect to these contents are prepared.
In the jackpot end INT suggestion element table of this example, as the lottery table, six sets of allocations for each of the set values Ve “1” to “6” are stored in order from the upper layer side, and to the lower layer side, Further, six sets of allocation values for each of the set values Ve “1” to “6” are stored. The six lottery tables on the upper layer side are tables defining the distribution for each set value Ve corresponding to the initial win, and the six lottery tables on the lower layer side are the tables defining the distribution for each set value Ve corresponding to the condominium. It is said that

67, in the acquisition process of step S2905, an offset value corresponding to the setting value Ve acquired in step S2904 is acquired from the first offset table shown in FIG. 69, and in the selection process of step S2906, based on the offset value. Then, the lottery table is selected from the jackpot end INT suggestion element table shown in FIG. At this time, in the first offset table, since the offset value for the set value Ve is in the range of “0” to “5”, in the selection process of step S2906, the lottery is selected from the upper six sides in the jackpot end INT suggestion element table. The table is selected. That is, as a result, the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve is selected from the lottery tables corresponding to the first win.
In the determination process of step S2910, which is executed subsequent to step S2906, a process of determining the background (may be none) as a suggestion element in the jackpot end INT according to the selected lottery table is performed.

If it is determined in the previous step S2903 that the probability change is in progress, that is, it is during the condominium vacation, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2907 to execute the set value information acquisition process, and then based on the set value information in step S2908. Then, the offset value is acquired from the second offset table, the process of selecting the lottery table based on the offset value is performed in the subsequent step S2909, and the determination process of step S2910 is executed.

FIG. 70 shows an example of the second offset table used in step S2908 (also stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 242 as the second offset table).
As illustrated, in the second offset table, the offset values of "6" to "11" are set for the set values Ve "1" to "6".
Therefore, in the acquisition process of step S2908, the lottery table is selected from the six lower layers in the jackpot end INT suggestion element table, that is, the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve from the lottery table corresponding to the continuous vacation. Is selected.
In the determination process of step S2910 executed subsequent to step S2909, a process of determining the background (may be none) as a suggestion element in the jackpot end INT according to the lottery table selected in step S2909 is performed.

As shown in FIG. 68, in the present example, the lottery table stored on the upper layer side at the time of the first hit has a distribution value of 0 for the background 7 to the background 12, and the lottery table corresponding to the lower-tier condominiums. For, the distribution value for background 1 to background 6 is set to 0. As a result, the backgrounds 1 to 6 are not made to appear at the time of the condominium (they are not made to appear as the setting suggestion element), and the backgrounds 7 to 12 are not made to appear at the first hit.

The CPU 241 ends the big hit effect lottery process shown in FIG. 67 in response to the execution of the determination process of step S2910.

Here, an offset table (FIGS. 69 and 70) in which different offset values are set for the common set value Ve as described above is provided, and these offset tables are selectively used according to the conditions to end the big hit as shown in FIG. 68. By performing a lottery using the INT suggestion element table, it is possible to perform common reference processing of the table when performing a lottery different for each condition as a setting suggestion element lottery, and it is possible to reduce the program capacity. it can.

(Suggestive production by SU notice)

Subsequently, referring to FIGS. 71 to 77, the suggestive effect by the SU announcement will be described.
The SU notice effect is a kind of notice effect for notifying the possibility of controlling the advantageous state, which is an advantageous state for the player, and is an effect having one to a plurality of notice steps. In other words, it is a stage announcement effect having stages.
In this example, the contents of the SU notice effect, specifically, the background image can be used to present an effect that suggests the set value Ve.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the SU announcement lottery process executed by the CPU 241.
First, as the variation pattern information acquisition process of step S3001, the CPU 241 performs a process of obtaining information of the variation pattern that has been won based on, for example, the above-mentioned decorative pattern designation command. Next, in step S3002, the CPU 241 acquires the offset value from the offset table based on the winning variation pattern, selects the lottery table based on the offset value in step S3003, and selects the SU stage based on the lottery value in step S3004. And the process of determining the contents.

72 shows an example of the SU effect table used in the selection process of step S3003, and FIG. 73 shows an example of the SU stage lottery offset table used in the acquisition process of step S3002 (these tables also have a predetermined value in the ROM 242). Stored in each area).
In the SU stage lottery offset table shown in FIG. 73, similarly to the first advance notice offset table shown in FIG. 64, a short variation pattern (“short variation P”) and a reach variation pattern (“reach variation P”). ), an offset value is set for each super reach variation pattern (“SP reach P”). In this example, the offset value is 0 for the short variation pattern, 1 for the reach variation pattern, and 2 for the super reach variation pattern. Each value is set.

In the SU effect table of FIG. 72, a plurality of lottery tables that determine the distribution of the winning probabilities for each lottery target related to the SU notice effect are prepared. In this example, the lottery target as the SU announcement effect “none” and each lottery as SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), and SU5 (character B) There are three types of lottery tables that define distribution values for each target (“table 1”, “table 2”, and “table 3” in the figure). Here, brackets such as (white frame) added after SU1 to SU5 indicating the SU stage mean the contents of the SU notice effect, specifically, the type of the background image. For example, (white frame) is A background image with a white frame means (character A) or (character B) means a background image including an image of a specific character.
In the SU effect table, "table 1", "table 2", and "table 3" are stored in order from the upper layer side.

71, in the acquisition process of step S3002, the offset value is acquired from the table shown in FIG. 73 based on the information of the winning variation pattern, and in the selection process of step S3003, the table shown in FIG. 72 based on the offset value. A lottery table is selected from. Specifically, in this example, when the winning fluctuation pattern is a short fluctuation pattern and 0 is acquired as an offset value, the table 1 is selected. If the winning variation pattern is the reach variation pattern and 1 is acquired as the offset value, table 2 is selected, and if the winning variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern and 2 is acquired as the offset value, table 3 is selected. To be selected.
Then, in step S3004 subsequent to step S3003, the CPU 241 determines the SU notice effect “none” based on the stored value (lottery value) of the table thus selected from the tables 1 to 3 and the random number value for lottery. , SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), or SU5 (character B) is determined. That is, the stage and contents of SU are determined.

In addition, according to the example of the distribution value shown in FIG. 72 (in this case also, the random number for lottery can take 10000 ways from 1 to 9999), in the table 1 corresponding to the short fluctuation pattern, the SU notice effect “none The winning probability of “” is the highest, followed by the winning probability of SU1 (white frame), and the remaining SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), and SU5 (character B). ), the winning probability is 0.
In the table 2 corresponding to the reach variation pattern, SU5 (character B), SU4 (character A), SU notice production “none”, SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame) in that order. The winning probability is gradually increasing.
In Table 3 corresponding to the super reach variation pattern, the winning probability of SU5 (character B) is highest, and thereafter, SU4 (character A), SU3 (white frame), and SU notice production “none” gradually. The winning probability is lowered, and the winning probabilities of SU1 (white frame) and SU2 (white frame) are the lowest.

The CPU 241 determines whether or not the player wins SU3 or more in step S3005 in response to the execution of the process of step S3004. That is, it is determined in step S3004 whether any of SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), and SU5 (character B) is determined.
If the player has not won at least SU3, the CPU 241 ends the SU advance notice lottery process shown in FIG. That is, in the case of winning in SU2 or lower, the process for replacing the content of the SU notice effect described below is not performed.

On the other hand, if the player has won at least SU3, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S3006 to determine whether or not the player has missed the SU3 danger last time. That is, the SU notice effect that appeared last time is the SU notice effect of SU3 or more in which the background is replaced with the background of the danger pattern frame by the content replacement using the SU3 replacement table described later, and the SU preview effect is the subject of the notice. It is determined whether or not the deviation determination result is obtained in the symbol variable display game.

If it is determined in step S3006 that the SU3 denger has been missed last time, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S3007, acquires the offset value from the offset table without referring to the set value, and then in step S3008, selects the lottery table based on the offset value. Then, in step S3012, the replacement content of SU3 is determined based on the lottery value.

FIG. 74 shows an example of the SU3 replacement table used in the selection process of step S3008, and FIG. 75 shows an example of the SU3 replacement offset table used in the acquisition process of step S3007 (these tables are also stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 242). Stored respectively).
In the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75, an offset value is set for each set value Ve. Specifically, as shown in the figure, the set value Ve “1” to “6” corresponds to the offset value “0” to “5” is defined.
In the SU3 replacement table shown in FIG. 74, a lottery table defining distribution values for each replacement content of “default”, “red”, and “danger” is prepared for each set value Ve. Here, “default” means that the frame in the background is not replaced, and “red” and “danger” mean that the frame is replaced with a red and a danger pattern, respectively.
As shown in the figure, in the SU3 replacement table, the lottery table with the set value Ve “1” is stored in the uppermost layer, and thereafter, the lottery table with the larger set value Ve is stored in the lower layer side. There is.

71, in the acquisition process of step S3007, the offset value is acquired from the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75 without referring to the set value Ve. That is, the CPU 241 acquires the offset value “0” corresponding to the set value Ve “1” in the offset table. Then, in the selection process of step S3008, the lottery table is selected from the SU3 replacement table based on the offset value “0” thus acquired. Specifically, the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve “1” stored in the uppermost layer in the SU3 replacement table is selected.
Then, in the determination processing of step S3012 executed subsequent to step S3008, the replacement content is determined from among “default”, “red”, and “danger” based on the lottery table thus selected.

Here, according to the example of the distribution values shown in FIG. 74, the process of steps S3007→S3008→S3012 is performed, so that the lottery table having the highest “default” winning probability is selected. That is, the lottery table with the lowest possibility of replacement is selected. As a result, if the driver misses the SU3 Danger last time, it becomes difficult to perform the SU notice effect by the SU3 Danger again.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S3006 that the previous SU3 deranger has fallen off, the CPU 241 executes the set value information acquisition process in step S3009, and then acquires the offset value from the offset table based on the set value information in step S3010. Then, in a succeeding step S3011, a lottery table is selected based on the offset value, and in step S3012, a process of determining replacement contents of SU3 based on the lottery value is performed.

Specifically, in the acquisition process of step S3010, the offset value corresponding to the set value Ve acquired in step S3009 is acquired from the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75, and in the subsequent step S3011, the SU3 shown in FIG. 74 is acquired. A lottery table based on the acquired offset value is selected from the replacement table. Specifically, if the offset value is “0”, the lottery table having the setting value Ve “1” stored in the uppermost layer position is selected, and if the offset value is “1”, the lottery table is stored in the position next to the uppermost layer position. The lottery table stored at the position (address) specified by the offset value is selected, for example, the lottery table having the set value “2” is selected.
Then, in the determination process of step S3012 in this case, the replacement content is determined from among “default”, “red”, and “danger” based on the lottery table selected in step S3011.

According to the example of the distribution value shown in FIG. 74, in the SU3 replacement table in this case, the higher the setting, the lower the probability of winning the “default”, whereas the higher the setting of “red”, the higher the probability of winning becomes. Has been done. Regarding the "danger", the winning probability is lower than that of the "danger" and "red" regardless of the setting value Ve, and the winning probability is the highest when the setting value Ve "6" which is the highest setting. Has been In this example, the winning probability of the “danger” is the same for the set values Ve “1” to “5”, and the winning probability is increased only for the set value Ve “6”.

The CPU 241 ends the SU advance notice lottery process shown in FIG. 71 in response to the execution of the determination process of step S3012.

As can be understood from the series of processes described above, in the present embodiment, the “stage” of the SU notice effect (stage notice effect) can be determined based on the variation information, and the “content” of the SU notice effect is set to the set value Ve. It is possible to decide based on this. Specifically, in this example, the "content" of the SU notice effect can be determined by replacement.

Regarding the setting suggestion using the stage notice production, if the stage of the stage notice production is decided based on the set value, the stage notice production is difficult to develop and it is difficult to enhance the production effect. Therefore, as described above, the stage of the stage announcement effect can be determined according to the variation information, and the notice content of the stage announcement effect can be determined based on the set value.
Accordingly, in realizing the set value suggestion effect using the stage announcement effect, it is possible to prevent the stage announcement effect from becoming difficult to develop, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Normally, a plurality of types of notice effects are implemented in the gaming machine, but all of the notices that have stages as the contents of the notice effect may be configured as described above, or only some notices may be changed to the above-mentioned notices. You may make it a structure like this. In addition, in order to enhance the attraction of the performance, the "stage" may be determined based on the set value Ve and the "content" may be determined based on the variation information for some of the notices. By doing so, it is possible to give different characteristics to the notices, and it is possible to improve the entertainment interest.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing another example of the SU announcement lottery process.
First, in this another example, the table shown in FIG. 77 is prepared as the SU3 replacement offset table stored in the ROM 242. That is, a table having the same content as that shown in FIG. 75 is stored as the SU3 replacement first offset table (FIG. 77A), and a SU3 replacement second offset table different from the SU3 replacement first offset table is stored. (FIG. 77B).
In the SU3 replacement second offset table, the same offset value (“0” in this example) is stored for the set value Ve of “1” to “6”.

The SU announcement lottery process shown in FIG. 76 is different in that the processes of steps S3020 and S3021 are executed instead of the process of step S3007 shown in FIG. 71, as the process executed when the player has missed the SU3 danger last time.
In this case, the CPU 241 acquires the setting value Ve stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 in the setting value information acquisition in step S3020, and in the subsequent step S3021, the offset value from the SU3 replacement second offset table based on the setting value information. Is acquired, and the process proceeds to the lottery table selection process in step S3008.
Since the offset value acquired in step S3021 is the same value regardless of the set value Ve, in the selection process of step S3008 in this case, the same lottery table is selected regardless of the set value Ve. Specifically, in this example, since the offset value “0” corresponding to the setting value Ve “1” is selected, the lottery table in which the content replacement is unlikely to occur is selected as in the case of the processing example of FIG. 71. become.
In the acquisition process of step S3010 in this case, the SU3 replacement first offset table shown in FIG. 77A is used as the offset table.

As described above, the method for selecting the same lottery table regardless of the set value Ve is not limited to the method of acquiring a fixed offset value without referring to the set value Ve, and as shown in FIG. 77B. It is also possible to adopt a method of selecting the lottery table based on the offset value acquired from the offset table in which the same offset value is stored in each set value Ve.

Here, the lottery for the SU notice effect may be performed in the following manner.
FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the lottery mode of the SU notice effect in the embodiment.
First, the expansions M06J-1, M06J-2, and M06J-3 shown in the lower left of the upper table in the drawing mean the following expansions, respectively.

M06J-1: Staying in a specific background mode, and not winning the pre-reading notice (pre-reading effect), winning the target SU notice (fireworks launch SU notice)

M06J-2: State of staying in a specific background mode, pre-reading notice is being executed, and the target SU notice has been won

M06J-3: In a state where the user stays in a specific background mode, the variation is selected as the target variation of the look-ahead notice and the target SU notice is won.

In the development M06J-1, the target SU announcement lottery is performed based on the table TBL1. In the development M06J-2 and the development M06J-3, the lottery for the target SU notice is performed based on the table TBL2 and the table TBL3, respectively.

In the development M06J-1, a case where the results SU3 and SU4 of the lottery based on the table TBL1 are won and a case where the SU5 is won are defined as a development M06L-1.
In addition, in the development M06J-2, a case where the results SU3 and SU4 of the lottery based on the table TBL2 are won and a case where the result is SU5 are defined as a development M06L-2.
Further, in the development M06J-3, a case where the results SU3, SU4 of the lottery based on the table TBL3 are won and a case where the SU5 is won are defined as a development M06L-3.
In addition, in these developments M06L-1 to M06L-3, when SU5 is won, a lottery is performed on the contents of SU5 based on the tables TBL4, TBL5, and TBL6, respectively.

The table in the lower part of FIG. 78 exemplifies the lottery player method for content replacement (background replacement) of SU3 for each expansion of M06L-1 to M06L-3.
In the expansion M06L-1 as shown in the figure, it is determined whether or not there was a miss in the previous danger (see step S3006). If there is a deviation from the previous danger, there is no branch for each set value Ve, and the replacement content is selected based on the table TBL4.
On the other hand, if it is not missed last time by the danger, the extraction player method branches for each set value Ve. Specifically, the replacement content is selected by lot using a different table (tables TBL5 to TBL10 in the figure) for each set value Ve of "1" to "6".

Further, in the expansions M06L-2 and M06L-3, there is no branch depending on whether or not there was a miss in the previous danger, and no branch based on the set value Ve, and the replacement content is selected based on the tables TBL11 and TBL12 as shown in the drawing.

In the above-mentioned lottery player method, it is possible to make a setting suggestion based on the SU notice when the prefetch effect is not won as the development M06J-1.
As a result, in the case of a variation with a low hit expectancy that is not as high as the prefetching or a variation in which the prefetching effect is not executed toward the target variation of the prefetching, the role of the SU notice is used for the purpose of suggesting the reliability of the variation. Instead, it can be used to suggest settings.

Further, in the state where the prefetching effect is being executed as the development M06J-2, the setting suggestion based on the SU notice is not performed.
When the pre-reading effect is executed using multiple changes, if the SU notice is won during the change in the pre-reading, the pre-reading that suggests the expected degree of winning is performed toward the target change of the pre-reading. Since it is in the middle, it is not used for the purpose of suggesting the setting as the role of the SU notice. In other words, the look-ahead notice suggests the expected degree of winning toward the target change, and the player's interest is focused on that, so in such a situation, the setting suggestion element should not be included, and the player We are trying to prevent confusion.

Further, even in the state where the variation is the target variation of the prefetching effect as the development M06J-3, the setting suggestion by the SU announcement is not performed.
In this case, since the change is a target change of read-ahead and has a high expectation of hitting, use the role of SU notification for the purpose of indicating the reliability of the change and not for setting. By doing so, the player is prevented from being confused.

As described above, the development M06L-1, the development M06L-2, and the development M06L-3 are adopted as the drawing player method, but any one of them may be adopted or any combination may be adopted. Good.
With regard to the development M06L-2, when there are a plurality of types of look-ahead effects, it is configured not to give the setting suggestion by the SU notice only during execution of a specific look-ahead effect (eg, a pre-reading notice for all screens), and other types. It may be configured to suggest the setting by the SU notice while the pre-reading effect (eg, notice of pending change) is being executed.
With regard to the development M06L-3, when there are a plurality of types of prefetch notice, in a state where the change is a target change of a specific prefetch effect (eg, prefetch notice of all screens), setting suggestion by SU notice is not performed. With such a configuration, in a state in which the variation is a target variation of another prefetch effect (eg, notice of pending change, etc.), the setting may be suggested by the SU announcement.
If the change is a hit change, the setting suggestion is not made by the setting suggestion notice including the setting suggestion element such as the SU notice described above, and if the change is a marginal change, the setting suggestion is given. It may be configured to do so.

Here, in the SU notice lottery method of the present example described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77, in the case of making a setting suggestion by SU notice, among the plurality of tables in which the SU notice contents are associated with each set value, If the SU notice content is selected based on the table corresponding to the current set value and the setting suggestion based on the SU notice is not given, a specific table (a table specified not based on the set value) among the above plurality of tables is selected. The SU announcement contents are drawn based on this.
In such a lottery player method, when the setting suggestion based on the SU notice is given, the notice content of the SU notice is determined based on the set value Ve, and when the setting suggestion based on the SU notice is not given, the notice content of the SU notice is set to the set value. In other words, it can be said that it is a method of making a decision without being based on Ve.
When this is applied to the developments M06J-1 to M06J-3 described above, it can be said that in the gaming machine 1 of this example, the SU notice lottery is performed as follows.
First, in the comparison between the expansion M06J-1 and the expansion M06J-2 described above, it can be stated as follows.
That is, when the variable display of the symbol is performed, if the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is executed (expansion M06J-2), the variable display of the symbol is performed. It is possible to determine the notice content of the SU notice for which is not based on the set value Ve, and on the other hand, when performing the variable display of the symbol, the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is targeted. When the prefetching effect is not executed (development M06J-1), it can be said in other words that the notice content of the SU notice for the variable display of the symbol can be determined based on the set value Ve.

Further, in the comparison between the expansion M06J-1 and the expansion M06J-3 described above, the following can be put in another way.
That is, when the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the predetermined symbol is executed before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed (expansion M06J-3), the variable display of the predetermined symbol is displayed. The notice contents of the target SU notice can be determined without being based on the set value Ve, and on the other hand, before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed, the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the predetermined symbol is set. When not executed (expansion M06J-1), it can be rephrased that the notice content of the SU notice for the variable display of the predetermined symbol can be determined based on the set value Ve.

According to the above-mentioned lottery player method, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being given by the SU announcement in the state where the prefetching effect is being executed or the variation is the target variation of the prefetching effect.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Here, the suggestion of setting by a predetermined announcement effect such as SU announcement can be realized by the following method. That is, a "predetermined effect" that is a notice effect including an element suggesting the set value Ve (for example, a specific background such as a danger pattern) is prepared, and whether or not to execute the predetermined effect is set in the set value Ve. It is decided based on this. Specifically, for example, by performing a lottery using a table configured such that the predetermined effect is more likely to appear as the setting is higher, it is possible to suggest the setting that the setting is high.
On the other hand, when the setting suggestion is not performed, whether or not to execute the predetermined effect is determined without being based on the set value Ve. Specifically, for example, by making a decision not to execute the predetermined effect regardless of the set value Ve, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion.

In this way, by determining whether or not to execute the predetermined effect based on the set value Ve, it is possible to suggest the setting by the predetermined effect. On the other hand, by determining whether or not to execute the predetermined effect, not based on the set value Ve, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed.
When this is applied to each of the cases of “suggest setting” and “do not suggest setting” in the developments M06J-1 to M06J-3 described above, the gaming machine 1 of this example has the following configuration. can do.
First, in the comparison between the development M06J-1 and the development M06J-2 described above, when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is executed. In the case (expansion M06J-2), whether or not to execute a predetermined effect for the variable display of the symbol can be determined without being based on the set value Ve, and when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the symbol is displayed. When the pre-reading effect targeted for the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of No is not executed (expansion M06J-1), it is set whether to execute the predetermined effect targeted for the variable display of the symbol. The configuration is such that it can be determined based on the value Ve.

Further, in the comparison of the development M06J-1 and the development M06J-3 described above, when the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the predetermined symbol is executed before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed (the development In M06J-3), it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a predetermined effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol without using the set value Ve, and before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed. If the look-ahead effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol is not executed (expansion M06J-1), whether or not the predetermined effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol is executed is set value Ve. The configuration is such that it can be decided based on.

By adopting these configurations, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed in the state where the prefetching effect is being executed or in the state where the change is the target change of the prefetching effect.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

When there are a plurality of setting suggestion notices in the pre-reading notice non-winning state, the notice contents may be determined based on the set value Ve for all setting suggestion notices. It may be configured such that only some of the setting suggestion notices such as a notice can be decided based on the set value Ve.
In addition, when there are multiple setting suggestion notices in the pre-reading notice non-winning state, all the setting suggestion notices may be configured to be executable, or only some setting suggestion notices such as SU notices. It may be configured to be executable.

In addition, in the state in which the pre-reading notice is being executed (eg, when the pre-reading notice is executed while targeting a change after the change when performing lottery for each notice at the start of the change) When there are a plurality of setting suggestion notices, the notice contents of all setting suggestion notices may be determined without being based on the set value Ve, or some setting suggestion notices such as SU notices. Only for example (for example, a setting suggestion notice that can be executed before the reach), the notice content may be determined without being based on the set value Ve.
Further, when there are a plurality of setting suggestion notices while the prefetch notice is being executed, all the setting suggestion notices may be configured not to be executed. : It may be configured not to execute only the kind of setting suggestion notice that can be executed before the reach).

Further, when there are a plurality of setting suggestion notices in a state where the change is the target change of the look-ahead notice, the notice contents can be determined for all the setting suggestion notices without being based on the set value Ve. Alternatively, only for some setting suggestion notices such as SU notices (eg, set suggestion notices that can be executed before reach), the notice content can be determined without being based on the set value Ve. You may.
Further, in the state where the change is the target change of the look-ahead notice, if there are multiple setting suggestion notices, it may be configured not to execute all the setting suggestion notices, or some setting suggestion notices such as SU notices. It may be configured not to execute only a notice (eg, a notice of setting suggestion that can be performed before reach).

Further, when the notice content of the setting suggestion notice is determined without being based on the set value Ve, the notice content may be determined using a specific lottery table. At that time, it is desirable to determine the advance notice content from the lottery table based on the variation pattern information of the variation and the information about the winning or losing. Further, in the case where the prefetching notice is being executed or the target variation of the prefetching notice is being performed, when the notice content of the setting suggesting notice is determined without being based on the set value Ve, a common specific lottery table is set for each of them. It may be used, or a different lottery table may be used for each. In addition, when a plurality of setting suggestion notices are provided, the notice contents differ depending on the type of setting suggestion notice, and it goes without saying that a lottery table exists for each setting suggestion notice.

[5-5. Regarding the difference in the set value range that the main control unit and the production control unit correspond to]

Here, as understood from the various lottery processing of the effect control unit 24 described above, the effect control unit 24 determines that the set value Ve is the actual use range Ru (“1”, “2”, “6” in this example). ), if the value is within the usable range Re (“1” to “6”), the effect lottery is normally performed without an error.

On the other hand, if the set value Ve is not a value within the actual use range Ru, the main control unit 20 is incapable of executing at least a specific process regarding the progress of the game. For example, in the jackpot random number determination process (S1502) described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27 above, if the set value Ve (set value Vd) is not within the use range Ru, it is shown in FIG. It becomes impossible to acquire the appropriate determination reference value TH and the setting difference information from the big hit determination random number determination table, and the big hit determination cannot be appropriately executed.

The difference in correspondence between the set values of the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 as described above can be expressed as follows.
That is, the main control unit 20 can set any one of N (N is a natural number of 2 or more) kinds by the setting change processing (step S115), and based on the N kinds of set values. The first process relating to the progress of the game operation can be executed.
On the other hand, the effect control unit 24 can execute the second process regarding the progress of the effect operation based on the set value information about the set values received from the main control unit 20 based on the set value information about M kinds more than N kinds. It is said that.

Thereby, when making it possible to change the number of steps of the set value, the effect control unit 24 can execute the second process regarding the progress of the effect operation up to M steps. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need for rewriting the program of the effect control unit 24 up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of steps of the set value while reducing the load of the program rewriting work.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 24, as described with reference to FIG. 52A above, is a command (setting value information) for notifying the setting value transmitted by the main control unit 20, specifically, the setting confirmation. Regarding the set value information as the medium command and the command at the time of setting change, it is possible to analyze not the three set value information corresponding to the actual use range Ru but the six set value information corresponding to the usable range Re. ing.
Specifically, regarding these setting confirmation command and setting change command, it is possible to receive the command including the identification data of any one of "1" to "6" in steps S2150 and S2152, respectively. It is possible to analyze the command.

That is, if the three kinds of set values Ve corresponding to the usage range Ru are N kinds of set values that can be set in the setting change process, the effect control unit 24 sets the M kinds of set values larger than the N kinds. It is configured to analyze information.

Thereby, when the number of steps of the set value Ve can be changed, the effect control unit 24 can analyze the set value information up to M steps. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need for rewriting the program of the effect control unit 24 up to the M stage.
Therefore, the number of set values to be used can be changed while reducing the load of the program rewriting work.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 24, when the setting value Vd set in the setting change process on the main control unit 20 side and the setting value analysis information based on the analyzed setting value information correspond ( For example, if the set value Ve indicated by the set value Vd and the set value Ve indicated by the set value analysis information match, or if they do not correspond, a predetermined process (various effect lottery processes described in FIGS. 57 to 77) is performed. It is configured to be executable.

As a result, when the number of stages of the set value Ve can be changed, the effect control unit 24 can execute the process up to the M stage, and does not need to rewrite the program of the effect control unit 24 until the M stage. It becomes possible to do.
Therefore, the number of steps of the set value Ve can be changed while reducing the load of the program rewriting work.

Here, according to the process of FIG. 52A, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the setting change end command is received in step S2154, the setting value Ve received from the main control unit 20 is within a proper range. It is assumed that the setting change end scenario registration process is executed in step S2158 without checking whether or not there is any (see step S2162).
As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect control unit 24 side from notifying the abnormality of the set value when the main control unit 20 side is about to normally end the setting change process. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the main control unit 20 side advances the subsequent game operation in response to the normal end of the setting change process while the effect control unit 24 side is performing the abnormality notification, and the game can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uneasy.

Further, according to the processing of FIG. 52A, in step S2162, the effect control unit 24 determines whether the set value Ve received from the main control unit 20 side is within the usable range Re, and if it is within the usable range Re. The received set value Ve (identification data described above) is stored in the RAM 243 (specifically, the “notification set value storage area A1” described above), and if it is outside the usable range Re, the received set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243. I will not do it.
When the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, the set value Ve is not stored in the RAM 243, but in the present embodiment, the “set value command” is transmitted at a plurality of timings other than when the setting is changed. Is transmitted at least when the power is restored (S808 when the power is restored) and when the fluctuation starts (S1411), so that the set value Ve within the usable range Re is received at those timings. An appropriate set value Ve can be stored in the RAM 243.

In addition to the above-exemplified timings, the set value command may be transmitted during a customer waiting demonstration, at the start or end of a big hit or a small hit, at the start of a round game, at the start of an INT between rounds, or the like.

As described above, in the present embodiment, if the set value Ve is a value within the usable range Re, even if the set value Ve is not within the usable range Ru, it is stored in the RAM 243 as it is. Like the lottery process (FIGS. 57 to 77, etc.) related to various effects, in the present embodiment, the lottery process corresponds to the set value Ve of the usable range Re, so the set value Ve is a value within the use range Ru. Even if it is not, there will be no bug in the production lottery process.

Further, according to the process of FIG. 52A, when the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, in the setting history information updating process of step S2166, the set value Ve outside the usable range Re is the RAM 243 (specifically, It is stored in the above-mentioned “history set value storage area A2” (see step S2404 in FIG. 53).
However, even if the set value Ve outside the usable range Re is stored in the history set value storage area A2 as described above, it is necessary to confirm the abnormality of the set value Ve during the transmission processing in step S2607 (FIG. 55) described above. Thus, it is possible to prevent the inappropriate setting value Ve outside the usable range Re from being displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
As described above, the abnormality confirmation processing at this time is performed by determining whether the individual history information to be transmitted is history information about setting changes (setting change history information), and then using the setting change history information. In some cases, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve included in the history information is outside the usable range Re, and when the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, the liquid crystal control is performed. Instruction information for displaying an abnormality is transmitted to the unit 40. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to display information indicating that an abnormality has been recognized in the set value Ve in the corresponding individual history information (for example, display of an "E" mark meaning an error).

<6. Modified example of setting-related command processing and setting value conversion>

Here, in the above, the setting value Ve set in the setting change processing (S115) shown in FIG. 10 (the setting value Ve saved in step S416) is set in the main loop preprocessing (S119) shown in FIG. Although an example of transmitting to the effect control unit 24 side by the value command (S808) has been described, the set value Ve set by the setting change process can also be sent to the effect control unit 24 by a command at the time of ending the setting change. Specifically, in the embodiment, the setting change end command is transmitted (S605, S606) in the RAM clear process (S116) shown in FIG. 14 as the command at the end of the setting change. Instead of this, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a “setting change completion command” including the set value Ve set in the setting change process is transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

In the process of FIG. 52A described above, the process (S2163) in which the effect control unit 24 stores the set value Ve in the RAM 243 can be executed each time the set value command from the main control unit 20 is received. However, the storage processing of the set value Ve in the RAM 243 can be performed only when the setting is changed.
When the storage process of the set value Ve in the RAM 243 is performed only when the setting is changed in this way, when the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re as in the process shown in FIG. 52A, the set value Ve is set. If no is stored (route of S2162→S2164), the set value Ve will not be set in the RAM 243.
Therefore, in this case, if the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, a value representing the set value Ve “1” (in other words, a value representing the lowest step of the set value Ve) is stored in the RAM 243. It is possible to prevent the abnormal setting value Ve from being set in the RAM 243 and prevent the setting value Ve from not being set.

FIG. 79 shows a flowchart of the setting-related command processing S2130e as the first modification, which includes the storage of the lowest step value as described above.
The setting-related command process S2130e as the first modification corresponds to the case where the main control unit 20 transmits the setting value Ve set in the setting change process by the above-mentioned “setting change completion command” to the effect control unit 24 side. It is considered to be the processing.
The difference from the processing shown in FIG. 52A is that the reception determination processing of the setting change end command in step S2154 is omitted, the processing of steps S2159 to S2161 and the processing of step S2164 are omitted, and step S2181. This is the point where the processing of is added.

In the processing shown in FIG. 79, the CPU 241 first performs the reception determination processing of the “setting change completion command” in step S2180. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a command including the notification information (identification data) of any of the set values Ve “1” to “6” is received as the “setting change completion command”.
When determining in step S2180 that the "setting change completion command" (setting values "1" to "6") has not been received, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2150. In this case, when the negative result is obtained in step S2151, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2153. If a negative result is obtained in step S2153, the CPU 241 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 79.
Further, in this case, the CPU 241 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 79 in response to the execution of each scenario registration process of steps S2155 to S2157.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2180 that the “setting change completion command” (setting values “1” to “6”) has been received, the CPU 241 executes the setting change end scenario registration process of step S2158.
If the setting value Ve included in the received “setting change completion command” is within the usable range Re of “1” to “6” by the determination processing in step S2180 described above, the setting change end scenario is set in step S2158. be registered. That is, even when the unused set value Ve within the usable range Re is received, the effect of notifying the end of the setting change is performed.

In response to the execution of the scenario registration process in step S2158, the CPU 241 determines in step S2162 whether the setting information is the usable range Re.
If the setting information is within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 performs a process of storing the setting value information in the RAM in step S2163, and proceeds to the history information updating process of step S2166.
On the other hand, if the setting information is not within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 stores the setting value “1” in the RAM 243 in step S2181, and proceeds to the history information updating process of step S2166.

By the processing as the first modification as described above, corresponding to the case where the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243 only when the setting is changed, if the set value Ve is a value outside the usable range Re, the specific value (the specified value is stored in the RAM 243). In this example, "1") can be stored.

When the specific value (“1”) is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 243 (the “notification setting value storage area A1” described above) as in the above-described first modification, the setting value in the setting history information is set. A specific value (“1”) may also be stored for Ve (that is, the “history set value storage area A2” described above).
Alternatively, an abnormal value may be stored in the setting history information.
By storing an abnormal value in the setting history information, it is possible to store the fact that the setting value Ve is abnormal as history information while allowing the game lottery to be performed based on the specific value.

Here, as the suitability determination of the set value Ve when storing the set value Ve in the RAM 243, it may be determined whether or not the set value Ve is within the usable range Re and not within the usable range Re.
For example, when the set value Ve to be used is “1”, “2”, and “6” as in this example, first, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve is within the usable range Re and used. If the value is within the possible range Re, it is further determined whether or not the set value Ve is an unused value (any one of “3”, “4”, and “5”).
At this time, if the set value Ve is not an unused value, the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243 as it is. On the other hand, when the set value Ve is an unused value, it is possible to store a specific value (“1”) in the RAM 243. Alternatively, when the set value Ve is an unused value, the set value Ve can be corrected to a value within the usage range Ru and stored in the RAM 243. For example, when the set value Ve is “3” or “4”, it may be corrected to “2”, and when it is “5”, it may be corrected to “6”.

FIG. 80 shows a flowchart of the setting-related command processing S2130e as the second modification, which includes the correction of the set value Ve as described above.
The difference from the process shown in FIG. 79 is that the processes of steps S2182 and S2183 are added.
In this case, when the CPU 241 determines in step S2162 that the setting information is within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2182 and determines whether the setting information is an unused value. Specifically, in this example, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve is any of "3", "4", and "5" (any of "02H", "03H", and "04H").
When determining that the setting information is not the unused value, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2163 and stores the setting information in the RAM 243. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting information is an unused value, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2183 and refers to the setting value correction table to store the correction value in the RAM 243. Specifically, in this example, the set value correction table (stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 242) is referred to, and when the set value Ve is “3” or “4”, the set value Ve is corrected to “2” and the set value Ve is set to “5”. At this time, the value is corrected to "6" and the corrected setting value Ve is stored in the "notification setting value storage area A1" of the RAM 243.

Here, in the above description, the main control unit 20 uses the setting value offset conversion table shown in FIG. 16 to set the setting value Vd handled by the main control unit 20 side in accordance with the program on the effect control unit 24 side. Although an example of converting to the value Ve has been given, the main control unit 20 transmits the information of the set value Vd to the effect control unit 24 without performing conversion using the set value offset conversion table, and the setting is performed on the effect control unit 24 side. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the value Vd is converted.
81 shows an example of a setting value conversion table to be used on the side of the effect control unit 24 in this case. Here, it is assumed that the stage of the set value Ve and the value to be used are uniquely determined by the specification information of the gaming machine 1.

As shown in the figure, in the setting value conversion table, a conversion table storing information of the setting value Vd transmitted from the main control unit 20 side, specifically, conversion values for each of “0” to “5” is specified (see FIG. It is prepared for each of "spec 1" to "spec 4").

In this case, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) selects the corresponding conversion table from the setting conversion table based on the information of the specifications specified by the above-described specification specification command, and receives the setting value Vd received from the main control unit 20, for example. Information is converted based on the selected conversion table.
Here, "spec 1" has 6 levels of setting, and the main control unit 20 in this case uses "0" to "5" as the set value Vd. “Spec 2” and “spec 3” have two stages of setting and three stages of setting, respectively, and the main control unit 20 uses “0”, “1”, and “0” to “3” as the set value Vd, respectively. “Spec 4” is “no setting”, and in this case, “0” is stored as the conversion value for each set value Vd as illustrated.

By adopting the configuration in which the effect control unit 24 side performs the setting value conversion as described above, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main control unit 20 side.

<7. Summary so far>

As described above, the gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols and controls to an advantageous state which is an advantageous state for the player, and determines whether to control to the advantageous state. Determination means (step S1502: big hit random number determination processing), pre-reading determination means (step S1309: pre-reading determination processing) for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state before determination by the determination means, and determination by the pre-reading determination means. Based on the result, before the variable display of the symbols to be judged is performed, the pre-reading production execution means (the production control unit 24 and the liquid crystal display) that can execute the pre-reading production that informs the possibility that the design is controlled to the advantageous state. The device 36, the optical display device 45a, the sound generation device 46a, and other production means) and the production execution means (production control unit) capable of executing a preliminary production that notifies the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state during the variable display of the symbols. 24, and liquid crystal display device 36, optical display device 45a, sound generating device 46a, etc.), and a setting value (the same Ve) that indicates a step regarding the probability of whether or not to control in an advantageous state. Means (step S115: setting change processing).
Then, the notice effect includes a predetermined effect (for example, SU notice effect), and when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is executed. In this case, it is possible to determine the notice content of the predetermined effect for the variable display of the symbol without being based on the set value, and when the variable display of the symbol is performed, it is performed after the variable display of the symbol. When the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the symbol is not executed, the notice content of the predetermined effect for the variable display of the symbol can be determined based on the set value.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed while the prefetching effect is being executed.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Further, the gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols and controls to an advantageous state which is an advantageous state for the player, and includes the above-mentioned determining means, pre-reading determining means, pre-reading effect execution. With the means, the effect execution means, and the setting means, the notice effect includes a predetermined effect, and when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is targeted. When the pre-reading effect that was done is executed, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute a predetermined effect targeting the variable display of the symbol, based on the set value, and when performing the variable display of the symbol, the symbol concerned If the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the symbol that is performed after the variable display of is not executed, it is possible to determine based on the set value whether to execute the predetermined effect for the variable display of the symbol. It is what

As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed while the prefetching effect is being executed.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Further, the gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols and controls to an advantageous state which is an advantageous state for the player, and includes the above-mentioned determining means, pre-reading determining means, pre-reading effect execution. In addition to the means, the effect execution means, and the setting means, the notice effect includes a predetermined effect, and the look-ahead effect intended for the variable display of the predetermined symbol before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed. When is executed, the notice content of the predetermined effect intended for the variable display of the predetermined symbol can be determined without being based on the set value, and the predetermined symbol is displayed before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed. When the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the symbol is not executed, the notice content of the predetermined effect for the variable display of the predetermined symbol can be determined based on the set value.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed in a state where the change is the target change of the look-ahead effect.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Further, the gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols and controls to an advantageous state which is an advantageous state for the player, and includes the above-mentioned determining means, pre-reading determining means, pre-reading effect execution. In addition to the means, the effect execution means, and the setting means, the notice effect includes a predetermined effect, and the look-ahead effect intended for the variable display of the predetermined symbol before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed. When is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the predetermined effect for the variable display of the predetermined symbol without being based on the set value, and before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed. When the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the predetermined symbol is not executed, it is possible to determine based on the set value whether or not to execute the predetermined effect for the variable display of the predetermined symbol. It is a thing.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed in a state where the change is the target change of the look-ahead effect.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

<8. Suggestive production regarding set values>

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, suggestive effect regarding the set value can be appropriately performed. The suggestion effect regarding the set value is, for example, an effect in which the player playing the game machine 1 can estimate the set value Ve set in the game machine 1. In the following description, the value (range) of the set value Ve is not a value (0 to 5) used corresponding to the set value inside the gaming machine 1, but an operator or a player who sets the set value. The value (1-6) that can be grasped is used.

As the suggestive effect regarding the set value, in addition to the effect (set value suggesting effect) in which the set value Ve that has been set can be inferred, it is possible to infer whether or not the set value Ve has been changed (instruction to change the set value). Production) is also included. Specifically, whether the set value Ve set for the certain gaming machine 1 on the previous day is not changed on the current day and the same set value Ve is used, or the set value Ve of the previous day is changed and new. The effect is that it is possible to infer whether the set value Ve (including the case where the set value 4 is reset to the same set value 4) is set.

In the case of performing an effect in which the set value Ve can be estimated as the suggestive effect regarding the set value, the set value Ve has a certain width in addition to suggesting that the set value Ve is 6 or 5. It is possible to suggest possible values.
Specifically, an effect that suggests that the set value Ve is an even number (any one of 2, 4, 6) and an effect that suggests that the set value Ve is an odd number (any one of 1, 3, 5) are considered. Be done. In addition, an effect that suggests that the set value Ve is any of 4 to 6 may be used. As an example of suggesting a wider range, there may be an effect that suggests that the set value Ve is other than 1 (that is, any of 2 to 6).

In the suggestion effect regarding the set value, the effect using the sound, light, liquid crystal, movable body accessory, button, etc. by the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24 is performed. Specifically, a sound effect using the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46 included in the gaming machine 1, a light effect using the light display device 45a including the decoration lamp 45 and various LEDs, the liquid crystal display device 36, and the like are used. Image effects, visual effects using a movable body accessory, and sensation-type effects using the effect buttons 13 and the wind pressure device.

By using such suggestive effect regarding the set value, it is possible for the player to estimate what kind of set value Ve is applied to the gaming machine 1 in which the game is being played, and the gaming machine to be played. Can be used as a criterion for selecting. By using such information when selecting the gaming machine, the player can stand up more advantageously than selecting the gaming machine in the dark clouds. As a result, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 1 that is easily selected by the player.
Further, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of appropriately estimating the settings of the gaming machine 1 based on the suggestive effect regarding the set value and the enjoyment of selecting the gaming machine 1.

FIG. 119 shows the relationship between the type of suggestive effect regarding the set value and the execution timing of the suggestive effect. FIG. 82 shows the “type of suggestive effect regarding set value” part shown in FIG. 119, and FIG. 83 shows the “type of execution timing” part shown in FIG. 119. Further, FIG. 84 shows a portion of “whether performance is executed (◯/no mark)” in FIG. 119.

[8-1. Type of production]

Types of suggestive effects (hereinafter simply referred to as “instructive effects”) relating to set values implemented in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described (FIG. 82).
In FIG. 82, 21 kinds of suggestive effects shown by effects 01 to 21 are described. Each suggestive effect is provided with columns of “type”, “corresponding/other”, and “effecting means”.
As the “type”, there are provided three types of “setting value suggestion effect”, “setting value change suggestion effect”, and “big hit announcement effect”. The “set value suggestion effect” and the “set value change suggestion effect” are as described above. The “big hit announcement effect” is an announcement effect for informing whether or not it is originally a big hit. By changing the announcement mode according to the set value Ve, it has a role as a set value suggesting effect. It is a thing.

The distinction of “corresponding/other” is “corresponding” when the suggestion effect is related to the symbol variable display game, and is “when relevant” appears regardless of the symbol variable display game. Others".

The “rendering means” defines which rendering means is used to perform the suggestion rendering. If the "sound" is marked with a circle, a sound effect using the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46 is performed. If the "light" is marked with a circle, the decoration lamp 45 or If the light effect using the optical display device 45a including various LEDs is executed and the mark "○" is written on the "liquid crystal", the image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 or the like is executed and the mark "○" is displayed on the "movable body". If the mark is written, a visual effect using a movable body accessory or the like is executed, and if a "○" is described in the "button", a visual effect type using the effect button 13 or a wind pressure device is used. The performance is executed.
Specific examples of each effect will be described later.

[8-2. Performance timing]

Subsequently, the timing at which the suggestive effect may be performed will be described with reference to FIG. 83.
First, the 42 types of suggestive effect timings indicated by the timings 01 to 42 are roughly classified into three types, “waiting for customers”, “changing”, and “big hit”.
The suggestion effect that is performed in the “waiting for customers” is divided into the types of “initialize”, “operation notification”, “demo”, and “menu screen” as more detailed execution timings, and “initialize” is the initialization of the frame role (timing 01 ) And the initialization of the board character (timing 02).

The frame accessory is a movable accessory provided in the “frame”. The “frame” includes the front frame 2, the outer frame 4, the glass door 6, the front operation panel 7, and the like.
The board accessory is a movable accessory provided on the "board". The “board” is configured to include the game board 3.

The execution timing of the suggestion effect performed in the “operation notification” is divided into a menu notification (timing 03) and a volume/light quantity notification (timing 04). The menu notification is, for example, the liquid crystal display device 36 when the winning in the starting opening 34 does not occur for a predetermined time such as 5 seconds after the special symbol variable display game ends with the number of reserved balls being 0. Is a notification effect that is realized by displaying an image including a message such as "The menu screen is displayed by pressing the XX button!" on the liquid crystal display device 36.
Further, the volume/light quantity notification is a notification effect performed by using the liquid crystal display device 36 when a prize has not been given to the upper starting opening 34 for a predetermined time such as 10 seconds from the execution of the menu notification. This is realized by displaying an image including a message such as "The volume and the light amount can be changed by pressing the XX button!" on the liquid crystal display device 36.

“Demo” is the timing when the above-mentioned demo screen is displayed, and it is divided into more detailed display of the model introduction (timing 05) and display of the company logo (timing 06) and display of the attention alert (timing 07). ..

The suggestive effect executed while the “menu screen” is displayed is executed while the first layer of the menu screen is displayed (timing 08) and while the second layer of the menu screen is displayed. It is divided into those executed at (timing 09).
As described above, the execution timing of the suggestive effect executed in the “waiting for customer” can be further divided into nine kinds of timings 01 to 09.

The effect control unit 24 can grasp the initialization start timing (start of timing 01) by receiving a power-on command from the main control unit 20. Regarding the timings 02 to 04, since the production control unit 24 knows the time required for the initialization process of the frame accessory and the time required for the initialization process of the board accessory, they can be dealt with respectively.
Further, the demonstration start timing (start of timing 05) can be grasped by the effect control unit 24 by receiving the standby screen display command and the demo display command from the main control unit 20. Regarding the timings 06 and 07, since the production control unit 24 knows the time required for the image presentation of the model introduction, the time required for the image production of the company logo, etc., they can be dealt with respectively.
When the menu screen is being displayed, a signal from the effect button is received in response to the pressing of the menu button as one of the effect buttons. Thereby, the process for displaying the menu screen on the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed by the effect control unit 24. As a result, the timing (timing 08, 09) during the display of the first layer and the second layer of the menu screen can be grasped by the effect control unit 24.

The suggestive effect performed during "changing" is further divided into "before reach", "after reach", and "after reach" timing.
As "before the reach", when the winning which is the trigger of the further fluctuation (timing 10), the low speed fluctuation (timing 11), the high speed fluctuation (timing 12), one of the decorative symbols, for example, the left symbol is stopped When the first symbol is set as the timing to stop (timing 13), the pseudo-repeating second time (timing 14), the pseudo-repeating third time (timing 15), and the pseudo-repeating fourth time (timing 16) are further classified. Note that the number of pseudo-repetitions is four times as an example, but there may be pseudo-repetitions after the fifth. In that case, an effect timing at which the suggestion effect can be executed is appropriately added.

As the "after reach", for example, when the second symbol is stopped as the timing when the right symbol is stopped in the state where the left symbol is stopped, that is, the reach occurrence timing (timing 17), for example, the middle symbol is stopped after the normal reach occurs. There is a time (timing 18) when the winning/dragging effect is executed. Further, as "after reach", the title is being displayed after the occurrence of the first-class super reach (timing 19), the winning fan production is being executed (timing 20), and the fan production is being informed whether or not the production will be developed ( There is a timing 21), a title is being displayed (timing 22) after the occurrence of the type 2 super-reach, and a win-win effect is being executed (timing 23).
In addition, in the first-class super reach production, there may be a stir-up production that informs whether or not the production will develop. However, when the production is developed by winning this lottery, it is executed in the second-class super production. Reach. That is, the first type super reach is developed and the second type super reach is executed. Here, the second-class super-reach has a higher expectation of winning than the first-class super-reach. For example, the above-mentioned super-reach 4 is a super-reach type having a performance mode that develops from the type 1 super-reach to the type 2 super-reach.

The timing of “after the end of reach” includes a re-lottery effect (timing 24) and a time of stopping all symbols (timing 25), which is a timing at which the middle symbol is stopped while the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped.

As will be understood from the above, the execution timing of the suggestive effect executed during “changing” is further divided into 16 types of timings 10 to 25.

The timing 10 as the winning (variation start) timing before the reach can be grasped by the production control unit 24 receiving the variation pattern designating command and the decorative pattern designating command. Regarding each of the timings 11 to 25, since the effect control unit 24 determines the time-series development (effect content) based on the information included in the variation pattern designation command and the decorative pattern designation command, it is possible to grasp it by itself. it can.

Next, each timing that belongs to "big hit" will be described. The "big hit" includes a normal big hit game that transitions to the normal state without transitioning to the probability change state after the big hit game, a probability variation big hit game that transitions to the probability change state after the big hit game, and the like.
The timing belonging to "big hit" is further divided into four types, "during opening performance", "round", "ending pattern A" and "ending pattern B".

The “during opening presentation” can be divided into a big hit notification presentation (timing 26) and a right-handing instruction (report) (timing 27).
The “during round” is divided into each round (1 to 7R). As an example, during the 1R game, a battle effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 is being performed (timing 28), during the 2R game, a battle effect is being performed (timing 29), and during the 3R game, a battle effect ( Timing 30) and when over-winning occurs (timing 31), during the 4R game during victory/defeat (timing 32), during the 5R game during a short open V round (timing 33), during the 6R game The character introduction effect (timing 34) and the 7R game can be divided into character introduction effect (timing 35).

The over-winning is that a larger number of game balls enter the special winning opening 50 than the prescribed number of winnings that is defined in advance as the number of winnings that can be won in the big winning opening 50 in one round. . For example, when the prescribed number of winnings in one round is 10 and the 10th and 11th balls reach the vicinity of the special winning opening 50 at approximately the same time with 9 balls winning, an over-winning is achieved. There is a possibility.
That is, the timing 31 is the timing triggered by the occurrence of the over-winning.

The winning/defeating effect is, for example, an effect in which characters are confronted with each other on the liquid crystal display device 36, and it is conceivable that the defeating effect is executed in the case of a normal big hit and the winning effect is executed in the case of a probability variation big hit. In addition, although it normally looks like a jackpot, if it is a probability variation jackpot internally, the player may be notified that the probability variation jackpot game is in progress by executing a winning effect.

The V round is a specific round from 1 to 7R, and is a round in which a specific winning opening for opening the gaming state after the big hit game is changed to a probable state by winning a game ball for a predetermined time. .. That is, by placing the game ball in a specific winning opening opened for a predetermined time during the round V, it is possible to make a transition to the probability changing state after the big hit game.

As "during ending of pattern A", during the mode display effect in which the transition mode after the big hit is displayed (timing 36), at the time of warning display for forgetting to take an IC (timing 37), when displaying the company logo (timing 38) Can be divided.

Further, as "during ending of pattern B", during the mode display effect in which the transition mode after the big hit is displayed (timing 39), at the time of displaying the caution that the IC has forgotten to be taken (timing 40), during the display of the intent attention warning ( It can be divided into a timing 41) and a corporate logo display (timing 42).
As described above, each of the suggested effects 01 to 21 can be executed at 42 types of timings indicated by timings 01 to 42. In the following, description will be given by exemplifying a specific effect mode.
It should be noted that the battle effect and the victory/defeat effect executed in each round are merely examples, and it is not always necessary to perform the same effect. Further, the number of rounds (1 to 7R) is also an example, and may be a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot that allows a game of 1 to 10R.

The effect control unit 24 can grasp the big hit start timing, that is, the timing 26 as the start timing of the opening effect, by receiving the big hit start command. With respect to the timing 27, the production control unit 24 grasps the time required for the big hit notification production, so that it is possible to know the arrival of the timing 27.
The timings 28 to 35 as the start timings of 1R to 7R can be understood by the production control unit 24 receiving the round start command and the round end command from the main control unit 20.
For each timing belonging to the ending of the pattern A (timings 36 to 38) and each timing belonging to the ending of the pattern B (timings 39 to 42), by receiving the jackpot end command from the main control unit 20, The effect control unit 24 can be grasped.

[8-3. Example of production]

FIG. 84 exemplifies the relationship between 19 types of suggestive effects (effects 01 to 19) and 42 types of timings (timings 01 to 42). A circle mark in the figure indicates that the suggestive effect is performed. Specifically, the effect 01 can be executed at each timing of timings 02 to 09.

(Direction 01)

As a specific example of the effect 01, a suggestion effect using a frame accessory can be considered. For example, a setting value suggestion effect in which the frame accessory vibrates is performed. The timing is set to timings 02 to 09, and is executed in the gaming machine 1 in the "waiting for customers" state.
The gaming machine 1 detects that the player has touched an operator such as each button with respect to the gaming machine 1 that is "waiting for customers", and performs a lottery on whether or not the performance 01 can be executed. When the lottery is won, the suggested effect as effect 01 is executed.
Here, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the probability of winning whether or not the effect 01 can be executed is set, and the player's willingness to play the game machine 1 in which the effect 01 is executed can be increased.

FIG. 85 shows a flowchart of an example of a specific processing flow.
The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) determines in step S3101 whether or not the current timing is appropriate for execution of the effect 01. That is, if the current situation is any of the timings 02 to 09 (in the case of S3101:Y), the process proceeds to the following step S3102, and if it is any other timing (in the case of S3101:N), the series shown in FIG. Ends the process.

In step S3102, the effect control unit 24 executes a process of branching depending on whether or not the execution flag is 0. The execution flag "0" indicates that the effect 01 has not been executed, and "1" indicates that the effect 01 has already been executed.

Each process for the suggested effect 01 shown in FIG. 85 can be executed at an appropriate place in the effect control main process (FIG. 41) or the effect control timer interrupt process (FIG. 44), for example. In that case, after executing each process following step S3101 shown in FIG. 85, each process following step S3101 is executed again after several msec. That is, for example, with respect to the gaming machine 1 that has once transited to the state of waiting for customers, a series of processes shown in FIG. 85 can be executed many times before transitioning from the state of waiting for customers to another state. Sexuality occurs. If the process of FIG. 85 is executed at intervals of a few msec, and if the execution feasibility lottery for the effect 01 is won each time, the effect 01 will be continuously executed, so the frame of the gaming machine 1 will be continued. The accessory will continue to vibrate, resulting in a suggestive effect 01 that is not appropriate for the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not the execution flag is "0", and if it is "0", the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3103. Perform the process of changing. If the execution flag is “1” (S3102:N), the process of FIG. 85 is terminated without performing the subsequent processes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production 01 as the suggestive production from being excessively generated and to appropriately cause the production.

The process shown in FIG. 85 does not include the process of returning the execution flag to "0". The execution flag is returned to 0, for example, when it is determined that the customer waiting state is transited to another state. For example, when a variation pattern designation command is received from the main control unit 20, it is determined that the customer waiting state will be exited. Therefore, the execution flag provided for the suggestive effect 01 is set in the timing when the command is received. Set "0". As a result, when transitioning to the customer waiting state again, the process shown in FIG. 85 is executed, and the effect 01 as the suggestive effect can be appropriately executed. In other words, the production 01 may be executed only once for each transition to the customer waiting state.

The execution flag appears in each suggestive effect described below, but each suggestive effect has a different execution flag. That is, the execution flag used for the effect 01 and the execution flag used for the effect 02 are different flags.
In addition, there is no execution flag for suggestive effects that are not installed in the gaming machine 1. Then, when there is only one suggestive effect installed in the game machine 1 (for example, in the case where the suggestive effect is the game machine 1 capable of executing only the effect 01), one execution flag may be provided. Needless to say, it is not necessary to consider that each performance has a different execution flag.

The effect control unit 24 that has set the execution flag to 1 determines in the subsequent step S3104 whether or not the operating element that triggers the activation of the effect 01 has been operated. In the present embodiment, the operator that triggers activation is, for example, the effect button 13 or the like.

When the manipulator is not operated (S3104: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 85.
In addition, when the manipulator is operated (S3104: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve from the RAM 243 or the like in the subsequent step S3105, and performs the lottery according to the set value Ve in the step S3106. .. The winning probability corresponding to the set value Ve for the effect 01 is stored in the ROM 242 or the like in the state of, for example, a table. Each table used in each of the following productions is also stored in the ROM 242 and the like, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Succeedingly, in the step S3107, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the lottery about the execution possibility of the effect 01 is won. In the case of being unsuccessful (in the case of S3107:N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 85. If the player has won (S3107: Y), the effect control unit 24, in step S3108, performs scenario registration for vibrating the frame accessory in order to execute effect 01, and executes suggestive effect 01 shown in FIG. The process ends.

As described above, when the suggestion effect as the effect 01 is once executed, the lottery is not performed again until the game machine 1 is played and then transitions to the “waiting for customer” state again, and the effect The suggestion production as 01 is not performed.
As a result, the processing load of the gaming machine 1 relating to the execution of the lottery and the effect 01 is reduced.

Note that the effect 01 is not displayed during the period of timing 01 when the initialization process of the frame accessory is being executed. This is because, during the initialization process of the frame accessory used for the effect 01, there is a moment when the variables necessary for driving the frame accessory are in an inconsistent state. This is because there is a possibility that the gaming machine 1 may fall into a situation where it does not operate normally by performing the effect. That is, when the effect 01 is a suggestive effect such as vibrating the frame accessory, it is prevented from occurring during the initialization period (timing 01) of the frame accessory to prevent the occurrence of a defect. .

(Direction 02)

As a specific example of the effect 02, a suggestion effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 can be considered. As the content of the effect, for example, some kind of score is displayed, and a higher score such as 100 points (out of 100 points) is displayed as the set value Ve is higher.

The suggestion effect as effect 02 is executed in the gaming machine 1 in the “waiting for customers” state or the gaming machine 1 in the “before reach” state.
As an example, in the table shown in FIG. 84, the suggested effect as effect 02 is volume/light quantity notification (timing 04) in the state of “waiting for customers”, displaying model introduction (timing 05), and displaying company logo. (Timing 06), the display of the attention alert (timing 07), and during the change and the state before the reach, while the first layer of the menu screen is displayed (timing 08), it is a trigger to start the change. It can be executed at each timing of winning (timing 10), low speed fluctuation (timing 11), and high speed fluctuation (timing 12).

Note that the menu notification (timing 03) is an effect that is executed when, for example, when the number of reserved balls is 0 and a winning is not made at the starting opening 34 for a predetermined time such as 5 seconds, the player May be executed while playing (i.e., holding the firing operation handle 15). In particular, when playing a game for a long time, there is a high possibility that the menu notification timing will arrive several times during the game.
The menu notification is an effect that constantly causes the player to recognize a state in which the game ball is not winning in the upper starting opening 34, and even if the suggestion effect as the effect 02 is performed at such timing, the player is informed. It is not known whether or not it will be an effective production, and there is a risk that it may result in a decline in game motivation. Therefore, at the timing of the menu notification, which is timing 03, the main suggestive production, which is production 02, is not performed.

Further, the sound volume/light quantity notification (timing 04) is an effect executed when, for example, when the number of holding balls is 0, a winning in the starting opening 34 does not occur for a relatively long period of 15 seconds or the like. Therefore, it is unlikely to be executed while the player is playing the game. That is, there is a high possibility that the player is taking a break by releasing his hand from the firing operation handle 15. Therefore, it is possible to expect an effect of returning the player to the game state by performing the main suggestion effect at such a timing.

When the suggestion effect as effect 02 is performed while waiting for the customer, it may be executed in response to the player touching the effect button 13 or the like. This assumes that the player suddenly touches the production button 13 or the like of the gaming machine 1 while checking each unit while walking along the aisle to decide which gaming machine to play.
When the suggestion effect as the effect 02 is performed at such a timing, the point display on the liquid crystal display device 36 presented to the player by the present suggestion effect includes an element of the player's luck trial (or test-taking). There is. That is, the player performs an operation for generating the effect 02 on each of the gaming machines 1 on which the main effect 02 is mounted, and the point display displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is set to the high point game machine 1. It is conceivable to start the game because it is auspicious.

In view of such a situation, while the first layer of the menu screen is displayed (timing 08), it is a timing that the player can reach by performing only one operation, so the present suggestive effect is executed. It can be said that the timing is suitable for.
On the other hand, while the second layer of the menu screen is displayed (timing 09), it is a timing that the player cannot reach unless the player performs the operation twice or more, so the player who wants to easily generate this suggestive effect There is a possibility that the timing is not suitable for me.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, at timing 09, the suggested effect as the effect 02 is not executed.

An example of a specific processing flow will be described with reference to FIG. 86.
The effect control unit 24 first determines in step S3111 whether or not the timing is appropriate for execution of the effect 02. That is, if the current situation is any of the timings 04 to 08 and 10 to 12, the process proceeds to step S3112, and if it is any other timing, the series of processes shown in FIG. 86 is terminated.

When there is no problem in the timing of executing the effect 02, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3112 whether the execution flag is 0 or not.
The execution flag is set to "1" when the effect 02 has already been executed, and is set to "0" when the effect 02 has not been executed. The meanings of the execution flags in the subsequent productions are the same, and are set to "1" if they have been executed and "0" if they have not been executed.

When the execution flag is “1”, the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 86.
On the other hand, when the execution flag is “0”, the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to “1” in step S3113, acquires the set value Ve in subsequent step S3114, and responds to the set value Ve in step S3115. Draw lots. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the effect 02 is executed. In the lottery, not only whether or not the effect 02 is executed, but also the number of points displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 when it is executed is also selected. Which point number is easy to win depends on the set value Ve as described above.
The winning probability and the number of points to be displayed for the effect 02 with the set value Ve are stored in, for example, the ROM 242 as a table.

The production control unit 24 determines in a succeeding step S3116 whether or not the previous lottery result has been won, and if the lottery result has been lost, the process ends.
When the execution lottery of the effect 02 is won, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command to the effect control unit 40 in step S3117.
As a result, points are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the suggested effect as the effect 02 is realized in the gaming machine 1.

This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is arranged in a time series from top to bottom in the drawing. The time chart describes the transition of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 from the state immediately before waiting for customers to the state waiting for customers. It also describes the time required from the transition to waiting for customers to the transition to each state. For example, when transitioning to waiting for customers, first, waiting for fluctuation start is started, and the liquid crystal display device 36 is in a symbol stop image state. After the symbol stopped state continues for 15 seconds, control for informing the operation is started, and an image indicating the menu informing is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. After a further 15 seconds, an image showing the volume/light quantity notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

FIG. 123 shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in each state. The symbols (a) to (f) are assigned to each image, and the correspondence with each state is shown.

A specific example in the case of executing the effect 02 in the gaming machine 1 in which each image shown in FIG. 123 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 will be described. For example, while the symbol stop image such as the image (a) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the menu notification and the volume/light amount notification such as the image (b) are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. During the period, the set value suggestion production is not performed.
However, when the player presses the effect button 13 to display the menu screen in the state where the menu notification such as the image (b) is being performed, the set value suggestion effect is performed.

When the player presses the effect button 13 while the image (b) of FIG. 123 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the first layer of the menu screen as the image (g) of FIG. 124 is the liquid crystal. It is displayed on the display device 36. That is, the timing at which the image (g) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is the timing 08 shown in FIG.

In the image (g), a score of "72 points" is displayed together with a menu that can be selected by the player using the operation element. As described above, this numerical value indicates a higher score as the set value Ve is higher.

(Direction 03)

As a specific example of the effect 03, a suggestion effect performed using the liquid crystal display device 36 while waiting for a customer and displaying a demo screen can be considered. In the present embodiment, the timings 05 to 07 are set while the demo screen is being displayed.
For example, the appearance probability of a specific image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 while the demo screen is displayed is set to be higher as the set value Ve is higher. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether to play the game machine 1 based on whether or not the specific image effect appears.
In particular, since the image effect is executed by using the liquid crystal display device 36 while the demo screen is displayed, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game even in the gaming machine 1 which is not in the game, so that the seat is vacant. The number of gaming machines 1 can be reduced, and the operating rate of the gaming machines 1 can be increased.

Further, the effect with such a setting difference may be displayed after the decorative symbol variable display game is played a predetermined number of times after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. Specifically, the image effect is executed with a constant probability regardless of the set value Ve until the decorative pattern variable display game is performed 500 times, and the demo screen display state is performed after the 500 decorative pattern variable display games are finished. When the transition is made to, the image effect having different appearance rates depending on the set value Ve may be configured to be executed. Further, it may be configured such that the specific image effect does not appear until the decorative symbol variable display game is completed 500 times.
With such a configuration, even if the gaming machine 1 is left idle after being played for a certain period of time (at least after the decorative symbol variable display game has been executed at least 500 times), it is possible to By executing the image effect, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game, and it is possible to return the gaming machine 1 to the operating state again.

An example of a specific processing procedure will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 87 is an example (S2130g) of each command process (S2130) in the command corresponding process (S2106) of FIG. 43, and is specifically executed in response to receiving the demo display command from the main control unit 20. It is something.
Specifically, the effect control unit 24 performs a process of setting "1" to the execution flag in step S3121. This execution flag is provided separately from the execution flags in each of the above-mentioned effects. The same execution flag is used in each of the following effects (each effect after the effect 04), but different flags are used for each effect.
Although not shown in FIG. 87, the execution flag for the effect 03 is written back to “0” when the demo screen display is completed. Specifically, the flag is written back to "0" when the decorative symbol variable display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36 by winning the game ball in the upper starting opening 34.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24, in step S3122, determines whether or not the special symbol variable display game executed after the power is turned on is 500 times or more. When the special symbol variation display game executed after the power is turned on is less than 500 times, the effect control unit 24 transmits the command for the normal demonstration screen display of step S3127 to the liquid crystal control unit 40. As a result, a normal demo screen that is not a suggestive effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol variable display game is 500 times or more, the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3123, and performs the lottery according to the set value Ve in step S3124. In the lottery process, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the winning probability is set.

Next, in step S3125, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the previous lottery is won, and if it is won, in step S3126 the liquid crystal control unit transmits a command for displaying the demonstration screen as effect 03. Do for 40. On the other hand, in the case where the lottery has been unsuccessful in the previous lottery, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for normal demo screen display in step S3127.

By performing the above processing, any demo screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the player visually recognizes the type of the demo screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to set the set value Ve. Estimated.

(Direction 04)

A specific example of the effect 04 is a suggestion effect that is generated when a game ball is won (timing 10), and is an effect that moves a movable body accessory. In addition, even during winning, it is executed only at the time of winning, which is the first variation start timing after the power is turned on. Further, as the effect type, "setting value change suggestive effect" is set.
That is, the player plays the gaming machine 1 in which the decorative symbol variable display game has not been played even after the opening of the hall, and confirms whether or not the effect 04 is generated. It is possible to infer whether the setting value Ve has been changed to a new setting value Ve, or whether the setting value Ve of the previous day has been unchanged and unchanged.

Since the effect 04 is executable, it is possible to create a situation in which even the gaming machine 1 having a low preceding sunrise ball rate is easily selected as a game target. That is, the operating rate of the gaming machine 1 can be improved.

The effect 04 may be configured to always occur at the start of the first decorative symbol variable display game after changing the set value Ve (that is, at the first winning).
Further, for example, when the set value 4 is changed to the set value 4, the effect 04 may be configured to be executed, or the effect 04 may not be executed because of the same set value Ve. May be.
Further, as a configuration opposite to the configuration described above, the effect 04 is generated at the start of the first decorative symbol variable display game after the power is turned on without changing the set value Ve. Good.
The effect 04 may be performed by grasping the button as a vibrating movable accessory and vibrating the button.

An example of a specific processing flow will be described with reference to FIG. 88. Note that, as an example only, the process (S2130b) for causing the effect 04 to appear by the effect control unit 24 receiving the decorative symbol designating command from the main control unit 20 is executed.
In this example, the process for executing the effect 04 is added to the process (FIG. 43C) executed when the effect control unit 24 receives the decorative symbol designating command. Therefore, the detailed description of the portions described with reference to FIG. 43C is omitted to avoid duplication.
The production control unit 24 executes steps S2132 to S2136 to confirm receipt of the variation pattern designation command, scenario registration for correction of the accessory origin, design variation flag setting, variation start processing, and variation pattern designation command deletion. I do.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3131 whether or not the special symbol variation display game is the first variation after the power is turned on.
When it is the first variation after the power is turned on (in the case of S3131: Y), the effect control unit 24 performs scenario registration for executing the effect 04 for operating the movable body accessory in the following step S3132.
On the other hand, when it is not the first fluctuation after the power is turned on (in the case of S3131: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 88.

(Direction 05)

As a specific example of the effect 05, an image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 and a sound effect using the sound generating device 46a are executed. At each of the timings 10 to 13 before the reach, for example, in the conversation between the characters appearing in the image effect executed by the gaming machine 1, a specific line for the suggestive effect is generated from the normal line with a certain probability. The suggestive production changed to is executed. The predetermined probabilities may be different probabilities depending on the set value Ve (that is, the higher the set value is, the higher the predetermined probability is), or may be the same probabilities regardless of the set value Ve. When the probabilities are the same, it may be a suggestive effect in which the content of the dialogue changes depending on the set value Ve.

It is determined whether or not the effect 05 is performed each time the decorative symbol variable display game is started, and by appropriately executing the effect 05, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not to continue the game of the gaming machine 1. Can be provided to the player.

FIG. 89 shows an example of specific processing contents.
The effect control unit 24 determines in step S3141 whether or not the timing is appropriate for execution of the effect 05, that is, whether or not any of timings 10 to 13 is met.
When it is determined that the timing is not appropriate (S3141: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 89. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing is appropriate (S3141: Y), the effect control unit 24 confirms in step S3142 whether the execution flag is “0”. If the execution flag is not “0”, the process is executed. finish.
When the execution flag is "0", the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3143, and performs a lottery as to whether or not to execute the effect 05 in subsequent step S3144. In this example, the effect 05 as the suggestive effect is executed with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

Then, the production|generation control part 24 branches a process by step S3145 according to whether the said lottery was won. In the case of being unsuccessful, the effect control unit 24 ends each process shown in FIG. 89, and in the case of being elected, the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3146, and sets the set value Ve in step S3147. Select the appropriate conversation. In the conversation selection, one is selected from a plurality of conversations having different selection probabilities according to the set value Ve. For example, three types of conversation 1, conversation 2, and conversation 3 are prepared as a plurality of conversations, and in the setting value 1, conversations 1 to 3 are selected with a probability of 65%, 30%, and 5%, respectively. With setting value 6, conversations 1 to 3 are selected with a probability of 10%, 15%, and 75%, respectively.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize that there is a high possibility that the setting value is 6 when the conversation 3 can be visually recognized, and the setting value 1 when the conversation 1 can be visually recognized. You can recognize that there is a high probability.

(Direction 06)

As a specific example of the presentation 06, the suggestion presentation is performed using the light display device 45a such as the decoration lamp 45 or the LED device at each timing (timing 10 to 25) during the change. Specifically, the effect is performed by turning on the optical display device 45a for a certain period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds), but the emission color is changed according to the set value Ve. The emission color may be uniquely determined by the set value Ve, or the emission color that is easily selected may be different by the set value Ve.
Further, when the gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of light sources such as LEDs as the optical display device 45a, the light source used for the effect may be changed depending on the set value Ve, or different light sources may be used for the effect depending on the set value Ve. It may be configured to be easy.
Further, not only the light source used for the presentation is changed from the LEDs provided as various types of the light display device 45a according to the set value Ve, but also the emission color thereof may be changed.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned fixed time may be changed according to the set value Ve. Alternatively, the light emission effect may be performed at a plurality of timings among the timings 10 to 25 during one change, and the number of effects during one change may be changed according to the set value Ve. Specifically, in the case of the setting value 1, it is easy to perform the light emission effect at 1 to 3 timings of the timings 10 to 25, and in the case of the setting value 6, 6 to 8 locations of the timings 10 to 25. It is configured so that the light emission effect is easily performed at the timing of. Of course, the above-described emission color and the number of the optical display devices 45a used for the presentation may be combined.

As a result, the more the light emission effect is performed during one change, the higher the degree of expectation that is the high set value. Therefore, even if the production with low expectation is being executed during the change, when the suggestive production as the production 06 appears, the player can continue the game without losing interest.

A specific processing procedure will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that, in some cases, detailed description of the same processes as those of the above-described production examples is omitted.
The effect control unit 24 determines in step S3151 whether it is a timing suitable for executing the effect 06, and in step S3152 determines whether the execution flag is “0”.
When it is determined that the timing is appropriate and the execution flag is “0”, the effect control unit 24 sets “1” to the execution flag in step S3153, acquires the set value Ve in step S3154, and sets the set value in step S3155. A lottery is conducted according to Ve.

In this lottery, based on the set value Ve, which light source is used, what display mode (lighting pattern such as once blinking or twice blinking) is adopted, and so on are determined.
In the lottery, there may be a lottery result in which none of the light sources is turned on (=losing).

Next, in step S3156, the effect control unit 24 branches based on whether or not the lottery result is won. In the case of winning, in step S3157, scenario registration for performing light effect is performed.
By such a process, the production 06 as the suggestive production is executed.
The execution flag changed to "1" in step S3153 is cleared to "0" when the timing ends. For example, when the effect 06 is executed and the execution flag is changed to “1” at the timing 10 which is the timing of the winning (start of variation), the period as the timing 10 ends and the next phase (for example, timing 11). The execution flag is returned to “0” when the transition is made to. As a result, the effect 06 can be executed again at the timing 11.

(Direction 07)

As a specific example of the effect 07, the timing (timing 13) at which the first decorative pattern stops among the three left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in a specific area on the liquid crystal display device 36. The timing of the second and third pseudo-repetitions (timings 14 and 15) and the timing at which the second decorative design stops (timing 16), the type of the stopped decorative design corresponds to the set value Ve. Produce a suggestive effect.
For example, when the setting value is 6, the probability that the reach effect (reach variation pattern) in which both the first stopped decorative pattern and the second stopped stopped decorative pattern are 6 is other It is set higher than the set value (1 to 5).

In addition, although the reach effect is not executed (that is, through the normal variation pattern), in a state where all the three decorative symbols are stopped, a specific order of arrangement (for example, the left symbol is 1, the middle symbol is 2, and the right symbol is 3). The suggestive effect may be performed by making the appearance rate of the decorative pattern) different depending on the set value Ve.
Even if the result of the reach effect is deviated, if the stop mode is expected to be a high set value, the player's willingness to play can be maintained.

Further, when all the decorative symbols are stopped and a big hit occurs through the reach effect, a difference according to the set value Ve may be provided in the appearance rate of the decorative symbols that have been a big hit. For example, the probability that a large number of three decorative patterns simulating 6 will be a big hit is set to be higher as the set value becomes higher.
Even if the hit type is unwilling to the player, if the stop mode is expected to be a high set value, the player's willingness to play can be maintained.

Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG. 91. Note that FIG. 91 is an example (S2130b) of each command process (S2130) in the command corresponding process (S2106).
First, the effect control unit 24 executes the processes of steps S2132 to S2134. Since these processes have already been described, detailed description will be omitted.
Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3161, and executes the fluctuation start process in subsequent step S3162.

The fluctuation start process in this example is performed based on the set value Ve. That is, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is selected based on the set value Ve (that is, it is determined whether or not the set value suggestion is included in the variation pattern), and when it is determined to be included, based on the set value Ve A fluctuation pattern lottery is performed, and processing for starting the fluctuation pattern selected as a result of the lottery (scenario registration, command transmission to the liquid crystal control unit 40, etc.) is performed.
Thereby, for example, when the reach effect is executed, the decorative pattern corresponding to the set value Ve is tempered. Further, when displaying a state in which three decorative symbols are arranged to notify the big hit, the decorative symbol corresponding to the set value Ve is stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the variation pattern using the set value Ve is not always selected during the reach effect or the jackpot notification effect. Therefore, a part of the reach effect and the big hit notification effect performs a lottery of a variation pattern that does not depend on the set value Ve. In this case, the variation pattern is selected based on the contents of the variation pattern designation command and the decorative pattern designation command received from the main control unit 20 without using the set value Ve.

Then, the production|generation control part 24 deletes a fluctuation pattern designation|designated command in step S2136, and complete|finishes a series of processes shown in FIG.

(Direction 08)

As a specific example of the effect 08, in the "normal fluctuation 4s" which is the shortest effect in the deviation variation pattern, the higher the set value, the more easily the number of the decorative pattern stopped becomes large. The variation pattern of "normal variation 4s" is used as one mode of suggestive presentation.
It is also possible to adopt a mode in which the decorative pattern corresponding to the value of the set value Ve easily stops. Specifically, if the setting value is 3, it means that the decorative pattern imitating 3 is likely to stop.

Further, in the variation pattern of the deviation through the normal reach, the same decorative pattern may be easily stopped.
The execution timing of the suggestive effect may be, for example, when the second symbol is stopped (timing 17) or when the normal reach occurs and when the winning/depressing effect is generated (timing 18).

In the presentation 08, a high set value can be expected depending on the mode of the decorative pattern that is stopped even if the variation pattern is out of alignment, and it is possible to prevent a decline in game motivation.

Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG. 91. It should be noted that description of each processing of steps S2132 to S2134 is omitted.
The effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3161, and performs a fluctuation start process in subsequent step S3162.
In the fluctuation start process, when the lottery result of the fluctuation pattern is “normal fluctuation 4s” that does not include the reach effect, the decoration stop symbol is determined according to the set value Ve, and the scenario registration or the liquid crystal control unit 40 corresponding thereto is determined. The command is sent to.
Thereby, the decorative pattern selected according to the set value Ve is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the player can infer the set value Ve.

(Direction 09)

As a specific example of the presentation 09, during the title display of the first type super reach (timing 19) and the title display of the second type super reach (timing 22), a danger pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as one of the title images. When a special image (image with a high expected value) such as is displayed, the winning probability of the big hit is different depending on the set value Ve.
Not only the liquid crystal display device 36, but also the sound generating device 46a, the optical display device 45a, and the like are used for this suggestive effect.
For example, the higher the set value Ve, the lower the winning probability after the suggestive effect appears may be set.

Further, the jackpot winning probability is the same for the set values 2 to 6, but the jackpot winning probability for the set value 1 may be 100%. That is, if a special image such as a danger pattern is displayed as a title image but is not a big hit, but is a jackpot, it is possible that the player loses incentive to play. Since the possibility that the setting value is 1 which is disadvantageous to the player disappears, it is possible to prevent the game motivation from being attenuated and to improve the game motivation. That is, whether the lottery result is a big hit or not, it is possible to increase the motivation for the game.

Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG. 91. Note that the description of each process of steps S2132 to S2134 and S2136 is omitted.
After obtaining the set value Ve in step S3161, the effect control unit 24 executes a variation start process based on the set value Ve in step S3162.
In the variation start process, a lottery is carried out in an effect mode according to the set value Ve.
For example, when the set value Ve is 1 and the lottery result of the big hit lottery is “out”, for example, the title of the danger pattern is not displayed but the title is displayed in another mode.
When the set value Ve is 6 and the jackpot lottery result is “out”, the lottery with the possibility of selecting the title display of the danger pattern is performed.

For example, it can be realized by using a table as shown in FIG. In the first type super reach, for example, three types of title screens of title 1, title 2, and title 3 (danger pattern) are prepared. Title 2 is more reliable than Title 1 (possibly winning the big hit lottery), and Title 3 is more reliable than Title 2.

FIG. 92 shows the distribution probabilities of the titles 1, 2, and 3 when the first-class super-reach is executed (when the first-class super-reach is executed or not), which is out of the jackpot lottery. Is shown. Specifically, the numerical value of the numerator when the denominator is set to 65536 is described, and if it is out of the range, the set value Ve=1, 45536 described in the column of title 1 appears with the probability of 45536/65536. Shows. In the rightmost column, the appearance rate of the title 3 is set, which is calculated in consideration of the respective jackpot winning probabilities and the appearance probabilities of the first-class super reach depending on the set value Ve. For example, the setting value Ve=2, which is out of the jackpot lottery, the probability that the winner of the first type super reach is won, and the title 3 in which the danger pattern appears is won is 1.5e-6( 1.5×10^-6).

As can be understood from FIG. 92, the reliability (the degree of expectation to win the jackpot lottery) when the title 3 including the danger pattern as the first type super reach appears on the liquid crystal display device 36 is higher than the set value 6. The set value 1 is higher.
That is, as described above, with the setting value 1, when a special image such as a danger pattern is displayed as a title image, a big hit confirmation effect is obtained, and with the setting value 6, the same effect is not a big hit confirmation effect.

(Direction 10)

As a specific example of the effect 10, the appearance rate of a specific reach (for example, a first type super reach or a second type super reach) varies depending on the value of the set value Ve.
The effect timings are the timings related to the first type super reach (timings 19 to 21) and the timings related to the second type super reach (timings 22 and 23).
Not only the liquid crystal display device 36, but also the sound generating device 46a, the optical display device 45a, and the like are used for this suggestive effect.

For example, at least one of a plurality of reach modes as the first type super reach has different appearance rates depending on the odd/even number of the set value Ve. Moreover, the higher the continuous appearance of the super reach, the higher the possibility that the set value is high.
As a result, even if the super-reach has come off in spite of its appearance, continuous appearance of the super-reach increases the degree of expectation of being a high set value, and can prevent a decrease in game motivation.

A specific processing example will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 93 is an example (S2130b) of each command process (S2130) in the command corresponding process (S2106).
The production control unit 24 executes each processing of steps S2132 to S2134. Detailed description of each process is omitted. Succeedingly, in the step S3171, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the special symbol variable display game to be performed is the first type super reach. This information can be acquired by analyzing the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 20.

In the case of the first type super reach (in the case of S3171: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3172, and determines whether or not the set value Ve is an even number in subsequent step S3173.
If it is an even number (S3172: Y), the effect control unit 24 selects a table for an even number (step S3174). If the number is odd (in the case of S3172: N), the effect control unit 24 selects the table for odd numbers (step S3175).

Next, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery for determining the effect mode (variation mode) based on each table in step S3176, and starts the fluctuation in step S3177 based on the effect mode selected as a result of the lottery. Specifically, a process of transmitting a command for executing the decorative symbol variable display game to the liquid crystal control unit 40, a process of registering a scenario for performing each effect using the speaker 46, the optical display device 45a, and the like. Is executed in step S3177.

In addition, in step S3171, if the special symbol variation display game to be performed is not the first type super reach (in the case of S3171: N), the effect control unit 24, in step S3178, performs processing or lottery according to the variation mode to be executed. Then, the fluctuation is started in step S3177.

After starting the fluctuation, the effect control unit 24 executes the deletion processing of the fluctuation pattern designation command in step S2136.

In this way, by selecting different tables according to whether the set value Ve is even or odd (steps S3174 and S3175), it is possible to make the variation mode that is likely to appear even and the variation mode that is likely to appear odd. .. As a result, the player can estimate the set value Ve based on the behavior of the gaming machine 1.

(Direction 11)

As a specific example of the effect 11, a suggestion effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 and the effect button 13 is performed during execution of the hit-and-fall effect in the second type super reach. For example, when the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an image for instructing the depression of the effect button 13 as one of the winning aspiration effects, an image displayed when the aspiration effect also serves as a suggestive effect and when it does not. Different (for example, different wording instructing button press).
The stirrer effect as the suggestive effect is configured so that, for example, the probability that the probability variation is a big hit is 100%, and only the set value 6 appears.

In this case, the appearance of a stir-up effect as a suggestive effect ensures that the jackpot such as the probability variation 10R has been won, and the set value Ve is 6 which is the maximum set value. It is possible to significantly improve the willingness to play the game.
It should be noted that “fixing” the setting value here does not mean that what was internally undefined in the gaming machine 1 is settled at this moment, but is decided internally as a value that already exists in the gaming machine 1. This means that the set value Ve that is being set is clear to the player, and that the set value Ve that the player has estimated is settled. In addition, not only when the assumed set value Ve is narrowed down to one number, but also when it is narrowed down to a value other than a specific numerical value, it is described as “fixed”. Specifically, it is used such as "determined to be an odd number" or "determined to be 2 or more". In the following description, the word “determined” is used in the same meaning.

Note that it is not essential to determine that the setting value is 6, for example, a configuration that determines that the setting value is 4 to 6 or a configuration that determines that the setting value is not 1. It is also possible to do it. In addition, it may be an effect that suggests that a high setting value is rich even if it is not fixed.

Specifically, an example of executing an effect in which dialogue is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as the winning/defying effect will be described with reference to FIG. 94.
FIG. 94A is a table showing lines 1 to 4 that can be selected for each set value Ve. When the set value Ve is 1, either line 1 or line 3 is selected and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. When the set value Ve is 2, the dialogue 1 is selected (that is, the dialogues 2 to 4 are not displayed).

Since the dialogue 1 is selected regardless of the set value Ve, it is not a suggestive effect. The dialogue 2 can be selected only when the set value Ve is 6, and it is determined that the set value Ve is 6 when the effect is selected.
The serif 3 can be selected when the set value Ve is 1, 3, and 5, and it is determined that the set value Ve is an odd number. The serif 4 can be selected when the set value Ve is 4, 5, and 6, and it is determined that the set value Ve is 4 or more.

A specific processing procedure will be described with reference to FIG. 94B. The above-mentioned processing will not be described in detail.
The effect control unit 24 determines in step S3181 whether it is an appropriate timing to execute the effect 11, and in subsequent step S3182 determines whether the execution flag is “0”.
When the timing is appropriate for executing the effect 11 and the execution flag is “0”, the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to “1” in step S3183 and the set value in step S3184. Ve is acquired, and in a succeeding step S3185, branch processing is performed according to the set value Ve.

If the set value Ve is 1 or 3, the effect control unit 24 selects one of the lines 1 and 3 in step S3186. At this time, the serif 3 may be configured to be less likely to be selected (that is, the selection probability is lower) than the serif 1.
When the set value Ve is 2, the effect control unit 24 selects the line 1 in step S3187.
When the set value Ve is 4, the effect control unit 24 selects one of the lines 1 and 4 in step S3188.
When the set value Ve is 5, the effect control unit 24 selects any one of the lines 1, 3, and 4 in step S3189.
When the set value Ve is 6, the effect control unit 24 selects any one of the lines 1, 2, and 4 in step S3190.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3191.

(Direction 12)

As a specific example of the effect 12, a suggestion effect is performed using the liquid crystal display device 36 at the time of the re-lottery effect (timing 24) after winning the big hit. At this time, the appearance probability of the decorative symbol before the re-lottery, the appearance probability of the decorative symbol after the re-lottery, and the like are varied depending on the set value Ve.
For example, as a re-lottery effect, a state in which decorative patterns (for example, 2, 4, 6, 8) indicating "normal big hit" that do not transition to the probability variation state after the jackpot is complete, is changed to the probability variation state after the jackpot is finished. When performing an effect in which the image changes to a decorative pattern (for example, 1, 3, 5, 7, 9) indicating the probability of changing to a decorative pattern of 1 if the set value Ve of the gaming machine 1 is 1. If the set value Ve is 6, the probability of changing to a decorative pattern of 7 is increased.

In such a gaming machine 1, even in the case of being promoted to the “probable variation big hit” through the re-lottery effect, the player changes every time when it changes to one decorative design and when it changes to seven decorative design. Therefore, it is possible to realize a highly entertaining game.

A specific processing example will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 95 is an example (S2130b) of each command process (S2130) in the command corresponding process (S2106).
After performing the processes of steps S2132, S2133, and S2134, the production control unit 24 performs a process of randomly selecting the variation mode of the decorative symbol based on the hit type and the variation pattern in step S3201.
By the time the process of step S3201 is executed, the effect control unit 24 has received the decorative pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command from the main control unit 20. Therefore, as described above, the effect control unit 24 has already acquired the information of the hit type (disappearance, normal 4R, probability variation 10R, etc.) and variation pattern (normal 4s, super reach 1, etc.). In step S3201, by using these pieces of information, the type of decorative symbol variable display game to be played on the liquid crystal display device 36 is randomly selected.

Succeedingly, in step S3202, the effect control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not the variation mode selected as a result of the previous variation mode lottery includes re-lottery. In the case of the variation mode in which the re-lottery is not executed, the effect control unit 24 performs the process of starting the variation in step S3205, and deletes the variation pattern designation command in step S2136.

On the other hand, in the case of the variation mode in which the re-lottery is executed, the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3203, and executes the process according to the set value Ve in subsequent step S3204. Specifically, the lottery process of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed to the player before the re-lottery and the decorative symbol to be presented to the player after the re-lottery is performed according to the set value Ve.

This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 96.
FIG. 96 is an example of a table used for a lottery of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed to the player via the liquid crystal display device 36. In the re-lottery effect, the appearance mode in which the display on the liquid crystal display device 36 is changed from the decorative pattern showing "normal big hit" as the promotion success pattern to the decorative pattern showing "probable variation big hit" and the promotion failure pattern "normal A presentation mode in which the same decorative pattern indicating the same "normal big hit" is displayed again from the decorative pattern indicating "big hit" is prepared. FIG. 96 is a table referred to when executing the promotion success pattern. Numerical values in the figure show the selection probability of each decorative pattern, and the unit is %.

As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern is selected according to the set value Ve. For example, as the decorative pattern before the re-lottery when the set value Ve is 1, the probability that "2" is selected is 60%, the probability that "4" is selected is 20%, and "6" is selected. The probability is 10%, and the probability that "8" is selected is 10%. Further, as the decorative pattern after the re-lottery when the set value Ve is 1, the probability that "1" is selected is 70%, the probability that "3" is selected is 10%, and "5" is selected. The probability is 10%, the probability that "7" is selected is 5%, and the probability that "9" is selected is 5%.
That is, the setting value Ve is 1, and when the promotion success pattern is revealed as the re-lottery effect, the effect mode in which the decorative symbol “2” is changed to “1” is most easily selected.
As can be understood from FIG. 96, the decorative pattern that is easily selected before and after the re-lottery differs depending on the set value Ve.

Returning to the explanation of FIG.
The effect control unit 24 that has finished the lottery of the decorative symbols according to the set value Ve performs the process of starting the variation in step S3205, and deletes the variation pattern designation command in step S2136. In the process of starting the variation, as described above, the process of transmitting the command for executing the decorative symbol variable display game to the liquid crystal control unit 40 and the various effects using the speaker 46, the optical display device 45a, and the like are performed. Executes the process of registering the scenario.

(Direction 13)

As a specific example of the effect 13, the liquid crystal display device 36 is used to perform a suggestion effect for causing the player to operate two operators (for example, two effect buttons including the effect button 13).
For example, as shown in FIG. 97A, after the wording such as “W device chance!” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (Image 1), two operators to be operated by the player are simulated as shown in FIG. 97B. An image (image 2) including the icon image and a word that prompts an operation such as “press at the same time!” is displayed.
Subsequently, the jackpot lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (FIG. 98A, FIG. 98B). When the jackpot lottery is won, the same decorative pattern (the decorative symbol 7 in the figure) is prepared as shown in FIG. 98A. Will be notified. On the other hand, when the big hit lottery is lost, as shown in FIG. 98B, the lottery is notified because the decorative symbols are not arranged.

After being notified of the failure as shown in FIG. 98B, the image shown in FIG. 99A or 99B is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
The image shown in FIG. 99A is an image displayed with a setting value Ve of any of 1 to 6, for example, and is an image selected with high probability. On the other hand, the image shown in FIG. 99B is an image displayed with a low probability when the set value Ve is 6, for example, and a specific character image (UFO character image in the figure) is added to the image shown in FIG. 99A. It is supposed to be an image. In other words, the image shown in FIG. 99A is always displayed when the set value Ve is 1 to 5, and the image shown in FIG. 99A or 99B is displayed only when the set value Ve is 6. Has been done.
When the image shown in FIG. 99B is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the player can recognize that the set value Ve is 6, which is the maximum value.

In FIG. 99B, the icon of the speaker is described together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. This indicates that when the image effect shown in FIG. 99B is executed, the sound effect by the speaker is simultaneously performed. That is, the player can not only visually enjoy the effect, but also enjoy the effect by hearing.
Then, even a player who misses the image effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 36 can notice the suggestion effect by performing the sound effect using the sound generation device 46a such as the speaker.

The image used for the finalized effect of the set value 6 (FIG. 99B) is presented to the player when it is out of the big hit lottery (that is, the timing 25 when all the symbols are stopped), so that the big hit lottery is lost. It is possible to prevent the game motivation from decaying and to improve the game motivation, so that a highly entertaining effect can be realized.

A specific processing procedure will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S3211, the performance control unit 24 determines whether or not the timing is appropriate for execution of the performance 13. That is, the process branches depending on whether or not the present time is the time when all the symbols are stopped (timing 25).

When the timing is not appropriate to execute the effect 13, the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 100. On the other hand, if the timing is appropriate, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the execution flag is “0” in the following step S3212. When the execution flag is not “0”, that is, when it is “1”, the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 100.
When the execution flag is "0", that is, when the effect 13 is not being executed, the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3213 and acquires the set value Ve in step S3214.

Then, the production|generation control part 24 performs lottery of the production|generation aspect according to the setting value Ve and the winning information of the big hit lottery in step S3215. In this lottery, whether or not to execute the decorative symbol variable display game using each image shown in FIGS. 97 to 99 is selected by lottery, and when it is executed, which image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. You will be drawn by lot.
As a result of the lottery, when performing an effect without using the images shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, the liquid crystal display device 36 ends without performing the subsequent processing shown in FIG.

When the effect using each image shown in FIGS. 97 to 99 is executed, the effect control unit 24 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to sequentially display FIG. 97A (image 1) and FIG. 97B (image 2) in step S3216. Is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40.

Succeedingly, the effect control unit 24, in step S3217, determines whether or not the player's operation based on the image 2 is performed. That is, the process branches based on whether or not the player has operated the manipulator displayed as an icon image on the liquid crystal display device 36.
When the operator is operated, the liquid crystal display device 36 proceeds to the process of step S3219. If the manipulator is not operated, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3218 whether a predetermined time (for example, 3 s) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has not elapsed, the effect control unit 24 executes the process of step S3217 again. On the other hand, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the effect control unit 24 proceeds to the process of step S3219.
That is, the effect control unit 24 repeatedly executes the processes of step S3217 and step S3218 until the player operates the operation element or a predetermined time elapses.

In step S3219, the effect control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not the jackpot lottery is won. The winning information can be acquired from the command received from the main control unit 20.
When the big hit lottery is won, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for displaying FIG. 98A (image 3) on the liquid crystal display device 36 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3220.

If the jackpot lottery has been lost, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for displaying FIG. 98B (image 4) on the liquid crystal display device 36 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3221, and the character image in step S3222. It is determined whether (UFO icon image) is displayed. It should be noted that whether or not to display the character image has already been determined by the lottery in step S3215.

When the character image is not displayed, the effect control unit 24 sends a command for displaying the FIG. 99A (image 5) on the liquid crystal display device 36 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3223.
On the other hand, in the case of displaying the character image, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for displaying FIG. 99B (image 6) on the liquid crystal display device 36 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3224.

The effect of displaying the images 5 and 6 on the liquid crystal display device 36 is the suggestion effect. That is, the player can estimate the set value Ve of the gaming machine 1 from the appearance ratios of the images 5 and 6 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 when the player is out of the big hit lottery.

(Direction 14)

As a specific example of the effect 14, a suggestion effect such as blinking the logo of the gaming machine 1 or the like when all the symbols of the decorative symbol variable display game are stopped (timing 25).
More specifically, after the total number of revolutions after the power is turned on (the number of decorative symbol variable display games performed after the power is turned on) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2000 times), there is a predetermined trigger. From a specific number (for example, 20 times), a suggestion effect such as blinking the logo of the gaming machine 1 or the like is performed when all the symbols in the decorative symbol variable display game are stopped (timing 25). Then, thereafter, the same suggestive effect can be executed periodically (for example, for every 100 decorative symbol variable display games) for a predetermined period (for example, for 20 decorative symbol variable display games). A predetermined period in which the suggestive effect may be performed (during 20 times of the decorative symbol variable display game) is referred to as a suggestive effect period.

The setting value Ve is 1 as long as it flashes at least once in each suggestive effect period. That is, the setting value Ve may be 1 when the suggestive effect of blinking the logo or the like has never occurred in a certain suggestive effect period.
Since the player thinks that the set value Ve may not be 1 while blinking once in each suggestive effect period until then, performing the suggestive effect causes the player to continue the game. Can be the reason.

In addition, when the suggestive effect is performed twice in any of the suggestive effect periods described above (for example, when the suggestive effect is performed twice during the decorative symbol variable display game 20 times in a certain suggestive effect period) Is configured to determine that the set value Ve is 2 or more. In this case, the suggestion effect appears twice in one suggestion effect period, so that the player's motivation for the game can be improved.

The predetermined trigger may be the start or end of a predetermined number of decorative symbol variable display games, or after a specific effect is performed.
Further, although the example in which the optical display device 45a such as the decoration lamp 45 is used as the presentation means is shown, the sound production using the sound generation device 46a may be used instead, or the production using the liquid crystal display device 36. It may be performed, or may be an effect of moving the movable body accessory.

Further, the total number of out balls may be used instead of the total number of revolutions after the power is turned on. According to this, in the gaming machine 1 in which the number of award balls is small and the player is highly likely to stop the game, the gaming balls do not enter the winning openings so much at a timing earlier than the other gaming machines 1. A predetermined opportunity comes, and it is possible to increase the possibility of suppressing a decrease in game motivation for the game machine 1.

Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control unit 24 determines in step S3231 whether it is appropriate as the timing to execute the effect 14, and in subsequent step S3232 determines whether the execution flag is "0".
When it is inappropriate as the timing to execute or when the execution flag is not “0”, the effect control unit 24 ends the process shown in FIG. 101.

Rendering control unit 24, in step S3233, executes the process of changing the execution flag to "1". This prevents the production 14 as the suggestive production from being repeatedly executed at the same timing.

The effect control unit 24 branches in step S3234 depending on whether or not the total number of revolutions is 2000 or more. If it is less than 2000 times, the effect control unit 24 ends each process shown in FIG. 101. If the total number of revolutions is 2000 or more, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3235 whether or not the last two digits of the total number of revolutions are less than 20. "%" in the figure indicates the remainder operator. That is, the formula of "cumulative rotation number %100" represents a formula for calculating a remainder obtained by dividing the cumulative rotation number by 100.

When the last two digits are 20 or more, the effect control unit 24 ends the suggestion effect 14 execution processing without executing the subsequent processing.
When the last two digits are less than 20, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3236 whether or not the last two digits of the cumulative number of revolutions are "00", and when it is "00", the effect number is 0. Is set (step S3237).
In the effect 14, the suggestive effect can be executed 20 times (2000 to 2019 times) after the total number of rotations reaches 2000 times or more. Further, thereafter, every time the last two digits become "00", the suggestive effect can be executed during the subsequent 20 rotations. At this time, in one set of the suggestive effect executable period of 20 rotations, the number of times the suggestive effect is performed is changed according to the set value Ve. The number of effects set to "0" in step S3237 is a variable indicating how many suggested effects have been performed in one set of the suggested effect executable period, and the last two digits of the cumulative rotation number are "00". Every time it is reset to “0”.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3238, and in step S3239, determines whether or not the effect 14 can be executed based on the number of effects and the set value Ve.
FIG. 102 shows an example of a table used for the lottery.
The unit of the numerical value in the figure is “%”, and indicates the probability that the effect 14 as the suggested effect will be executed (that is, the winning probability).
For example, when the set value Ve is 1 and the number of effects is “0”, that is, when the effect 14 is not yet executed in the suggested effect executable period, the effect 14 is executed with a probability of 2%. If the set value Ve is 1 and the number of presentations is 1 to 19, the winning probability is 0%. That is, the production 14 is executed at most once during one set of the suggested production execution period. Therefore, when the effect 14 is executed a plurality of times during one set, it is determined that the set value Ve is 2 or more.

As understood from FIG. 102, the higher the set value Ve, the easier the effect 14 is to be executed. Therefore, the player can infer the set value Ve from the appearance frequency of the effect 14 and the like.

Returning to FIG. The production control unit 24 branches in step S3240 depending on whether or not the production 14 is executed, that is, whether or not the lottery in step S3239 is won.
In the case of being unsuccessful, the effect control unit 24 ends the suggestion effect 14 execution process of FIG. 101.
If the player has won, the production control unit 24 adds 1 to the number of productions in step S3241, transmits a command for production 14 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3242, and registers a scenario for production 14 in step S3243. I do.

(Direction 15)

A specific example of the effect 15 is a suggestion effect performed when an over-winning occurs during each round game (timings 28 to 35) during a big hit.
For example, when over-winning occurs in each round, a sound effect different from the usual sound effect is performed. The probability that different sound effects are performed is increased as the gaming machine 1 has a higher set value. Furthermore, when the different effects are executed in rounds 4 and 5, setting 2 or more is confirmed.

By mounting such an effect 15 on the gaming machine 1, it becomes possible for the player to play with expectation whether or not the suggestive effect is executed even during a normal big hit. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide the gaming machine 1 with a high interest in gaming.

Instead of the sound effect, a light effect using the light display device 45a may be performed.

Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG. 103A. In addition, FIG. 103A is an example (S2130h) of each command processing (S2130) in the command corresponding processing (S2106), and is executed in response to the effect control unit 24 receiving the special winning opening winning command from the main control unit 20. It is an example of a process performed. In addition, in FIG. 103A, processes other than the process relating to the effect 15 as the suggested effect are omitted.
First, the production control unit 24 receives a special winning opening winning command from the main control unit 20 to execute a series of processes shown in FIG. 103A. This command is issued from the main control unit 20 in response to the game ball winning the special winning opening 50 that is opened for a predetermined time in each round game of the big hit game.
The effect control unit 24 that has received the command performs a process of adding 1 to the special winning counter in step S3251. This counter is a variable for counting the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening 50 during each round game, and is cleared to "0" when each round game is started.

Succeedingly, in the step S3252, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the big winning counter has a value larger than the maximum winning number. The upper limit of the number of winning balls is the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed in one round, and when the number of winning balls reaches that number, the special winning opening 50 is closed. However, there is some error between the timing when the number of winning balls reaches the upper limit number and the timing when the special winning opening 50 is closed. For example, two gaming balls win at the same time from the state where the maximum winning number is insufficient. When the player wins in the mouth 50, more prize balls than the maximum number may be allowed (so-called over prize).
In step S3252, it is determined whether or not the winning balls related to the received command this time are more winning balls than the upper limit number.

If the current winning to the special winning opening 50 is an over-winning (S3252: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3253, and executes the effect 15 in the following step S3254. Or lottery.
In this lottery process, the winning probability is set to be different depending on the set value Ve, and, for example, lottery is performed based on the table shown in FIG. 103B. In this example, as shown in FIG. 103B, in the first round, a special sound effect occurs with a setting value of 1 at a probability of 10%, and a special sound effect with a probability of 60% at a setting value of 6. ..
Further, in the fourth round and the fifth round, the winning probability of the setting value 1 is 0%, and when the effect 15 occurs, the setting value 2 or more is fixed.

The production control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not the lottery is won in step S3255. When executing the effect 15, the effect control unit 24 performs scenario registration for outputting a special sound in step S3256.
On the other hand, in the case of being unsuccessful (in the case of S3255:N) or in the case where the current winning is not the over-winning (in the case of S3252:N), the effect control unit 24 performs scenario registration for outputting the normal sound in step S3257. ..

In addition, in the above example, the example in which the effect control unit 24 also manages the number of winning balls during the round has been described, but the main winning mouth winning command in the state of including the information indicating the number of winning balls is mainly controlled. The effect control unit 24 may be configured to receive from the unit 20. In that case, the big prize counter held in the effect control unit 24 is unnecessary, and only the value of the upper limit number of prizes needs to be held. Further, in order that the effect control unit 24 does not have to hold the value of the upper limit number of winnings, a big winning opening winning command including information on whether or not the winning ball corresponds to over winning may be received. .. In this case, the effect control unit 24 does not need to perform the process of step S3251, and instead of step S3252, it may perform a process of determining whether or not the special winning opening winning command is due to an over-winning.

It should be noted that, in the above, an example in which a normal sound effect or a special sound effect is executed at the time of over-winning has been described, but other examples are also possible.
For example, a special sound effect may be selected at a timing when the special winning counter reaches a predetermined number in a specific number of rounds. Specifically, in the fourth round, whether or not to execute a special sound effect at the timing when the special winning counter reaches 5 is drawn according to the set value Ve, and when the winning is achieved, the special sound effect is executed. If the player fails, the normal sound effect is executed. The presentation 15 may have such a mode.
Further, other than that, it may be configured to select no sound effect and sound effect depending on the lottery result. That is, when a prize is won in the special winning opening 50, there is usually no sound effect, and sound effect can be generated only at a specific timing (for example, a timing when the special winning counter of the fourth round becomes 5). It may be configured.

(Direction 16)

As a specific example of the effect 16, the liquid crystal display device 36 at the ending start after the completion of all round games in the big hit, that is, at the time of the mode display effect in which the transition mode after the big hit is displayed (timing 36, 39). An image effect is displayed in which a specific image different from the normal one is displayed above.
The normal image is, for example, an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in accordance with the current number of large-sized condominiums, and is an image for notifying a gaming state. On the other hand, the specific image is, for example, an image in which a specific character image is superimposed on the normal image. The image effect as the effect 16 is executed only when the lottery as to whether or not to display a specific image different from the normal one is won.

The specific image effect is, for example, an effect that suggests that the set value Ve is not 1 (that is, an effect that causes the player to recognize that the set value Ve has been determined to be 2 or more).

Specific processing contents will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, FIG. 104 is an example (S2130i) of each command process (S2130) in the command corresponding process (S2106), and is executed in response to the effect control unit 24 receiving the jackpot end command from the main control unit 20. It is an example of a process.
The big hit end command is a command issued when all of the round games executed during the big hit game are finished, and the production control unit 24 receives the command and is used as an ending on the liquid crystal display device 36. Each process for outputting the image effect is executed.
In addition, in FIG. 104, parts other than the part related to the effect 16 are omitted.

The effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3261, and then, in the following step S3262, the effect control unit 24 draws whether or not the effect 16 as the suggestive effect can be executed.
Then, production control part 24 performs branch processing according to a lottery result in Step S3263.
When the lottery is won (S3263: Y), the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for displaying a special image to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3264. Thereby, for example, an image as shown in FIG. 105B is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
On the other hand, when the drawing is unsuccessful (in the case of S3263: N), the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for normal image display to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3265. Thereby, for example, an image as shown in FIG. 105A is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

When displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 36 and performing sound effect or light effect, the process for scenario registration is also performed together with step S3264 and step S3265.
For example, in FIG. 105B, the speaker icon is shown together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. This indicates that, as in the case of FIG. 99B, when the image effect shown in FIG. 105B is executed, the sound effect by the speaker is simultaneously performed.

Also, the UFO icon drawn in the image of FIG. 105B describes the same effect (concentrated line effect) as the UFO icon drawn in the image of FIG. 99B. Image effects in which the same effect drawing is added to the same UFO icon may mean the same suggestive content. For example, in the image effect shown in FIG. 99B, by being used for the effect of confirming that the set value Ve is 6, the UFO icon with a concentrated line is a confirmed effect of the set value 6 for the player. You can give recognition that there is. Then, the image using the UFO icon in the same drawing mode (for example, FIG. 105B) is similarly only an effect for confirming that the set value Ve is 6, thereby causing the player to misidentify the suggestion content. Without it, it becomes possible to notify appropriately.

This is not limited to image production. Specifically, FIG. 99B shows that the sound effect is executed at the same time as the image effect, and similarly, FIG. 105B also shows that the sound effect is executed. It is desirable that the sound effects executed at this time are similar (for example, the same sound or sound effect is output). In the sound effect as well, the same effect mode can be used to notify the correct suggestion content without misidentification by the player.
Of course, the same applies not only to sound effects but also to light effects using LEDs or the like. That is, it is possible to prevent false recognition of the suggested content by making the LEDs used for the sound effect the same and by making the emission colors of the LEDs the same.
Further, when the combinations are the same, the same suggestion content may be shown. For example, a UFO icon with a concentrated line has appeared, but if the sound effect at that time is different, it may be configured to have different suggestive contents. That is, when both the UFO icon and the sound effect are in the same effect mode, the suggested effect may be the same instructive content.

Another example of the effect 16 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 shows an example of state transition different from FIG. Specifically, in FIG. 126, after the round game (final R release) of the final round during the big hit game, the big hit end interval effect is executed after an interval between rounds. Further, after that, an invocation warning and an IC forgetting attention warning (similar to the timing 40 and the timing 41 shown in FIG. 83) are executed, and after that, a company logo (corresponding to the timing 42 in FIG. 83) and a high-precision/normal suggestion Screen display (corresponding to timing 39 in FIG. 83) is sequentially executed.
Also, each round game is a second winning game section (feature continuous operation period), and the ending period is a third winning game section. The opening period (fanfare period) is the first winning game section.

As a first example of the execution period of the set value suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, that is, on the liquid crystal display device 36, from the start of the big hit end interval effect to the last phase of the big hit game, that is, the end of the high-precision/normal suggestion screen display. An image effect in which a specific symbol is superimposed on is executed.

As a second example of the execution period of the set value suggestion effect, the image effect is executed from the start of the big hit end interval effect to the end of the display of the company logo.

Further, as a third example of the execution period of the set value suggestion effect, not only the ending period of the big hit game, but also the section before the ending period, that is, the image as the set value suggestion effect from during the execution of the final round of the big hit game. The performance is executed.

In any of the first example, the second example, and the third example of the execution period of the set value suggesting effect, the set value suggesting effect appears at least in a period longer than half the ending period (20 seconds). Is configured.
In this way, it is desirable that the set value suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period or longer. Further, when the set value suggestion effect is performed during the ending period (third hitting game section) or the fanfare period (first hitting game section), and when those sections end in a relatively short time, Like the third example of the execution period of the set value suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect may be displayed from the second hitting game section (or for a while after entering the second hitting game section). .. In addition, after the ending section ends, that is, after a high-accuracy or low-accuracy (normal) game is started, it appears for a while (for example, for n seconds or until n number of symbol variation display games end). It may be configured as follows.

The set value suggestive effect is not executed so many times as compared with the big hit suggestive effect. This is because the winning result of the big hit lottery occurs every time the big hit lottery is carried out, and the notification frequency is inevitably high, whereas the set value is not changed during the game of one day. This is because (or significantly less), there is a high possibility that further notification will be meaningless once notified once.
However, if the player misses the suggestion of the set value by a few set value suggestive effects, the player has to wait for the next occurrence of the set value suggestive effect having a low appearance frequency, which is a significant disadvantage for the player. May occur. Therefore, it is desirable to perform the setting value suggestive effect over a long period of time, that is, present the suggestive content.

Further, the timing when the final round of the big hit game is exhausted (that is, the ending period) is also a timing when the player's interest in the gaming machine is temporarily diminished. However, at this timing, an image effect is given to call attention to the sneaking-in and the attention to forgetting to take the IC. That is, the effect may be diminished even if such a caution is given at a timing when the player's interest is diminished.
However, in the gaming machine 1 in this example, since the image production as the set value suggestion production is executed in the ending period, the image production for giving various attention while keeping the player highly interested. Can be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play and improve the effectiveness of each alert.

(Direction 17)

As a specific example of the effect 17, during the ending of the pattern A (that is, timings 36 to 38), a suggestive effect using the sound generation device 46a is performed with a predetermined probability. For example, when performing the suggestive effect, one is further selected and output from a plurality of types of voice data (speech data). There are, for example, five types of voice data, and the suggested contents differ depending on the voice data.

FIG. 106A shows the correspondence between the selected voice data and the suggested contents.
As shown in the figure, when the voice data 1 is output, it is determined that the set value Ve is 2 or more, and when the voice data 2 is output, it is determined that the set value Ve is an even number. However, when the audio data 3 is output, it is determined that the set value Ve is an odd number. Further, when the voice data 4 is output, it is determined that the set value Ve is 3 or more, and when the voice data 5 is output, the set value Ve is determined to be 6.

A specific processing flow will be described with reference to FIG. 106B.
First, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3271 whether the timing for executing the effect 17 is appropriate, and in step S3272 determines whether the execution flag is "0".
When the timing is not appropriate or when the execution flag is “1”, the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 106B.

When the timing is appropriate and the execution flag is “0”, the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to “1” in step S3273, and executes the effect 17 as the suggested effect in the subsequent step S3274. Whether or not to draw.

Then, the production|generation control part 24 determines whether the lottery was won by step S3275. In the case of being unsuccessful (in the case of S3275: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 106B. On the other hand, if the player has won the prize (S3275: Y), the effect control unit 24 executes a branch process according to the set value Ve in step S3276.

If the set value Ve is 1, the effect control unit 24 selects the audio data 3 in step S3277. When the set value Ve is 2, the effect control unit 24 selects one of the voice data 1 and the voice data 2 in step S3278. When the set value Ve is 3 or 5, the effect control unit 24 selects any one of the voice data 1, the voice data 3, and the voice data 4 in step S3279. When the set value Ve is 4, the effect control unit 24 selects any one of the voice data 1, the voice data 2, and the voice data 4 in step S3280. When the set value Ve is 6, the effect control unit 24 selects any one of the voice data 1, the voice data 2, the voice data 4, and the voice data 5 in step S3281.
In each selection process of steps S3277 to S3281, a lottery process based on a predetermined probability is performed. That is, it is a process of selecting one from the options based on a predetermined probability determined in advance. Note that each option does not have to have the same easiness of selection. For example, in the case of the set value 6, one is selected from the audio data 1, the audio data 2, the audio data 4 and the audio data 5, but the audio data 2 is easier to be selected than the audio data 1. May be configured.

The effect control unit 24 performs scenario registration for outputting the selected voice data in step S3282. As a result, the voice data corresponding to the set value Ve is selected and output, which allows the player to guess the set value Ve.

In the gaming machine 1 configured such that the effect 17 can be executed, even if the player's willingness to play is likely to be diminished by winning the regular jackpot rather than the probability-changing jackpot, the pattern A will be displayed during the ending. Since it is possible to have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, it is possible to prevent a decline in game motivation.

(Direction 18)

As a specific example of the effect 18, for example, when the effect that notifies the transition to the probability variation state is performed at the timing 36 to 42 when the probability variation big hit during the transition to the probability variation state after the big hit game, the effect button 13 is performed. The sound effect to be executed is changed according to the operation such as. For example, when performing a sound production of a blessing voice that blesses the transition to the probability change state, four types of blessing voices are prepared (FIG. 107A).

When the blessing voice 1 is used, it is not known which value the set value Ve is. That is, it is considered as a non-indication production. For example, blessing voice 1 is selected in most cases. Thereby, when the blessing voice 1 is not selected and the following suggestive effect is performed, it is possible to give the player an uplifting feeling.
When the blessing voice 2 is used, it is determined that the set value Ve is 2 or more. When the blessing voice 3 is used, it is confirmed that the set value Ve is 4 or more. When the blessing voice 4 is used, it is determined that the set value Ve is 6.

A flowchart of specific processing is shown (FIG. 107B). Note that FIG. 107B is an example (S2130i) of each command process (S2130) in the command corresponding process (S2106). In addition, FIG. 107B shows only the process related to the execution of the effect 18, and in reality, the effect control unit 24 also performs various processes not shown.
The production control unit 24, in step S3291, determines whether or not the mode to be shifted to after the jackpot game is over is the probability change state. The mode to be shifted can be specified by the jackpot end command, for example, as described above.
When it is not in the probability changing state (S3291: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 107.
When the transition mode is in the probability change state (S3291: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3292, and performs branch processing based on the set value Ve in step S3293.

When the set value Ve is 1, the effect control unit 24 selects the blessing voice 1 in step S3294. When the set value Ve is 2 or 3, the effect control unit 24 selects one of the blessing voice 1 and the blessing voice 2 in step S3295. When the set value Ve is 4 or 5, the effect control unit 24 selects any one from the blessing voice 1, the blessing voice 2 and the blessing voice 3 in step S3296. When the set value Ve is 6, the effect control unit 24 selects any one from the blessing voice 1, the blessing voice 2, the blessing voice 3 and the blessing voice 4 in step S3297. Each selection process is synonymous with performing a lottery process based on a predetermined probability set in advance.

Subsequently, the performance control unit 24 executes the scenario registration for outputting the selected blessing voice in step S3298.
The blessing voices to be selected do not have to have the same easiness of selection.

(Direction 19)

As a specific example of the effect 19, at the timing 36 to 42 which is determined to be a big hit, for example, when notifying a transition to a time saving state after a big hit game, the light effect using the light display device 45a and the liquid crystal display device 36 are used. Suggestive effect is performed by performing the image effect used.
As an example, when there is a movable body accessory that is moved at any of timings 36 to 42 to notify that the transition to the time saving state is performed, it is mounted on the movable body accessory in the suggestion effect. The light display device 45a (LED or the like) is illuminated. At this time, a suggestive effect is performed depending on how many colors the light source as the optical display device 45a is made to emit.

For example, there are five types of light colors: blue, green, yellow, red, and rainbow. The "rainbow" is a light emitting mode in which a plurality of light emitting colors are sequentially changed at regular time intervals such as 0.2 seconds.
FIG. 108A shows an example in which the selection probability of each color differs depending on the set value Ve. As shown in the figure, the issuance pattern that emits rainbow colors is the most difficult to select regardless of the set value Ve, but the higher the set value Ve, the easier it is to select. Further, the lower the set value Ve, the easier it is for blue to be selected. As can be seen from the figure, blue has the lowest expected value, and green, yellow, red, and rainbow have higher expected values in the order of higher set values. That is, for the player, blue, green, yellow, red, and rainbow are the motives for increasing the game in order.
A flowchart of specific processing is shown (FIG. 108B). Note that FIG. 108B is an example (S2130i) of each command process (S2130) in the command corresponding process (S2106). Further, in FIG. 108B, only the process related to the suggestive effect is extracted and shown.
Production control section 24, in step S3301, determines whether the transition mode after the big hit game is in a time saving state.
When not shifting to the time saving state (S3301: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 108B. On the other hand, when shifting to the time saving state (S3301: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in the following step S3302, and performs the lottery according to the set value Ve in step S3303. In the lottery, lottery is performed based on the table shown in FIG. 108A.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24, in step S3304, performs scenario registration for realizing the effect 19 as the suggested effect.

(Direction 20)

Effects 20 to 21 are suggestive effects executed at timings not shown in FIG. 84. The effect 20 is an effect executed during the decorative symbol variable display game in the time saving state. Specifically, the effect of causing a specific character to appear on the liquid crystal display device 36 while in the time saving state (that is, until the transition to the normal state or before the transition to the big hit game). is there. The character image that has once appeared does not disappear during the game in the time saving state, and the state of being superimposed and displayed on the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as another image effect is maintained.
Further, the number of the character on the liquid crystal display device 36 is configured to be able to increase while playing the time saving state, and the number of the character finally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. The set value Ve can be estimated according to

A specific processing flow will be described with reference to FIG. 109A. The series of processes shown in FIG. 109A are appropriately executed as shown in FIG. 109A at the timing when the decorative symbol variable display game in the time saving state is started, the timing when all the symbols are stopped, and the like. Further, it may be executed for each special symbol variable display game in the time saving state, or may be executed for each of the five special symbol variable display games.

First, in step S3311, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the timing for executing the effect 20 as the suggested effect is appropriate. If the timing is not appropriate (S3311: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 109A.
When the timing is appropriate (in the case of S3311: Y), the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the execution flag is 0 in the following step S3312.

When the execution flag is 1 (S3312: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the process. When the execution flag is 0 (S3312: Y), the effect control unit 24 sets 1 in the execution flag in the following step S3313. The execution flag is reset to 0 every time the special symbol variable display game is started, for example. That is, the execution flag is a flag for preventing the effect 20 from being executed multiple times in one variable display game.

The production control unit 24, in step S3314, performs a lottery according to the set value Ve and the appearance counter CNT. The appearance counter CNT is the number of characters to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. As described above, while the time saving state continues (that is, until the game state is changed to another game state), the current state is only maintained or increased, and decreases. It is said that there is nothing to do. Although not shown, the appearance counter CNT is cleared to “0” when transitioning from the time saving state to another state.
FIG. 109B is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the lottery process according to the set value Ve and the appearance counter CNT.

As shown in the figure, in the state where the appearance counter CNT is 0, the winning probability in one lottery opportunity is set to be low, but this means that the lottery opportunity occurs many times during the time saving state. Think about it.
Further, as can be seen from the figure, since the winning probability is 0% when the appearance counter CNT is 3, the maximum number of characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is three. Further, in the set values 1 to 3, there are at most two bodies. That is, when the three character images are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the player can recognize that the set value Ve is 4 or more.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 109A.
After the lottery based on the table is performed, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3315 whether or not the lottery is won. If the player has won (S3315: Y), a process of adding 1 to the appearance counter CNT is performed (S3316), and a command for image output corresponding to the appearance counter CNT is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40. (S3317).
On the other hand, if the appearance has failed (S3315: N), the appearance counter CNT is left as it is and the process proceeds to step S3317, and a command for image output corresponding to the appearance counter CNT is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40.
The command transmitted to step S3317 is a command based on the image effect that appears in the decorative symbol variable display game at that time, and is a different command if the image effect is different.

(Direction 21)

As a specific example of the effect 21, an image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 is performed as a suggested effect during a predetermined time from the opening of the store, in the evening, or at a specific time such as when the store is about to close.
When the RTC function unit is provided in the gaming machine 1, the time zone between opening, evening, and closing of the store is grasped based on the current time obtained by the RTC function. In addition, when the opening time or the closing time differs depending on the store or region, the gaming machine 1 may be configured so that the opening time or the closing time can be set.

Further, when the gaming machine 1 is not provided with the RTC function unit, each time zone may be indirectly grasped from the number of gaming balls discharged from the outlet 49.
Specifically, when the jackpot lottery is won in the period from the occurrence of the first out ball after the power is turned on to the occurrence of the 1000th out ball, a specific effect appears as a suggested effect when the store is opened. In addition, when the big hit lottery is won in the period from the occurrence of the 25,000th out ball to the occurrence of the 26000th out ball, a specific effect appears as a suggested effect in the evening. Furthermore, when the big hit lottery is won in the period from the occurrence of the 40,000th out ball to the occurrence of the 41,000th out ball, a specific effect appears as a suggestion effect just before the closing of the store.
In this case, the player may be informed that the particular effect is a time zone in which it may appear as a suggested effect.

That is, the specific effect that was randomly selected and appeared at a certain probability in the other times appears as a suggested effect in which the ease of appearance changes according to the set value Ve in each of the above sections. Become. It should be noted that it may be a dedicated effect for suggestive effect that does not appear outside of the above time zones.
The specific effect that appears as a suggested effect when the store is opened, the specific effect that appears as a suggested effect in the evening, and the specific effect that appears as a suggested effect just before the store is closed may be different effects, and the same. It may be a production.
Further, the liquid crystal display device 36 may display only an image for a specific effect as a suggestive effect, or an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as another image effect (not related to the suggestive effect). Image) (a small image such as an icon) to be presented as the suggestive effect may be superimposed and displayed.

A specific processing flow will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 110 is an example of a flowchart for the case where the RTC function unit is provided in the gaming machine 1.
First, in step S3321, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the timing for executing the effect 21 is appropriate. In this process, for example, only whether or not it is a predetermined timing in the special variable display game is determined. Specifically, if the effect 21 is to be performed at the timing of start of variation in the special variation display game, it is determined whether or not the present time is such timing.

If the timing is appropriate (S3321: Y), the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3322 whether the execution flag is 0 or not.
When the timing is not appropriate (in the case of S3321: N) or the execution flag is 1 (in the case of S3322: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 110.

If the timing is appropriate and the execution flag is 0, the effect control unit 24 performs a process of setting 1 in the execution flag in step S3323, and a process of acquiring the RTC value in subsequent step S3324.
Next, in step S3325, effect control unit 24 determines from the acquired RTC whether or not the current time is in a specific time zone, that is, whether or not it is in the time zone corresponding to the opening of the store as described above.
When the present time is specific (in the case of S3325: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3326, and performs the lottery according to the set value Ve in step S3327. Specifically, for example, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the winning probability.

On the other hand, when the current time is not the specific time (S3325: N), the effect control unit 24 performs the effect lottery to win with a certain probability in step S3328. That is, the player wins with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

After step S3327 or S3328, the effect control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not the lottery for the effect 21 is won in step S3329.
If the player has won the prize (S3329: Y), the effect control unit 24 transmits a command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3330 to cause the image effect as the effect 21 to appear.
On the other hand, in the case of being unsuccessful (in the case of S3329: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 110 without transmitting the command.

As will be understood from the description, when the effect 21 is won as a result of being randomly selected in step S3328, the effect 21 appears as an image effect that is not a suggestion effect. In addition, when the result of the lottery corresponding to the set value Ve is won in step S3327, it is revealed as an image effect as a suggestive effect.

As described above, the image production as the suggestive production is executed just before the opening of the store, so that the game of the player can be promoted immediately after the opening of the store, and the operating time of the gaming machine 1 can be improved. Further, the image production as the suggestive production is executed just before the store is closed, so that the game of the player can be continued until the store is closed, and the operating time of the gaming machine 1 can be improved. Further, as a result, it becomes possible to promote the game when the store is opened the next day.

(Summary of each performance)

When the 21 types of suggestive effects described above are not displayed at the same time, it can be realized by devising the execution flag used in each suggestive effect. That is, in each execution flag, “0” indicates not yet executed, “1” indicates already executed, and “2” indicates that it is being executed. Then, when determining whether or not to execute each effect, by confirming whether or not the execution flag for another suggestive effect is “2”, it is possible to execute another suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a plurality of suggestive effects from being executed at the same time.
Further, the suggestive effect that may be executed at the same time can be realized by omitting the process of confirming the execution flag for the suggestive effect.

As a matter of course, the gaming machine 1 may not include all of the 21 types of suggestive effects described above.
Further, FIG. 84 is merely an example, and various suggestive effects may be performed at a timing at which there is no o mark in FIG. 84.

[8-4. Other examples of production]

Each of the above-described production examples will be described. First, the operation flow of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the series of operation flows shown in FIG. 111 include the processing of the main control unit 20, the processing of the effect control unit 24, and the operations by the hall staff, the player, and the like. In addition, the processing shown in FIG. 111 is an extract of the processing that is important for understanding the movement of the gaming machine 1 among the respective processing executed by the gaming machine 1, It is considered as a part.

When a power-on operation is performed by the hall staff or the like (step S4001), the main control unit 20 of the gaming machine 1 detects the operation and sends a command to the effect control unit 24 to display a standby screen on the liquid crystal control unit 40. A command for causing this is transmitted, and a standby screen (an image including characters such as "Plause wait... ") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (step S4002).

Subsequently, in step S4003, the main control unit 20 performs a branch process depending on whether or not the set value change condition is satisfied (step S104 described above).
When the setting value change condition is satisfied, a command is issued from the main control unit 20 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 via the effect control unit 24 to notify the liquid crystal display device 36 that the setting is being changed. A screen is displayed (step S4004).

The main control unit 20 confirms whether or not the setting key switch is OFF in step S4006 while accepting the setting change operation in step S4005. That is, by accepting the setting change operation until the setting key switch is turned off, the change operation of the hall staff or the like can be performed.
After confirming that the setting key switch is OFF, the main control unit 20 performs a command transmission via the effect control unit 24 in step S4007 to display a screen on the liquid crystal display device 36 to notify the end of the setting change. .. Further, the effect control unit 24 performs processing for turning on the setting change flag in step S4008.
The setting change flag is changed to “ON” when the setting is changed, and is a flag referred to for determining whether or not to perform the setting value change suggestive effect. The setting change flag is stored in, for example, the RAM 243 included in the effect control unit 24.
The above steps S701 to S717 are executed at the timing of performing steps S4005 and S4006. The process corresponding to step S4007 is the process of step S722 described above.

Subsequently, the main control unit 20 performs a RAM clear process in step S4009, and executes a RAM clear notification mode in step S4010. The RAM clear notification mode is a mode of the gaming machine 1 realized by the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24, the liquid crystal control unit 40, etc., and uses the liquid crystal display device 36, various lamps (LEDs, etc.), the speaker 46, etc. Will be realized.

The main control unit 20 that has completed the setting change realizes the RAM clear notification mode by using the effect control unit 24 and the like in step S4009, and executes the RAM clear processing in step S4010.
Steps S4009 and S4010 correspond to the processes of steps S116 to S118 described above.

If it is determined in step S4003 that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the main control unit 20 determines in step S4011 whether the RAM is abnormal or the backup flag is abnormal. If any of the abnormalities has occurred, the main control unit 20 uses the effect control unit 24 to realize the error notification mode (step S4012). The hall staff member who has recognized the error notification mode performs an operation of, for example, turning off the power of the gaming machine 1 (step S4013).

If the setting change condition is not satisfied, the RAM is not abnormal, and the backup flag is not abnormal, the main control unit 20 determines in step S4014 whether the RAM clear switch is ON. If the RAM clear switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S4009.
On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is OFF, the main control unit 20 determines in step S4015 whether or not the set value confirmation condition is satisfied (step S108 described above).

If the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the main control unit 20 executes the setting confirmation mode in step S4016. In the setting confirmation mode, an image for notifying that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, a process of displaying the set value Ve on the setting/performance display 97, and the like are performed. Corresponds to step S109 described above.
The main controller 20 displays the set value Ve on the setting/performance display 97 until the setting key switch is turned off by performing a process of determining whether the setting key switch is off in step S4017. to continue.
When the setting key switch is turned off, the main control unit 20 transmits a command for displaying a normal screen in step S4018.

After executing either step S4010 or S4018, the processing shifts to the processing shown in FIG.
The main control unit 20 determines whether or not the jackpot lottery probability state is highly accurate (step S4019). If it is not highly accurate, that is, if it is low (S4019: N), the effect control unit 24 sets the set value change suggesting effect lottery flag to ON in step S4020. The set value change suggestive effect lottery flag is a flag indicating whether or not to perform a lottery process for determining whether or not to perform the set value change suggestive effect, and if ON, the lottery process is executed in a process described later. To be done. This flag is stored in, for example, the RAM 243 included in the effect control unit 24.

When the jackpot lottery probability state is high (S4019: Y), the effect control unit 24 turns off the setting value change suggestion effect lottery flag (step S4021) and turns off the setting change flag (step S4022).
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the set value is changed, the jackpot lottery probability state is started from the low probability state. That is, since it is highly accurate at the stage of step S4019, it means that the set value has not been changed, so that the processes of steps S4021 and S4022 are performed so that the set value change suggestive effect does not appear.
Note that this process is a precautionary process, and even if the process of turning off both flags is omitted here, the set value change suggestion effect is not executed.

Subsequently, the main controller 20, in step S4023, determines whether or not to start the big hit game. When the power is turned off during the big hit game, the backup recovery process returns the big hit game to the state after the power is turned on. In such a case, the determination result of step S4023 becomes Y, and the process advances to step S4024.
In step S4024, the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 perform processing for displaying the big hit screen on the liquid crystal display device 36.
When the jackpot game is started after the power is turned on, the effect control unit 24 executes a process of turning off both the set value change suggesting effect lottery flag and the setting change flag (steps S4025 and S4026), and the process of step S4027. Move to. Also, when it is determined in step S4023 that the big hit game is not started, the process proceeds to step S4027.

In step S4027, the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 stand by until the special symbol variable display game is started. If the special symbol variation display game is started, or if it is started during the special symbol variation display game due to power failure recovery, the process proceeds to step S4028, and it is determined whether or not the set value change suggestive effect lottery flag is ON. The effect control unit 24 executes the determination process.

When the set value change suggesting effect lottery flag is ON, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery process in step S4029 as to whether or not to execute the set value change suggesting effect.
When the lottery process is won, a set value change suggesting effect based on the effect mode won in the subsequent process appears.
Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 turns off the set value change suggestion effect lottery flag in step S4030, and turns off the set value change flag in step S4031.

When the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 issue a command, the decorative symbol variable display game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in step S4032.

(Set value change suggestion production 1)

The suggestion effect regarding the presence/absence of a change in the set value, which is the effect mode as shown in the effect 04, is executed, for example, between step S4031 and step S4032. Further, in the description of the effect 04, when the effect 04 as the suggestive effect is executed, the button is vibrated, whereas when not executed, the button is not vibrated, but other effect modes are also possible. ..
For example, at the start of the first decorative pattern variable display game after power-on, at least some vibration of the button is set to occur, and when the set value change suggestive effect 1 as the suggestive effect is executed, The vibration may be increased (the number of vibrations or the vibration time may be increased). Specifically, it can be realized by using a PM type stepping motor or the like. For example, when the set value change suggestive effect 1 as the suggestive effect is executed, the stepping motor is operated in four steps, and when the button is simply vibrated instead of the suggestive effect, the stepping motor is operated in two steps.
Thereby, even when the set value change suggestion effect 1 is not executed, the vibration of the button occurs, and the player can be given a feeling of uplifting.

In the case where the special machine 1 and the special machine 2 are provided in the gaming machine 1, if the first special symbol variation display game after turning on the power is related to the special machine 2, the set value change suggestion effect 1 Need not be carried out. That is, the set value change suggestion effect 1 may be executed when the first special symbol variation display game for the special figure 1 after the power is turned on is started.

(Set value change suggestion production 2)

The set value change suggestion effect 2 appears at the timing when the background image (effect mode) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched. The background image (effect mode) is, for example, a type of scene displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and is an effect mode identified by the player. For example, a "town mode" in which a scene of the character walking in the town is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, a "vehicle mode" in which a scene of the character riding a car is displayed, and the character rests at the beach. The "vacation mode" in which the scene being played is displayed is appropriately displayed. When performing the image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 in each effect mode, the image effect corresponding to each scene can appear. Also, an effect that occurs only in a specific effect mode may be provided.

The timing at which the background image (effect mode) is switched may come, for example, for each fixed number of special symbol variable display games, or for each special symbol variable display game, the effect mode transition lottery is performed with a predetermined probability, and the winning is achieved. In this case, the background image (effect mode) may be switched.
That is, the set value change suggestive effect 2 may be generated at a different timing from the start of the first decorative symbol variable display game after the power is turned on.
In such a case, for example, a part of the processing shown in FIGS. 111 and 112 can be changed as shown in FIG. 113.

After the setting value change suggestion effect lottery flag is turned on (in the case of S4028: Y) and the setting value change suggestion effect lottery is executed in step S4029, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the lottery is won in step S4041. Branch by.
If the player has won, the effect control unit 24 stores in the RAM 243 or the like the effect mode of the set value change suggesting effect that is won in step S4042. From the stored information, the performance timing and the content of the performance can be specified. It should be noted that the information stored here is erased after being used for executing the set value change suggestive effect, for example.

The set value change suggestion effect 2 is executed at the timing when the background image (effect mode) is switched for the first time after the power is turned on. At that time, a dedicated background image for the set value change suggestive effect 2 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. The dedicated background image is, for example, the “pool mode” in which the scene where the character is playing in the pool is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
The dedicated effect mode is maintained until the next background image switching timing. That is, the player is unlikely to miss the suggestive effect that suggests that the set value Ve has been changed, and the motivation for the game can be improved.

In the case where the lottery is lost in step S4029, the dedicated background image is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 even if the set value Ve is changed.

(Set value change suggestion 3)

The set value change suggestion effect 3 is a suggestion effect that causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display a specific image under specific conditions before the end of the first big hit game after the power is turned on. Further, in this example, the set value change suggestive effect 3 also serves as the set value suggestive effect.

Specific description will be made with reference to FIG. 114.
FIG. 114A is a diagram schematically showing a specific image displayed as, for example, a result screen for notifying the result of the big hit game on the liquid crystal display device 36 after the big hit game is finished.
In the specific image, one character image is displayed in the left half area in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, and another character image is displayed in the right half area. Although not shown in the figure, it is assumed that result information such as the number of coins thrown is displayed in this image.
In the following description, the character image displayed in the left half area will be described as “left character”, and the character image displayed in the right half area will be described as “right character”.

The left character and the right character are different characters when they appear at the same time, and there are patterns in which only one of the left and right appears, and there are patterns in which the character does not appear on either the left or right.
In this example, the suggestion effect is different in suggestion content depending on the combination and appearance timing of the characters appearing in the left character and the right character.

FIG. 114B is a diagram showing an example of combinations of left and right characters and suggestive contents. As shown in the figure, there are 14 types of appearance patterns of the character image (pattern Nos. 1 to 14). "ANY" in the figure means that any character appears, and it is not included when the character does not appear. That is, the effect pattern in which the pattern number is set to 1 corresponds to the case where there is no left character and some character image is displayed as the right character.

The specific image effect that is set to the pattern No. 1 or 2 has a suggestion content of “none”, and is a normal image effect that is not a suggestion effect. The background color in this case is "blue".
That is, when only one of the left character and the right character appears in the specific image effect after the big hit game, the player can recognize that it is a normal image effect that is not a suggestion effect.
In addition, since the background color is set to "blue" only for the specific image effects that are the pattern Nos. 1 and 2, a normal image that is merely a recognition that the background color is "blue" and is not a suggestive effect. You can understand that it is a production.

The specific image effects designated as patterns Nos. 3, 4, and 5 are any combination of the protagonist A or the protagonist B and the pets C, D, and E. In addition, in any image presentation, the suggestion content is “indication of XX”. This is different from the suggestion content that is described as “confirmation of XX” described later, and is the content that indicates that XX is rich although it is not definite.
The specific image effect specifically set as the pattern No. 3 is “4, 5, 6 suggestion”, and the set value Ve is easily selected in 4 to 6, and the set value Ve is selected in 1 to 3. The effect pattern is difficult (however, the appearance rate is not 0%).
The background color of each of the specific image effects designated as patterns Nos. 3, 4, and 5 is "green". That is, the appearance of a specific image effect whose background color is "green" allows the player to obtain information for assisting the estimation of the set value Ve.

For the specific image effects with pattern Nos. 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10, the suggestion content is “OK confirmation”. That is, it is an image effect that appears as a suggestion effect (determination suggestion effect) in which the value of the set value Ve is determined as one or is determined to be within a certain range. The background color is set to “gold” or “rainbow”, and the player can understand that it is a confirmation suggestion effect for the set value Ve just by looking at the background color.
Further, the specific image effect shown in the pattern No. 6 whose background color is “rainbow” is a suggestive effect in which the highest setting value 6 is set, and thus it is possible to significantly improve the player's willingness to play. Become.

The specific image effects designated as pattern Nos. 11 and 12 have a negative suggestion content of "XX". That is, the image effect (negative suggestion effect) suggests that the set value Ve is not a certain value. In any of the image effects, the background color is set to “black”, and it is possible to recognize that the effect is some negative suggestion effect only by checking the background color.

The specific image effects designated as pattern Nos. 13 and 14 are combinations that do not appear on the game result display screen displayed after the jackpot game is over. The details will be described later.

As described above, even a player who does not know the original work such as a work that is the theme of the gaming machine 1, that is, a player who does not recognize a character such as the protagonist A or the protagonist B, It is configured so that it is possible to grasp what kind of suggestive effect is being performed by simply looking at the background color for the specific image effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from enjoying the image effect by not knowing the original work and diminishing the desire to play the game.

In addition, the specific image effect based on the table shown in FIG. 114B is configured so that even a player who knows the original can enjoy it. For example, when “pet C” appears in the left character or the right character, it is suggested that the set value Ve is likely to be 4 to 6. That is, when the effect set as the pattern No. 3 appears, the possibility that the set values are 4 to 6 is highly likely to be notified by the image effect, and when the effect set as the pattern No. 8 appears, the set value 4 is set. It is notified that ~6 will be determined.
Further, when “pet D” appears, it is suggested that the set value Ve is likely to be an odd number.
Furthermore, when “pet D” appears in the left character or the right character, it is suggested that the set value Ve is likely to be an even number.

In this way, even a player who knows the original can roughly understand the suggestion contents according to the appearing character image. Therefore, it is possible to provide an image effect with an increased interest to the game to a player who does not understand all the details of the table shown in FIG. 114B.

A specific image effect that appears as such a set value suggestion effect appears after the jackpot game ends (or after all round games end), but some players may miss the suggestion effect. is there. In particular, it is thought that it is easy to overlook when the obtained payout is transferred to a box.

Therefore, the gaming machine 1 is configured to display, on the demo screen, a combination of character images that have appeared in the immediately preceding specific image effect from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game.
In the gaming machine 1, there is a payout ranking screen displayed in the demo screen, and a character image is displayed on the payout ranking screen. The ranking of the previous day is displayed until the first big hit of the day, and the ball ranking of the current day is displayed after the first big hit.
After the first big hit, the character image and the background color appearing in the immediately preceding specific image effect (that is, the big hit game result screen) are reproduced on the payout ranking screen. However, the posture (pose) of the character image may be different. That is, the character image displayed on the payout ranking screen can be changed every time the big hit game is finished (pattern Nos. 1 to 12).

Here, the image when the payout ranking screen is displayed before the first big hit game is described.
In this example, in the payout ranking screen until the first big hit game is started, character images of combinations of pattern No. 13 or 14 are displayed.
In both pattern Nos. 13 and 14, the main character A and the main character B appear as character images, and only the appearance positions are different. Both pattern Nos. 13 and 14 appear only before the first big hit game after the power is turned on, and basically do not appear after the first big hit game unless the power of the game machine 1 is turned off during the game. It is a thing.
When the image with pattern No. 13 is displayed on the payout ranking screen, the suggestion content is “none”. That is, even if the effect appears, the player cannot obtain any information regarding the set value Ve.
On the other hand, when the image with the pattern No. 14 is displayed on the payout ranking screen, the suggestion content is "setting change confirmed". That is, when the effect appears, it is possible to recognize that the set value Ve has been changed, and thus the set value change suggestion effect is obtained. That is, the payout ranking screen effect in this case is set value change suggestion effect 3.
The background color of the image is "white". This is a background color that is different from any of the specific images described above, and the appearance of the payout ranking screen with the background color set to "white" allows the player to make a suggestive effect regarding the setting value change. It is possible to grasp.

As described above, the demo screen is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 when the game ball does not win the special winning opening 50 or the like for a certain period of time, and thus can be intentionally generated by the player. .. Therefore, even a player who misses a specific image effect that has appeared after the big hit game can confirm what kind of suggestion effect has been performed. Then, before the first big hit game, the set value change suggesting effect 3 indicating whether or not the set value has been changed can be made to appear by one's own hand, and it is possible to confirm at any time desired. Is.

(Set value suggestion production 1)

In the example of the effect, like the effects 03 and the effect 21 described above, the appearance probability of the suggestive effect is different depending on time, conditions, and the like. Further, in the production 21, the example of using the RTC function has been described according to the flowchart, but here, an example of using the total number of out balls will be described.
In addition, in this example, the number of big hit games (which is counted as one big hit game of a predetermined number of rounds, and is hereinafter referred to as big hit number) is also considered.

In this example, each time the decorative symbol variable display game is started, whether or not the suggestive effect is executed is selected by lottery, and in the case of winning, a specific character is superimposed on another image effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. A suggestion effect is made to display an image (which may be a person or a medal). Of course, the character image that easily appears (or the character image that appears) is set to be different depending on the set value Ve.
In this example, a character image imitating a medal (hereinafter, referred to as “medal character”) appears.

This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 115.
FIG. 115A is a table showing the appearance probability of the set value suggestive rendering 1 under the condition that the number of jackpots is less than 20 and the total number of out balls is 1000 or less. There are a plurality of colors of medal characters that appear in the suggestion effect as the set value suggestion effect 1, and there are, for example, five types of copper, silver, gold, a danger pattern, and a rainbow.
As shown in the figure, with the setting value 1, no medal character appears. In other words, if a medal character appears, it is determined that the set value Ve is 2 or more regardless of the color.
Similarly, with the setting value 2, there is a possibility that silver, gold, danger pattern, and rainbow medal characters do not appear, but only bronze medal characters appear.
In the setting value 3, the gold, danger pattern, and rainbow medal characters do not appear, in the setting value 4, the danger pattern and rainbow medal characters do not appear, and in the setting value 5, the rainbow medal character does not appear. Has been done. For a combination in which the appearance probability is 0% (for example, the setting value is 1, the bronze medal character), the appearance probability in each of the subsequent tables is also 0%.

In FIG. 115A, the total number of outs is 1 to 1000, and the number of jackpots is less than 20, so the state immediately after the opening of the hall or the like is applicable. In such a state, the probability that a bronze medal character appears will be higher than in the subsequent games. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation to play the game immediately after the opening of the hall.
When the number of big hits is less than 20 and the total number of out balls exceeds 1000 to 6000, as shown in FIG. 115B, the appearance probability of the copper-colored medal characters is lowered. ..
Further, when the number of big hits is less than 20 and the total number of out balls is from 6001 to 12000, the appearance probability of each silver, gold, danger pattern, and rainbow medal character increases (FIG. 115C).
Then, when the number of jackpots is less than 20, and the total number of out balls is from 12001 to 24000, the probability of appearance of a bronze medal character is higher than that before (Fig. 116A).
Further, when the number of big hits is less than 20 and the total number of out balls is 24001 or more, the appearance probability of the medal character of each color is increased (FIG. 116B).

Thus, except for FIG. 115A, which seems to be immediately after the opening of the hole, the probability of appearance of each medal character increases as the total number of out balls increases. That is, the suggestive effect for estimating the set value Ve is likely to appear with the elapse of the game time, and the motivation for the game can be maintained.

Under the condition that the number of big hits is 20 to 30, the appearance probabilities are set to be high. That the jackpot game was executed that many times, it is expected that the decorative symbol variable display game was executed a certain number of times. Furthermore, the player is likely to have won a certain amount of balls. In such a situation, it is desirable to increase the probability of appearance of the medal character and to keep the player motivated to continue the game by making the player recognize the appearance of the medal character.

When the number of jackpots is 31 times or more, it is possible that the number of wins is increased and the player is playing in a good mood. In such a case, by increasing the appearance probability of the medal character, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to play.
It should be noted that if the number of coins to be paid increases, the player may have a psychology of stopping while the player is hitting. Even in such a case, by increasing the appearance probability of the medal character as shown in the table of FIG. 117B, it becomes possible to motivate the player to continue the game.

Further, in this example, the appearance probabilities of the respective effects are different depending on the conditions, but the suggestion contents when the relevant effects appear are the same. Specifically, according to FIG. 115A, when a medal character with a danger pattern appears, it is determined that the set value is 5 or the set value 6. The relationship between the “danger medal character” and the “information (i.e., the suggestion content) of confirming the set values 5, 6” is under other conditions (ie, FIGS. 115B, 115C, 116A, 116B, 117A, and 117B). ) Does not change. Therefore, the player has determined that "the set value Ve is 5 or 6" for "the appearance of the medal character of the danger pattern" without knowing the condition of the game machine 1 at present. Since it can be understood as “”, it is a suggestive effect that is easy for the player to understand.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIGS. 118A and 118B, the appearance probability is changed so that the suggestion content is changed to a direction in which it is narrowed down (that is, the setting value Ve estimated by the player is changed in a direction in which options are narrowed down). It may be changed.
Specifically, in the gaming machine 1 under the condition A, it is suggested that the "appearance of medal character of danger pattern" is "determined that the set value Ve is 5 or 6" as shown in FIG. 118A. It is said to be directed. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 under the condition B, as shown in FIG. 118B, the appearance probability of the medal character may increase or may decrease to 0%, which causes the “appearance of the medal character of the danger pattern”. Has been changed to an effect that suggests that "the set value Ve is 6 is confirmed". That is, in condition B, the appearance probability of the effect decreases to 0% when the setting value Ve is 5, and the appearance probability increases when the setting value Ve is 6.
That is, by changing from the condition A to the condition B, the accuracy of the information of the notification content to be perceived by the player when the suggestive effect appears will be increased.

Further, in the case where the accuracy of the information transmitted to the player is higher in the condition B than in the condition A as described above, it is preferable that the condition B is a condition that is less likely to appear (is difficult to achieve).
For example, if condition B is a normal condition and condition A is a condition that rarely appears, the player must have a danger pattern medal character appear under condition B which is a normal condition. Therefore, after the setting value Ve is 6 as the suggestion content, the specific condition A is satisfied, and the accuracy of the suggestion content information is likely to be additionally received. This is not preferable because the suggestion content received under the condition A becomes meaningless information for the player.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 118A and 118B, the condition A is a normal game, and the condition B is a specific condition that rarely holds, so that the player is in a normal game condition. Information indicating that the setting value Ve is 5 or 6 is received due to the occurrence of the suggestive effect below, and the possibility that the setting value Ve is 5 disappears due to the suggestive effect that appears under a specific condition that occurs thereafter. It is more likely to receive upgraded information that is "determined to be 6." For this reason, even if the player visually recognizes the same effect (that is, the effect in which the medal character of the danger pattern appears), both suggestive effects can be given meaning and meaningless suggestive effects can be reduced. At the same time, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play.

It should be noted that, for example, the condition B as a specific condition may be established when "the big hit lottery is not won over the decorative symbol variable display game of 500 times (=so-called 500 times addicted)". In other words, the player may think that if he continues to lose the jackpot lottery for a long time, he will stop the game, but in such a case, he will be upgraded until he wins the next jackpot lottery more than 500 times. By making it easier to obtain the information, it is possible to maintain the willingness to play until the next big hit game.

As for this effect, not only the configuration in which the setting value suggestion effect 1 as the suggestion effect can be executed for each decorative symbol variable display game as in this example, but also the setting value suggestion effect is performed by the specific image effect displayed after the jackpot is over. It can also be obtained by the configuration.
That is, after the jackpot game which is won after 500 addictions, the player is motivated to play the game by making the set value suggestion effect so that the upgraded information can be obtained (or easily obtained). It can be maintained until the next big hit game.

<9. Suggestion production about big hit>
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a suggestion effect regarding the big hit (previous notice effect) may be appropriately performed. The suggestion effect regarding the big hit is an effect in which it is possible to infer whether or not the player playing the game machine 1 has won the big hit lottery performed in the game machine 1.

[9-1. Type of production]

Types of suggestive effects (hereinafter, referred to as “big hit suggestive effects”) related to the jackpot that can be executed in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described (FIG. 120).
First, as shown in FIG. 120, the big hit suggestion effect is provided with "prefetch/relevant" and "effect means".
The distinction between "prefetching/corresponding" indicates whether the jackpot suggestion production is "prefetching notice production" or "preliminary notice production in the change". The fluctuation refers to a decorative symbol variable display game currently executed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.

It should be noted that each of the jackpot suggestive effects is performed using any one of the producing means of “sound”, “light”, “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, and “button”, as in the above-described suggestive effect regarding the set value. It may be executed using one effect means, or may be executed using a plurality of effect means.
The effect using "sound" as the effect means is a sound effect using the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46. The production means using "light" as the production means is a light production using the light display device 45a including the decoration lamp 45 and various LEDs. The effect using "liquid crystal" as the effect means is an image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 or the like. The production using the "movable body" as the production means is a visual production using a movable body accessory or the like. The effect using the "button" as the effect means is a sensation type effect using the effect button 13 or the wind pressure device.

[9-2. Performance timing]

The timing when the big hit suggestion effect is performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 121, the timing when the big hit suggestive effect is performed is performed only during “changing”. Note that the big hit suggestion effect is not executed in "waiting for customers" and "during big hit".

The big hit suggestion effect that is performed “during change” is further divided into timings 10 to 25. Since each timing has already been described, detailed description will be omitted.

[9-3. Example of production]

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the relationship between the types of big hit suggestive effects (effects 50 to 67) and the timing of execution. Each jackpot suggestion production is explained.

(Direction 50)

The effect 50 is a big hit suggestion effect as a pre-reading notice effect that is performed using the “liquid crystal” and “button”, and is, for example, a “holding change notice effect”. The pending change notice effect is executed, for example, at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is started or at the timing when all the symbols are stopped at which all the decorative symbols are stopped.
Specifically, the operation holding balls (holding icons) displayed in the holding display areas 76 and 77 provided in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 are different from the normal color (for example, silver) in a different color (blue, red, yellow, etc.). ) Or a special hold display mode (rainbow pattern, danger pattern, etc.) to suggest a jackpot lottery result in a specific variable display game after the next time. In other words, it is possible to suggest to the player that the jackpot lottery result is highly likely to be won in the variable display game targeted for the pending change notice effect.

A specific flow of the main effect will be described.
First, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery on whether or not to execute the pending change notice effect. The setting value information is used for this lottery. That is, the effect is such that the appearance probability of the effect changes according to the set value Ve.
When the lottery is won, the effect control unit 24 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display an image for prompting the user to press the effect button 13 at a predetermined timing. At this time, an image effect such as shaking of the hold icon may be performed at the same time. This allows the player to know that the pending change notice effect can be executed.
Next, when the player presses the effect button 13, an image effect of changing the hold icon displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 from the normal color to the specific color, or when the color is already the specific color, An image effect of changing to a display mode with a high expectation, or an image effect in which the change of the hold icon does not occur and the original hold icon display mode is maintained.

Whether or not the hold icon changes is determined, for example, by lottery by the effect control unit 24 when the hold change notice effect is drawn. The lottery on the execution of the pending change notice effect may be performed at the same time as the jackpot lottery related to the operation pending ball is executed, or may be performed each time the special symbol variable display game is started.

On the other hand, when the player does not press the effect button 13, an image effect of changing the hold icon is executed at a predetermined timing.

Other concrete performance examples are possible. For example, the colors and display modes of the hold icons are rainbow, red, orange, yellow, blue, and silver (normal color) in descending order of expectation.
When the hold change notice effect is executed, first, in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, an effect of changing the hold icon from silver to blue is executed. Further, an image prompting the user to press the effect button 13 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.
When the player presses the effect button 13, an image effect showing that the hold icon is being drawn by lottery as to whether or not the color changes to a color with a higher expectation is performed. This lottery may be actually executed at this timing, or an image effect based on a predetermined lottery result may be executed.

When the lottery is won, an image effect in which the blue hold icon changes to yellow is performed, and at the same time, an image effect that prompts the player to press the effect button 13 is executed. By repeating this, an effect finally changing to a rainbow image icon can be executed.
In addition, when the lottery is lost in each lottery, the change of the hold icon to a color/display mode with a higher degree of expectation does not occur, and the hold change notice production ends.

Such an effect may be executed, for example, while the display position of the operation holding ball that is the target of the hold change notice effect is changed as the special symbol variation display game is exhausted. For example, after the color of the hold icon of the operation hold ball of the hold display section b1 of FIG. 4 changes from silver to blue with the execution of the hold change notice production, the hold display section is started together with the execution of the next special symbol variable display game. After the blue hold icon moves to a1, the hold change notice effect is performed again (or the previous hold change notice effect is continuously executed), and the hold icon of the operation hold ball on the hold display portion a1 changes from blue to blue. It may change to yellow.

Note that the pending change notice effect may be executed using only the liquid crystal display device 36 without using the effect button 13 or the like.

(Direction 51)

The effect 51 is a big hit suggestion effect as a look-ahead notice effect performed using “light”, “liquid crystal”, and “movable body”, and is, for example, a “special zone entry notice effect”.
The special zone entry notice production makes the player have a sense of expectation by suggesting that there is a possibility of plunging into the special zone production executed over one or more special symbol variable display games. Is.
The special zone entry notice effect is executed, for example, at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is started or at the time when all the decorative symbols are all stopped.

In the special zone, for example, the background image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is different from the usual one, and there is a possibility that the special symbol variable display game at the end of the zone wins the big hit lottery. Is a section for suggesting that the player has a high expectation over the previous several times of the special symbol variable display games (that is, while entering the special zone).
When the special zone is set to only one special symbol variable display game, for example, after the image effect in which the background color is different from the normal is performed in the variable display game, the fact that the jackpot lottery is won Notification is given to the player. In addition, in the one-time special symbol variable display game, a pseudo continuous effect involving a pseudo continuous variable display state of decorative symbols may be performed.

A plurality of types of effect patterns may be provided in the special zone entry notice effect. For example, it may be possible to execute a fixed effect that indicates that the special zone is always entered, or even if an effect that can be selected both when entering the special zone and when not entering the special zone is executable. Good.
Also, an effect that is highly likely to rush into the special zone or an effect that is low may be provided.
Since various special zone entry notice effects can be executed in this manner, it is possible to provide effects with a high gaming appeal.

A specific flow of the effect will be described. Here, an example in which an effect related to the special zone is executed over three special symbol variable display games will be described.
First, based on the start of the special symbol variable display game, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery process regarding whether or not the effect can be executed. In this lottery process, the appearance probability is set differently by referring to the setting value information.
If you win the production execution possibility lottery, the variable display operation of the decorative symbol is started in the special symbol variable display game (first game: special zone entry notice effect), and the light effect means provided in each part of the gaming machine is used. The light effect is performed, and at the same time, the liquid crystal display device 36 performs the image effect such that the liquid crystal display device 36 draws whether or not to enter the special zone.
In addition, as in this example, when entering a special zone, while performing a highly entertaining effect to the player by the movable body accessory, perform a light emission effect by the light effecting means mounted on the movable body accessory, Further, an image effect is suggested on the liquid crystal display device 36 to indicate that the special zone has been successfully entered.
On the other hand, when the special zone is not entered, an image effect is suggested on the liquid crystal display device 36 to indicate that the special zone has failed. At the same time, a light emitting effect by a light effecting means or an effect using a movable body accessory may be displayed.

After suggesting that the special zone has been successfully entered, or suggesting that it has failed, the first time of the special symbol variable display game ends, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it has fallen into the jackpot lottery. It That is, the special symbol is stopped when it comes off. At this time, on the liquid crystal display device 36, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed at the appearance of a defect.
In this way, the effect executed in the special symbol variable display game as the first game described above is the "special zone entry notice effect". In addition, when the production which failed in the special zone is executed, one special symbol variable display game is finished and the production of a series of special zones is finished.

In the next variable display game (second game: entry into a special zone), when the variable display operation of the decorative pattern is started, the liquid crystal display device 36 has an expectation as to whether or not the player has won the big hit lottery. Image effects (for example, effects that excite whether to win a battle, effects that excite whether a specific mission can be achieved, etc.) are executed. Then, an image including characters such as "NEXT" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed at the appearance of a deviation. During the execution of the variable display game (second game) and the next variable display game (third game), a display indicating that the special zone is being entered is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

Further, in the next variable display game (third game: a big hit winning suggestion game), after an image effect for enlarging the effect is executed, a big hit lottery winning suggestion is finally given by the stop mode of the decorative pattern. For example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all displayed as a decorative symbol that represents "3", so that the image design suggests that you have won the jackpot, and the left symbol and the right symbol are both "3". By the presentation of the stop mode in which the decoration symbol is represented and the middle symbol is the decoration symbol representing “2”, the image effect is suggested which indicates that the jackpot lottery is lost.

In addition, in the case of performing the effect related to the special zone over the three times of the special symbol variable display game, in the situation that the execution of the special symbol variable display game is confirmed three times including the variation at the start of the effect. Is desirable. That is, when performing the special zone effect based on the start of the special symbol variation display game for the next operation holding ball, it is executed on condition that the number of operation holding balls is 3 or more (3 or 4). It In other words, when the execution of a series of effects related to the special zone is started, the number of operation-reserving balls may be two or more with the game as the first game.
This is for pre-reading the information regarding the winning/losing of the big hit lottery and considering that the special zone entry effect is easily executed when the pre-reading lottery result is a win. It is clear to the player that the expected winning value is low even if a series of effects starting from the special zone entry announcement effect as described above is executed for the unpredictable special symbol variation display game that does not even win the prize. This is because it is not possible to produce a game that enhances the entertainment of the game.

Note that the above example is merely an example, and a series of effects may be realized by a pseudo continuous effect accompanied by a pseudo continuous variable display state of decorative symbols.

(Direction 52)

The effect 52 is a big hit suggestion effect as a look-ahead notice effect performed using "liquid crystal", and is, for example, a "countdown notice effect". The countdown notice effect is a notice effect executed over a plurality of special symbol variable display games. Further, it may be executed together with a plurality of pseudo continuous variable display executed during one special symbol variable display game. In this case, the countdown notice effect is completed in one special symbol variable display game.

When winning the execution of the countdown notice effect, an image effect is displayed in which a predetermined numerical value (for example, "2") is displayed as a count value on the liquid crystal display device 36 in a specific symbol variable display game. The count value is subtracted every time the special symbol variable display game is executed and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and at the timing when the count value becomes "0", an image effect or the like that suggests the jackpot lottery result is executed. It
In the specific symbol variable display game in which the display of the count value is “0”, in addition to the image effect that suggests the jackpot lottery result, there are other effects such as the effect that develops into the first type super reach and the second type super reach. It may be configured to be performed.

Further, the countdown notice production may not be continued until the count value becomes "0". For example, after the count value is displayed as "1", the image production showing that the countdown notice production is not continued is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It may be executed on the device 36 to end the countdown notice effect.
By enabling such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention only to the special symbol variable display game in which the count value becomes “0” when the countdown notice effect occurs, Even in the state where the count value is "1" or "2", it is possible to play the game while expecting that the effect will continue, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

A specific flow of the effect will be described.
The production control unit 24 carries out a lottery on whether or not the countdown notice production can be performed, in response to the reception of the hold addition command. In this lottery, the setting value information is not referred to. That is, the lottery is won with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.
After winning the execution possibility lottery of the countdown notice effect, the effect control unit 24 determines the initial value of the count value in consideration of the number of operation-reserving balls. For example, the number of operation holding balls including the operation holding ball increased this time is set to "3", and the initial value of the count value is determined to be "2".

With the start of the next special symbol variable display game, the number of operation-holding balls becomes "2", and the liquid crystal display device 36 is informed that the count value is "2" together with the character image, and the countdown notice effect is produced. An image effect for notifying the player that execution has started is executed.

Further, with the start of the next special symbol variable display game, the number of operation-holding balls becomes "1", the liquid crystal display device 36 is informed that the count value is "1", and the countdown notice production continues. An image effect indicating that the action is being performed is executed.

Then, with the start of the next special symbol variable display game, the number of operation-holding balls becomes "0", the liquid crystal display device 36 is informed that the count value is "0", and the countdown notice effect is produced. Upon completion, the winning result of the big hit lottery is notified on the liquid crystal display device 36. Specifically, along with the stop display of the special symbol variable display game, an image effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in a stop mode indicating that the decorative pattern has been won in the big hit lottery (or a stop mode indicating that the prize has been lost). Is executed.

It should be noted that a plurality of initial count values may be prepared as variations of the effect. In addition, the winning expectation level may be different for each initial value of the count value.

(Direction 53)

The effect 53 is a big hit suggestion effect as a pre-reading notice effect that is performed using the “liquid crystal” and “button”, and is, for example, a “chance eye notice effect”.
The chance eye notice effect can be executed at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is started, at the time of low speed variation, at the time of high speed variation, or at the timing of stopping all symbols.

The "low speed fluctuation" is the timing of executing the symbol fluctuation display game having a relatively long fluctuation time such as "normal fluctuation 12s" or "normal fluctuation 8s" described above, and per unit time. The game digestion speed is low. Such a variation is likely to be executed when the number of operation-reserving balls is small, for example.
In addition, "at the time of high-speed fluctuation" is a timing at which the symbol fluctuation display game having a relatively short fluctuation time such as "normal fluctuation 4s" or "normal fluctuation 6s" is being executed, and per unit time. The game digestion speed is high. Such a variation is likely to be executed when the number of operation-reserving balls is large, for example.

An example of a specific flow of production will be described.
Along with the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 executes an execution possibility lottery lottery for the chance notice announcement effect. When this lottery is won, the effect control unit 24 causes the opportunity notice effect to appear.
Specifically, the decorative symbol variable display game in which the decorative symbol fluctuates on the liquid crystal display device 36 is started. On the liquid crystal display device 36, a left symbol (during variable display), a middle symbol (during variable display), and a right symbol (during variable display) are displayed, as well as characters and pictures prompting the production button 13 to be pressed. Displayed inside.

When the player presses the effect button 13, for example, a stop display of the left symbol is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Further, in the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (the left symbol (while being displayed in a stopped state), the middle symbol (while being displayed in a variable state), the right symbol (while being displayed in a varying state)), characters or the like for further pressing the effect button 13 are displayed. included.

When the player further presses the effect button 13 in response to the suggestion by the image effect, the stop display of the right symbol is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36 on the liquid crystal display device 36.
Further, on the liquid crystal display device 36, an image effect including a left symbol (during stop display), a middle symbol (during variable display), a right symbol (during stop display), and characters for prompting the player to press the effect button 13 is displayed. Executed.

When the player presses the third effect button 13 based on the image effect, the image effect of stopping and displaying the middle symbol is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
On the liquid crystal display device 36, the color of each of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed suggests to the player whether or not the jackpot lottery is likely to be won.

For example, the left design is a decorative design imitating blue character "2", the middle design is a decorative design imitating blue character "8", and the right design is a decorative design imitating blue character "6". If it is, since the three decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are all decorative symbols that imitate blue letters, the expectation degree regarding the operation-holding balls to be provided in the variable pattern display game is higher than usual. It is suggested to the player.

The left design is a decorative design imitating the red character "5", the middle design is a decorative design imitating the red character "1", and the right design is a decorative design imitating the red character "7". If it is, since the three decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are all decorative symbols that imitate red letters, the expectation level regarding the operation-holding balls to be used in the variable pattern display game is higher than usual. It is suggested to the player. Note that, for example, it is assumed that the decorative pattern of red characters has a higher expectation than the decorative pattern of blue characters.

Note that the high degree of expectation may be suggested by the order in which the decorative patterns stop. For example, in the above, the example in which the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped and displayed in this order has been described. Rather than this stop mode, a mode in which the right symbol, the middle symbol, and the left symbol are stopped and displayed in order may have a higher degree of expectation.

The chance notice production is configured to appear with a certain probability regardless of the set value.

(Direction 54)

The effect 54 is a big hit suggestion effect in the variation that is performed using "light", and is, for example, "prize at lamp winning notice effect".
The prize lamp notice effect at the time of winning is executed at the timing when the number of operation-reserving balls increases by winning.

A specific flow of the effect will be described.
When the special symbol variation display game for a certain winning ball is being executed, if the number of operation-holding balls increases due to a new winning, the effect control unit 24 carries out a lottery or non-execution lottery of the winning lamp advance notice effect. In this lottery, the set value Ve is referred to. That is, the appearance probability of the effect differs depending on the set value Ve.

By winning the lottery, the lamp advance notice effect at the time of winning is executed. In this lottery process, information on whether or not the special symbol variation display game currently being executed is a big hit is referred to. That is, when the special symbol variable display game currently being executed is a big hit, the lamp advance notice effect at the time of winning is likely to be executed.

When the execution of the winning lamp advance notice effect is decided, the light effect of turning on the specific light display device 45a is executed as the winning lamp advance notice effect.

In addition, when performing the effect of lighting the optical display device 45a at the timing when the number of operation-holding balls increases due to winning, as described above, the winning lamp notice that indicates the degree of expectation of the currently changing special symbol changing display game In addition to executing the effect, a look-ahead notice effect indicating that the expected degree of the increased number of operation-holding balls is high may be executable.

Further, those effects may appear in the same effect mode. In this case, the player who recognizes the light effect recognizes that there is a high expectation of winning the currently changing special symbol variation display game, and the currently changing special symbol variation display game is not a big hit. Even if it is out of the way, it is possible to have an expectation about the reserved ball that has triggered the performance execution. That is, it is possible to obtain a sense of expectation twice with one production, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Direction 55)

The effect 55 is a big hit suggestion effect in the variation performed using “sound”, “light”, and “liquid crystal”, and is, for example, “the relevant pending change notice effect”.
The pending change notice production is at the start of fluctuation, at low speed fluctuation, at high speed fluctuation, at the time of stopping the first symbol in which one of the decorative symbols is stopped, at the second pseudo run, the third pseudo run, and the fourth pseudo run. It is possible to execute at timing.

When the execution of the holding change notice production is won, the color, the design, the shape, etc. of the icon of the game in-hold K currently displayed for the game J shown in FIG. Due to the change, an effect is suggested to the player, suggesting that the possibility of winning the big hit lottery in the change is higher than usual.

Here, the flow of the effect will be described with an example in which the pending change notice effect is executed in association with the pseudo continuous effect. The colors and display modes of the hold icons are rainbow, red, orange, yellow, blue, and silver (normal color) in descending order of expectation.
First, when the special symbol variation display game is started, the effect control unit 24 performs effect execution availability lottery. In this lottery, since the set value information is referred to, the pending change notice effect has an appearance probability according to the value of the set value Ve.
When the effect execution availability lottery is won, the decorative symbol variable display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and at the same time, the image effect of changing the hold icon from silver (normal color) to blue is performed. At the same time, an effect of causing the specific light display device 45a to glow blue, which is the same color as the hold icon, is executed, and an effect sound that indicates that the hold icon has changed to a high expected value is output from the sound generation device 46a. Is executed.

Subsequently, when the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is temporarily stopped for a while, the holding icon changes from blue to yellow when it changes again by the second pseudo-reproduction. Is executed. At the same time, effects by the optical display device 45a and the sound generation device 46a are also executed.

When the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is changed to a pseudo second stop display and then changed again by the third pseudo-reproduction, the hold icon changes from yellow to red. Image production is executed. At the same time, effects by the optical display device 45a and the sound generation device 46a are also executed.

Furthermore, when the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is changed to a pseudo third stop display and then changed again by the fourth pseudo-reproduction, the hold icon changes from red to rainbow. A changing image effect is executed. At the same time, effects by the optical display device 45a and the sound generation device 46a are also executed.

By performing such an effect, it is possible to expect the player to be informed that the big hit lottery has been won after the fourth pseudo continuous effect is executed.

(Direction 56)

The effect 56 is a big hit suggestion effect in the variation performed using the “movable body” and the “button”, and is, for example, a “button vibe notice effect”.
The button vibe notice effect is, for example, an effect executed in parallel with the reach effect executed when two of the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

The flow of production will be specifically described.
With the start of the special symbol variable display game, the effect control unit 24 refers to the set value information and performs the lottery for whether or not the button vibe notice effect can be executed. That is, the effect is displayed with a probability according to the set value.
After the special symbol variable display game is started, the first, second, and third symbols are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. At this time, when there is a high possibility that the jackpot lottery for the variation has been won, the effect may be performed during the variation display of the three decorative symbols.
For example, when the previous execution possibility lottery is won, the button vibe notice effect is executed.
Specifically, by vibrating the movable body accessory, the sense of expectation is visually stimulated, and by vibrating the effect button 13, a sense of the expected value is sensed.

Further, on the liquid crystal display device 36, the first symbol and the second symbol are stopped and displayed together with the execution of the button vibe notice effect. At this time, two patterns are provided for the stop patterns of the first symbol and the second symbol. One is a pattern in which the decorative designs of the first design and the second design are the same, and the reach effect is continuously executed with the end of the button vibe notice effect.
The other is a pattern in which the decorative symbols of the first symbol and the second symbol are different, and the variation ends with the stop display of the third symbol without the reach effect being executed.

A plurality of types of vibration patterns of the movable body accessory and the effect button 13 may be prepared, and the selection probability may be changed according to whether or not the jackpot lottery is won. Specifically, the vibration pattern A may be easily selected in the case of winning, and the vibration pattern B may be easily selected in the case of losing. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly entertaining effect.

(Direction 57)

The effect 57 is a big hit suggestion effect in the variation that is performed by using the “liquid crystal” and the “movable body”, and is, for example, “movable body warn notice effect”.
Movable body pre-announcement performance, for example, in a configuration capable of executing a highly reliable production that suggests that it is highly possible that you have won the big hit lottery by moving the movable body, It is a performance that is executed before execution. This effect can be executed together with the reach effect, for example.
For example, the movable-body-warning advance notice effect is an effect that vibrates the movable body, and a pattern for executing the above-described highly reliable movable-body effect and a pattern for not performing the same are provided after the execution of the movable-body shake notice effect. .. In other words, the noticeable effect of moving the movable body is an effect that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of developing a highly reliable effect.

Specifically, the flow of the effect will be described.
Along with the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 carries out a lottery of possibility of execution of the noticeable effect on the movable body and a lottery of possibility of execution of the movable body effect with high reliability. In this lottery, by referring to the setting value information, the winning probability is different depending on the setting value Ve.
The result of the lottery is a pattern A in which both productions are performed and a production is executed to notify the player that the big hit lottery result has been won, and the player is informed that both productions are performed but the big hit lottery result is lost. The process is branched into a pattern B for executing a notice effect, a pattern C for executing a noticeable effect for inclining a movable body but not developing a highly reliable movable body effect, and a pattern D for performing neither effect.

Here, the pattern A will be described as an example.
After the special symbol variable display game is started, the first symbol, the second symbol and the third symbol are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. At this time, an effect of vibrating the movable body accessory is executed, and at the same time, an image effect such that a lottery is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to determine whether or not the movable body effect is developed.

Subsequently, after the first design and the second design are stopped and displayed in the same decorative design on the liquid crystal display device 36 to be in the reach state, the image production which suggests that the production is developed is executed, and the movable body accessory It is highly possible that a high-reliability effect (for example, an effect in which two movable body parts are combined, an effect in which two movable body effects are combined, etc.) is performed using, and that the jackpot lottery is won on the liquid crystal display device 36. Is performed.

Further, on the liquid crystal display device 36, all of the first symbol to the third symbol are stopped and displayed with a decorative symbol imitating the same numeral, whereby an image effect indicating that the jackpot lottery is won is executed, and the movable body part is played. The production that suggests winning is also executed in the thing.

(Direction 58)

The effect 58 is a big hit suggestion effect in the variation that is performed using “light”, and is, for example, “illumination flash notice effect”.
The illuminator flash notice effect is an effect of causing the illuminator panel mounted on the gaming machine to emit light in a predetermined pattern. The illuminator panel includes, for example, a rectangular light guide plate and a light emitting unit arranged at an edge portion of the light guide plate. Light emitted from the light emitting unit passes through the inside of the light guide plate and moves forward at a predetermined position. It is formed so that a predetermined pattern emerges by being reflected toward. That is, the illumination flash notice effect is an effect for causing the player to visually recognize a predetermined pattern by causing the light emitting unit to emit light.
The Illuminator flash notice production may be executed together with the reach production.

The flow of production will be specifically described.
With the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 carries out an irradiance lottery execution possibility lottery. In this lottery, by referring to the setting value information, the winning probability is different depending on the setting value Ve.

When the execution possibility lottery is won, the first and second symbols are stopped on the liquid crystal display device 36, the reach effect is executed, and the light emitting portion of the illuminator panel is caused to emit light so that the illuminator panel has a predetermined pattern. Illumination flash notice production is executed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than usual.

The illuminator panel can be formed with a reflecting portion so as to reflect only light emitted from a specific direction forward. Therefore, the reflection part that reflects the light emitted from the left and right ends of the illuminator panel to the front is arranged so as to form the pattern A, and the light emitted from the upper and lower ends is reflected to the front. By arranging the parts so that the pattern B is formed, it is possible to make a plurality of types of patterns stand out on the illumination panel.
By using such an illumination panel, it is possible to separately provide a highly reliable illumination flash announcement effect and a less reliable illumination flash announcement effect.

It is also possible to express the degree of reliability by preparing a plurality of types of flash patterns. For example, it is possible to express a high-reliability effect by displaying a flash pattern that blinks the illuminator panel at a high frequency, and to express a low-reliability effect by displaying a flash pattern that blinks at a low frequency. Is.
In addition, the reliability may be changed by changing the color of the light emitted from the light emitting unit.

(Direction 59)

The effect 59 is a jackpot suggestion effect that is performed using “sound”, “liquid crystal”, and “button”, for example, “telephone notice effect”.
In addition, here, the notice effect using the "phone" which is an important item appearing in the theme of the gaming machine 1 is executed. Therefore, a notice effect using another important item according to the theme of the gaming machine 1 may be used. For example, in the case of a game machine 1 with a soccer theme, a "soccer ball notice effect" using a "soccer ball" may be executed.

The telephone notice presentation may be executed together with the reach presentation. For example, on the liquid crystal display device 36, after the first symbol and the second symbol are stopped and the reach effect is executed, the image effect representing the state of the incoming call is executed, and the sound generation device 46a activates the call. The ringtone is output as a sound effect, and an image effect that prompts the effect button 13 to be pressed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed.

The flow of the performance will be described with a specific example.
First, based on the start of the special symbol variable display game, the effect control lottery is executed by the effect control unit 24 to execute the telephone announcement effect.
When the lottery is won, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as the first symbol and the second symbol, and after the reach effect is executed, the imitative sound of the characterized ringing tone is displayed. The sound generation device 46a outputs the ringing tone while performing the image effect.
After that, an image effect that prompts the player to press the effect button 13 is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

When the player presses the effect button 13, the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and an image effect that indicates whether or not the jackpot lottery is won is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

The effect 59 has different winning probabilities of the execution possibility lottery depending on the set value Ve. For example, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the winning probability of the lottery. Therefore, it can be estimated that the higher the appearance frequency of the effect 59, the higher the set value Ve.

(Direction 60)

The effect 60 is a jackpot suggestion effect that is performed using “liquid crystal”, and is, for example, a “background change notice effect”.
The background change notice effect can be executed, for example, at the timing of starting the special symbol variation display game, low-speed variation, high-speed variation, the first symbol stop when one of the decorative symbols is stopped, or the like.

Specifically, it is an image effect in which the background image in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is different from usual.
This effect appears with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

A specific flow of the effect will be described.
Along with the start of the special symbol variable display game, the execution possibility lottery of the background change notice effect is performed. When winning, an image effect of variably displaying the decorative pattern on the specific background image is performed. For example, while the background image normally represents the daytime background, the background image represents the evening background when the execution possibility lottery of the background change notice effect is won.

Other effects (for example, reach effect) may be executed together with the stop display of the second symbol.
Further, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the execution timing of the background change notice effect. For example, the background change notice effect may be executed with the stop of the first symbol rather than the background change notice effect with the start of the special symbol variation display game.

(Direction 61)

The effect 61 is a jackpot suggestion effect that is performed using the "liquid crystal" and the "movable body", and is, for example, "step-up notice effect".
The step-up notice effect can be executed, for example, at the timing of starting the special symbol variation display game, low-speed variation, high-speed variation, first symbol stop, or the like.

In the step-up notice effect, an image effect up to a predetermined step is executed among the image effects prepared in a plurality of steps. Then, by executing the final stage image effect, it is suggested that the big hit lottery is won. Alternatively, it may be configured so that it is suggested that winning the big hit lottery is rich.

Such an effect may be executed over the above plurality of timings.
This will be specifically described.
First, based on the start of the special symbol variable display game, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect. When the lottery is won, a lottery is also executed regarding what type of step-up notice effect is to be executed. For example, as step-up notice effects, first-stage effects to fourth-stage effects are provided.
At the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbol is actually started on the liquid crystal display device 36, the step-up notice effect is executed and the first-stage image effect is executed.

Subsequently, after the decorative design is stopped and displayed, the second-stage image effect is executed at the timing when the second pseudo continuous effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
Furthermore, the third-stage image production is executed at the timing when the third pseudo-reproduction is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the fourth pseudo-reproduction is executed at the timing when the fourth pseudo-reproduction is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Four-stage (final stage) image effects are executed.
As a result, the player is informed that there is a high probability that he or she has won the jackpot lottery.
After that, the first symbol to the third symbol are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to notify that the big hit lottery has been won.

The step-up notice effect has a certain appearance probability (probability of execution/non-execution lottery) regardless of the set value Ve.

(Direction 62)

The effect 62 is a jackpot suggestion effect that is performed using "light", "liquid crystal", and "button", and is, for example, "preliminary effect at the time of symbol stop".
The symbol stop time notice effect may be executed at the timing of the first symbol stop, for example.

A specific flow of the effect will be described.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the execution possibility lottery of the notice effect at the time of the symbol stop is executed. When the lottery is won, the notice effect at the time of the symbol stop appears. This effect is executed with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

With the start of the special symbol variable display game, the decorative symbol variable display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the light emission control by the optical display device 45a is executed at the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, on the liquid crystal display device 36, an image effect for prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 is executed.

When the player depresses the effect button 13, a stirrup effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as to whether or not the reach effect is executed by stopping the second symbol.
When the user is instructed to perform the reach effect, the same symbol as the first symbol is stopped and displayed as the second symbol on the liquid crystal display device 36, and one of the reach effects appears.
On the other hand, when the user is instructed that the reach effect is not executed, a symbol different from the first symbol is stopped and displayed as the second symbol on the liquid crystal display device 36, and then the third symbol is also stopped and displayed.

(Direction 63)

The effect 63 is a jackpot suggestion effect that is performed using “sound” and “light”, for example, “roulette notice effect”.
The roulette notice effect is an effect that can be performed together with the pseudo continuous effect, and appears with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.
The flow of the roulette notice production will be described with an example.

Based on the start of the special symbol variable display game, an executability lottery for deciding whether to execute the roulette notice effect is executed.
Here, it is assumed that execution of the effect has been decided.
On the liquid crystal display device 36, the decorative symbol variable display game is started, and after the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the pseudo-relation is started by restarting. In response to the start of the pseudo-relation, the roulette notice production is started.
In the gaming machine 1, for example, a plurality of shaped objects having different shapes are formed around the gaming area 3a. Each of the shaped objects has, for example, a round shape, a star shape, or a flower shape, and each is formed so as to emit light in different colors.

In the roulette notice production, after the round-shaped, star-shaped, and flower-shaped shaped objects sequentially emit light, only a specific shaped object (for example, a star-shaped shaped object) emits light, and the sound generation device 46a A sound effect is output.
Only the modeled objects that are likely to win the jackpot lottery are designed to emit light finally.For example, the highest expectations are given when the flower-shaped modeled objects finally emit light. It is said to be degree.

After each of the three-dimensional objects are sequentially illuminated with the start of the second pseudo sequence, the star-shaped model object is emitted with the stop display of the decorative pattern in the second pseudo sequence.
After the respective three-dimensional objects are sequentially emitted with the start of the third pseudo-repeating, the star-shaped three-dimensional object is emitted again with the stop display of the decorative pattern in the third pseudo-repeating.
Further, each of the three-dimensional objects is sequentially emitted again with the start of the fourth pseudo-repeating, and then the flower-shaped three-dimensional object is emitted with the stop display of the decorative pattern in the fourth pseudo-rear.
As a result, the player can experience the roulette notice production according to the progress of the pseudo-relational production, and at the same time with the stop display of the pseudo-relational production, expectation of which molded object will be in a light emitting state. You can experience it. That is, it is possible to provide a production that is highly entertaining to the game.

Other examples of roulette notice production are also described.
A corresponding reach effect is set for each of the round, star, and flower shaped objects.
Then, the reach effect corresponding to the finally-lighted modeled object is executed. In other words, the reach effect corresponding to the flower pattern is considered to have high expectation, and when the roulette notice effect appears, the player has a high expectation that the flower shaped object emits light. It is possible to experience the production while expecting the production to be executed.

In addition, a mode may be prepared in which none of the shaped objects emit light and the reach effect is not executed.

(Direction 64)

The effect 64 is a jackpot suggestion effect that is performed using “light” and “liquid crystal”, and is, for example, “group notice effect”.
The group notice effect can be executed, for example, at the timing of stopping the second symbol. That is, it may be executed together with the reach effect.

Specifically, the flow of the effect will be described.
Based on the start of the special symbol variable display game, a group notice effect execution/non-execution lottery is performed. When the lottery is won, execution of the group notice effect is determined.

After the decorative symbol variable display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, the stop display of the second symbol is executed subsequently to the stop display of the first symbol. At this timing, on the liquid crystal display device 36, a group notice effect in which a large number of specific characters are displayed is executed, and the player is informed that the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than usual. Further, as part of the group notice effect, light emission control by the optical display device 45a is executed.
After the execution of the group notice effect, the reach effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 or the like is executed.

It should be noted that, in the group announcement effect, the degree of expectation may be expressed by the difference in the number of characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

(Direction 65)

The effect 65 is a jackpot suggestion effect that is performed using the "liquid crystal" and "button", and is, for example, "SP development notice effect".
The SP development preview production appears when executing a production that fuels whether or not to develop into the first type super reach.
This effect appears with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

The flow of production will be specifically described.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 performs an execution possibility lottery for the SP development notice effect.
Next, on the liquid crystal display device 36, the decorative symbol variable display game is started, and the first symbol and the second symbol are stopped and displayed. The first design and the second design are both the same decorative design, and the reach effect is developed on the liquid crystal display device 36. At this time, the SP development notice effect is also executed. Specifically, an image effect for driving whether or not the type 1 super reach is developed is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

In this fanning effect, for example, an image effect in which the main character and the enemy character fight is executed, and at the same time, a notification prompting the user to press the effect button 13 is executed as the image effect.
When the player presses the effect button 13 according to this notification, an image effect in which either the main character or the enemy character wins is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Here, when the image effect in which the main character wins is executed, the image effect that develops into the first type super reach is further executed. This makes it possible for the player to know that there is a high probability that he or she has won the jackpot lottery.

(Direction 66)

The effect 66 is a jackpot suggestion effect that is performed using “sound” and “liquid crystal”, for example, “SP title notice effect”.
The SP title notice presentation is performed using the display mode such as the color and pattern of the title of the super reach displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 when the type 1 super reach or the type 2 super reach is developed. is there.
This effect appears with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

The flow of production will be specifically described.
Based on the start of the special symbol variable display game, the effect control unit 24 carries out an execution possibility lottery for the SP title notice effect.
Next, the decorative symbol variable display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the first symbol and the second symbol are stopped and displayed. If the first design and the second design are stopped and displayed with the same decorative design, and the reach production is executed, if the type 1 super reach develops with higher expectations, the type 1 super reach Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

It is the title notice production that suggests the possibility of winning the big hit lottery depending on the form of the title image at this time.
For example, if the title is formed of gold characters, it has a higher expectation than that formed of red characters. In addition, if it is a rainbow pattern or a danger pattern, the expectation is higher than that of gold.
Further, when the title image is displayed, a sound effect generated by the sound generating device 46a is output. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of sound effects and suggest the degree of expectation depending on which sound effect is output.

(Direction 67)

The effect 67 is a jackpot suggestion effect that is performed by using “light”, “liquid crystal”, and “button”, and is, for example, “promotional effect fanning notice effect”.
The promotion effect incentive notice effect is an effect (promotion effect) that suggests whether or not the jackpot type having a low advantage for the player is promoted to the jackpot type having a high advantage after the player is notified of the jackpot type. ..
It is more advantageous for the player to execute the promotion effect after being notified that the regular 4R or regular 6R big hit has been won. Furthermore, when the promotion effect is executed, it is changed (promoted) to a jackpot type such as the probability variation 6R or the probability variation 10R, which provides a more advantageous situation for the player.

The flow of production will be specifically described.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 carries out a lottery of whether or not the promotion effect agitation notice effect can be executed. After winning the lottery, the decorative symbol variable display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the first symbol, the second symbol, and the third symbol are stopped and displayed with the same decorative symbol. Various effects can be executed until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

After the three decorative symbols having the same decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the player is informed that they have won the jackpot lottery, the promotion effect incentive notice effect can be executed based on the previous execution possibility lottery. When this effect is executed, the player can expect to be promoted to the jackpot type having a high advantage. It should be noted that inside the gaming machine 1, it is previously determined whether the big hit game to be executed from now on has a low or high advantage. The term “promotion” as used herein means that it becomes clear to the player that the type of jackpot game that has been uncertain for the player is highly advantageous.

In the promotion effect agitation notice effect, the player is informed that the promotion effect will be executed by illuminating, for example, a light emitting unit provided on the effect button 13 as the light display device 45a. In response to the player pressing the effect button 13, an image effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36 so as to give a sense of expectation as to which of the decorative pattern having a high advantage and the decorative pattern having a low advantage is stopped and displayed. .. For example, on the liquid crystal display device 36, a decorative pattern is changed again, and an effect (elevation effect) is carried out to encourage the player whether or not the already notified big hit type is changed to a more advantageous big hit type. The result is notified. As a result, the player can be correctly notified of the jackpot type that has been determined at the time of winning the prize.

The promotion effect fanning notice effect appears with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

<10. Other productions>

In addition to the suggestive effect regarding the set value and the suggestive effect regarding the big hit, there may be an effect provided in the gaming machine 1.
For example, although no suggestion is given regarding the set value Ve or the big hit, a lively effect may be executed.

(Direction 80)

The presentation 80 is a lively presentation performed using the "liquid crystal". Specifically, it is an effect that can be executed at the timing (timing 10) when the number of operation-reserving balls increases by winning.
Based on the start of the special symbol variable display game, an execution possibility lottery for the effect 80 is performed, and when the lottery is won, an image effect in which a passerby crosses from left to right is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36. ..

It should be noted that a similar effect may be executable as a suggestive effect regarding the set value or a suggestive effect regarding the big hit. For example, an image effect in which a passerby crosses from left to right may be a lively effect, and an image effect in which a passerby crosses from right to left may be executable as a suggestion effect regarding a big hit.
In this way, by making the effect similar to the suggestive effect regarding the setting value or the suggestive effect regarding the big hit a lively effect, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game even in the lively effect in which the suggestion regarding the set value or the big hit is not given.

<11. About productions with different appearance probabilities depending on the setting value>

As described above, the effects installed in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment include those having different appearance probabilities depending on the set value Ve. Several examples can be considered as effects in which the appearance probability differs depending on the set value Ve. Here, each example will be described.

[11-1. First example]

In the first example of an effect whose appearance probability differs depending on the set value Ve (hereinafter simply referred to as “setting difference first example”), the appearance of the effect appears because the winning probability of the execution possibility lottery for the corresponding effect differs for each set value Ve. The probabilities are different.
For example, an example of the jackpot probability corresponding to each set value Ve is shown below.

・Set value 1: 1/180
・Set value 2: 1/170
・Set value 3: 1/160
・Set value 4: 1/150
・Set value 5: 1/140
・Set value 6: 1/120

Furthermore, an example of the winning probability of the execution possibility lottery for a certain effect X, that is, an example of the probability that the effect X is executed is shown below.

・Setting value 1: 1/8 of the big hit lottery
・Set value 2: 1/7 of the big hit lottery
・Set value 3: 1/6 of the big hit lottery
・Set value 4: 1/5 of big hit lottery
・Set value 5: 1/4 of big hit lottery
・Set value 6: 1/3 of big hit lottery

The appearance probability of the effect X per variation (one game) is calculated from these numerical values as follows.

・Set value 1: 1/1440
・Set value 2: 1/1190
・Set value 3: 1/960
・Set value 4: 1/750
・Set value 5: 1/560
・Set value 6: 1/360

Thereby, it can be estimated that the set value Ve is higher as the gaming machine 1 has a larger number of appearances of the effect X.
Further, the player can also estimate the set value Ve by grasping the number of times the effect X appears with respect to the number of times of winning the big hit lottery.

[11-2. Second example]

In the second example of an effect whose appearance probability differs depending on the set value Ve (hereinafter simply referred to as “setting difference second example”), the winning probability of the execution possibility lottery for the effect is constant regardless of the set value Ve, In the first place, since the winning probability in the big hit lottery differs depending on the set value Ve, the appearance probability of the effect X differs.
For example, the jackpot probability corresponding to each set value Ve is equal to that in the first example. In addition, the winning probability of the execution possibility lottery for the effect X is 1/5 when the big hit lottery is won regardless of the set value Ve.
At this time, the appearance probability of the effect X per one variation (one game) can be calculated as follows.

・Set value 1: 1/900
・Set value 2: 1/850
・Set value 3: 1/800
・Set value 4: 1/750
・Set value 5: 1/700
・Set value 6: 1/600

Thereby, it can be estimated that the set value Ve is higher as the gaming machine 1 has a larger number of appearances of the effect X.
Note that, as in the first example, even if the number of times the effect X appears with respect to the number of times the big hit lottery is won, the set value Ve cannot be estimated.

<12. Example of selective implementation on game machines>

The suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect related to the set values described above may be all mounted on one gaming machine, or a part of them may be selected and mounted on one gaming machine.
Here, an example will be described in which a part of each of the above-described suggestive effects is selected and mounted on one gaming machine.

In the gaming machine 1 in this example, each effect is selectively installed from the above-mentioned effects 1 to 21, effects 50 to 67, and effect 80.
Specifically, in the gaming machine 1, effect 1, effect 4, effect 15, effect 20, effect 50, effect 52, effect 53, effect 54, effect 58, effect 62, effect 63, effect 64, effect 65, An effect 66, an effect 67, and an effect 80 are installed. In the following description, this gaming machine will be referred to as gaming machine 1A.
In the example described above, the effect 20 can be executed at each timing during the decorative symbol variable display game in the time saving state. That is, as an example, it is configured to be executable at timings 10 to 25 in the time saving state among timings 01 to 42.
The gaming machine 1A in this example is configured such that the effect 20 can be executed only at the timing 10 as the prefetching announcement effect in the time saving state.

FIG. 122 shows each effect installed in the gaming machine 1A.
The effect classification in FIG. 122 is “setting value change suggestion effect”, “setting value suggestion effect”, “big hit suggestion effect (with setting difference)”, “big hit suggestion effect (no setting difference)”, and “lively effect”. ..

With a setting difference, it is possible to infer the setting value Ve, such as one having a different appearance probability depending on the setting value Ve, one having a different production mode depending on the setting value Ve, or one having a different production mode depending on the setting value Ve. It is a directing.
Effects with setting differences are referred to as “setting value suggesting effects” and “big hit suggesting effects (with setting differences)”.
Further, the effects without setting difference are referred to as “setting value change suggesting effect”, “big hit suggesting effect (no setting difference)” and “lively effect”.
The "set value change suggestion effect" may be an effect having a setting difference.

In the following description, the set value change suggestive effect is “effect A”, the set value suggestive effect is “effect B”, the jackpot suggestive effect (with setting difference) is “effect C”, and the jackpot suggestive effect (no setting difference). ) May be referred to as “effect D”, and a lively effect that is neither a big hit suggestion effect nor a suggestion effect regarding the set value may be referred to as “effect E”.

Here, the grouping of each effect classification will be described. It should be noted that an effect (effect 80) that is neither a big hit suggestive effect nor a set value suggestive effect is excluded here.
First, as one of grouping, it is possible to distinguish between a suggestive effect that does not suggest a big hit and a suggestive effect that suggests a big hit.
In this case, a "setting value change suggestion effect" and a "setting value suggestion effect" are provided as effects that purely suggest only a setting value without giving an indication of a big hit.
Further, regarding effects for suggesting a big hit, "big hit suggesting effect (with setting difference)" and "big hit suggesting effect (no setting difference)" are provided.

Further, as another classification method, it is possible to distinguish between a suggestive effect that includes a suggestion regarding a set value and a suggestive effect that does not include a suggestion regarding a set value.
In this case, as suggestive effects including suggestions regarding the set value, "set value change suggestive effect", "set value suggestive effect" and "big hit suggestive effect (with setting difference)" are provided.
Further, as a suggestive effect that does not include a suggestion regarding the set value, “big hit suggestive effect (no setting difference)” is provided.

[12-1. About the appearance timing of the production]

The classification of the appearance timings of various effects has been described using the timings 01 to 42 described above, but here, the classification different from that will be described.
Specifically, each timing at which the effect can appear is classified into “waiting for customers”, “prefetching”, “changing (first half)”, “changing (second half)”, and “big hit”.

“Waiting for customers” is a period equivalent to the timings 01 to 09 described above.
"Pre-reading" is the timing when the pre-reading notice effect can appear, and the operation hold ball (that is, the undigested operation hold) that has not been used for the execution of the symbol variation display game (variation display operation of the special symbol) It is a timing at which the big hit lottery for the symbol variation display game relating to the operation-holding ball can be executed as the prefetch determination process.

"Fluctuating (first half)" is the period from the start of the decorative symbol variable display game until the second symbol (for example, the right symbol) is stopped and displayed, focusing on the decorative symbol.
In terms of the timing described above, the period is equivalent to the timings 10 to 16.
In the following description, "during change (first half)" may be described as the first period.

"Fluctuating (latter half)" means that the first symbol (for example, the left symbol) and the second symbol (for example, the right symbol) are stopped and displayed with the same decorative symbol, and the third symbol (for example, the medium symbol) is variably displayed. It is a period from the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, the three decorative patterns are finally stopped and displayed after the decorative pattern reaches the reach state.
In terms of the timing described above, the period is equivalent to the timings 17 to 25.
In the following description, “changing (second half)” may be described as the second period.

The "big hit" is a period from the start to the end of the big hit game, and corresponds to the period of timings 26 to 42 described above.

[12-2. About waiting for customers]

Of the effects shown in FIG. 122, the effect that can be executed while the game machine 1A of the present embodiment is waiting for the customer is effect 01 as the set value suggestion effect.
Further, other effects are configured not to be executed while waiting for customers. That is, the effect 01 is the only effect that can be executed while waiting for customers.

While the set value suggestion effect can be executed while waiting for customers, the suggestion effect for suggesting a big hit is not executed, so that it is possible to make the game machine 1A difficult to execute effects while waiting for customers. ..
Therefore, when the effect 01 is executed while waiting for a customer, it is possible to let the player recognize that it is a comparatively rare case, and the player is interested in the game machine on which the effect 01 is executed. It is possible to raise interest. In particular, as compared with a gaming machine in which various effects are constantly displayed, it is possible to realize effective effects with a small number of effects.
Note that such an effect can be further enhanced by not performing the lively production while waiting for customers.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A storage unit is provided for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to a player.
Set value inferrable performance in which it is possible to infer the set value based on the appearance probability and/or effect content, and set value in which it is impossible to infer the set value based on the appearance probability and/or effect content The unguessable effect is provided so that it can be executed.
A game machine characterized in that, while waiting for a customer, the effect that the set value can be estimated is allowed to appear and the effect that the set value cannot be estimated does not appear.

In addition, such a configuration can be restated as follows.
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and it is not possible to infer the high and low expectation of the big hit lottery, and the high expected level of the set value can be estimated based on the production mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit And a third effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the effect mode, and a third effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low expectation of the jackpot lottery based on the effect mode. ,,
A game machine characterized in that the production effecting means is capable of executing the first production effect and incapable of executing the second production effect and the third production effect while waiting for a customer.

Further, the implementation mode of the effect is different from that shown in FIG. 122, and the gaming machine 1A may be configured so that the set value change suggesting effect can be executed while waiting for the customer. In that case, both the set value change suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect can be executed while waiting for the customer.
If the gaming machine 1A has such a configuration, it is possible to guess whether or not the set value Ve has been changed even while waiting for a customer, and to guess the set value Ve set in the gaming machine 1A. Is possible due to the appearance of the effect, and it is possible to increase the game motivation for the game machine.

Further, since the effect executed here is not the suggestive effect about the big hit but the set value Ve, there is an advantageous effect on the set value Ve for the player in the game machine in which the player is not playing. If executed, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player will play the game machine for a long time.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
Set value change suggestive effect that can estimate whether the set value has been changed after the last power-on operation based on the effect mode, and whether the set value is high or low can be estimated based on the effect mode and the winning expectation of the jackpot lottery A first effect in which the height cannot be estimated, a second effect in which it is possible to infer the height of the set value based on the effect mode, and a degree of expectation in the jackpot lottery can be inferred, and a high value of the set value based on the effect mode And a production effecting means capable of executing a third production that can estimate the degree of expectation of winning the big hit lottery,
The production means is capable of executing the setting value change suggestion production and the first production while waiting for a customer, and the second production and the third production are not executable. ..

[12-3. About prefetching]

122, among the effects shown in FIG. 122, the effects that can be executed during the prefetch of the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment are the effect 20 as the set value suggestive effect and the jackpot suggestive effect (with a setting difference). And the effects 52 and 53 as the big hit suggesting effect (there is no setting difference).

The number of types of suggestive productions that suggest big hits is larger than the number of types of suggestive productions that do not suggest big hits.
The "number of types of effects" referred to here is to count the effects of the same system as one. For example, in the case of the effect 09 described with reference to FIG. 92 described above, since three types of titles are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, at least three patterns are prepared as effect modes. Become. If the appearance timing is taken into consideration, the effect patterns will increase further. However, in "the number of types of production", they are collectively counted as "1".
In the following description, when the effect patterns are different, if each effect pattern is counted as one, it will be described as "the total number of effect modes".

During the prefetch, the degree of expectation regarding the operation-holding ball is high, and even if the set value suggestion effect is executed in such a state, it is highly possible that the player has won the jackpot lottery for the operation-holding ball. There is a risk of misunderstanding.
Therefore, in order to avoid such misunderstandings, the number of types of suggestive productions that suggest big hits is larger than the number of types of suggestive productions that do not suggest big jackpots. It is possible to increase the possibility that the performance will be performed.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A special symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result on condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
Decorative symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the decorative symbol in a directing manner with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol,
Acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information triggered by the detection of the game ball by the starting means,
Until the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means is subjected to the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol in the special symbol display means, the storage order is specified with the predetermined maximum pending storage number as the upper limit. Holding storage means for holding and storing as an operation holding ball capable of
A holding ball number notifying means for notifying the number of holding balls, which is the number of operation holding balls, by displaying a holding icon for the number of holding balls,
At a predetermined timing before the operation-holding ball is provided for execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, pre-reading determination means for making a look-ahead determination about whether the jackpot lottery related to the operation-holding ball is won or not,
A pre-reading notice production means for performing a pre-reading notice production for changing the display mode of the hold icon for the operation-holding ball which is the subject of the pre-reading determination,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player,
As the pre-reading notice production, a first production in which it is possible to infer the level of the set value based on the production mode and in which it is not possible to infer the level of expectation in the jackpot lottery, and it is possible to infer the level of the set value based on the production mode At least one of the second effect in which it is possible to infer the degree of expectation of winning in the jackpot lottery, and the third effect in which it is not possible to infer the degree of setting value based on the aspect and the degree of expectation of winning in the jackpot lottery Equipped with
The number of types of the first effect that can be executed as the prefetching notice effect is a (a is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effect that can be executed as the prefetching notice effect is b ( b is 0 or more), the number of types of the third effect that can be executed as the prefetching notice effect is c (c is 0 or more),
a is a number smaller than (b+c), a gaming machine.

Further, another configuration example that achieves the above effects is shown below.
Setting means capable of setting a set value representing a step regarding the probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player,
Display means capable of variably displaying effect symbols each of which is composed of three symbol groups which are changed in accordance with a lottery result indicating whether or not to generate a profit state.
And a production execution control means capable of controlling execution of a first production that suggests the set value set in the gaming machine and a second production that suggests the lottery result,
Based on the winning or failure of the lottery result regarding the operation-holding balls before being subjected to variable display, the number of the first type effects that can be executed in the pre-reading period during which the pre-reading notice effect for the operation-holding balls is executed is s.
The second type effect that can be executed in the prefetch period is t,
A gaming machine characterized in that t>s≧0 holds.

In the state where the relationship between the variable s and the variable t holds, the first-type effect may include an effect (effect a) that mainly suggests a set value as an effect purpose. In addition, the type 2 production mainly suggests winning/losing of the lottery result as a production purpose, and an production (production b) in which the selection ratio is different depending on the set value, and mainly the winning/losing of the lottery result as a production purpose. An effect (effect c) that makes a suggestion and has the same selection ratio regardless of the set value may be included.
That is, when the variable s is the number of effects a and the variable t is the sum of the numbers of effects b and effects c, t>s≧0 may be satisfied.

As a result, during pre-reading, more effects whose main purpose is to suggest a lottery result for jackpots can be executed than effects whose main purpose is to suggest a set value. As a result, a lot of effects including suggestions for big hits appear in a state where the player has high expectations regarding the operation-holding ball, so that the player is less likely to be confused and the player's willingness to play is amplified. It is possible to perform effective production. Further, since it is difficult for the first-type effect to appear, the processing load of the effect execution control means and the power consumption can be reduced.
In addition, the variable t or the variable s here may be "the number of types of effects" or "the total number of effects".

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
As a production purpose, a production that mainly makes a suggestion regarding the set value is a production a,
As a production purpose, mainly a suggestion regarding the winning or losing of the lottery result, and a production with a different selection ratio according to the set value is a production b.
As a performance purpose, mainly suggesting whether the lottery result is won or lost, and a performance with the same selection ratio regardless of the set value is a performance c,
The effect a is included in the first type effect,
The effect b and the effect c are included in the second type effect.

In the state in which the variable s and the variable t are satisfied, the first type effect may be the effect b and the second type effect may be the effect c.
That is, when the variable s is the number of effects b and the variable t is the number of effects c, t>s≧0 may be satisfied.

As a result, when focusing on the effect that gives a suggestion about the big hit to be executed during pre-reading, the appearance will occur regardless of the set value, rather than the effect in which it is possible to infer the set value such that the appearance frequency differs depending on the set value. Since more productions whose frequency does not change appear, the player can enjoy the productions without considering the suggestion regarding the set value or the jackpot. Further, by making the first-type effect difficult to appear, it is possible to reduce the processing load and power consumption of the effect execution control means.

In addition, with regard to the effect that mainly suggests the set value, by using an effect that is different from the effect that is mainly intended to suggest the big hit or an unmistakable effect, an appropriate effect can be performed while avoiding confusion of the player. You can For example, a specific character image may appear in a corner or the like on the liquid crystal display device 36 that is performing an effect that suggests a big hit, and the suggestion about the set value may be casually made. In addition, if an effect for giving a suggestion about a big hit is being executed on the liquid crystal display device 36 and the player is paying attention to the liquid crystal display device 36, a light emitting effect using the decoration lamp 45 or the like is casually performed. By doing so, it may be appealed to the player who has a better understanding of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, the variable t or the variable s here may be "the number of types of effects" or "the total number of effects".

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 having the above effects will be described.
As a production purpose, a production that mainly makes a suggestion regarding the set value is a production a,
As a production purpose, mainly a suggestion regarding the winning or losing of the lottery result, and a production with a different selection ratio according to the set value is a production b.
As a performance purpose, mainly suggesting whether the lottery result is won or lost, and a performance with the same selection ratio regardless of the set value is a performance c,
The production b is included in the first type production,
The effect c is included in the second type effect.

In the state in which the variable s and the variable t are satisfied, the first-type effect may be effect a and the effect b, and the second-type effect may be c.
That is, the variable s may be a value obtained by adding the number of effects a and the number of effects b, and when the variable t is the number of effects c, t>s≧0 may be satisfied.

As a result, during prefetching, the player mainly pays attention to whether or not the operation-holding ball is a big hit by reducing the number of effects mainly for suggesting the set value, that is, the number of effects a and effects b. While doing so, it is possible to experience the production. That is, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect without causing confusion for the player. In addition, by reducing the appearance of the effects a and effects b as the first type effects, the processing load of the effect execution control means and the power consumption can be reduced.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 having such an effect is shown below.
As a production purpose, a production that mainly makes a suggestion regarding the set value is a production a,
As a production purpose, mainly a suggestion regarding the winning or losing of the lottery result, and a production with a different selection ratio according to the set value is a production b.
As a performance purpose, mainly suggesting whether the lottery result is won or lost, and a performance with the same selection ratio regardless of the set value is a performance c,
The effect a and the effect b are included in the first type effect,
The effect c is included in the second type effect.

Several examples of the number of type 1 effects and the number of type 2 effects described above are possible. One is to capture effects with different appearance timings and appearance triggers as one effect. In other words, in other words, a similar effect in which the appearance timing and the appearance timing are the same but the effect mode is slightly different, for example, an effect in which only the dialogue displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is different. It is just a variation and is considered as one production including various variations.
Thereby, the balance of each effect installed in the gaming machine 1 is adjusted in consideration of the number of kinds of effects that the player can substantially grasp as the number of effects, that is, the number of effects in which a plurality of variations are collected. You can That is, in the case where it is intended to reduce the number of effects that suggest the set value so that the player will not be confused, by considering the number of types of effects excluding variations, a balance of effects that does not make the player feel uncomfortable It is feasible.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects will be shown.
The number of productions whose appearance timings and/or appearance timings are different from each other is defined as the number of production groups,
As the number of production variations, the number of productions whose appearance timings and/or appearance motives are similar to each other is counted separately.
The above-mentioned t and s are the number of performance groups.

As another example of the number of first-type effects and the number of second-type effects, even effects that have similar appearance timings and appearance timings are to be considered as one effect, respectively. That is, in other words, even if the appearance timing and the appearance trigger are the same, if the effect mode is slightly different, it is regarded as a different effect. That is, if there are many variations of effects, the number of effects also increases.
Some of the effects having different variations are internally stored as common information in the gaming machine 1. Therefore, by treating effects with different variations as different effects (different effects), it is possible to realize various effect modes while improving the use efficiency of the storage capacity.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
The number of productions whose appearance timings and/or appearance timings are different from each other is defined as the number of production groups,
As the number of production variations, the number of productions whose appearance timings and/or appearance motives are similar to each other is counted separately.
The game machine characterized in that the t and the s are the number of effect variations.

It should be noted that when the set value suggesting effect is executed, the gaming machine 1A is configured so that the big hit suggesting effect (there is no setting difference) and the big hit suggesting effect (there is a setting difference) are always executed so that no misunderstanding occurs. It is possible to

Next, we will consider the number of production opportunities. The effect 20 in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment can be executed during the decorative symbol variable display game in the time saving state, and like the effects 50, 52, 53, can be executed in the game states other than the time saving state. It has not been. That is, as compared with the effects 50, 52, 53, the effect 20 is set to have fewer execution opportunities.
Therefore, by providing more opportunities to perform the suggestive effect that suggests the big hit than to perform the suggestive effect that does not suggest the big hit, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 1A in which the above misunderstanding does not easily occur. Becomes

Further, in consideration of the number of production opportunities, the gaming machine 1A can consider that the suggestion production not including the suggestion about the setting value has more execution opportunities than the suggestion production including the suggestion about the setting value. is there. Specifically, there are more opportunities to execute the effects 52 and 53 than there are opportunities to execute the effects 20 and 50.
As a result, many productions that purely suggest only the jackpot lottery results regarding the operation-holding balls appear, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from being confused without knowing what the production is suggesting. it can.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A special symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result on condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
Decorative symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the decorative symbol in a directing manner with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol,
Acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information triggered by the detection of the game ball by the starting means,
Until the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means is subjected to the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol in the special symbol display means, the storage order is specified with the predetermined maximum pending storage number as the upper limit. Holding storage means for holding and storing as an operation holding ball capable of
A holding ball number notifying means for notifying the number of holding balls, which is the number of operation holding balls, by displaying a holding icon for the number of holding balls,
At a predetermined timing before the operation-holding ball is provided for execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, pre-reading determination means for making a look-ahead determination about whether the jackpot lottery related to the operation-holding ball is won or not,
A pre-reading notice production means for performing a pre-reading notice production for changing the display mode of the hold icon for the operation-holding ball which is the subject of the pre-reading determination,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player,
As the pre-reading notice production, a first production in which it is possible to infer the level of the set value based on the production mode and in which it is not possible to infer the level of expectation in the jackpot lottery, and it is possible to infer the level of the set value based on the production mode At least one of the second effect in which it is possible to infer the degree of expectation of winning in the jackpot lottery, and the third effect in which it is not possible to infer the degree of setting value based on the aspect and the degree of expectation of winning in the jackpot lottery Equipped with
The number of types of the first effect that can be executed as the prefetching notice effect is a (a is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effect that can be executed as the prefetching notice effect is b ( b is 0 or more), the number of types of the third effect that can be executed as the prefetching notice effect is c (c is 0 or more),
(A+b) is a number less than or equal to c. A gaming machine.

Next, a suggestion effect for suggesting a big hit will be described.
In the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, effects 50, 52, and 53 can be executed during prefetching as suggestive effects for suggesting a big hit. Among them, the number of types of effects is larger in the big hit suggestive effect (with setting difference) than in the big hit suggesting effect (without setting difference).
As a result, more of the big hit suggestive effects (no setting difference) that are not confusing whether they are suggestive effects about the set value Ve or whether the big hit lottery is won or lost can be presented, so that the player can easily understand the effect. It becomes possible to do it. In particular, as shown in FIG. 122, since the number of types of effects implemented in the gaming machine 1A as the big hit suggestive effect (there is a setting difference) is one (effect 50), the player can obtain the effect ( By understanding that the effect 50) is an effect including suggestions regarding the set value Ve, it can be understood that the other effects (effects 52, 53) are effects that only suggest a big hit. You can enjoy the production without worrying about it.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A special symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result on condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
Decorative symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the decorative symbol in a directing manner with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol,
Acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information triggered by the detection of the game ball by the starting means,
Until the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means is subjected to the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol in the special symbol display means, the storage order is specified with the predetermined maximum pending storage number as the upper limit. Holding storage means for holding and storing as an operation holding ball capable of
A holding ball number notifying means for notifying the number of holding balls, which is the number of operation holding balls, by displaying a holding icon for the number of holding balls,
At a predetermined timing before the operation-holding ball is provided for execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, pre-reading determination means for making a look-ahead determination about whether the jackpot lottery related to the operation-holding ball is won or not,
A pre-reading notice production means for performing a pre-reading notice production for changing the display mode of the hold icon for the operation-holding ball which is the subject of the pre-reading determination,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player,
As the pre-reading notice effect, a second effect in which it is possible to infer the height of the set value based on the effect mode and can infer the degree of expectation in the jackpot lottery, and it is not possible to infer the level of the set value based on the effect mode Equipped with at least one of the 3rd production that can predict the degree of expectation of winning the big hit lottery,
The number of types of the second effect that can be executed as the prefetching notice effect is b (b is 0 or more), and the number of types of the third effect that can be executed as the prefetching notice effect is c ( c is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that b is a number smaller than c.

[12-4. About changing (first half)]

122, among the effects shown in FIG. 122, the effects that can be executed during the variation (first half) of the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment are effect 04 as a set value change suggestive effect and jackpot suggestive effect (setting). There is a difference 54), effects 62 and 63 as a big hit suggestion effect (no setting difference), and an effect 80 as a lively effect.

The number of types of suggestive productions that suggest big hits is larger than the number of types of suggestive productions that do not suggest big hits during the fluctuation (first half).
Specifically, the number of types of suggestive effects that do not suggest a big hit is only one set value change suggestive effect. Further, the number of types of suggestive effects for suggesting a big hit is three, that is, one for the big hit suggestive effect (with setting difference) and two for the big hit suggesting effect (no setting difference). Note that, as described above, the effect 80 that does not give a suggestion regarding the set value or a big hit is excluded here.

During the change (first half), the player is more interested in whether or not each notice effect such as reach effect is executed. If a lot of setting value suggestion effects and setting value change suggestion effects are executed in such a state, the variation becomes an involuntary effect for a player who has a high interest in whether or not the big hit lottery is won. There is a risk that the attractiveness of the gaming machine 1A may be halved.

In the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, the number of types of suggestive productions that suggest big hits is larger than the number of types of suggestive productions that do not suggest big jackpots. It is said that many suggestions for big hits of interest can be revealed.

An example of the configuration of such a gaming machine 1 will be given.
A special symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result on condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display region for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display region for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and the third variable symbol for variably displaying 3 decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of each decorative pattern using the symbol display area,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Of the second effect that can estimate the height of the, and the third effect that can not estimate the height of the set value based on the production mode and can predict the expected degree of winning of the jackpot lottery, and change the setting value based on the production mode And an effect executing means capable of executing at least one of the fourth effects capable of inferring the presence or absence of
The effect execution means can be executed in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. The number of types of the first effect is a (a is 0 or more), the number of types of the second effect that can be executed in the specific period is b (b is 0 or more), and is executed in the specific period. The number of types of the third effect that can be performed is c (c is 0 or more), and the number of types of the fourth effect that can be executed in the specific period is d (d is 0 or more).
A game machine characterized in that (a+d) is a number smaller than (b+c).

In particular, in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, the only suggestion effect that does not suggest the big hit appearing during the change (first half) is the effect 04 which is the set value change suggestion effect. It is sufficient for the player to confirm once the setting value change suggesting effect, and the setting value change suggesting effect becomes an unnecessary effect while the game is continued thereafter. Therefore, the set value change suggestive effect does not need to appear many times while the game is continued, and the appearance probability may be lower than other suggestive effects. Actually, as described above, the effect 04 can be executed only at the time of winning, which is the first variation start timing after the power is turned on. That is, it is determined whether or not it appears once after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, the effects 54, 62, and 63 are configured so that they can appear many times a day, and as a performance execution opportunity, suggest a big hit rather than a suggestion that does not give a big hit. There are more suggestive productions.
As a result, almost all of the effects that the player experiences during the fluctuation (first half) are supposed to be suggestions that suggest a big hit, so it is possible for the player to be confused as to what suggestion has appeared. Has been lowered.

Although the set value change suggestive effect (eg, effect 04) is an effect in which the effect opportunity is remarkably limited, it is also an important effect for determining whether or not to continue playing the gaming machine in which the effect appears. is there.
It is possible to motivate a player to play for a long time because such an effect can be executed even though there are few opportunity for effect.

In the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, it has been described that the only suggestion effect that does not suggest the big hit that appears during the change (first half) is the effect 04 which is the set value change suggestion effect. For example, it is configured such that the set value suggestive effect does not appear during the change (first half).
As a result, it is less likely that the player will be confused as to what suggestive effect has appeared.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects will be given.
A special symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result on condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display region for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display region for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and the third variable symbol for variably displaying 3 decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of each decorative pattern using the symbol display area,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Of the second effect that can estimate the height of the, and the third effect that can not estimate the height of the set value based on the production mode and can predict the expected degree of winning of the jackpot lottery, and change the setting value based on the production mode And an effect executing means capable of executing at least one of the fourth effects capable of inferring the presence or absence of
The effect execution means, in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, A game machine characterized in that it is impossible to execute one effect.

In addition, since there are two or more types of suggestion effects (effects 54, 62, 63) for suggesting a big hit, it is possible to give an idea about a big hit using various effects without being monotonous. Has become. That is, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
In particular, since a plurality of jackpot suggestive effects (no setting difference) are implemented and the number of types of effects is the greatest (two effects 62 and 63), I am interested in winning or losing the jackpot lottery related to the variation. It is possible to provide effective production to the owning player.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects will be given.
A special symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result on condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display region for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display region for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and the third variable symbol for variably displaying 3 decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of each decorative pattern using the symbol display area,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Of the second effect that can estimate the height of the, and the third effect that can not estimate the height of the set value based on the production mode and can predict the expected degree of winning of the jackpot lottery, and change the setting value based on the production mode And an effect executing means capable of executing at least one of the fourth effects capable of inferring the presence or absence of
In the specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, a plurality of types A game machine characterized by being capable of executing the third effect.

Further, in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, a big hit suggestion is made rather than the total number of types of the set value change suggestive effect, the set value suggestive effect, and the lively effect (two in total for one, zero, and one). The number of types of production (with setting difference) and jackpot suggestion production (no setting difference) is larger (1 piece, 2 pieces, 3 pieces in total), so the jackpot lottery that is most interesting to the player There are many variations of suggestive productions about winning and losing, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects will be given.
A special symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result on condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display region for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display region for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and the third variable symbol for variably displaying 3 decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of each decorative pattern using the symbol display area,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Of the second effect that can estimate the height of the, and the third effect that can not estimate the height of the set value based on the production mode and can predict the expected degree of winning of the jackpot lottery, and change the setting value based on the production mode It is possible to execute at least one of a fourth effect in which it is possible to infer the presence or absence of a game, and a fifth effect in which it is not possible to infer the level of the set value based on the mode of the production and it is not possible to infer the level of expectation in the jackpot lottery. And an execution means,
The effect execution means can be executed in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. The number of types of the first effect is a (a is 0 or more), the number of types of the second effect that can be executed in the specific period is b (b is 0 or more), and is executed in the specific period. The number of types of the third effect that can be performed is c (c is 0 or more), and the number of types of the fourth effect that can be executed in the specific period is d (d is 0 or more). The number of types of the fifth effect that can be executed in is set to e (e is 0 or more),
(A+d+e) is a smaller number than (b+c). A gaming machine.

[12-5. About changing (second half)]

Of the respective effects shown in FIG. 122, the effects that can be executed during the change (second half) are effects 58 as a big hit suggesting effect (with a setting difference), and effects 64 and effects as a big hit suggesting effect (no setting difference). 65, effect 66, and effect 67.
That is, the game machine 1A in this example is not provided with the set value change suggestive effect and the set value suggestive effect that can be executed during the change (second half), and there is one big hit suggestive effect (with a setting difference) and a big hit suggestion. There are four effects (no setting difference).

Since the setting value change suggestion effect and the setting value suggestion effect are not provided during the change (second half), the effect executed by the gaming machine 1A is an effect that suggests a big hit. There is no confusion.
In particular, during the fluctuation (second half), since the decorative pattern is in the reach state on the liquid crystal display device 36, the concern about whether or not the fluctuation is a big hit is significantly improved. It is not preferable to execute the effect that only suggests the set value at such timing.

For example, when a flashy effect that has a sense of expectation for a player who is not familiar with the characteristics of the gaming machine 1A is executed, the effect is a value that suggests a high set value, but the game The person may expect that the decorative pattern variable display game being executed at that time is likely to be a big hit. As a result, if the decorative symbol variable display game comes off, the player may be confused, or the player may be discouraged and end the game.
According to this example, since the effect that only suggests the set value Ve is not executable during the change (second half), there is no possibility of causing such a situation, and the effect is executed. It is possible to enjoy the effect by paying attention only to the winning result of the big hit lottery.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A special symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result on condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display region for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display region for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and the third variable symbol for variably displaying 3 decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of each decorative pattern using the symbol display area,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Of the second effect that can estimate the height of the, and the third effect that can not estimate the height of the set value based on the production mode and can predict the expected degree of winning of the jackpot lottery, and change the setting value based on the production mode And an effect executing means capable of executing at least one of the fourth effects capable of inferring the presence or absence of
The production execution means specifies from the reach state in which two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed until three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that neither of the first effect and the fourth effect is executable during a period.

In addition, since there are two or more types of suggestive effects for suggesting a big hit, it is possible to make a suggestion about a big hit using various kinds of effects without being monotonous. That is, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A special symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result on condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display region for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display region for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and the third variable symbol for variably displaying 3 decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of each decorative pattern using the symbol display area,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Of the second effect that can estimate the height of the, and the third effect that can not estimate the height of the set value based on the production mode and can predict the expected degree of winning of the jackpot lottery, and change the setting value based on the production mode And an effect executing means capable of executing at least one of the fourth effects capable of inferring the presence or absence of
The effect execution means specifies from the reach state in which two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed until three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. A gaming machine, wherein a plurality of types of the second effect and the third effect can be executed during a period.

Note that the production time in the reach state may take a long time. In such a state, if not only the suggestive effect that suggests the big hit but also the suggestive effect that does not suggest the big hit is executed, the effect time may be lengthened and the player may be bothered. You may feel it.
According to this example, since the suggestion effect that does not suggest the big hit is not executed during the change (second half), it is possible to prevent the effect time from being unnecessarily lengthened.

In addition, among the timings 17 to 25 during the fluctuation (second half), the number of suggestive effects for suggesting the big hit that can be executed at the timing 17 is the largest.
Specifically, there are two types of suggestive effects, that is, an effect 58 and an effect 64, which give an idea about a big hit that can be executed at the timing 17. There are two types of suggestive effects, that is, effect 65 and effect 66, which give an idea about a big hit that can be executed at the timing 19. There is one type of effect 66, which is a suggestion effect that gives a suggestion about a big hit that can be executed at timings 20, 22, and 23. One type of effect 67 is a suggestive effect that gives a suggestion about a big hit that can be executed at timings 24 and 25.
The suggestion effect for suggesting a big hit that can be executed at the timings 18 and 21 is not implemented in the gaming machine 1A in this example.

Timing 17 is the timing when the second symbol stops, and is one of the timing when the player greets with great expectations. That is, the player has a great interest in whether or not the same decorative symbol as the first symbol stops.
It is possible to provide the gaming machine 1A which is highly entertaining to the player by mounting a lot of suggestive effects on the gaming machine 1A for suggesting a big hit that can be executed at such a timing 17.

It should be noted that there are other possible timings when the player has great expectations. For example, this may also be applicable during the win-winning effect execution at the timing 20, during the win-winning effect execution at the timing 23, or during the run-off effect for notifying whether the effect at the timing 19 is developed. The same effect can be obtained by preparing a variety of suggestive effects for suggesting a big hit that can appear at such a timing.

Further, among a plurality of timings at which the player's expectation increases, various effects may be executed by focusing on one timing, or various effects may be executed at all timings.
When a variety of effects can be executed by focusing on one timing, when the player reaches the corresponding timing, an expectation about whether or not the effect is executed is increased. That is, when the relevant timing is recognized by the player as the timing at which the gaming interest in the gaming machine 1A becomes the most interesting, the timing is recognized as the unique timing of the gaming machine 1A, and is differentiated from other gaming machines. Can be planned.
In addition, the occasional suggestion effect that suggests a big hit in a manner other than the relevant timing, in which the player unexpectedly appears, can significantly improve the player's willingness to play.

It should be noted that these effects are not limited to during fluctuation (second half). That is, it is possible to obtain the same effect by configuring the gaming machine 1A so as to be able to execute various effects at the timing when the player expects.

[12-6. About big hit]

Of the effects shown in FIG. 122, the effect that can be executed during the big hit of the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment (during the big hit game) is only the effect 15 as the set value suggesting effect.

During the big hit, since the gaming machine 1A is configured so that the big hit suggesting effect does not appear, it is determined that the effect that appears during the big hit period is an effect that gives a suggestion regarding the set value. The person can appropriately understand the effect contents.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Execution of at least one of the second effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the value, and the third effect in which it is not possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of the jackpot lottery And means,
A game machine characterized in that the effect executing means is incapable of executing the second effect and the third effect during a big hit game.

In addition, during the big hit, it is a period in which the player enjoys an advantageous situation and a period in which it is judged whether or not more games should be continued in the gaming machine 1A.
Since the effect that appears in such a period is only the set value suggesting effect, the player who visually recognizes or experiences the effect can make an appropriate judgment.

During the big hit game, it is possible to obtain a predetermined number of prize balls by winning the game balls into the open big winning opening 50, but it is relatively easy to win the big winning opening 50. It is possible to play a game without paying attention to the special winning opening 50. Therefore, there is a possibility that interest in the gaming machine 1A may be diminished during the big hit game.
However, in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, the sound effect based on the occurrence of over-winning can be executed in the effect 15 as the set value suggesting effect. That is, the probability of occurrence of the set value suggestive effect can be improved by launching a game ball so as to promote the occurrence of over-winning. Thereby, the player can improve the accuracy of estimation of the set value Ve of the gaming machine 1A. That is, the player can concentrate on playing the big hit game in order to generate the over-winning prize, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
Large winning means configured to be able to execute a closed state in which it is difficult or impossible to enter a game ball and an open state that facilitates entering a game ball,
Based on the detection information by the ball detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the big winning means, the number-of-balls counting means for counting the game balls that have entered the big winning means,
A lottery means for executing a lottery on whether or not to win,
An opening control means capable of controlling the big winning means in the open state until the number of game balls counted by the number-of-entered-balls counting means reaches a specified number of entered balls within a range not exceeding a predetermined specified time,
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Execution of at least one of the second effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the value, and the third effect in which it is not possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of the jackpot lottery And means,
A game machine characterized in that the effect execution means is capable of executing the first effect when an over-winning in which the counted game balls exceed the specified number of entered balls.

In addition, during the big hit, even if a game ball wins the upper start opening 34 and the lower start opening 35, the amount of winning exceeding the maximum number of reserved memories is not a target of the big hit lottery. That is, at the stage when the number of operation-reserving balls reaches the maximum reserved memory number, the player may be less interested in winning the game balls into the upper starting opening 34 and the lower starting opening 35.
Therefore, when a game ball is won in the upper start opening 34 or the lower start opening 35 in a state where the number of operation holding balls becomes maximum during the big hit game, some effect sound for suggesting the set value is reproduced. The gaming machine 1A may be configured to be able to execute various set value suggesting effects. As a result, even after the number of operation holding balls reaches the maximum holding storage number, it is possible to make the player interested in the fact that the game balls have won the upper starting opening 34 and the lower starting opening 35. , It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[12-7. About changing (overall)]
122, among the effects shown in FIG. 122, effects that can be executed during fluctuation (overall) of the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, that is, can be executed during fluctuation (first half) and during fluctuation (second half). The effects that are presented are effects 04 as setting value change suggestive effects, effects 54 and 58 as big hit suggestive effects (with setting difference), effects 62, 63, 64, 65 as big hit suggestive effects (without setting difference). 66 and 67.

In the gaming machine 1A of the embodiment, the set value suggesting effect is not included in the effects that may appear during the change (overall). In addition, since the effect 04 as the set value change suggesting effect that may only appear is only at the time of winning, which is the first variation start timing after power-on as described above, it is possible to appear. The timing is extremely limited.
Therefore, in the production that can appear during the change (overall), the suggestive production regarding the set value is hardly included.
As a result, the effect that appears during the change (overall) is almost certainly a jackpot suggestion effect, except for the effect 80 that does not give any suggestion, and thus appropriate information without causing confusion to the player. Is suggested.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A special symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result on condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display region for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display region for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and the third variable symbol for variably displaying 3 decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of each decorative pattern using the symbol display area,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Execution of at least one of the second effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the value, and the third effect in which it is not possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of the jackpot lottery And means,
The game effecting device is characterized in that none of the first effect is executable during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

Further, among the jackpot suggestive effects that can appear during the change (overall), those with a setting difference (effects 54, 58) are those without a setting difference (effects 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67). The number of types has been reduced compared to.
During the fluctuations, interest in winning the big hit lottery of the fluctuations is the highest. On the other hand, the effect (i.e., jackpot suggestion effect (no setting difference)) that does not give any suggestions to the set value Ve but only gives an idea about the expectation of winning in the jackpot lottery is a suggestion to the set value Ve and the winning expectation of the jackpot lottery It is possible to provide an effect that does not confuse what the player is suggesting by providing more than the effect that both suggests the degree (that is, the jackpot suggesting effect (there is a setting difference)). ..

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A special symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result on condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display region for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display region for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and the third variable symbol for variably displaying 3 decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of each decorative pattern using the symbol display area,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Execution of at least one of the second effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the value, and the third effect in which it is not possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of the jackpot lottery And means,
The effect execution means sets the number of types of the second effect that can be executed in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed to b (b is 0 or more). , The number of types of the third effect that can be executed in the specific period is c (c is 0 or more),
A game machine characterized in that c is a larger number than b.

Furthermore, as the effects that can appear during fluctuation (overall), a plurality of types of jackpot suggestive effects (with setting differences) are provided. As a result, it is possible to execute a variety of effects that suggest only the winning result of the jackpot lottery of the variation of which the player is most interested, and the interest of the game is improved.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A special symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result on condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display region for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display region for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and the third variable symbol for variably displaying 3 decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of each decorative pattern using the symbol display area,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Execution of at least one of the second effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the value, and the third effect in which it is not possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of the jackpot lottery And means,
The effect machine is capable of executing a plurality of types of the third effect in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

In some cases, it is possible to obtain an effect by changing the form of the performance (performance content, appearance probability, etc.) that is executed during the fluctuation (first half) and during the fluctuation (first half) that constitutes the fluctuation (whole). .
For example, the number (n) of effects (first type effects) capable of suggesting the set value that can be executed in the first period (during change (first half)) is the second period (during change (latter half)). It is conceivable that the number is made larger than the number (m) of the first type effects made executable in (1).
In the second period, it is considered essential for the enjoyment of the game to be able to execute an effect for suggesting the winning result of the big hit lottery. Performing an effect capable of suggesting the set value in such a period increases the number of effects executed in the second period, and in some cases, a plurality of types of effects are simultaneously executed. This results in an increase in the time length used for the effect and an increase in the processing load on the CPU for the effect. According to this configuration, by avoiding such a situation, it is possible to contribute to a reduction in processing load and a reduction in power consumption. Further, it is possible to reduce the possibility of dropping frames in the image effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
Setting means capable of setting a set value representing a step regarding the probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player,
Display means capable of variably displaying effect symbols according to a lottery result of whether to generate a profit state,
And a production execution control means capable of performing execution control of a first type production that suggests the set value set in the gaming machine, while the production pattern is changing by the display means,
In the gaming machine, the effect symbol is composed of three symbol groups that change,
In the display means, the period from the start of fluctuation of the three symbol groups to the stop of fluctuation of the two symbol groups is the first period (during fluctuation (first half)), and the fluctuation of the two symbol groups. When the period from the stop until all of the three symbol groups are stopped is the second period (during fluctuation (second half)),
The first type effect that can be executed in the first period is n pieces,
The first type effect that can be executed in the second period is m,
A game machine characterized in that n>m≧0.

Further, by providing a difference in the executable effect according to the stop mode when two symbol groups out of the three symbol groups (left symbol group, middle symbol group, right symbol group) are stopped and displayed, the effect It may be possible to obtain
For example, when the stop mode when the two symbol groups are stopped and displayed is not the “reach mode (reach mode)”, the number of the first type effects (m1) that can be executed in the second period is “reach state ( It is conceivable that the number is larger than the number (m2) of type 1 effects that can be executed in the second period in the case of "reach mode)".
In the second period, it is indispensable from the standpoint of game play to be able to execute an effect for suggesting the winning result of the big hit lottery, but if it is not in the reach state, there is no problem even if the first type effect is revealed. Absent. Therefore, in the non-reach state, there is a high possibility that the effect for suggesting the winning result of the jackpot lottery will not be executed, and there is a low possibility that the effect and the first-type effect are executed at the same time, so the processing load of the CPU It is possible to execute the first-class effect without increasing the power consumption and the power consumption. In addition, by executing the first-class effect instead of executing the effect for suggesting the winning result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to efficiently suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play.
That is, in the second period, it is desirable to increase the number of executable first type effects in the non-reach state than in the reach state.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
In the display mode when two of the three symbol groups stop changing after they start changing,
When the two symbol groups are not in a predetermined reach mode, the number of the first type effects that can be executed in the second period is m1, and
When the two symbol groups are in a predetermined reach mode, the number of the first type effects that can be executed in the second period is m2,
A game machine characterized in that m1>m2≧0 holds.

Some examples of the above-described type 1 effect (effect in which setting values can be suggested) will be specifically described.
In the following description, an effect whose main purpose is to give a suggestion regarding the set value is referred to as “effect a”, and an effect whose main purpose is to give an idea of the winning result of the jackpot lottery is referred to as “effect b”. Alternatively, it is set as “production c”. As for “effect b” and “effect c”, the effect of which the selection ratio differs depending on the set value is “effect b”, and the effect of which the selection ratio does not differ according to the set value is “effect c”.
In the first example, the type 1 effect includes effect a and does not include effect b and effect c.
As a result, since the type 1 effect does not include an effect that is mainly intended to suggest the winning result of the jackpot lottery, it is desirable to execute the effect for suggesting the winning result of the jackpot lottery at the first timing. By not performing the seed effect, it is possible to obtain the various effects described above.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
As a production purpose, a production that mainly makes a suggestion regarding the set value is a production a,
As a production purpose, mainly a suggestion regarding the winning or losing of the lottery result, and a production with a different selection ratio according to the set value is a production b.
As a performance purpose, mainly suggesting whether the lottery result is won or lost, and a performance with the same selection ratio regardless of the set value is a performance c,
The first-type effect includes the effect a, and does not include the effect b and the effect c.

Further, in the second example of the above-described first-type effect, the first-type effect includes the effect b and does not include the effect a and the effect c.
In this way, the main purpose is to suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery, but the production that also includes the suggestion about the set value, so to speak, the production that makes you wonder what it suggests. It is defined as a first-class effect.
This kind of effect is controlled so as not to be executed at a timing when it is desirable to execute the effect for suggesting the winning result of the big hit lottery, so that the player does not misunderstand the suggested content. Can be executed at an appropriate timing. In addition, the main purpose is an effect for suggesting the winning result of the jackpot lottery without executing the effect (effect a) whose main purpose is to give an indication regarding the set value, and Since it is possible to execute effects with different selection ratios depending on the set value, it is possible to perform interpolation for not executing the effect a.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
As a production purpose, a production that mainly makes a suggestion regarding the set value is a production a,
As a production purpose, mainly a suggestion regarding the winning or losing of the lottery result, and a production with a different selection ratio according to the set value is a production b.
As a performance purpose, mainly suggesting whether the lottery result is won or lost, and a performance with the same selection ratio regardless of the set value is a performance c,
The first-type effect includes the effect b, but does not include the effect a and the effect c.

Furthermore, in the third example of the above-described type 1 effect, the type 1 effect includes effect a and effect b, but does not include effect c.
As a result, the main purpose is not only to suggest a winning result for the big hit lottery (draft a) but also to suggest a winning result for the big hit lottery, but the selection ratio varies depending on the set value. The production that can be suggested is also defined as the first type production.
By not executing such a first-type effect at a timing when it is desirable to execute an effect for suggesting the winning result of the jackpot lottery, the player sets the set value set in the gaming machine 1 currently playing. It is possible to enjoy the production without worrying about how many Ve. In addition, at this timing, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU and the power consumption by mainly performing the effects with the same selection ratio regardless of the set value.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
As a production purpose, a production that mainly makes a suggestion regarding the set value is a production a,
As a production purpose, mainly a suggestion regarding the winning or losing of the lottery result, and a production with a different selection ratio according to the set value is a production b.
As a performance purpose, mainly suggesting whether the lottery result is won or lost, and a performance with the same selection ratio regardless of the set value is a performance c,
The first-type effect includes the effect a and the effect b, but does not include the effect c.

Also, some examples of the number of type 1 effects can be considered. One is to capture effects with different appearance timings and appearance triggers as one effect. In other words, in other words, a similar effect in which the appearance timing and the appearance timing are the same but the effect mode is slightly different, for example, an effect in which only the dialogue displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is different. It is just a variation and is considered as one production including various variations.
Thereby, the balance of each effect installed in the gaming machine 1 is adjusted in consideration of the number of kinds of effects that the player can substantially grasp as the number of effects, that is, the number of effects in which a plurality of variations are collected. You can That is, in the case where it is intended to reduce the number of effects that suggest the set value so that the player will not be confused, by considering the number of types of effects excluding variations, a balance of effects that does not make the player feel uncomfortable It is feasible.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
The number of productions whose appearance timings and/or appearance timings are different from each other is defined as the number of production groups,
As the number of production variations, the number of productions whose appearance timings and/or appearance motives are similar to each other is counted separately.
The n and the m are the numbers of performance groups.

As another example of the number of type 1 effects, even if the appearance timing and the appearance timing are similar, each is regarded as one effect. That is, in other words, even if the appearance timing and the appearance trigger are the same, if the effect mode is slightly different, it is regarded as a different effect. That is, if there are many variations of effects, the number of effects also increases.
Some of the effects having different variations are internally stored as common information in the gaming machine 1. Therefore, by treating effects with different variations as different effects (different effects), it is possible to realize various effect modes while improving the use efficiency of the storage capacity.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
The number of productions whose appearance timings and/or appearance timings are different from each other is defined as the number of production groups,
As the number of production variations, the number of productions whose appearance timings and/or appearance motives are similar to each other is counted separately.
A game machine characterized in that the n and the m are the number of effect variations.

[12-8. Set value suggestion production and appearance timing]

In the present embodiment, the set value suggesting effects that can appear are effects 01, 15, and 20. In these effects, the number of types of effects that appear during other periods is larger than during variation (overall). Specifically, there are 0 types of set value suggesting effects that can appear during fluctuation (overall), and 3 types of setting value suggesting effects that can appear during other periods.
This makes it difficult for the set value suggesting effect to appear during the fluctuation (overall) in which the big hit lottery for the fluctuation is most concerned, and continues the gaming machine 1A in the game at other times. Then, a set value suggesting effect that can be a judgment factor for judging whether or not to play is made to appear easily. Therefore, appropriate information is provided.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A special symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result on condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display region for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display region for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and the third variable symbol for variably displaying 3 decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of each decorative pattern using the symbol display area,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
An effect execution means capable of executing at least one first effect in which it is possible to infer the level of the set value based on the effect mode and in which it is not possible to infer the level of expectation of the jackpot lottery,
The effect execution means is configured to have a number (a is 0 or more) of the types of the first effect that can be executed in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The number of types of the first effect that can be executed in a specific period is b (b is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a smaller number than b.

[12-9. Big hit suggestion production and appearance timing]

In the present embodiment, the big hit suggestive effects that can appear (there is a setting difference) are effects 50, 54, and 58. In these effects, the number of types of effects that can be displayed during the change (overall) is greater than the number of types of effects that can be displayed in other periods.
That is, there are two types of big hit suggestive effects (with a setting difference) that can appear during fluctuations (overall), and big hit suggestive effects (with a setting difference) that can appear during other periods. Is one type.

Since the big hit suggestion effect (with setting difference) is a kind of big hit suggestion effect, it is possible to appear a lot during the change, which makes it suitable for a player who is interested in winning or losing the big hit lottery of the change. It is possible to perform a performance.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A special symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result on condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display region for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display region for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and the third variable symbol for variably displaying 3 decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of each decorative pattern using the symbol display area,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
And a production execution means capable of executing at least one second production capable of inferring the level of the set value based on the production mode and inferring the level of expectation of the jackpot lottery,
The effect execution means sets the number of types of the second effect that can be executed in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed to be a (a is 0 or more), and The number of types of the second effect that can be executed in the specific period is b (b is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a larger number than b.

In addition, during the change, instead of separately enabling the set value suggestion effect, the big hit suggestion effect also serves as the set value suggestion effect, that is, the big hit suggestion effect (there is a setting difference) can appear. By doing so, since most of the effects that appear during the change are effects that suggest a big hit, it is possible to provide an appropriate suggestion to the player and a game that is interested in the set value Ve. It is also possible for a person to give an appropriate suggestion regarding the set value Ve. Further, since the effect 54 and the like both serve as the suggestive effect for the set value Ve and the suggestive effect for the big hit, the number of the effects mounted on the gaming machine 1A can be suppressed, so that the gaming machine 1A used for the effect can be suppressed. It can contribute to the reduction of the storage area.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot suggestive effects that can appear (no setting difference) are effects 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67. In the big hit suggestive effect (no setting difference), the number of kinds of effects that can appear during the change (overall) is increased compared to other periods (6 types). As a result, the jackpot suggestion effect (no setting difference) appears at the timing when the player is most interested in the winning of the jackpot lottery, so that an appropriate suggestion can be given to the player.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
A special symbol display means for performing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result on condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied,
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display region for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display region for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and the third variable symbol for variably displaying 3 decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of each decorative pattern using the symbol display area,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
And a production execution means capable of executing at least one third production in which it is not possible to estimate the level of the set value based on the production mode and the level of expectation of the jackpot lottery can be estimated.
In the effect execution means, the number of types of the third effect that can be executed in the specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is a (a is 0 or more), The number of types of the third effect that can be executed in the specific period is b (b is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a larger number than b.

In addition, as for the big hit suggestive effect (there is no setting difference), the largest number of kinds that can appear during the change (second half) are prepared. The mid-fluctuation (second half) is a reach state, and is a period in which the player is most interested in winning or losing the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation. By preparing various jackpot suggestion effects (no setting difference) in such a period, the enjoyment of the game is improved without making the player bored.

[12-10. Production buttons and each production]

Each effect installed in the game machine 1A of the present embodiment includes an effect that is displayed by using an operator such as the effect button 13. Specifically, each of the effects 01, 50, 53, 62, 65, 67 can be executed by operating the operator. The effect circled in FIG. 122 corresponds to the effect.

The effect that is displayed using the operator is, for example, an effect that appears when the operator is operated, but the effect itself does not appear when the operator is not operated. Alternatively, the effect is displayed immediately by the operation of the operator, but when the operation of the operator is not performed, the effect appears (advances) after a predetermined time elapses.

The ones in which the effect appears (advance) after a lapse of a predetermined time even if the operator is not operated include those in which the effect time differs depending on the presence or absence of the operation.
A specific example will be described.
First, the image effect A for displaying an image prompting the user to press the effect button 13 on the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed. When the player presses the effect button 13, the effect is performed by executing the image effect B on the liquid crystal display device 36, and finally the image effect C is performed to give some suggestion. On the other hand, when the player does not press the effect button 13, the image effect C for presenting the suggestion content is performed after a predetermined time such as 5 seconds elapses.
That is, the flow of effects on the liquid crystal display device 36 when the effect button 13 is pressed continues to the image effects A, B, and C, while on the liquid crystal display device 36 when the effect button 13 is not pressed. The flow of the effect continues with the image effects A and C.
Such an effect is one aspect of an effect that appears (progresses) with an operator as a trigger.

Among the respective effects installed in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, in the effects that are displayed using the operating elements, compared to the set value suggestion effect (effect 01), the jackpot suggestion effect (effect 50) , 53, 62, 65, 67) has a larger number of types.
In the set value suggestion effect, the player can obtain important information used for determining whether to continue the game of the game machine 1A or whether to start the game of the game machine 1A. It is possible production. Such an important effect does not appear depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operation element, and the production time of the important effect becomes shorter depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operation element, and the confirmation of the suggested content becomes insufficient. Can be a significant disadvantage to the player.

In the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, since the set value suggesting effect that is displayed using the operation buttons such as the effect buttons 13 is only the effect 01, many set value suggesting effects are used in the game. The suggestion content can be transmitted equally regardless of the operation of the person.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
Special symbol display means for deriving and displaying the display result by executing the variable display operation of the special symbol, provided that the operation means operable by the player and the starting means detect the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. When,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Execution of at least one of the second effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the value, and the third effect in which it is not possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of the jackpot lottery And means,
The number of types of the first effect executed by the operation of the operation unit is a (a is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effect executed by the operation of the operation unit is b. (B is 0 or more), and the number of types of the third effect executed by the operation of the operation means is c (c is 0 or more).
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a smaller number than (b+c).

In addition, among the suggestion effects triggered by the operation of the effect button 13 mounted on the gaming machine 1A, regarding the set value suggestive effect, the effect start timing and end timing are not changed by the operation.
For example, in the effect 01, after the set value suggestion effect is started by pressing the effect button 13, the effect is ended at a predetermined timing after the effect is started regardless of whether or not the effect button 13 is pressed. That is, the end timing of the effect is the timing when a certain time has elapsed from the start of the effect, regardless of the depression of the effect button 13.

On the other hand, of the suggested effects triggered by the operation of the effect button 13, the big hit suggestive effect has different effect start timing and end timing depending on the operation.
For example, in the effect 50, the pending change notice effect is executed, but after the image effect for prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 is executed, the next image effect (for example, at the timing according to the press of the effect button 13 (for example, An image effect of changing the hold icon from a normal color to a specific color is executed. That is, the image effect of changing the hold icon from the normal color to the specific color, which is started by pressing the effect button 13, is set at a different timing according to the pressing of the effect button 13. Further, if the effect button 13 is pressed down lately, the end timing of the effect is also delayed accordingly.

In other words, in each of the suggested effects triggered by the operation of the effect button 13 mounted on the gaming machine 1A, it can be said that the set value suggestive effect has the effect time length unchanged by the operation. ..
Furthermore, it can be said that, among the suggestion effects triggered by the operation of the effect button 13, the effect duration is variable for the big hit suggestion effect.

As for the set value suggestive effect, as mentioned above, the effect does not appear due to the presence or absence of the operation of the operator, and the effect time of the effect is shortened due to the presence or absence of the operation of the operator, so it is not possible to confirm the suggested content. Since it can be extremely disadvantageous for the player to be sufficient, the end timing and the production time length are unchanged.

On the other hand, the big hit suggestion effect is a suggestion effect regarding the big hit of the big hit lottery in the fluctuation (or the fluctuation which is planned to be executed in the future for the operation holding ball), and the desire to obtain information about the win quickly according to the player. There is also a desire to carefully enjoy the production contents. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, the start timing, the end timing, and the effect time length are made variable depending on the operation timing of the operation button 13 or the like, so that an appropriate effect according to the game mode of the player can be achieved. It is possible to appear.

A configuration example of such a gaming machine 1 is shown below.
Special symbol display means for deriving and displaying the display result by executing the variable display operation of the special symbol, provided that the operation means operable by the player and the starting means detect the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. When,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Execution of at least one of the second effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the value, and the third effect in which it is not possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of the jackpot lottery And means,
The end timing of the first effect executed by the operation of the operation means is invariable regardless of the operation timing of the operation means or the presence or absence of operation,
The end timing of at least a part of the second effect or the third effect that is executed in response to the operation of the operation unit is variable depending on the operation timing of the operation unit or the presence or absence of the operation. Characteristic game machine.

Further, the following configuration example of the gaming machine 1 is also conceivable.
Special symbol display means for deriving and displaying the display result by executing the variable display operation of the special symbol, provided that the operation means operable by the player and the starting means detect the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. When,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Execution of at least one of the second effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the value, and the third effect in which it is not possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of the jackpot lottery And means,
The effect time length of the first effect executed by the operation of the operation means is invariable according to the operation timing of the operation means or the presence or absence of operation,
The effect time length of at least a part of the second effect or the third effect executed by the operation of the operation means is variable according to the operation timing of the operation means or the presence or absence of the operation. A gaming machine characterized by.

In addition, the effect 01 is an effect that is executed in response to the player pressing a certain operator in a waiting state, and is a so-called hidden effect. Therefore, unlike the other effects, the execution is decided in order to appeal the suggestion contents to the player, but the execution is canceled by the non-operation of the operator, which is different from the mode.
Therefore, with respect to the set value suggestion effect executed during the game of the gaming machine 1A (during prefetching, during change, or during big hit), the suggestion content can be transmitted equally regardless of the operation of the player.

In the gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, the jackpot suggestive effects that are displayed by using the operation buttons 13 and the like are effects 50, 53, 62, 65, 67. In addition, the ones in which the effect does not appear by the operation of the player and the ones in which the effect time is shortened are included.
The big hit suggestion effect is an effect that suggests whether or not a big hit game will be invited in the near future from the execution of the effect, and even if the effect is missed, it is unlikely to be a disadvantage for the player. Therefore, with regard to the jackpot suggestion production, many productions in which the production appears (or develops) in accordance with the operation of the operator are provided for the purpose of improving the sense of presence and the interest in playing the game.

In addition, as long as it is changing (whole), the set value suggestion effect executed according to the operation of the operator is not provided.
The effect executed according to the operation of the operator is an effect that is highly expected by the player. When such an effect is executed during a change, the player tends to infer that it is a suggestive effect for the big hit of the change that is most interesting at that time. If the set value suggestion effect is performed at such a timing, there is a possibility that an effect that cannot meet the expectations of the player may be executed and that the player may be confused by the effect contents.
Therefore, in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, when the effect accompanied by the operation of the manipulator during the change is executed, the big hit suggestion effect is always produced.
With such a configuration, an appropriate effect that meets the expectations of the player is executed, and the player is not confused.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
Special symbol display means for deriving and displaying the display result by executing the variable display operation of the special symbol, provided that the operation means operable by the player and the starting means detect the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. When,
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display region for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display region for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and the third variable symbol for variably displaying 3 decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of each decorative pattern using the symbol display area,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Execution of at least one of the second effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the value, and the third effect in which it is not possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of the jackpot lottery And means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect that is executed by the operation of the operation means in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect does not include the first effect.

Further, in the gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, the set value suggesting effect triggered by the operation of the operator such as the effect button 13 has the effect content unchanged regardless of the operation mode of the operator. For example, the effect 01 installed in the game machine 1A is started by pressing the effect button 13. However, the effect contents are based on the effect contents previously determined by lottery, and are not variable depending on the operation mode (operation timing or presence/absence of operation) of the effect button 13.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, the jackpot suggesting effect triggered by the operation of the operation button such as the effect button 13 has a variable effect content depending on the operation mode of the operation button. For example, the effect 50 mounted on the game machine 1A executes the image effect for prompting the pressing of the effect button 13, and then, by pressing the effect button 13, whether or not the hold icon changes to a color with a higher expectation degree. An image effect showing how the lottery is drawn is executed, and an image effect in which the hold icon changes to a high-expectancy icon is executed.
However, if the effect button 13 is not pressed after the image effect for prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 is executed, the image effect in which the hold icon changes to a high-expected one after a certain period of time is executed. To be done. That is, the mode of the image effect differs depending on whether or not the effect button 13 is pressed.

Since the set value suggestion effect is an important effect for the player to decide the continuation of the game, etc., the same effect contents are displayed regardless of the operation mode of the operation buttons such as the effect buttons 13, so that the game is played. It provides the person with appropriate suggestions.
The big hit suggestion effect is an effect that suggests whether or not a big hit game will be invited in the near future from the execution of the effect, and even if the effect is missed, it is unlikely to be a disadvantage for the player. Therefore, for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game by the player, the effect contents are configured to change according to the operation mode of the operator such as the effect button 13.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 is shown below.
Special symbol display means for deriving and displaying the display result by executing the variable display operation of the special symbol, provided that the operation means operable by the player and the starting means detect the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. When,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Execution of at least one of the second effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the value, and the third effect in which it is not possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of the jackpot lottery And means,
In the first effect executed when triggered by the operation of the operation means, the same effect mode is set regardless of the mode of the operation,
At least a part of the second effect or the third effect that is executed by the operation of the operation means as a trigger, the effect mode is different depending on the mode of the operation. Amusement machine.

The above gaming machine 1 may further include the following features.
A game machine characterized in that the different effect modes are different effect times.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 may have the following features.
A game machine characterized in that the different effect modes are different image effects.

In the effect (hereinafter, referred to as an operation effect) that appears using the manipulator, the difference between the changing time (first half) and the changing time (second half) may be considered.
For example, that is, the period from the start of fluctuation of the three symbol groups to the stop of fluctuation of the two symbol groups is the first period (during fluctuation (first half)), and the two symbol groups stop fluctuation. When the period from when to all three symbol groups are stopped is the second period (during fluctuation (second half)), it is possible to suggest the set value in the operation production that can be executed in the second period (first Seed production) may not be included.
In the second period, it is considered essential for the enjoyment of the game to be able to execute an effect for suggesting the winning result of the big hit lottery. Performing an effect capable of suggesting a set value as an operation effect in such a period increases the number of effects executed in the second period, and in some cases, a plurality of types of effects are simultaneously executed. This results in an increase in the time length used for the effect and an increase in the processing load on the CPU for the effect. According to this configuration, by avoiding such a situation, it is possible to contribute to a reduction in processing load and a reduction in power consumption. Further, it is possible to reduce the possibility of dropping frames in the image effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
Setting means capable of setting a set value representing a step regarding the probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player,
Display means capable of variably displaying effect symbols according to a lottery result of whether to generate a profit state,
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Operation effect using the operation means,
And a production execution control means capable of performing execution control of a first type production that suggests the set value set in the gaming machine,
The effect symbol is composed of three symbol groups that change,
In the display means, the period from the start of fluctuation of the three symbol groups to the stop of fluctuation of the two symbol groups is defined as a first period, and the three symbols after the fluctuation of the two symbol groups is stopped. When the period until all the symbols are stopped is the second period,
The game machine characterized in that the operation effect executable at least in the second period does not include the first-type effect.

Some examples of the above-described type 1 effect will be described.
It should be noted that an effect which is an operation effect and whose main purpose is to give a suggestion regarding a set value is referred to as “effect Ba”, and an operation effect which is a main purpose to give an idea of a winning result in a big hit lottery. The effect is referred to as “effect Bb” or “effect Bc”. Regarding “effect Bb” and “effect Bc”, the effect of which the selection ratio differs depending on the set value is “effect Bb”, and the effect of which the selection ratio does not differ according to the set value is “effect Bc”.
Further, an effect that is an operation effect and is a first-type effect is defined as a "specific effect", and an effect that is an operation effect but is not a first-type effect is defined as a "non-specific effect".

The first example is that the specific effect includes the effect Ba but does not include the effect Bb and the effect Bc. As a result, since the special effect does not include an operation effect that mainly suggests the winning result of the big hit lottery, it is desirable to execute the effect for suggesting the winning result of the big hit lottery at the timing of the first kind. By not executing the effect, it is possible to execute an appropriate operation effect without causing confusion for the player. Further, since the effect Bb and the effect Bc are not executed at the timing of executing the specific effect, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU and reduce the power consumption.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
The operation effect and the first type effect are specified effects,
As the non-specific effect, the effect other than the first-type effect, which is the operation effect,
The effect Ba that is the operation effect and mainly makes a suggestion regarding the set value as an effect purpose is effect Ba
An effect which is the operation effect and which mainly gives a suggestion regarding the winning or failure of the lottery result as an effect purpose, and further has an effect having a different selection ratio according to the set value as an effect Bb,
As the production Bc, the operation production and the production purpose mainly suggest the win/loss of the lottery result, and further, the production having the same selection ratio regardless of the set value is the production Bc.
The specific effect includes the effect Ba, but does not include the effect Bb and the effect Bc.

In the second example, the special effect includes the effect Bb but does not include the effect Ba and the effect Bc. By this, the main purpose is to suggest the winning result about the big hit lottery, but the operation effect that also includes the suggestion about the set value, so to speak, it is possible for the player to wonder what it is suggesting A special effect is defined as a specific effect.
By controlling not to execute the specific effect at the timing when it is desirable to execute the effect for suggesting the winning result of the big hit lottery, the effect that does not give the misunderstanding of the suggestion content to the player at an appropriate timing. It becomes possible to execute. In addition, by not executing the specific effect, even if the effect Ba whose main purpose is the effect of suggesting the set value does not appear, the effect Bb having a different selection ratio depending on the set value can appear, so that It is possible to bring out an effect that substitutes the suggestion regarding the set value. Therefore, depending on the player, it is possible to appropriately transmit the information regarding the set value, and it is possible to provide various information with less effect.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
The operation effect and the first type effect are specified effects,
As the non-specific effect, the effect other than the first-type effect, which is the operation effect,
The effect Ba that is the operation effect and mainly makes a suggestion regarding the set value as an effect purpose is effect Ba
An effect which is the operation effect and which mainly gives a suggestion regarding the winning or failure of the lottery result as an effect purpose, and further has an effect having a different selection ratio according to the set value as an effect Bb,
As the production Bc, the operation production and the production purpose mainly suggest the win/loss of the lottery result, and further, the production having the same selection ratio regardless of the set value is the production Bc.
The specific effect includes the effect Bb, but does not include the effect Ba and the effect Bc.

In the third example, the effect Ba and the effect Bb are included and the effect Bc is not included in the specific effect. As a result, an effect capable of suggesting the set value is defined as a specific effect. Therefore, when the operation effect is executed at a timing when the specific effect is not displayed, the player grasps the suggestion result of the winning result about the jackpot lottery without causing confusion about the effect content (or the suggestion content in the effect). be able to. That is, the contents suggested by the presentation are made easy to understand.
Further, since the effect Ba and the effect Bb are not executed at the timing when the specific effect is not displayed, the processing load on the CPU is reduced, the power consumption is reduced, or the processing of the display unit (the liquid crystal display device 36 or the like) used for the effect is performed. It is possible to reduce the burden. In particular, in the liquid crystal display device 36, since the frequency of performing the processing for causing a plurality of effects to appear simultaneously decreases, it is possible to reduce the possibility of dropping frames.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
The operation effect and the first type effect are specified effects,
As the non-specific effect, the effect other than the first-type effect, which is the operation effect,
The effect Ba that is the operation effect and mainly makes a suggestion regarding the set value as an effect purpose is effect Ba
An effect which is the operation effect and which mainly gives a suggestion regarding the winning or failure of the lottery result as an effect purpose, and further has an effect having a different selection ratio according to the set value as an effect Bb,
As the production Bc, the operation production and the production purpose mainly suggest the win/loss of the lottery result, and further, the production having the same selection ratio regardless of the set value is the production Bc.
The specific effect includes the effect Ba and the effect Bb, but does not include the effect Bc.

In addition, it is conceivable to increase the number of non-specific effects in the effects that are executed during the change, rather than the number of specific effects.
The specific effect includes an effect capable of suggesting a set value. By reducing the possibility that such an effect appears during a change, the number of effects that suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery is relatively increased. That is, while the interest of the player is changed depending on whether or not the jackpot lottery is won, the appearance of the non-specific effect is increased, so that an appropriate effect according to the interest of the player is performed. You can

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
While the effect design by the display means is changing,
The number of the specific effects that the effect execution control means can execute is i,
The number of the non-specific effects that the effect execution control means can execute is j,
A game machine characterized in that j>i≧0.

Both the specific effect and the non-specific effect use the operation of the operation unit, but the effect can be displayed without operating the operation unit. Differences between the specific effect and the non-specific effect depending on whether or not the operation means is operated will be described.
First, in a specific effect that includes an effect that can suggest a set value and a non-specific effect that includes an effect that can suggest a winning result in a big hit lottery, the end timing of each effect and the operation of the operation means The relationship of existence will be described.

For example, in the specific effect, the end timing is unchanged regardless of whether or not the operation means is operated, whereas in the non-specific effect, the end timing may be changed depending on whether or not the operation means is operated.
As described above, the specific effect includes an effect capable of suggesting a set value. The set value is often unchanged during the game, and is important information for the player to decide whether or not to continue the game. Therefore, it is possible that the effect can be canceled by operating the operation means, and that the time during which the suggestion information regarding the set value is presented to the player is shortened will be a significant disadvantage for the player. high. In addition, the suggestion information is presented earlier because the operation means is operated earlier, and the suggestion information presentation is delayed because the operation is delayed, which shortens the suggestion information presentation time. It is also possible.
It is highly possible that the specific effect that presents the suggestion information regarding the set value has a smaller number of appearances than the non-specific effect that suggests the winning result of the big hit lottery. Therefore, shortening the presentation time of the suggestion information regarding the set value is likely to be extremely disadvantageous to the player, so that the end timing of the effect is unchanged regardless of whether or not the operation means is operated. It is desirable to do. Similarly, it is desirable to make the start timing of the effect unchanged regardless of whether or not the operation means is operated.

Regarding the suggestion of the winning result about the jackpot lottery, for example, even if the player misses, if the jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot game will automatically start, which may be disadvantageous to the player. Is low. Therefore, with respect to the effect of suggesting the winning result of the big hit lottery, it is possible to perform a highly entertaining effect by starting, developing and developing the effect in synchronization with the operation of the player.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
In the specific effect, it is assumed that there is no change in the end timing of the effect due to the presence or absence of the operation of the operation means,
A game machine characterized in that, in at least a part of the non-specific effects, the end timing of the effects is changed depending on whether or not the operation means is operated.

Further, in the specific effect, the time length required for the effect does not change regardless of whether or not the operation means is operated, whereas in the non-specific effect, the time length required for the effect may change depending on whether or not the operation means is operated. Be done.
Even with such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility of causing the above-mentioned disadvantage of the player.

A specific configuration example of the gaming machine 1 is shown below.
In the specific effect, it is assumed that there is no change in the effect time length required for effect depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operation means,
A game machine characterized in that, in at least a part of the non-specific production, the production time length required for the production varies depending on whether or not the operating means is operated.

Furthermore, the effect contents of the specific effect are unchanged regardless of whether or not the operation means is operated, whereas the effect contents of the non-specific effect may change depending on whether or not the operation means is operated.
Since the specific effect includes something that suggests a set value, if the configuration is such that the effect does not appear and the suggestion based on the effect content cannot be made by not operating the operating means, the reason as described above Therefore, there is a possibility that it will be a significant disadvantage to the player.
On the other hand, the non-specific effect includes the suggestion of the winning result of the big hit lottery, and even if the effect does not appear without operating the operation means, it is unlikely that the player will be disadvantaged.
Therefore, regarding the specific effect, it is desirable to make the end timing of the effect unchanged regardless of whether or not the operation means is operated. Regarding the non-specific effect, it is desirable that the effect is not displayed or the effect is started with a delay depending on whether or not the operation means is operated. As a result, an effect synchronized with the player's operation can be performed, and an effect having a high appealing effect on the suggestion content can be performed.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
In the specific effect, it is assumed that there is no change in the effect content depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operation means,
A game machine characterized in that, in at least a part of the non-specific effects, the effect contents are changed depending on whether or not the operation means is operated.

In addition, some examples of the number of specific effects and non-specific effects can be considered. One is to capture effects with different appearance timings and appearance triggers as one effect. In other words, in other words, a similar effect in which the appearance timing and the appearance timing are the same but the effect mode is slightly different, for example, an effect in which only the dialogue displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is different. It is just a variation and is considered as one production including various variations.
Thereby, the balance of each effect installed in the gaming machine 1 is adjusted in consideration of the number of kinds of effects that the player can substantially grasp as the number of effects, that is, the number of effects in which a plurality of variations are collected. You can That is, in the case where it is intended to reduce the number of effects that suggest the set value so that the player will not be confused, by considering the number of types of effects excluding variations, a balance of effects that does not make the player feel uncomfortable It is feasible.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
The number of productions whose appearance timings and/or appearance timings are different from each other is defined as the number of production groups,
As the number of production variations, the number of productions whose appearance timings and/or appearance motives are similar to each other is counted separately.
The i and the j are the numbers of performance groups.

As another example of the numbers of the specific effects and the non-specific effects, even effects having similar appearance timings and appearance timings are regarded as one effect, respectively. That is, in other words, even if the appearance timing and the appearance trigger are the same, if the effect mode is slightly different, it is regarded as a different effect. That is, if there are many variations of effects, the number of effects also increases.
Some of the effects having different variations are internally stored as common information in the gaming machine 1. Therefore, by treating effects with different variations as different effects (different effects), it is possible to realize various effect modes while improving the use efficiency of the storage capacity.

A configuration example of the gaming machine 1 capable of obtaining such effects is shown below.
The number of productions whose appearance timings and/or appearance timings are different from each other is defined as the number of production groups,
As the number of production variations, the number of productions whose appearance timings and/or appearance motives are similar to each other is counted separately.
The i and the j are the number of effect variations.

<13. Example 2 of selective implementation on game machines>

Here, the gaming machine 1B in which each effect is selectively mounted from the above-mentioned effects 1 to 21, effects 50 to 67, and effect 80 will be described.
The effects selectively mounted on the gaming machine 1B are effect 01, effect 04, effect 15, effect 20, effect 51, effect 52, effect 54, effect 58, effect 62, effect 63, effect 64, effect 65, effect. 66 and production 67.

In the gaming machine 1B, the effect 20 is a pre-reading notice effect in the time saving state that can be executed only at the timing 10.

In the gaming machine 1B, there are four types of effects that appear (develop) when the operation of the operation button such as the effect button 13 is triggered, that is, effect 01, effect 62, effect 65, and effect 67.
Further, among them, only the effect 01 can be executed while the fluctuation is stopped. In addition, during the fluctuation stop, the first symbol, the second symbol, and the third symbol are all stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

In the gaming machine 1B, since the effect triggered by the operator that can appear during the fluctuation stop is only the effect 01 that is one of the set value suggesting effects, the operator that can appear during the fluctuation stop is selected. The number of types of set value suggestive effects triggered (that is, one) is larger than the number of types of jackpot suggestive effects triggered by an operator that can appear during fluctuation stop (that is, zero).
While there is growing interest in winning the big hit lottery during the fluctuation, there is also a timing when the fluctuation is not occurring during fluctuation stop, in which there is no game ball at the start opening It also includes the situation where the person is bored.
At such a timing, it may be possible for the player to hesitate about whether or not to continue playing the game on the gaming machine.
According to the gaming machine 1B of the present embodiment, the suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the operator performed at such a timing has a larger number of types in the set value suggestion effect than in the jackpot suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Further, an aspect of the gaming machine 1 different from the gaming machine 1B will be described. FIG. 125 shows a summary of the effect types (setting value change suggesting effect, setting value suggesting effect, etc.) and execution timings (waiting for customers, prefetching, etc.) for each effect installed in the gaming machine 1. It is a table shown in.
In FIG. 125, as the types of effects, setting value suggestion effect (effect d), setting value suggestion effect (effect a), big hit suggestion effect with setting difference (effect b), and big hit suggestion effect without setting difference (effect) c), a lively effect (effect e) is shown. In addition, it is shown to which effect type each effect mounted on the gaming machine 1 belongs, and at which effect execution timing is executed.
Further, the table shows the number of types of variations for each effect and information indicating whether or not the effect is accompanied by button press. Pressing the button means that the player operates not only the effect button 13 but also any one of various operators provided in the gaming machine 1.
For example, effect No. The effect that is set to 01, that is, the effect 01 is an effect that involves pressing a button, and there is only one variation. Further, the effect 20 is an effect in which there are three types of variations without pressing a button. As an example of the variation of the effect 20, the number of the specific characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 has three patterns of one to three.

In the summary column of FIG. 125, information on the effects that can be executed at each execution timing is shown. For example, there is only one effect executed while waiting for customers, and it is shown that the effect is a set value suggestion effect. Also, there is only one effect that involves pressing a button.

A configuration example of such a gaming machine 1 is shown below.
Special symbol display means for deriving and displaying the display result by executing the variable display operation of the special symbol, provided that the operation means operable by the player and the starting means detect the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. When,
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display region for variably displaying the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display region for variably displaying the second decorative symbol, and the third variable symbol for variably displaying 3 decorative pattern display means for performing the variable display operation of each decorative pattern using the symbol display area,
Storage means for storing a set value representing a step regarding a probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player;
The first effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the production mode and the high and low of the expectation of winning in the big hit lottery, and the high expectation of the high value in the set jack based on the production mode and the expectation of winning of the big hit lottery Execution of at least one of the second effect in which it is possible to infer the high and low of the value, and the third effect in which it is not possible to infer the high and low of the set value based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of the jackpot lottery And means,
In the specific state in which the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the production effect executing unit sets the number of types of the first production that can be executed by the operation of the operation unit as a (a is 0 or more), and The number of types of the second effect that can be executed in response to the operation of the operating means in the specific state is b (b is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effect that can be executed in the specific state is triggered by the operation of the operating means. The number of types of 3 effects is c (c is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a larger number than (b+c).

<14. Definition>
(About "Type 1 production" and "Type 2 production")
As described above, as one of the characteristic parts of the present invention, in a scene where the player expects a big hit (synonyms of scene, timing, staging part, etc. are also synonymous), staging (announcement, announcement) , Notification, display, pronunciation, light emission, etc. are synonymous, the same applies hereinafter), and production that suggests a big hit (words such as advance notice, notification, notification, display, pronunciation, light emission, etc. are synonymous, the same applies hereinafter) It can be cited as an example.

However, it is not easy to clearly draw the two effects (setting value suggestion effect and big hit suggestion effect) in the gaming machine. This is because a big hit suggestive effect (for example, the expectation of a big hit when a "group notice" is issued is about 50%) is set value suggestive effect (for example, when the "group notice" is issued, the setting is 2 or more. This is because it is assumed that it will also be confirmed).

Therefore, hereinafter, the setting value suggestion effect is referred to as “first type effect”, the jackpot suggestion effect is referred to as “second type effect”, and some examples of the definition at the time of drawing the line are described with reference to FIG. 125 and the like. Indicates.

First, the effects performed during the game will be described by dividing them into three effects a to c as follows. It should be noted that the effect may be only this, or effects having different purposes (for example, effect d and effect e as shown in FIG. 125) may be provided.

(Production a) Set value suggestion production The purpose of this production is mainly to suggest a set value. That is, the suggestion of the winning result of the jackpot lottery is considered as an extra bonus. For example, with regard to the suggestion of a big hit, there is a case where the player does not have much expectation even if this effect is produced.
Specifically, even if the expectation of the big hit lottery is less than 50%, less than 30%, or less than 10%, the big hit lottery is won. Especially when you can hardly expect.
In addition, an effect that does not suggest a big hit at all may be included in the set value suggesting effect.
Alternatively, the effect a may be defined by focusing on the part of the user's attention. For example, when the movable body accessory moves along with the sound effect and the set value is suggested by executing the character image effect on the liquid crystal display device 36, the player's attention is the movement of the movable body accessory and the liquid crystal display device 36. Image (image change). At this time, when a big hit suggestion is casually made in a place other than the movable body accessory or the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, light emitting effect using a part of the housing), attention of the player who experiences the effect Since the information obtained from the location is only information related to setting value suggestion, such effects may be classified as setting value suggestion effects.
Further, in the case of performing the same effect using the movable body accessory or the liquid crystal display device 36, when a big hit suggestion is made in an area less than 50% of the display area on the liquid crystal display device, the degree of attention of the player is It can be presumed that it is aimed at setting value suggestion. Therefore, such an effect can also be classified as an effect a.
Further, the player may be classified by focusing on the information first received. For example, of the two pieces of information, i.e., the suggestion information about the set value and the suggestion information about the big hit, the effect in which the first information received by the player after the start of the effect is the set value suggestion information may be classified into the effect a.

As an example, when the effects belonging to the effect a are specifically classified using FIG. 125, the effects corresponding to the effect a are effects 01, 20, and 15. Further, the effect 04 may be included in the effect a.

(Production b) Large Winning Suggestion with Different Settings The purpose of this production is to suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery. However, it is also possible to suggest a set value because there is a set difference in the appearance frequency.
When the effects classified into the effect b are defined, for example, when the expectation of the big hit lottery is 50% or more, or 30% or more, the expectation is relatively higher than the other effects.
Further, not only a setting difference is provided in the appearance frequency, but also a part of the effect that also suggests the setting value may be classified into the effect b.
For example, as defined in the effect a, the effect b may be defined by focusing on the part of the user's attention. When the movable body accessory moves along with the sound effect and the big hit is suggested by executing the character image effect on the liquid crystal display device 36, the player's attention is the movement of the movable body accessory and the image of the liquid crystal display device 36 ( Image change). At this time, even if a suggestion regarding the set value is casually made in a place other than the movable body accessory or the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, a light emitting effect using a part of the housing), the effect is experienced. Since the information obtained from the player's attention spot is suggestive information regarding a big hit, such an effect may be classified into an effect b.
Further, in the case of performing the same effect using the movable body accessory or the liquid crystal display device 36, when the set value suggestion is performed in an area less than 50% of the display area on the liquid crystal display device, the degree of attention of the player It can be presumed from the fact that the area occupied by the liquid crystal display device 36 is directed toward the jackpot suggestion. Therefore, such an effect can also be classified into the effect b.
Furthermore, even if there is no difference due to the set value on the table that is referred to when executing the process for selecting the effect, that is, the effect is selected with a certain probability regardless of the set value. Even in the case, effects (subject to be described in detail later) having substantially different appearance frequencies may be classified as effects b because the setting difference actually exists.
Further, the player may be classified by focusing on the information first received. For example, of the two pieces of information, i.e., the suggestion information regarding the set value and the suggestion information regarding the big hit, the presentation may be classified as the presentation b in which the first information received by the player after the start of the presentation is the big hit suggestion information.

As an example, when the effects belonging to the effect b are specifically classified using FIG. 125, the effects corresponding to the effect b are effects 50, 54, and 58.

(Production c) Big difference suggestion effect without setting difference The purpose of this effect is to suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery as in the case of effect b. In particular, unlike the effect b, since no setting difference is provided, it can be said to be an effect that purely suggests the winning result of the big hit lottery.
It should be noted that regarding the effect described in the effect b, that is, even in the effect that the difference due to the set value is not provided on the table referred to when executing the process of selecting the effect, the appearance frequency is substantially different. Since there is no setting difference in the selection rate on the table, it is not an effect intended to intentionally make the setting difference, and thus may be classified as effect c.

As an example, when the effects belonging to the effect c are concretely classified using FIG. 125, the effects corresponding to the effect c are effects 52, effects 53, effects 62, effects 63, effects 64, effects 65, 66, and effects. 67.

Next, the above-described first-type effect and second-type effect will be described using these effect classifications.
(Example 1)
The first-type effect includes effect a and does not include effect b and effect c.
As a result, since the type 1 effect does not include an effect that is mainly intended to suggest the winning result of the jackpot lottery, it is desirable to execute the effect for suggesting the winning result of the jackpot lottery at the first timing. By not executing the seed effect, the chance of simultaneously executing a plurality of types of effects is reduced, the time length used for the effect is shortened, and an increase in the processing load of the CPU relating to the effect can be suppressed. it can.

(Example 2)
The type 1 production includes production b and does not include production a and production c.
For example, at the timing when the first type effect is not executed, only the effects a and c can appear. That is, only the effect a whose main purpose is suggesting the set value and the big hit suggesting effect c with no setting difference. As a result, the player does not have to worry about whether the effect is a suggestion about the set value or a suggestion about the big hit, so that an effective effect can be realized without causing confusion. It is possible to put out.

(Example 3)
The first type effect includes effect a and effect b, and does not include effect c.
For example, at the timing when the first-type effect is not executed, only the effect c is allowed to appear. That is, since there are few productions that can be shown, the chances of simultaneously executing a plurality of productions are reduced, and the processing load is reduced and the production time is suppressed.

(Example 4)
The second-type effect includes effect b and effect c but does not include effect a.
For example, at a timing when the second-type effect is more likely to be executed than the first-type effect, the effect such as the effect a whose main purpose is to suggest a set value is difficult to appear, so that the player's It can be less likely to cause confusion.

(Example 5)
The second type production includes production c and does not include production a and production b.
For example, at a timing when the second-type effect is more easily executed than the first-type effect, not only the effect mainly aiming at setting value suggestion like the effect a, but also a big hit with a setting difference like the effect b. Since the suggestive effect is also difficult to appear, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to be confused.

(About "appearance frequency" and "selection ratio")
Although the terms “appearance frequency” and “selection ratio” are used in the above description, the definitions of these terms will be described here.
The "appearance frequency" means "the frequency that the target effect appears per time (for example, once per hour)", "the frequency that appears per change frequency (for example, once per 100 times)", or " The frequency that appears when the specific condition is satisfied (for example, once every 10 times when the normal reach is satisfied).
That is, that the appearance frequency differs depending on the set value means that the selection ratio of the target production differs for each set value (or only one or more specific set values) in the production selection table. Therefore, the “appearance frequency” and the “selection ratio” are synonymous with each other and can be replaced with each other.

As described above, when there is an effect P that is selected with the same effect selection ratio (for example, 1/100 when there is a change in the loss) on the effect selection table, the meanings of the appearance frequency and the selection ratio are different. There are different cases.
The big hit probability depends on the set value (the big hit probability does not have to be different for all the set values, but if the same big hit probability is set for all the set values, there is no point in setting the set value in the first place), This means that the loss probability differs depending on the set value. Therefore, in the effect P in the above example (the effect that appears at 1/100 when the variation of the loss), the selection ratio does not differ between the set values, but the loss frequency differs between the set values, and as a result, the appearance frequency is high. It is different (the appearance frequency is higher when the effect P is set low).

However, if all of them are taken into consideration, there will be no production belonging to the category of "no setting difference", so basically any word or phrase is used unless two terms are used properly in the same claim. Even if used, the case where the selection ratios in the selection table are the same is defined as "no setting difference", and the case where the selection ratios in the selection table are different is defined as "setting difference".

It should be noted that “no setting difference” is further subdivided to indicate that there is no setting difference between specific setting values, such as no setting difference among specific setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3). Good.
Similarly, “there is a setting difference” may be further subdivided so that only the specific setting value (for example, the setting value 6) has a different selection ratio from the other setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 5). ..

<15. Other modifications>

In the above description, a pachinko gaming machine using a game ball as a gaming medium has been illustrated, but the gaming machine is not particularly limited as long as it can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, it may be a game machine that uses a game medium having a shape other than a spherical shape as a game medium, a spinning-roller type game machine, or the like.

The various examples described above can be appropriately combined unless combination is impossible.

Here, the information displayed on the setting history screen Gs is not limited to the information exemplified in FIG. For example, a certain set value may indicate how long the game has been played. Specifically, the date and time from when a certain set value is set to when the set value is changed may be displayed. Also, the date and time from when the power is turned on to when the game is played with a certain set value until the power is next turned off may be displayed. In addition, when the set value is determined to be an abnormal value, the date and time from when it is determined to be abnormal to when the normal set value is set may be displayed. Originally, the setting value is not changed during the game, or the setting value does not change from the normal value to the abnormal value, but if the setting value is changed during the game due to noise or goto action, May store the date and time and display it as a history display. Further, the number of times the RAM clearing process and the backup restoring process are performed, and date and time information may be similarly displayed. Further, the timing of displaying the history display can be set not only during the setting confirmation process but also during the setting change process, for example. Further, it may be configured to display a history when a predetermined operation is input even during a game.

Further, in the above, an example in which the history information is stored in the internal work (work area of the RAM 243) in accordance with the occurrence of the target event of the history display and the history information stored in the internal work is immediately stored in the memory 244 has been described. However, as the timing of storing the history information of the internal work in the memory 244, the elapsed time stored in the internal work is referred to, and when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, it is stored (copied) in the memory 244. Is also possible.

Further, regarding the setting history confirmation screen Gs, even after the display is ended in response to the end instruction operation, if a predetermined display condition such as setting confirmation (or setting change) is fulfilled, the display instruction is given again. It can be displayed any number of times depending on the operation. Alternatively, when the setting history confirmation screen Gs has already been displayed a predetermined number of times under the condition that the predetermined display condition is satisfied, the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed even if the display instruction operation is performed again. Can be disabled.
Further, it is desirable to hide the performance display monitor that displays the base value while the history information is being displayed. Further, the volume/light amount adjustment may be made effective even while the history information is being displayed. At this time, although the adjustment is effective, it is desirable not to display the adjustment content on the display means.
Further, the contents and state of the performance display monitor may be displayed on the liquid crystal, and in this case, it is desirable to display the contents and state at a position that does not overlap the history information. Alternatively, the volume/light amount may not be adjustable. In this case, the history information and the display may not overlap with each other, and the degree of freedom in designing the screen configuration may be increased.

Further, it is desirable that at least the initializing operation of the movable body on the board side is not executed during the display of the history information. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the movable body on the board side from moving to the front side of the display means and hindering the visibility of the display screen. Further, the movable body on the frame side may not be similarly initialized. However, the movable body on the frame side may be initialized if there is no possibility of obstructing the display screen. In this case, for example, the initializing operation of the vibrating means mounted on the operating means or the air ejecting means for ejecting air may be performed. This allows the movable body on the frame side to finish the initializing operation first, so that the movable body on the board side can be moved after the display of the history information, that is, after the setting confirmation processing (or the setting change processing) is completed. It is efficient because you only have to initialize the body. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initialization operation may be performed for all the movable bodies after the display of the history information is completed.

Further, when the setting value changing operation is performed in a state where the harness connecting the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 is disconnected, the main control unit 20 performs processing based on the changed setting value. On the other hand, since the effect control unit 24 cannot know the information, it cannot store and display the history information. Therefore, by changing the setting value with the harness disconnected, turning the power off once, and then turning the power on again with the harness reconnected, you can change the setting without leaving a trace of the changed setting value. You can do it. In order to prevent this, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 20 transmits the setting value information to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 transmits the stored setting value information and the main control unit 20. The information of the set values may be compared with each other, and when there is a contradiction, an error may be notified by using a lamp, a speaker, a liquid crystal, or the like.
Further, in this case, the effect control unit 24 side may be set to the game stop state, and even if the command related to the game is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the processing based on the command is not performed. You may. When the effect control unit 24 receives various commands transmitted when executing the setting change process or the RAM clear process, the main control unit 20 side normally performs the setting change process again. Judges and stores the newly determined set value, and interrupts/stops the error notification (inconsistency occurrence ⇒ error notification ⇒ power off ⇒ setting change (non-error notification) ⇒ setting change completed (non-error notification)) You may do so. When the power is turned on for the first time, the effect control unit 24 has no information about the set value. Therefore, in such a case, when the information about the set value is transmitted from the main control unit 20. It is desirable that the error notification is not performed.

Further, as the set value suggesting effect, an operation effect using an operation means that can be operated by the player can be used. Specifically, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, a first operation means (example: PUSH button) and a second operation means (example: pat button) are provided, and (first operation means and second operation means are: It may be a separate operation device, or may be one that can be changed to the first mode and the second mode in a common operation device), and only the operation of the first operation means is effective. When the operation of the first operation means is performed during the operation valid period, the setting suggestion announcement that suggests the current setting value Ve may be executed. Further, when the player does not operate the first operation means during the first operation valid period, the setting suggestion notice may not be executed. Further, when the setting suggestion notice is not executed, it may be configured to execute an effect different from the setting suggestion notice (eg, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the variation hit). Even when the setting suggestion notice is executed, in addition to the setting suggestion notice, an effect different from the setting suggestion notice (eg, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the variation hit) is executed. You may comprise. In addition, when the operation of the second operation means is performed during the first operation effective period, the operation of the second operation means is not effective, so that it is the same as when the first operation means is not operated. Can be taken as a response.

The second operating means may have the same configuration as the first operating means described above.
In addition, when the degree of expectation that the fluctuation is a hit is higher when the operation effect is performed by the second operation means than when the operation effect is performed by the first operation means, the operation by the second operation means is performed. The setting suggestion notice may be executed in the production, and the setting suggestion notice may not be executed in the operation production by the first operation means. Further, the configuration suggestion notice may be executed in the operation effect produced by the first operation means, and the setting suggestion notice may not be executed in the operation effect produced by the second operation means.

In a specific operation effect in which both operations of the first operation means and the second operation means are effective, when the first operation means is operated, a setting suggestion notice is executed, and when the second operation means is operated. The configuration suggestion may not be executed. The configuration may be reversed.
Also, during the operation effective period of the specific operation effect, an image imitating either the first operation means or the second operation means is displayed on the display means, and which operation means should be operated for the player. In such a case, when an image imitating the first operating means is displayed, a setting suggestion notice is executed when the first operating means is operated, and the second operating means is operated. In this case, the setting suggestion notice may not be executed. Further, when the image simulating the first operation means is displayed, the setting suggestion notice may be executed when the operation of the second operation means is performed.
Also, regarding the specific operation effect, the relationship between the case of executing the setting suggestion notice after the operation and the case of not executing it, and the relationship between the setting suggestion notice and the effect different from the setting suggestion notice are the same as in the case of the above-mentioned operation production You may make it a structure.

Further, the presentation mode of the operation presentation may be configured to be different according to the set value Ve. For example, during the operation effective period of the operation means, the operation means may be used to execute the operation promotion effect by the display/voice/lamp prompting the operation, and the content of the operation promotion effect may be changed according to the set value Ve. It may be configured as follows. Specifically, the minimum setting value (example: setting 1) is denied by executing the operation promotion effect that appears only when the setting value Ve is equal to or more than the predetermined value (example: setting 2 to 6). It is possible to inform that. In addition, by executing the operation promotion effect that appears only when the set value Ve is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (example: setting 6), it is possible to notify that it is the maximum set value (example: setting 6). ..

Moreover, you may make it utilize the above-mentioned embodiment in the winning operation production|presentation which is performed at the last of reach production also among operation productions, and notifies the winning/losing of the said variation. In this case, the content of the operation promotion effect may be changed according to the set value Ve only when the winning result is a hit. In addition, the content of the operation promotion effect may be changed according to the set value Ve only in the case of the deviation. In addition, the content of the operation promotion effect may be changed according to the set value Ve only in the case of a transition to a probability change state advantageous to the player after the hit.

1, 1A Pachinko machine 13 Production button 16 Cross key 20 Main control board (main control unit)
201 CPU
202 ROM
203 RAM
24 Production control board (production control unit)
241 CPU
242 ROM
243 RAM
36 liquid crystal display device 38a, 38b special symbol display device 40 liquid crystal control unit 45 decoration lamp 45a optical display device 46 speaker 46a sound generator 61 front door open sensor 94 setting key switch 97 setting/performance display 98 RAM clear switch Gs setting history confirmation screen

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that displays a variable display of symbols and controls to an advantageous state that is an advantageous state for the player,
Determining means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state,
Whether to control the advantageous state, pre-reading determination means for determining before the determination by the determination means,
Based on the determination result of the pre-reading determination means, before the variable display of the symbol to be determined is performed, pre-reading effect execution means capable of executing the pre-reading effect informing the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state, ,
During the variable display of the symbol, an effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect informing the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state,
And a setting means capable of setting a setting value representing a step regarding the probability of controlling to the advantageous state,
The notice production includes a predetermined production,
When performing the variable display of the symbol, if the prefetch effect for the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is executed, the predetermined target for the variable display of the symbol It is possible to determine the notice contents of the production without being based on the set value,
When performing the variable display of the symbol, if the prefetch effect for the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is not executed, the predetermined effect for the variable display of the symbol A game machine in which the contents of the notice can be decided based on the set value. A gaming machine that displays a variable display of symbols and controls to an advantageous state that is an advantageous state for the player,
Determining means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state,
Whether to control the advantageous state, pre-reading determination means for determining before the determination by the determination means,
Based on the judgment result of the pre-reading judgment means, before the variable display of the symbol to be judged is performed, the pre-reading effect execution means capable of executing the pre-reading effect informing the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state, ,
During the variable display of the symbol, an effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect informing the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state,
And a setting means capable of setting a setting value representing a step regarding the probability of controlling to the advantageous state,
The notice production includes a predetermined production,
When performing the variable display of the symbol, if the prefetch effect for the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is executed, the predetermined target for the variable display of the symbol It is possible to decide whether to execute the effect without being based on the set value,
When performing the variable display of the symbol, if the prefetch effect for the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is not executed, the predetermined effect for the variable display of the symbol A gaming machine capable of determining whether or not to execute based on the set value.

Images